Volvo | V90 Twin Engine | Owner's Manual | Volvo V90 Twin Engine 2020 Early Owner's Manual

Volvo V90 Twin Engine 2020 Early Owner's Manual
V90
TWIN ENGINE
O W NE R 'S M ANU AL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo.
The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and
your passengers. Volvo strives to build one of the safest cars in the
world. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and
environmental requirements.
To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you
read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's
manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo
Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and
other cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alcohol or medication – or have an impaired ability to drive in some
other way.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OWNER'S INFORMATION
YOUR VOLVO
18
Volvo ID
28
Safety
44
Owner's manual in centre display
19
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
28
Safety during pregnancy
45
Navigate in the owner's manual in
the centre display
20
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
30
Whiplash Protection System
45
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
22
IntelliSafe – driver support and safety
33
Pedestrian Protection System
47
Volvo Cars support site
23
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
34
Seatbelts
48
Reading the owner's manual
23
Software updates
37
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
48
The owner's manual and the environment
25
Recording data
37
Seatbelt tensioner
50
Terms & Conditions for Services
38
Resetting the electric seatbelt
tensioner
51
Customer Privacy Policy
38
Door and seatbelt reminder
51
Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment
39
Airbags
53
Installation of accessories
39
Driver airbags
53
Connection of equipment to the
car's diagnostic socket
40
Showing the car's identification
number
41
Driver distraction
2
SAFETY
Owner information
41
Passenger airbag
54
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag*
56
Side airbags
58
Inflatable curtains
59
Safety mode
59
Starting and moving the car after
safety mode
60
Child safety
61
Child seats
62
Upper mounting points for child seats
62
Lower mounting points for child seats
63
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for
child seats
64
Child seat positioning
64
Child seat mounting
65
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
68
Table for location of i-Size child seats
70
Table for location of ISOFIX child
seats
71
Integrated child seat*
DISPLAYS AND VOICE
CONTROL
Managing messages in the driver
display
104
Handling a message saved from
the driver display
105
79
Overview of centre display
107
Driver display
81
Managing the centre display
110
Driver display settings
83
113
74
Fuel gauge
84
Activating and deactivating centre
display
Folding up the seat cushion in the
integrated child seat*
75
Hybrid gauge
84
113
Hybrid battery gauge
85
Navigating in the centre display's
views
Folding down the seat cushion in
the integrated child seat*
76
Trip computer
86
Show trip data in the driver display
88
Resetting the trip meter
89
Show trip statistics in the centre
display
Instruments and controls in lefthand drive car
78
Instruments and controls in righthand drive car
Managing subviews in centre display
117
Function view in centre display
120
Moving apps and buttons in centre display
122
89
Symbols in the centre display's
status bar
122
Settings for trip statistics
90
Keyboard in centre display
124
Date and time
90
127
Outside temperature gauge
91
Changing keyboard language in
centre display
Indicator symbols in the driver display
91
Enter the characters, letters and
words manually in the centre display
127
Warning symbols in the driver display
94
License agreement for the driver
display
Changing the appearance in the
centre display
129
95
Application menu in driver display
Handling the application menu in
the driver display
102
Switching off and changing the
volume of the system sound in the
centre display
129
101
Changing system units
130
Messages in the driver display
103
Changing system language
130
3
LIGHTING
4
Other settings in the centre display's top view
130
Open contextual setup in the centre display
131
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
132
Controlling a telephone with voice
recognition
146
Lighting control
150
Voice control of radio and media
147
Adjusting light functions via the
centre display
151
Settings for voice recognition
147
Position lamps
152
Daytime running lights
152
153
Using main beam
154
Resetting settings in the centre
display
132
Dipped beam
Table showing centre display settings
133
Active main beam
154
Driver profiles
134
Using direction indicators
156
Selecting driver profile
135
Active bending lights*
157
Renaming a driver profile
135
Rear fog lamp
157
Protect driver profile
136
Brake lights
158
Linking remote control key to
driver profile
136
Emergency brake lights
158
Resetting settings in the driver
profiles
138
Hazard warning flashers
159
Using home safe lighting
159
160
Message in centre display
138
Approach light duration
Managing messages in the centre
display
139
Interior lighting
160
Adjusting interior lighting
Handling a message saved from
the centre display
162
139
Head-up display*
140
Activating and deactivating the
head-up display*
142
Settings for head-up display*
142
Voice recognition
143
Using voice recognition
144
WINDOWS, GLASS AND
MIRRORS
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
CLIMATE
Manual front seat
184
Climate
200
Power* front seat
185
Climate zones
200
200
Windows, glass and mirrors
166
Pinch protection for windows and
sun blinds
166
Adjusting the power* front seat
185
Climate control - sensors
Reset sequence for pinch protection
167
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display*
186
Perceived temperature
201
Power windows
167
187
201
Operating power windows
168
Using a stored position for seat,
door mirrors and head-up display*
Controlling climate control with
voice recognition
188
202
169
Massage settings* in the front seat
Air quality
Using the sun blind*
170
189
203
Rearview and door mirrors
Clean Zone Interior Package*
204
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
170
Adjusting massage settings* in
the front seat
Clean Zone*
Interior Air Quality System*
204
Angling the door mirrors
171
205
Panorama roof*
173
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
Operating the panorama roof*
174
Passenger compartment filter
205
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind
176
Wiper blades and washer fluid
177
Using windscreen wipers
177
Using the rain sensor
178
Using the rain sensor's memory
function
179
Using windscreen and headlamp
washers
180
Using the rear window wiper and
washer
181
Using automatic rear windscreen
wiping when reversing
182
Adjusting* the length of the seat
cushion in the front seat
190
Adjusting the side support* in the
front seat
191
Adjusting the lumbar support* in
the front seat
192
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
193
Lowering the backrests in the rear
seat
194
Adjusting the head restraints in
the rear seat
195
Climate controls
211
Steering wheel controls and horn
212
197
Activating and deactivating
heated front seat*
Steering lock
197
213
Adjusting the steering wheel
198
Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat*
Activating and deactivating
heated rear seat*
213
Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat*
214
Air distribution
205
Changing air distribution
206
Opening, closing and aiming the
air vents
207
Table of air distribution options
208
5
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
6
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
215
Preconditioning time setting
225
Lock confirmation
238
Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel*
215
Adding and editing time setting
for preconditioning
226
Lock indication setting
239
215
227
239
Activating auto climate control
Activating and deactivating time
setting for preconditioning
Remote control key
241
Activating and deactivating air
recirculation
216
Removing time setting for preconditioning
228
Locking and unlocking with the
remote control key
242
Activating and deactivating time
setting for air recirculation
217
Climate comfort when parking
229
Settings for remotely controlled
and inside unlocking
217
229
Unlocking the tailgate with the
remote control key
243
Activating and deactivating max
defroster
Starting and switching off climate
comfort when parking
243
218
230
Remote control key range
Activating and deactivating the
heated windscreen*
Symbols and messages for parking climate control
Replacing the battery in the
remote control key
244
Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen*
219
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door mirrors
219
Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear
window and door mirrors
220
Regulating fan level for front seat
220
Regulating temperature for front seat
221
Synchronising temperature
222
Activating and deactivating air
conditioning
222
Parking climate
223
Preconditioning
223
Start and switch off preconditioning
224
Heater
232
Parking heater
233
Additional heater
Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater
Ordering more remote control keys
247
234
Red Key - restricted remote control key*
248
235
Settings for Red Key*
248
Detachable key blade
249
Locking and unlocking with the
detachable key blade
251
Immobiliser
252
Type approval for the remote control key system
253
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
262
Keyless locking and unlocking*
263
Settings for Keyless entry*
264
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
264
DRIVER SUPPORT
Antenna locations for the start
and lock systems
265
Locking and unlocking from inside
the car
266
Driving support systems
282
Selecting and activating cruise control
298
Speed-dependent steering force
282
Deactivating cruise control
299
General speed warning
283
Standby mode for cruise control
300
Electronic stability control
283
Adaptive cruise control*
300
Electronic Stability Control in
sport mode
285
Controls and display mode for
adaptive cruise control*
302
Activating or deactivating sport
mode for electronic stability control
285
Selecting and activating adaptive
cruise control*
303
Symbols and messages for electronic stability control
287
Deactivating adaptive cruise control*
304
Distance Warning*
288
Standby mode for adaptive cruise
control*
304
Activating or deactivating distance
warning
289
Limitations for adaptive cruise control* 306
Limitations of Distance Warning
289
Change between cruise control
and adaptive cruise control* in the
centre display
306
Unlocking the tailgate from the
inside of the car
267
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
268
Automatic locking when driving
269
Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate
269
Programming maximum opening
for power operated tailgate*
272
Opening and closing the tailgate
with foot movement*
273
Private locking
275
Speed limiter
290
Activating and deactivating private locking
275
Selecting and activating speed limiter
291
Symbols and messages for adaptive cruise control*
308
Alarm*
276
Deactivating the speed limiter
292
Pilot Assist*
310
293
Controls and display view for Pilot
Assist*
312
Activating and deactivating alarms*
278
Temporary deactivation of speed
limiter
Reduced alarm level*
279
Limitations for speed limiter
293
Double lock*
279
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
Automatic speed limiter
313
294
Temporarily* deactivating double
locks
280
Deactivate Pilot Assist*
Activating or deactivating the
automatic speed limiter
314
295
Standby mode for Pilot Assist*
315
296
Temporary disabling of steering
assistance with Pilot Assist*
316
Limitations of Pilot Assist*
316
Symbols and messages for
Pilot Assist*
318
Changing the tolerance for the
automatic speed limiter
Limitations for automatic speed limiter 297
Cruise control
297
7
8
Warning from driver support in
the event of a collision risk
319
City Safety in cross traffic
350
Change of target with driver support
320
Limitations for City Safety in cross
traffic
350
351
Display mode for road sign information*
367
Road Sign Information and
Sensus Navigation*
370
Warning for speed limitation and
speed camera from road sign
information*
370
Activating or deactivating warnings from road sign information*
371
Set the stored speed for driver
support
321
City Safety steering assistance for
evasive manoeuvre
Set time interval to vehicle ahead
322
352
Automatic braking with driver support
323
Automatic braking in the event of
an impeded evasive manoeuvre
with City Safety
Drive mode for driver support
324
Cornering support*
352
325
City Safety brakes for oncoming
vehicles
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
372
Activating or deactivating cornering support*
326
Limitations of City Safety
353
Driver Alert Control
373
Messages for City Safety
Limitations for cornering support*
356
Rear Collision Warning*
Overtaking Assistance
357
Activating or deactivating Driver
Alert Control
374
326
374
327
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning*
Use Overtaking Assistance
357
327
BLIS*
Radar unit
358
Select rest stop guidance in the
event of a warning from Driver
Alert Control
328
Activating or deactivating BLIS
359
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
375
Type approval for radar device
329
375
Camera unit
360
Lane assistance
337
Messages for BLIS
361
377
Limitations for camera and radar unit
338
Cross Traffic Alert*
Recommended maintenance for
camera and radar unit
362
Activating or deactivating lane
assistance
342
Activating or deactivating Cross
Traffic Alert*
363
Selecting assistance option for
lane assistance
377
City Safety™
343
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert*
Limitations of Lane assistance
378
Subfunctions for City Safety
363
344
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert*
379
Setting the warning distance for
City Safety
365
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
346
Road Sign Information*
366
Display mode for lane assistance
381
Detection of obstacles with City
Safety
347
Activating or deactivating road
sign information*
367
Steering assistance at risk of collision
382
Limitations of BLIS
HYBRID INFORMATION
Activating or deactivating steering
assistance in the event of a collision risk
383
Steering assistance upon risk of
run-off
383
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
384
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera
401
General information about Twin
Engine
412
Park Assist Pilot*
413
403
Charging the hybrid battery
Parking variants with Park Assist
Pilot*
404
Charging current
414
Using Park Assist Pilot*
405
Charging cable
416
407
Ground fault breaker in the charging cable
417
Steering assistance upon risk of
rear-end collision*
385
Leaving parallel parking with Park
Assist Pilot*
386
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
408
Temperature monitoring of the
charging cable
419
Limitations for steering assistance
at risk of collision
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
410
The charging cable's control unit
419
Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision
387
Opening and closing the hatch for
the charging input socket
421
Park Assist*
388
Start charging the hybrid battery
421
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and
along the sides*
389
Charging status in the car's charging input socket
424
Activating or deactivating the
parking assistance system*
390
Charging status in the charging
cable's control unit
426
Limitations of Parking assistance
391
392
Charging status in the car's driver
display
431
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot
Stop charging of hybrid battery
433
Park assist camera*
393
435
Park assist camera locations and
surveillance areas*
394
Symbols and messages relating to
Twin Engine in the driver display
396
Long-term storage of vehicles
with hybrid batteries
437
Park assist lines for park assist
camera*
Sensor fields for parking assistance system
398
Activate park assist camera
399
9
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the car
440
Auto braking after a collision
453
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
476
Switching off the car
441
Gearbox
454
Filling fuel
477
Ignition positions
442
Automatic gearbox
454
Handling of fuel
478
Selecting ignition mode
443
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
455
Petrol
479
Alcohol lock*
444
457
Petrol particle filter
479
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
444
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
445
Gear selector inhibitor
458
480
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock*
Overheating in the engine and
drive system
Kick-down function
459
Overloading the starter battery
481
Brake functions
445
Gear shift indicator
459
481
Foot brake
446
All-wheel drive
460
Using jump starting with another
battery
Brake assistance
447
Drive systems
460
Towbar*
483
Braking on wet roads
447
461
484
Braking on gritted roads
448
Starting and stopping the combustion engine in Twin Engine
Specifications for towbar*
Brake system maintenance
448
Drive modes
462
Parking brake
448
Activating and deactivating the
parking brake
449
Automatic parking brake activation
setting
450
Parking on a hill
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
484
Driving with a trailer
486
488
Changing drive mode
465
Trailer stability assist*
Energy distribution in hybrid drive
using map data*
466
Checking trailer lamps
489
Level control* and shock absorption
468
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
490
Settings for level control*
470
451
Economical driving
470
451
Factors that affect range when
running on electricity
471
Towing
491
Fitting and removing the towing eye
492
Recovery
493
HomeLink®*
494
HomeLink®*
452
Hold and Charge function
473
Programming
Activating and deactivating the
automatic brake at a standstill
452
Preparations for a long trip
474
Using HomeLink®*
496
Help when starting on a hill
453
Winter driving
474
Type approval for HomeLink®*
497
Driving in water
475
Compass*
497
Automatic braking when stationary
10
Extendable and retractable towbar*
494
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Activating and deactivating the
compass*
498
Calibrating the compass*
498
Sound, media and Internet
502
Playing a video
518
Audio settings
502
Playing back DivX®
519
Sound experience*
503
Settings for video
519
Apps
504
Media via Bluetooth®
519
Downloading apps
505
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
520
Updating apps
506
Media via USB port
520
Deleting apps
506
Connecting a device via USB port
520
Radio
507
521
Start radio
507
Technical specifications for USB
devices
Changing radio band and radio station
508
Compatible media formats
521
522
Searching for radio stations
509
Apple® CarPlay®*
Save radio channels in the Radio
Favourites app
510
Using Apple® CarPlay®*
Settings for radio
510
RDS radio
512
Digital radio*
512
Link between FM and digital radio*
513
Media player
513
Media playback
514
Controlling and changing media
515
Searching media
516
Settings for
Gracenote®
517
CD player*
518
Video
518
Apple®
CarPlay®*
523
525
Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®*
525
Android Auto*
526
Using Android Auto*
527
Settings for Android Auto*
527
Tips for using Android Auto*
528
Phone
529
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
530
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
531
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
532
11
VOLVO ON CALL
12
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
532
Activating and deactivating data
sharing
544
Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones
533
Data sharing for services
544
Removing devices connected to
Bluetooth
533
Storage space on hard disk
545
Managing phone calls
533
Managing text messages
534
Settings for text messages
535
Managing the phone book
536
Settings for phone
536
Settings for Bluetooth devices
537
Internet-connected car*
537
Connect the car to the Internet via
a Bluetooth-enabled phone
538
Connect the car to the Internet via
a phone (Wi-Fi)
539
Connect the car to the Internet via
car modem (SIM card)
540
Settings for car modem*
540
Sharing Internet access from the
car via a Wi-Fi hotspot
541
No or poor Internet connection
542
Remove Wi-Fi network
543
Wi-Fi technologies and security
543
User terms and conditions and
data sharing
543
License agreement for audio and media 546
Plan and schedule the charging of
your car using the Volvo On Call* app
558
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres
560
Emergency puncture repair kit
580
LOADING, STORAGE AND
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Dimension designation for tyre
562
Using a puncture repair kit
580
Passenger compartment interior
563
Inflating tyres with the compressor
from the puncture repair kit
584
Tunnel console
589
Electrical sockets
590
Dimension designation for wheel rim
588
Tyres' rotation direction
563
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
564
Using electrical sockets
592
Checking tyre pressure
564
Using the glovebox
593
Adjusting tyre pressure
565
Sun visors
595
566
Cargo area
595
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
566
Recommendations for loading
595
Saving a new tyre pressure in the
monitoring system*
568
Roof load and loading on load carriers
596
See tyre pressure status in the
centre display*
569
Action in the event of warning for
low tyre pressure
570
When changing wheels
571
Recommended tyre pressure
Bag hooks
597
Load retaining eyelets
598
Through-load hatch in the rear seat
598
Fitting and removing cargo cover*
599
Operating cargo cover*
600
Tool kit
571
Fitting and removing safety grilles*
601
Jack*
572
Fitting and removing the safety net*
603
Wheel bolts
573
First aid kit*
604
Removing a wheel
573
Warning triangle
605
Fitting the wheels
575
Spare wheel*
577
Handling the spare wheel
578
Winter tyres
578
Snow chains
579
13
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
608
Replacing a fuse
630
Car paintwork
660
Data transfer between car and
workshop via Wi-Fi
608
Fuses in engine compartment
632
Touching up minor paintwork damage
660
Download Center
609
Fuses under glovebox
639
Colour codes
661
Managing system updates via the
Download Centre
609
Fuses in cargo area
644
662
Cleaning the interior
649
Replacing the wiper blade, rear
window
Cleaning the centre display
649
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
663
Cleaning the head up display*
650
Set the wiper blades in service
position
664
Cleaning fabric upholstery and
headlining
651
Filling washer fluid
665
Cleaning the seatbelts
651
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
651
Car status
610
Book service and repair
611
Sending car information to a workshop 612
14
Raise the car
613
Servicing the climate control system
615
Head up display when replacing
the windscreen*
615
Opening and closing the bonnet
616
Engine compartment overview
617
Engine oil
618
Checking and filling with engine oil
619
Topping up coolant
620
Bulb replacement
622
Cleaning leather upholstery*
652
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
653
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood parts
653
Cleaning the exterior
654
Polishing and waxing
654
Handwashing
655
Automatic car wash
656
High-pressure washing
658
Cleaning the wiper blades
658
658
Replacing the reversing lamp bulb
622
Starter battery
624
Hybrid battery
628
Symbols on the batteries
629
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber
and trim components
Battery recycle
629
Cleaning wheel rims
659
Fuses and central electrical units
630
Rustproofing
660
SPECIFICATIONS
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Type designations
668
Dimensions
671
Weights
673
Towing capacity and towball load
674
Engine specifications
676
Engine oil — specifications
677
Adverse driving conditions for
engine oil
678
Coolant — specifications
679
Transmission fluid — specifications
679
Brake fluid — specifications
679
Fuel tank - volume
680
Air conditioning — specifications
680
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
682
Approved tyre pressures
683
Performance
684
Alphabetical Index
685
15
OWNER'S INFORMATION
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Owner information
The car's centre display1
Owner's information is available in several
different product formats, both digital and
printed. The owner's manual is available in
the car's centre display, as a mobile app and
on the Volvo Cars support site. There is a
Quick Guide and a supplement to the
owner's manual available in the glovebox,
with specifications and fuse information,
amongst other things. A printed owner's
manual can be ordered.
In the centre display, drag
down the top view and tap on
Owner's manual. Available
here are options for visual
navigation with exterior and
interior images of the car. The
information is searchable and
is also divided into categories.
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual",
download the app to your
smartphone or tablet and
select the car. Available in the
app are video tutorials and
options for visual navigation
with exterior and interior images of the car.
The content is searchable, and the various
sections are designed to facilitate navigation.
Volvo Cars support site
Go to support.volvocars.com
and select your country. Here
you can find owner's manuals, both online and in PDF
format. On the Volvo Cars
support site there are also
video tutorials and further
information and help regarding your Volvo and
your car ownership. The page is available for
most markets.
Printed information
There is a supplement to the
owner's manual1 in the glovebox that contains information
on fuses and specifications,
as well as a summary of
important and practical information.
There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
format that helps you to get started with the
most commonly used functions in the car.
Depending on equipment level selected, market, etc. additional owner's information may
also be available in printed format in the car.
A printed owner's manual and associated supplement can be ordered. Contact a Volvo
dealer to order.
1
18
A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
IMPORTANT
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that
applicable laws and regulations are followed. It is also important that the car is
maintained and handled in accordance
with Volvo's recommendations in the
owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the
information in the centre display and the
printed information then it is always the
printed information that applies.
Owner's manual in centre display
digital2
A
version of the owner's manual is
available in the car's centre display.
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
from the top view, and in some cases the contextual owner's manual can also be accessed
from the top view.
The information in the owner's manual can be
accessed directly via the owner's manual
homepage or its top menu.
NOTE
The digital owner's manual is not available
while driving.
Owner's manual
NOTE
Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner's information is not compliant with national or local
laws and regulations. Do not switch to a
language that is difficult to understand as
this may make it difficult to find your way
back through the screen structure.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
(p. 22)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 23)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 23)
2 Applies
for most markets.
Top view with button for owner's manual.
To open the owner's manual - drag down the
top view in the centre display and tap on
Owner's manual.
}}
19
OWNER'S INFORMATION
||
Contextual owner's manual
Related information
•
Navigate in the owner's manual in the
centre display (p. 20)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
•
Downloading apps (p. 505)
Navigate in the owner's manual in
the centre display
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
from the centre display top view in the car.
The content is searchable, and the various
sections are designed to facilitate navigation.
Top view with button for contextual owner's manual.
The contextual owner's manual is a shortcut to
an article in the owner's manual that describes
the active function shown on the screen.
When the contextual owner's manual is available, it is shown to the right of Owner's
manual in the top view.
Tapping on the contextual owner's manual
therefore opens an article in the owner's manual that is related to the content that is shown
on the screen. E.g. tap on Navigation Manual
– an article that is related to navigation opens.
This only applies to some of the apps in the
car. For downloaded third party apps,
for example, it is not possible to access appspecific articles.
20
The owner's manual is accessed from the top view.
–
To open the owner's manual - drag down
the top view in the centre display and tap
on Owner's manual.
There is a range of different options for finding
information in the owner's manual. The
options can be accessed from the owner's
manual homepage and from the top menu.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Opening the menu in the top menu
–
Press
in the upper list in the owner's
manual.
> A menu with different options for finding information is opened:
Homepage
Tap on the symbol to go back
to the start page in the
owner's manual.
Categories
The articles in the owner's
manual are structured into
main categories and subcategories. The same article can
be found in several appropriate categories so that it can
be found more easily.
1.
Quick Guide
Press the symbol to access a
page with links to a selection
of articles that can be useful
to read in order to get to
know the more common
functions of the car. The articles can also be accessed via
categories, but are collected here for faster
access. Tap on an article in order to read it in
its entirety.
Hotspots for exterior and interior
Exterior and interior overview
images of the car. Different
parts are designated with
hotspots that lead to articles
about those parts of the car.
3. Tap on an article to open it.
To go back, press the back arrow.
3. Tap on the title to open the article.
To go back, press the back arrow.
Favourites
Press the symbol to access
the articles saved as favourites. Tap on an article in order
to read it in its entirety.
Saving or deleting articles as favourites
Save an article as favourite by pressing
at
the top right when an article is open. When an
article has been saved as a favourite the star is
filled in: .
To remove an article as a favourite, press the
star again in the current article.
Press Categories.
> The main categories are shown in a list.
2. Tap on a main category ( ).
> A list of subcategories ( ) and articles
( ) is shown.
2. Tap on a hotspot.
> The title of the article about the area is
shown.
Video
1.
Press Exterior or Interior.
> Exterior or interior images are shown
with so-called hotspots in place. The
hotspot leads to articles about the corresponding part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the screen to browse
among the images.
Press the symbol to view
brief instruction videos for
various functions in the car.
}}
21
OWNER'S INFORMATION
||
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
Information
Tap on the symbol to obtain
information about which version of the owner's manual is
available in the car as well as
other useful information.
The owner's manual is available as a mobile
app3 from both the App Store and Google
Play. The app is adapted for smartphones and
tablets.
various sections are designed to facilitate navigation.
Using the search function in the top
menu
1.
Tap on
in the top menu of the owner's
manual. A keyboard appears in the lower
part of the screen.
2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt".
> Suggestions for articles and categories
are shown while letters are being
entered.
3. Tap on the article or category to access it.
Related information
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 124)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 23)
The owner's manual can be
downloaded as a mobile app
from the App Store or Google
Play. The QR code provided
here takes you directly to the
app. Alternatively, you can
search for "Volvo manual" in
the App Store or Google Play.
The app contains a video along with exterior
and interior images where different parts of
the car are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which lead to articles about the area in
question. The content is searchable, and the
3 For
22
certain mobile devices.
The mobile app is available from both the App Store
and Google Play.
Related information
•
Reading the owner's manual (p. 23)
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Volvo Cars support site
Support on the Internet
in it is possible to get an overview of service,
agreements and warranties,
amongst other things. Here there is also information about accessories and software adapted for your car model.
Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site.
The support site is available for most markets.
Related information
More information on your car is available on
the Volvo Cars website and support site.
It contains support for functions such as webbased services and functions, Volvo On Call*,
the navigation system* and apps. Videos and
step-by-step instructions explain different procedures, e.g. how to connect the car to the
Internet via a mobile phone.
Downloadable information
Maps
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation
there is the facility to download maps from the
support page.
Owner's manuals as PDF
Owner's manuals are available for download in
PDF format. Select car model and model year
to download the manual as required.
Contact
The support site contains contact details to
customer support and your nearest Volvo
retailer.
Log in to Volvo Cars website
Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to
www.volvocars.com. When you have logged
•
Volvo ID (p. 28)
Reading the owner's manual
To help you get to know your new car, read
the Owner's Manual before you drive it for
the first time.
Reading the owner's manual is a way to
become familiar with new functions, get
advice on how to handle the car in different
situations and learn how to make use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the owner's
manual.
The intention of this owner's information is to
explain all possible functions, options and
accessories included in a Volvo vehicle. It is
not intended as an indication or guarantee that
all of these features, functions and options are
included in every vehicle. Some terminology
used may not exactly match terminology used
in sales, marketing and advertising materials.
Development work is constantly underway in
order to improve our product. Modifications
may mean that information, descriptions and
illustrations in the owner's manual differ from
the equipment in the car. We reserve the right
to make modifications without prior notice.
Do not remove this manual from the car - if
problems should arise then the necessary
information about where and how to seek professional help will be missing.
© Volvo Car Corporation
}}
* Option/accessory.
23
OWNER'S INFORMATION
||
Options/accessories
In addition to standard equipment, the
owner's manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories
(retrofitted extra equipment).
All, at the time of publication known, options
and accessories are marked with an asterisk:
*.
The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for
the needs of different markets and national or
local laws and regulations.
NOTE
Risk of property damage
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions.
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a clear manner. The decals in the car have
the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information.
Warning of personal injury
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
damage to property.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
24
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
serious personal injury or fatality.
* Option/accessory.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Information
ate from the car's appearance depending on
equipment level and market.
The owner's manual and the
environment
Related information
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper originating from controlled forests.
The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed
owner's manual comes from FSC®-certified
forests or other controlled sources.
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 22)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 23)
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included
to show their approximate appearance and
location in the car. The information that
applies to your particular car is available on
the respective decals for your car.
Related information
•
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 30)
Illustrations and video clips
Illustrations and video clips used in the
owner's manual are sometimes schematic and
are intended to provide an overall picture or
example of a certain function. They may devi-
25
YOUR VOLVO
YOUR VOLVO
Volvo ID
Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives access to
a wide range of services via a single username and password.
NOTE
The services available may vary over time
and depend on equipment level and market.
Examples of services:
•
Volvo On Call app* – check the car with
your phone. For example, you can check
fuel level, show the nearest petrol station
and lock the car remotely.
•
Send to Car – send addresses from map
services on the Web, directly to the car.
•
Book service and repair – register a workshop/dealer at volvocars.com and book
service directly from the car.
NOTE
If the username/password for a service
(e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is
also changed automatically for other services.
Volvo ID is created from the car,
volvocars.com or the Volvo On Call app1.
1
28
When a Volvo ID is registered in the car, several services will be made available. Several
Volvo IDs can be used for the same car and
several cars can even be connected to the
same Volvo ID.
Related information
•
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
(p. 28)
•
Book service and repair (p. 611)
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different
ways. If the Volvo ID is created at
volvocars.com or with Volvo On Call app2, the
Volvo ID must also be registered to the car to
enable use of the various Volvo ID services.
Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo ID app
1. Download the Volvo ID app from
Download Centre in the centre display's
app view.
2. Start the app and register a personal email
address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created and
automatically registered to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars
website
1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in3
using the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo ID.
2. Enter a personal email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
If you have Volvo On Call*.
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo On Call
app4
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo
On Call app to the phone, via e.g. App
Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
Registering your Volvo ID to the car
If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the
Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as follows:
1.
2. Select to create Volvo ID.
3. The web page for creating a Volvo ID
opens. Fill in the requested information.
NOTE
4. Tick the box to accept the terms and conditions.
5. Press the button that creates your Volvo
ID.
6. An e-mail message is sent to the address
given. Confirm that the address is correct.
> Now the Volvo ID is ready to use.
If not done already, download the Volvo ID
app from Download Centre in the centre
display's app view.
To download apps, the car must be connected to the Internet.
2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your
email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the email address linked to
your Volvo ID.
> Your Volvo ID is now registered to the
car. Volvo ID services can now be used.
Related information
Volvo ID (p. 28)
•
•
•
Downloading apps (p. 505)
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 609)
2 Only applies to certain markets.
3 Available on certain markets.
4 Cars with Volvo On Call*.
* Option/accessory.
29
YOUR VOLVO
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working
on the development of safer and more effi-
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core
values and influences all operations. The environmental work is based on the whole life
cycle of the car and takes into account the
environmental impact it has, from design to
scrapping and recycling. Volvo Cars' basic
principle is that every new product developed
must have less impact on the environment
than the product it replaces.
Volvo's environmental management work has
resulted in the development of more effective
and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal
environment is also important to Volvo - the
30
cient products and solutions in order to
reduce the negative impact on the environment.
air inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than
the air outside thanks to the climate control
system.
Your Volvo complies with stringent international environmental standards. All Volvo's
manufacturing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this supports a systematic approach
to the operation's environmental issues, which
leads to continuous improvement with
reduced environmental impact. Holding the
ISO certificate also means that environmental
laws and regulations in force are complied
with. Volvo also requires that its partners must
also meet these requirements.
Fuel consumption
Since a large part of a car's total environmental impact stems from its use, the emphasis of
Volvo Cars' environmental work is on reducing
fuel consumption, carbon dioxide emissions
and other air pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their
respective classes. Lower fuel consumption
generally results in lower emission of the
greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
YOUR VOLVO
Contributing to a better environment
An energy-efficient and economical car can
contribute to reduced environmental impact
and also involve reduced costs for the owner
of the car. As the driver, it is easy to reduce
fuel consumption and thereby save money and
contribute to a better environment - here is
some advice:
•
Plan for an effective average speed.
Speeds above approx. 80 km/h (approx.
50 mph) and below 50 km/h (approx.
30 mph) lead to increased energy consumption.
•
Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals for service
and maintenance of the car.
•
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off
the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations.
•
Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary
stops and uneven speed contribute to
increased fuel consumption.
•
Use preconditioning – it can improve the
range of the hybrid battery and reduce the
energy requirement while driving.
Also remember to always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries
and oil, in an environmentally safe manner.
Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty
about how this type of waste should be dis-
carded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
An air filter helps prevent dust and pollen
entering the passenger compartment via the
air intake.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*
ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than
the air in the traffic outside.
The system cleans the air in the passenger
compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and
ground-level ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the
air is recirculated. Such a situation may arise
in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*, which also includes a function
that allows the fan to start when the car is
unlocked with the remote control key.
Interior
The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
carefully selected and has been tested in order
to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the
details are hand-made, such as the seams of
the steering wheel that are sewn by hand. The
interior is monitored in order not to emit
strong odours or substances that cause discomfort in the event of e.g. high heat and
bright light.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you also contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's
workshops are entrusted with the service and
maintenance of your car it becomes part of
Volvo's system. Volvo makes clear demands
regarding the way in which workshop premises shall be designed in order to prevent spills
and discharges into the environment. The
workshop staff have the knowledge and the
tools required to guarantee good environmental care.
Recycling
Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it is also important that the car is recycled
in an environmentally sound manner. Almost
all of the car can be recycled. The last owner
of the car is therefore requested to contact a
retailer for referral to a certified/approved
recycling facility.
* Option/accessory.
}}
31
YOUR VOLVO
||
32
Related information
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 682)
•
•
Economical driving (p. 470)
•
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 25)
•
Air quality (p. 202)
Start and switch off preconditioning
(p. 224)
YOUR VOLVO
IntelliSafe – driver support and
safety
IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept for car
safety. IntelliSafe comprises a number of systems5, whose purpose is to make a car journey safer, to prevent injuries and to protect
passengers and other road users.
WARNING
The functions are supplementary aids they cannot handle all situations in all conditions.
The driver always bears responsibility that
the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.
Support
With the aim of assisting the driver to drive
the car in a safer way, IntelliSafe has the following functions.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Active main beam
Tunnel detection
Pilot Assist
*Cross Traffic Alert
*Blind Spot Information
Park Assist*
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park assist camera*
Road Sign Information*
Electronic stability control
Roll Stability Control
•
•
•
•
Speed limiter*
Whiplash Protection System
Pedestrian Protection System
Seatbelts with seatbelt tensioners
Airbags
NOTE
Cruise control
Read the individual sections on each system in order to fully understand the functions and learn about important warnings.
Adaptive cruise control*
Rear Collision Warning
Driver Alert Control
All-wheel drive6
Prevention
With the aim of assisting the driver to avoid an
accident, IntelliSafe has the following functions.
Related information
•
•
•
Active main beam (p. 154)
Safety (p. 44)
Driving support systems (p. 282)
• City Safety
• Distance Warning*
• Lane assistance
• Collision Avoid. Assistance
Protection
With the aim of protecting the driver and passengers in certain situations in the event of an
accident, IntelliSafe has the following collaborative functions.
Park Assist Pilot*
5 Some of the systems
6 All Wheel Drive
are fitted as standard, while others are options. This may vary depending on market, model year and car model.
* Option/accessory.
33
YOUR VOLVO
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
Sensus makes it possible to use different
types of apps and turn the car into a Wi-Fi
hotspot.
This is Sensus
34
Sensus offers an intelligent interface and
online connectivity with the digital world. An
intuitive navigation structure makes it possible
to receive relevant support, information and
entertainment when it is necessary, without
distracting the driver.
Information when it is needed, where
it is needed
The different displays in the car provide information at the right time. The information is
shown in different locations based on how it
should be prioritised by the driver.
Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are
connected with entertainment, online connectivity, navigation* and the user interface
between driver and car. It is Sensus that
makes communication possible between you,
the car and the outside world.
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.
Head-up display*
The head-up display shows selected information that the driver should deal with as soon as
possible. Such information may, for example,
include traffic warnings, speed information
and navigation* information. Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls are also
shown in the head-up display. The display is
operated via the right-hand steering wheel
keypad and via the centre display.
Driver display
The driver display shows information on speed
and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being
* Option/accessory.
}}
35
YOUR VOLVO
||
played. The display is operated via the two
steering wheel keypads.
Centre display
Voice recognition system
The voice recognition system
can be used without the
driver needing to take his/her
hands off the steering wheel.
The system can understand
natural speech. Use voice
recognition to, for example,
play back a song, call someone, increase the
temperature or read out a text message.
Related information
Many of the main functions of the car are controlled from the centre display, a touch screen
which reacts to touch. The number of physical
buttons and controls in the car is therefore
minimal. The screen can even be operated
while wearing gloves.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Driver display (p. 81)
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 541)
From here, for example, you can control the
climate control system, the entertainment system and seat position*. The information that is
shown in the centre display can be acted on
by the driver or someone else in the car when
the opportunity arises.
36
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
Software updates
Recording data
So that you as a Volvo customer get the best
experience of your car, Volvo continuously
develops the systems in the cars and the services that you are offered.
You can update the software in your Volvo to
the latest version when your car is serviced at
an authorised Volvo dealer. The latest software update allows you to benefit from available improvements, including improvements
from earlier software updates.
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, certain information about the vehicle's
operation, functionality and incidents are
recorded in the car.
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to
register and record data related to traffic accidents or collision-like situations, such as times
when the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes
an obstacle in the road. The data is recorded in
order to increase understanding of how vehicle systems work in these types of situations.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short time, usually 30 seconds or less.
For more information about released updates
and answers to frequently asked questions,
please go to support.volvocars.com.
NOTE
Functionality after updating may vary
depending on market, model, model year
and options.
Related information
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
data related to the following in the event of
traffic accidents or collision-like situations:
•
How the various systems in the car
worked
•
Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 34)
•
Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts were fastened/tensioned
•
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 609)
•
The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
pedal
•
The travel speed of the vehicle
This information can help us understand the
circumstances in which traffic accidents, injuries and damage occur. The EDR only records
data when a non-trivial collision situation
occurs. The EDR does not record any data
during normal driving conditions. Similarly, the
system never registers who is driving the vehicle or the geographic location of the accident
or near-miss situation. However, other parties,
such as the police, could use the recorded
data in combination with the type of personally identifiable information routinely collected
after a traffic accident. Special equipment and
access to either the vehicle or the EDR is
required to be able to interpret the registered
data.
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped
with a number of computers designed to continually check and monitor the function of the
car. They can record data during normal driving conditions, but in particular register faults
affecting the vehicle's operation and functionality, or upon activation of the vehicle's driver
support function (e.g. City Safety and the auto
brake function).
Some of the recorded data is required to enable service and maintenance technicians to
diagnose and remedy any faults that occurred
in the vehicle. The registered information is
also needed to enable Volvo to satisfy legal
requirements laid out in laws and by government authorities. Information registered in the
vehicle is stored in its computer until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
}}
37
YOUR VOLVO
In addition to the above, the registered information can be used in aggregate form for
research and product development with the
aim of continuously improving the safety and
quality of Volvo cars.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. To
comply with national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be forced to disclose information of this nature to the police or other
authorities who may assert a legal right to
access such. Special technical equipment
which Volvo and workshops that have entered
into agreements with Volvo have access to is
required to be able to read and interpret the
recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the
information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is securely
stored and managed and that its management
complies with relevant legal requirements. For
further information - contact a Volvo retailer.
38
Terms & Conditions for Services
Customer Privacy Policy
Volvo offers services that help to enhance car
safety and comfort.
These services include everything from assistance in emergencies to navigation and various maintenance services.
Volvo respects and safeguards the personal
integrity of everyone visiting our website.
This policy regards to the handling of customer data and personal information. The purpose is to give current, past and potential customers a general understanding of:
Before using the services, it is important for
you to read the support information for Terms
& Conditions for Services at
www.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Customer Privacy Policy (p. 38)
•
The circumstances in which we gather
and process your personal data.
•
•
•
The types of personal data we gather.
The reason we gather your personal data.
How we handle your personal data.
For more information on the policy, search
support information at www.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 543)
•
•
Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 38)
Recording data (p. 37)
YOUR VOLVO
Important information on
accessories and auxiliary
equipment
WARNING
The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for
the needs of different markets and national or
local laws and regulations.
Options or accessories described in this manual are marked with an asterisk. In the event of
uncertainty over what is standard or an
option/accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.
Connection of equipment to the car's
diagnostic socket (p. 40)
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is
only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo
service technicians. Certain accessories only
function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system.
• Volvo original accessories are tested to
ensure that they function with the car systems for performance, safety and emissions control. In addition, a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician knows
where accessories may or may not be
safely installed in your Volvo. Always seek
the advice of a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician before installing any
accessories in or on your car.
Reading the owner's manual (p. 23)
•
Accessories that are not approved by
Volvo may not have been specifically tested for use with your car.
•
Some of the car's performance or safety
systems can be negatively affected if you
install accessories that have not been tested by Volvo, or if you permit someone
without experience of the car to install
accessories.
•
Damage that is caused by accessories
installed in a non-approved or incorrect
way is not covered by any new car warranty. More warranty information can be
found in the service and warranty booklet.
The driver always bears the ultimate
responsibility that the car is used safely
and that laws and regulations in force are
followed.
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories and extra equipment can negatively affect the car's electronic system.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only
carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in
the car's computer system.
It is also important that the car has maintenance and service according to Volvo's recommendations, the owner's information
and the service and warranty booklet.
If the on-board information differs from the
printed owner's manual then the printed
information always has precedence.
Related information
•
•
•
Installation of accessories
Installation of accessories (p. 39)
}}
39
YOUR VOLVO
||
Volvo does not accept any liability for
deaths, personal injury or costs arising as
a result of the installation of non-original
accessories.
Related information
•
Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 39)
Connection of equipment to the
car's diagnostic socket
Incorrect connection and installation of software or diagnostic tools may have a negative
effect on the car's electronic system.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only
carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in
the car's computer system.
Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is
under the instrument panel on the driver's side.
40
NOTE
Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the consequences if unauthorised equipment is
connected to the On-board Diagnostic
socket (OBDII). This socket should only be
used by trained and qualified Volvo service
technicians.
Related information
•
Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 39)
YOUR VOLVO
Showing the car's identification
number
Driver distraction
When contacting a Volvo dealer concerning
your Volvo On Call subscription, for example,
you will need the car's identification number
(VIN7).
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Continue to System System
Information Vehicle Identification
Number.
> The car's identification number is
shown.
Another way of finding the VIN is to look on
the dashboard through the car's windscreen,
on the first page of the service and warranty
booklet or in the car's registration certificate.
7
Vehicle Identification Number
VIN is positioned in a similar place on all models.
The driver is responsible for doing everything
possible to ensure the safety of themselves,
their passengers and other road users. Part of
this responsibility is avoiding distractions
such as carrying out an activity that is not
related to operating the car in a driving environment.
Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with
content-rich entertainment and communications systems. This could be mobile phones
with handsfree, navigation systems and audio
systems with lots of functions. You may also
have other portable electronic devices for your
own convenience. Used correctly, in a safe
way they can enrich the driving experience. If
they are used in the wrong way they could distract you.
We wish to give the following warnings regarding such systems, to indicate Volvo's concern for your safety. Never use a device or
function in the car in such a way that it will
distract you from the task of driving safely.
Distractions can lead to serious accidents.
Apart from these general warnings, we offer
the following advice regarding the new functions that may be in the car:
}}
41
YOUR VOLVO
||
WARNING
•
Never use a hand-held mobile phone
while driving. In some areas it is forbidden for the driver to use a mobile
phone while the car is moving.
•
If the car is equipped with a navigation
system you must only set and change
the itinerary when the car is parked.
•
Never program the audio system while
the car is moving. Program the radio's
presets when the car is parked and
then use the programmed presets for
faster and simpler use of the radio.
•
Never use laptops or hand-held computers while the car is moving.
Related information
•
42
Sound, media and Internet (p. 502)
SAFETY
SAFETY
Safety
WARNING
The vehicle is equipped with several safety
systems that work together to protect the
vehicle's driver and passengers in the event
of an accident.
The car is equipped with a number of sensors
that react in the event of an accident and activate different safety systems, such as different
types of airbags and seatbelt tensioners.
Depending on the specific accident situation,
such as collisions at different angles, roll-over
or driving off the road, the systems react in different ways to provide good protection.
If the warning symbol remains illuminated
or is switched on during driving and the
message SRS airbag Service urgent
Drive to workshop is shown in the driver
display, it means that part of one of the
safety systems does not have full functionality. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted as
soon as possible.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the car's various
safety systems yourself. Defective work in
one of the systems can cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury. Volvo
recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
There are also mechanical safety systems
such as Whiplash Protection System. The car
is also constructed so that a large part of the
force of a collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof and other parts of the body.
The car's safety mode may be activated after a
collision if an important function in the car has
been damaged.
If the specific warning symbol is broken then the general warning symbol
is illuminated instead and the driver
display shows the same message.
Warning symbol in driver display
The warning symbol is illuminated in
the driver display when the car's
electrical system is set in ignition
position II. The symbol is extinguished after approx. 6 seconds if the car's
safety system is fault-free.
44
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Safety during pregnancy (p. 45)
Seatbelts (p. 48)
Airbags (p. 53)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 45)
Pedestrian Protection System (p. 47)
Safety mode (p. 59)
•
Child safety (p. 61)
SAFETY
Safety during pregnancy
It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly during pregnancy, and that pregnant
drivers adjust their seating position.
Seatbelt
that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). The aim should be to
position the seat with as large a distance as
possible between abdomen and steering
wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
The diagonal section should wrap over the
shoulder then be routed between the breasts
and to the side of the abdomen.
Safety (p. 44)
Seatbelts (p. 48)
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Whiplash Protection System
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)
reduces the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy absorbing backrests
and seat cushion, as well as a specially
designed head restraint in the front seats.
WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the
collision and the nature of the colliding vehicle
all have an influence.
When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat
backrests are lowered backward and the seat
cushions move downward to change the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. Its movement helps to absorb some of
the forces that can arise and cause whiplash.
WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. It
must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and
ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
Seating position
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
must adjust the seat and steering wheel such
}}
* Option/accessory.
45
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
yourself. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the front seats have been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the seats must be replaced. Some
of the seats' protective properties may
have been lost even if they do not appear
damaged.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's backrest.
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered
then any load must be secured to prevent it
from sliding up to the front seat backrest in
the event of a collision.
WARNING
WHIPS and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by WHIPS.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Safety (p. 44)
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 357)
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a
rear-facing child seat is used in the rear
seat, the corresponding front seat must be
moved forward so that it does not make
contact with the lowered backrest or child
seat.
Seating position
For good protection from WHIPS the driver
and passenger must have the correct seating
position and make sure that the system's
function is not obstructed.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under
the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent
WHIPS from functioning.
46
Set the correct seating position in the front
seat before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in
the centre of the seat with as little space as
possible between the head and the head
restraint.
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Pedestrian Protection System
The Pedestrian Protection System (PPS) is a
system which, in certain frontal collisions,
contributes to mitigating a pedestrian's
impact with the car.
In certain frontal collisions with a pedestrian,
the sensors in the front of the car react and
the system is activated.
When PPS is activated, the following occur:
•
•
The rear section of the bonnet is raised.
An automatic alarm is sent via Volvo On
Call*.
The sensors are active at a speed of approx.
25-50 km/h (15-30 mph).
The sensors are designed to detect a collision
with an object that has similar properties to
those of the human leg.
NOTE
There may be objects in the traffic environment that prompt a signal to the sensors
that is similar to a collision with a pedestrian. It is possible that the system will be
activated in the event of a collision with
such an object.
WARNING
Do not fit any accessories or change anything in the front. Incorrect intervention at
the front may cause incorrect function in
the system and lead to serious injury and
damage to the car.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 44)
Volvo recommends that genuine wiper
arms are used and that only genuine parts
are used for them.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the system yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted.
Defective work in the system could cause
malfunction and result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo workshop in the event of any
damage to the front of the car in order to
ensure that the system is intact.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
Specification
PPS has been activated, or a
fault has occurred in the system.
Follow the recommendation
given.
* Option/accessory.
47
SAFETY
Seatbelts
WARNING
Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide good protection. Do not
lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
designed to protect in a normal seating position.
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the entire seatbelt must be
replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective
properties may have been lost even if the
seatbelt does not appear damaged. The
seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows
signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt
must be type-approved and designed for
installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt
to hooks or other interior fittings, as this
prevents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a
seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly,
this may diminish the protection provided
by the airbag in the event of a collision.
48
Related information
Safety (p. 44)
•
•
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50)
•
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 51)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
(p. 48)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
Make sure that all passengers have fastened
their seatbelts before starting to drive.
Putting on seatbelts
1.
Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure
it is not twisted or damaged.
NOTE
The seatbelt is equipped with an inertia
reel that is locked in the following situations:
•
•
•
•
if the belt is extended too quickly.
during braking and acceleration.
if the car leans heavily.
when driving in bends.
SAFETY
2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab
in the intended buckle.
> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has
locked.
3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be
adjusted for height.
WARNING
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt
into the buckle on the correct side. The
seatbelts and buckles would otherwise
possibly not function as intended in the
event of a collision. There is a risk of serious injury.
The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down
over the arm).
Press together the seat mounting and
move the seatbelt up or down.
4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards
the shoulder.
Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over
the abdomen).
}}
49
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt
to hooks or other interior fittings, as this
prevents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor
insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The
seatbelts and buckles would then possibly
not function as intended in the event of a
collision. There is a risk of serous injury.
Taking off seatbelts
1.
Press the red button on the seatbelt
buckle and then let the belt retract.
2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it
in by hand so that it does not hang loose.
Related information
•
•
•
50
Seatbelts (p. 48)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 51)
Seatbelt tensioner
The car is fitted with standard seatbelt tensioners and electric seatbelt tensioners that
can tension the seatbelts in critical situations
and collisions.
When the critical situation has come to an
end, the seatbelt and the electric seatbelt pretensioner are restored automatically, but they
can also be restored manually.
IMPORTANT
Standard seatbelt tensioner
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated.
All the seatbelts are equipped with a standard
seatbelt tensioner.
The seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in
the event of a collision with sufficient force in
order to more effectively restrain the occupant.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted.
Electric seatbelt tensioner
The driver and front passenger seatbelts are
equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the entire seatbelt must be
replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective
properties may have been lost even if the
seatbelt does not appear damaged. The
seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows
signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt
must be type-approved and designed for
installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
The seatbelt tensioners work together and can
be activated together with the driver support
systems City Safety and Rear Collision
Warning. In critical situations, such as panic
braking, driving off the road (e.g. the car rolls
into a ditch, lifts off the ground or hits something in the terrain), skidding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be tensioned by the
seatbelt tensioner's electric motor.
The electric seatbelt tensioner helps to adjust
the occupant to a better position, reducing the
risk of striking the car's interior and improving
the effect of safety systems, such as the car's
airbags.
Related information
•
•
•
Seatbelts (p. 48)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 48)
Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner
(p. 51)
SAFETY
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 56)
Resetting the electric seatbelt
tensioner
City Safety™ (p. 343)
The electric seatbelt tensioner is designed to
be reset automatically, but the seatbelt tensioner can be reset manually if the belt
remains extended.
1. Stop the car at a safe place.
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 357)
Door and seatbelt reminder
The system reminds unbelted occupants to
wear a seatbelt, and also warns about an
open door, bonnet or lid.
Driver display graphics
2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.
> The seatbelt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the entire seatbelt must be
replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective
properties may have been lost even if the
seatbelt does not appear damaged. The
seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows
signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt
must be type-approved and designed for
installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
•
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50)
Graphics in the driver display with different types of
warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is dependent on the vehicle's speed.
The driver display's graphics show which
seats in the car are occupied by belted and
unbelted passengers.
The same graphic also shows if the bonnet,
tailgate, fuel filler flap or any door is open.
The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing
the O button on the right-hand steering wheel
keypad.
Seatbelts (p. 48)
}}
* Option/accessory.
51
SAFETY
||
Seatbelt reminder
Visual reminder in the roof console.
A visual reminder is given in the roof console
and by means of the warning symbol in the
driver display.
The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed,
driving time and distance.
The belt status of the driver and passengers is
shown in the driver display's graphic when a
belt is buckled or unbuckled.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Front seat
A visual and acoustic reminder remind the
driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one.
52
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
•
Provides information on which seatbelts
are being used in the rear seat. The driver
display's graphics are shown when the
seatbelts are in use.
•
Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat
is unfastened during a journey by means
of a visual and acoustic reminder. The
reminder will cease once the seatbelt has
been put on again.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door
is not closed properly, the driver display's
graphics show what is open. Stop the car in a
safe place as soon as possible and close the
source of the warning.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then
the driver display's information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then
the driver display's warning symbol
illuminates.
Related information
•
•
Seatbelts (p. 48)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 48)
SAFETY
Airbags
The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable curtains for driver and passengers.
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
•
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
•
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending
on the nature of the collision and whether
or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies
to all belt positions.
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The smoke
and dust created when the airbags are
deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/
injury after intensive exposure. In case of
irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid
deployment sequence and airbag fabric
may cause friction and skin burns.
WARNING
Deployed airbags
If any of the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended:
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that it is transported to an authorised
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the car is
equipped with steering wheel airbag and
knee airbag1 on the driver's side.
WARNING
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the
collision on the vehicle and the action is
adapted accordingly so that none, one or
more airbags are deployed.
The airbag system's control module is
located in the centre console. If the centre
console is drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the cables to the starter
battery. Do not attempt to start the car
since the airbags may deploy. Recovering
the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Driver airbags
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Safety (p. 44)
Driver airbags (p. 53)
Passenger airbag (p. 54)
Side airbags (p. 58)
Inflatable curtains (p. 59)
Steering wheel airbag and knee airbag1 on the driver's side in the front seat.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags
help to protect the head, neck, face and chest
of the driver as well as the knees and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag
cushions the initial collision impact for the
occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs,
smoke escapes into the car. This is completely
normal. The entire process, including inflation
and deflation of the airbag, occurs within
tenths of a second.
}}
53
SAFETY
||
WARNING
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest.
Do not place or attach any object on the
top or front of the panel where the knee
airbag is stowed.
Passenger airbag
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle
is equipped with an airbag on the passenger
side in the front seat.
Related information
•
•
Airbags (p. 53)
Passenger airbag (p. 54)
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair. Defective work in the airbag system
could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Steering wheel airbag location
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the
steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
AIRBAG.
Knee airbag1 location
The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the
instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover
panel is marked AIRBAG.
1
54
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
Front passenger airbag in front seat.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbag
helps to protect the head, neck, face and
chest of the passenger as well as the knees
and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag is inflated. The airbag cushions
the initial collision impact for the occupant.
The airbag deflates when compressed by the
collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes
into the car. This is completely normal. The
entire process, including inflation and deflation
SAFETY
of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
Label for passenger airbag
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
Front-facing passengers (children and
adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair. Defective work in the airbag system
could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Passenger airbag location
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
WARNING
If the car is not equipped with a switch to
activate/deactivate the passenger airbag,
the airbag will always be activated.
Related information
•
•
•
Airbags (p. 53)
Driver airbags (p. 53)
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 56)
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
* Option/accessory.
55
SAFETY
Activating and deactivating
passenger airbag*
The passenger airbag can be deactivated if
the car is equipped with a switch, Passenger
Airbag Cut Off Switch (PACOS).
The switch for the passenger airbag is located
on the passenger end of the instrument panel
and is accessible when the passenger door is
open.
Check that the switch is in the required position.
WARNING
Activating passenger airbag
If the car is not equipped with a switch to
activate/deactivate the passenger airbag,
the airbag will always be activated.
Pull the switch outward and turn from
OFF to ON.
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag on Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
ON - The airbag is activated and all frontfacing passengers (children and adults)
can sit safely on the passenger seat.
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position
I or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the
roof console approx. 6 seconds after the
car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II.
OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children in rear-facing child seats can sit
safely on the passenger seat.
56
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
2. Confirm the message by pressing the
right-hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> A text message and a warning symbol
in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat when the airbag is
activated.
The passenger airbag must always be activated when front-facing passengers (children and adults) are sitting in the front passenger seat.
Deactivating passenger airbag
Pull the switch outward and turn from ON
to OFF.
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag off Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position
I or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the
roof console approx. 6 seconds after the
car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the
right-hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> A text message and a symbol in the roof
console indicate that the airbag for the
front passenger seat is deactivated.
WARNING
Front-facing passengers (children and
adults) must never sit on the passenger
seat when the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.
}}
57
SAFETY
||
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated.
Side airbags
WARNING
The side airbags on the driver's and passenger seats act to protect the chest and hips in
the event of a collision.
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair. Defective work in the side airbag
system could cause malfunction and result
in serious personal injury.
Related information
•
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50)
WARNING
Child seats (p. 62)
Do not put objects in the area between the
outside of the seat and the door panel,
since this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat
covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side
airbags.
The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest frames of the front seats and help to protect the driver and passengers in the front
seat.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact.
The airbag deflates when compressed by the
collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
WARNING
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Side airbags and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
Related information
•
58
Airbags (p. 53)
SAFETY
Inflatable curtains
WARNING
The Inflatable Curtain (IC), helps to prevent
the driver and passengers from striking their
heads on the inside of the car during a collision.
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hooks are only
designed for light coats and jackets (not for
solid objects such as umbrellas).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends only using
Volvo genuine parts that are approved for
fitting within these areas.
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection
of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed
in the headlining, may be compromised.
The inflatable curtain is mounted along both
sides of the headlining and helps protect the
driver and outer seat passengers of the car.
The panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG.
WARNING
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair. Defective work in the inflatable curtain system can cause malfunction and
result in serious personal injury.
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to
the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Safety mode
Safety mode is a protective state that is triggered when a collision may have damaged
any of the car's vital functions, such as the
fuel lines, sensors for any of the safety systems, or the brake system.
If the car has been in a collision, the message
Safety mode See Owner's manual may be
shown on the driver display with a warning
symbol as long as the display is not damaged
and the car's electrical system is still in working order. This message means that the car
has reduced functionality.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt
to restart the car if it smells of fuel when
the Safety mode See Owner's manual
message is shown in the driver display.
Leave the car at once.
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start
and move the car for a short distance, if in a
dangerous traffic situation for example.
Related information
•
Airbags (p. 53)
}}
59
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset
the electronics yourself if the car has been
in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as
normal. Volvo recommends that engaging
an authorised Volvo workshop to check
and restore the car to normal status after
Safety mode See Owner's manual has
been shown.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its
location. Volvo recommends that it is
transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
•
•
Safety (p. 44)
Starting and moving the car after safety
mode (p. 60)
Recovery (p. 493)
Starting and moving the car after
safety mode
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start
and move the car for a short distance, if in a
dangerous traffic situation for example.
IMPORTANT
If the message Safety mode See
Owner's manual is still shown on the display the car must not be driven or towed
but a vehicle recovery service must then be
used instead. Even if the car appears to be
driveable, hidden damage may make the
car impossible to control once moving.
Starting the car after safety mode
1.
Check the general damage situation of the
car and whether any fuel has been leaking.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If there is only minor damage and a check
has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be
attempted.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt
to restart the car if it smells of fuel when
the Safety mode See Owner's manual
message is shown in the driver display.
Leave the car at once.
2. Switch off the car.
3. Then try to start the car.
> The car's electronics carry out a systems check and then try to resume normal status. The driver display shows
the message Car start System check,
wait during this time. This can take up
to one minute.
60
4. Then try to start the car again when the
message Car start System check, wait
is no longer shown in the driver's display.
Moving the car after safety mode
1.
If the driver display shows the message
Normal mode The car is now in normal
mode after a start attempt, the car can be
carefully moved if standing in a dangerous
position.
2. Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its
location. Volvo recommends that it is
transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
SAFETY
Related information
•
•
•
Safety mode (p. 59)
Starting the car (p. 440)
Recovery (p. 493)
Child safety
Children must always sit secure while travelling in the car.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats
and attachment devices) which is designed for
fitting in this particular car. Using Volvo's child
safety equipment, you obtain good conditions
for a child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety equipment fits in well and
is simple to use.
The equipment that should be used is selected
taking account of the weight and size of the
child.
Volvo recommends that children travel in a
rear-facing child seat until as late an age as
possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and
then in a front-facing child seat until the child
is 140 cm (4 feet 7 inches) tall.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a
child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Related information
•
•
•
Safety (p. 44)
Child seats (p. 62)
Activating and deactivating child safety
locks (p. 268)
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child
seat that must be used for children of different ages and heights vary from country
to country. Check what does apply.
61
SAFETY
Child seats
Related information
Suitable child seats should always be used
when children are travelling in the car.
Children should sit comfortably and safely.
Make sure that the child seat is positioned,
mounted and used correctly.
•
•
•
Look in the installation instructions for the
child seat for the correct fitting.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions included.
Child safety (p. 61)
Integrated child seat* (p. 74)
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 62)
•
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 63)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 64)
•
•
Child seat positioning (p. 64)
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 56)
Upper mounting points for child
seats
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for child seats on the rear seat's outer
seats.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the upper mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
NOTE
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not
in use.
NOTE
Long-term installation and use of child
seats may cause wear and tear on the car's
fittings. Volvo recommends using the kick
guard accessory to protect the car's fittings.
62
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols
on the rear of the backrest.
The mounting points are located on the rear of
the rear seat's outer seats.
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
WARNING
The child seat's upper straps must be
routed through the hole in the head
restraint leg before they are tensioned at
the mounting point. If this is not possible,
follow the recommendations from the child
seat manufacturer.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars
with folding head restraints on the outer
seats.
Lower mounting points for child
seats
switch to activate/deactivate the passenger
airbag*.
The car is equipped with lower mounting
points for child seats in the front seat* and
the rear seat.
The lower mounting points are designed to be
used in conjunction with certain rear-facing
child seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the lower mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations in the rear seat.
NOTE
The mounting points in the rear seat are
located on the rear section of the front seat's
floor rails.
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage
compartment, this must be removed
before child seats can be attached to the
securing points.
Related information
Related information
•
•
Child seats (p. 62)
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 63)
Mounting point locations in the front seat.
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 64)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 68)
The mounting points in the front seat are
located on the sides of the passenger seat's
legroom.
•
•
Child seats (p. 62)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 64)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 68)
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 62)
The mounting points in the front seat are only
mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a
* Option/accessory.
63
SAFETY
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for
child seats
Lift the covers in order to access the mounting
points.
The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX
mounting points for child seats in the rear
seat.
i-Size/ISOFIX2 is a fixture system for car child
seats that is based on an international standard.
•
•
Child seats (p. 62)
•
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 63)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 70)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 71)
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Related information
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 62)
Child seat positioning
It is important to position the child seat in the
right place in the car. The choice of location
depends, amongst other things, on the type
of child seat and whether the passenger airbag is activated.
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.
Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear
seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If a
child is sitting on the front passenger seat
then he/she could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols2
on the upholstery of the backrest.
The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are
located behind covers in the lower section of
the rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats.
2 Names
64
and symbols change depending on market.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then
rear-facing child seats can be fitted on the
front passenger seat.
SAFETY
NOTE
Label for passenger airbag
Child seat mounting
It is important to remember a number of
things when a child seat is mounted and
used, which depend on where the child seat
is positioned.
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
WARNING
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could
rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause
the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and
adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.
Related information
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
•
•
•
Child seats (p. 62)
Child seat mounting (p. 65)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 68)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 70)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 71)
Do not secure the straps for the child seat
into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or
in springs, rails or beams under the seat.
Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
}}
65
SAFETY
||
NOTE
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not
in use.
NOTE
Installation in the front seat
•
When fitting rear-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
•
When fitting front-facing child seats,
check that the passenger airbag is activated.
•
Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved
or are semi-universal, and where the car is
included on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when
the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console3 accessory.
3 The accessory range
4 Varies depending on
66
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, Volvo recommends that the lower
mounting points are used with these3.
•
If the child seat is equipped with support
legs, always fit the support leg/support
legs directly to the floor. Never fit a support leg to a footrest or other object.
•
Long-term installation and use of child
seats may cause wear and tear on the car's
fittings. Volvo recommends using the kick
guard accessory to protect the car's fittings.
•
•
varies depending on market.
market.
The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to
facilitate child seat installation.
•
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, never adjust the position of the
seat in front after the straps have been fitted in the lower mounting points. Always
remember to remove the lower straps
when the child seat is not installed.
•
If the child seat is equipped with support
legs, always fit the support leg/support
legs directly to the floor. Never fit a support leg to a footrest or other object.
Installation in the rear seat
•
Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved
or are semi-universal, and where the car is
included on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
•
A child seat with support legs must not be
fitted in the centre seat.
•
The outer seats are equipped with the
ISOFIX fixture system and are approved
for i-Size4.
•
The outer seats are equipped with upper
mounting points. Volvo recommends that
child seat's upper straps should be pulled
through the hole in the head restraint
before being tensioned at the mounting
point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer.
With the installation of an infant seat in the rear seat,
Volvo recommends a distance of at least 50 mm
(2 inches) from the front part of the infant seat to the
rearmost part of the seat in front.
SAFETY
Related information
•
•
Child seat positioning (p. 64)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 68)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 70)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 71)
67
SAFETY
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
The table gives a recommendation for which
child seats suit which locations, and for what
size of child.
Weight
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
Group 2
15-25 kg
68
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section
on installing a child seat before installing
one in the car.
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only
rear-facing child seats)A
Front seat (with activated airbag, only
front-facing child seats)A
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
UB, C
X
UC
UC
UB, C
X
UC
UC
LD
UFB, E
U, LD
U
LD
UFB
UF, G, B*, H, LD
UF
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only
rear-facing child seats)A
Group 3
22-36 kg
Front seat (with activated airbag, only
front-facing child seats)A
UFB
X
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
UG, I, B*, H
UI
U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
B: Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.
X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats.
Adjust the backrest to a more upright position.
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146).
Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the rear-facing position (type approval E5 04192); Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212).
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the front-facing position (type approval E5 04191); booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).
Volvo recommends: Römer KidFix XP (type approval E1 04301312).
Volvo recommends: Integrated child seat (type approval E5 04220).
Volvo recommends: booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 71)
•
Seatbelts (p. 48)
Related information
•
•
•
Child seat positioning (p. 64)
Child seat mounting (p. 65)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 70)
* Option/accessory.
69
SAFETY
Table for location of i-Size child
seats
The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R129.
The table gives a recommendation for which
i-Size child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
Type of child seat
Front seat (with activated airbag, only
front-facing child seats)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
X
X
i-UA
X
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.
X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.
Volvo recommends that children travel in a rear-facing child seat until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age.
Related information
•
•
•
70
Always read the owner's manual section
on installing a child seat before installing
one in the car.
Front seat (with deactivated airbag,
only rear-facing child seats)
i-Size child seats
A
NOTE
Child seat positioning (p. 64)
Child seat mounting (p. 65)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 68)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 71)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 64)
SAFETY
Table for location of ISOFIX child
seats
The table gives a recommendation for which
ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and
for what size of child.
Weight
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Size classA
Type of child seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
C
Rear-facing child seat
D
Rear-facing child seat
The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R44 and the car model
must be included in the manufacturer's vehicle
list.
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section
on installing a child seat before installing
one in the car.
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rearfacing child seats)B, C
Front seat (with activated airbag, only
front-facing child
seats)B, C
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
ILB, D, XE
X
ILD
X
ILB, D, F, XE
X
ILD
X
}}
71
SAFETY
||
Weight
Group 1
9-18 kg
Size classA
Type of child seat
A
Front-facing child seat
B
Front-facing child seat
B1
Front-facing child seat
C
Rear-facing child seat
D
Rear-facing child seat
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rearfacing child seats)B, C
Front seat (with activated airbag, only
front-facing child
seats)B, C
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
X
ILB, F, G, XE
ILG, IUFG
X
ILB, F, XE
X
ILH
X
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal
categories.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label.
Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market).
There are no upper mounting points for child seats here.
The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats.
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146).
Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket.
Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not interfere with the child seat.
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X3 ISOfix (type approval E5 04200).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.
72
NOTE
If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size
classification, the car model must be
included on the vehicle list for the child
seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo dealer for information about
which i-Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
SAFETY
Related information
•
•
•
Child seat positioning (p. 64)
Child seat mounting (p. 65)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 68)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 70)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 64)
73
SAFETY
Integrated child seat*
The integrated child seats on the outer positions in the rear seat allow children to sit
comfortably and safely.
The child seat is specially designed to provide
children with good safety, together with the
car's seatbelt. The seat cushion can be raised
in two positions depending on the weight of
the child.
The child seat is approved for children who
weigh 15-36 kg (33-80 lbs) and are at least
95 cm (37 inches) tall.
Correct position, the seatbelt should be positioned in
on the shoulder.
Check before driving that:
74
•
the seat cushion is raised to the correct
position for the weight of the child
•
the seat cushion in locked in position
•
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
•
the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
throat or below the shoulder
•
the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned low over the pelvis to provide optimal protection.
Related information
•
•
Child seats (p. 62)
•
Folding down the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* (p. 76)
Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* (p. 75)
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repair or replacement of the integrated child seat is only
performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or
additions to the child seat. If an integrated
child seat has been subjected to a heavy
load, e.g. in connection with a collision,
then the seat cushion, seatbelt and backrest, or possibly the whole seat, must be
replaced. Even if the child seat appears to
be undamaged, it may not afford the same
level of protection. This also applies if the
seat cushion was in lowered position during a collision or similar. The seat cushion
must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.
WARNING
If the instructions for the integrated child
seat are not followed then the child could
sustain serious injury in the event of an
accident.
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Folding up the seat cushion in the
integrated child seat*
The seat cushion should always be folded up
when the integrated child seat is in use.
The seat cushion can be folded up in two positions. The position that should be used
depends on the weight of the child.
Lower position
Weight
22-36 kg
(50-80 lbs)
Upper position
15-25 kg
(33-55 lbs)
Lower position:
Press the seat cushion backwards to lock.
Upper position, start from the lower position:
Lift the seat cushion up at the front edge
and press it back against the backrest to
lock.
WARNING
If the instructions for the integrated child
seat are not followed then the child could
sustain serious injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE
Pull the handle forwards and upwards to
release the seat cushion.
Press the button to release the seat cushion.
It is not possible to adjust the seat cushion
from the upper position to the lower position. From the upper position, the seat
cushion must first be fully lowered into the
rear seat, and then folded up to the lower
position.
}}
* Option/accessory.
75
SAFETY
||
Related information
•
•
Integrated child seat* (p. 74)
Folding down the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* (p. 76)
Folding down the seat cushion in
the integrated child seat*
The seat cushion should be folded down into
the rear seat when the integrated child seat is
not being used.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the seat cushion
from the upper position to the lower position. From the upper position, the seat
cushion must first be fully lowered into the
rear seat, and then folded up to the lower
position.
Press down with your hand in the centre
of the seat cushion in order to lock it.
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
toys) left behind in the space under the
child seat's seat cushion before lowering.
NOTE
Before the rear backrest is lowered, the
child seat's seat cushion must be lowered
first.
Pull the handle forwards to release the
seat cushion.
76
Related information
•
•
Integrated child seat* (p. 74)
Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* (p. 75)
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Instruments and controls in lefthand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Horn
Centre and tunnel console
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Bonnet opening
Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/closing*, halogen headlamp levelling
Roof console
Centre display
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting,
media
Gear selector
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip
meter
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
Head-up display*
Driver display
Start knob
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Drive mode control
Panorama roof*
Parking brake
Display in roof console, ON CALL button*
Automatic braking when stationary
Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Steering wheel adjustment
78
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Driver's door
Instruments and controls in righthand drive car
Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/closing*, halogen headlamp levelling
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Bonnet opening
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Horn
Steering wheel adjustment
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Roof console
Memories for power front seat*, door mirror and head-up display* settings
Central locking
Power windows, door mirrors, electric
child safety lock*
Adjusting front seat
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip
meter
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
Head-up display*
Lighting control (p. 150)
Driver display
Starting the car (p. 440)
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Driver display (p. 81)
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panorama roof*
Display in roof console, ON CALL button*
Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
}}
Gearbox (p. 454)
* Option/accessory.
79
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Centre and tunnel console
Driver's door
Centre display
Memories for power front seat*, door mirror and head-up display* settings
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting,
media
Central locking
Gear selector
Power windows, door mirrors, electric
child safety lock*
Start knob
Adjusting front seat
Drive mode control
Parking brake
Automatic braking when stationary
80
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Lighting control (p. 150)
Starting the car (p. 440)
Driver display (p. 81)
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Gearbox (p. 454)
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Driver display
The driver display shows information about
the car and driving.
The driver display contains gauges, indicators
and indicator and warning symbols. The content of the driver display depends on the car's
equipment, settings and which functions are
active at that time.
The driver display is activated as soon as a
door is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The
driver display extinguishes after a while if it is
not used. To reactivate it, proceed with one of
the following:
•
•
Depress the brake pedal.
Activate ignition position I.
•
Open one of the doors.
WARNING
If the driver display should extinguish, not
illuminate on activation/start or be fully or
partially illegible, the car must not be used.
You should visit a workshop immediately.
Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the driver display
the information on e.g. brakes, airbags or
other safety systems may not be shown. In
which case, the driver cannot check the
status of the car's systems or receive current warnings and information.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
Location in the driver display:
On the left
In the middle
On the right
Speedometer
Indicator and warning symbols
Tachometer/Hybrid gaugeA
Trip meter
Outside temperature gauge
Gear shift indicator
OdometerB
Clock
Drive mode
Cruise control and speed limiter information
Messages, in some cases with graphics
Fuel gauge
Road Sign Information*
Door and seatbelt information
Hybrid battery gauge
–
Charging status
Distance to empty tank
–
Media player
Distance to empty battery
}}
* Option/accessory.
81
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
A
B
On the left
In the middle
On the right
–
Navigation map*
Instantaneous fuel consumption
–
Phone
App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
–
Voice recognition
–
Depends on drive mode selected.
Accumulated mileage.
Dynamic symbol
•
The dynamic symbol in its
basic form.
The centre of the driver display contains a
dynamic symbol that changes appearance for
different types of message. An amber or red
marker around the symbol indicates the
degree of severity of a control or warning message.
•
•
•
•
Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 91)
Trip computer (p. 86)
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
Handling the application menu in the
driver display (p. 102)
Drive modes (p. 462)
Examples of indicator symbol.
With an animation, the basic shape can be
turned into a graphic showing where a problem is situated, or in order to clarify information.
Related information
•
•
82
Driver display settings (p. 83)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 94)
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Driver display settings
Settings via the centre display
Settings for the driver display's display
options can be made via the driver display's
application menu and via the centre display's
settings menu.
Selecting information type
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
Settings via the driver display's app
menu
2. Press My Car Displays
Display Information.
Driver
3. Select what should be shown in the background:
Show no information in background
•
• Show information for current
2. Tap on System System Languages
and Units System Language to select
language.
> A change will affect the language in all
displays.
These settings are personal and are saved
automatically to the active driver profile.
Related information
•
•
playing media
• Show navigation even if no route is
set
•
Driver display (p. 81)
Handling the application menu in the
driver display (p. 102)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Selecting theme
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
2. Tap on My Car
Themes.
The app menu is opened and controlled using
the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel.
3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver
display:
In the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display from:
•
•
•
•
trip computer
media player
phone
navigation system*.
•
•
•
•
Displays
Display
Glass
Minimalistic
Performance
Chrome Rings
Selecting language
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
* Option/accessory.
83
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Fuel gauge
Hybrid gauge
The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the
fuel level in the tank.
In drive modes Hybrid and Pure, the driver
display shows a hybrid gauge that can help
the driver to drive the car in a more energyefficient way.
Indicates the power level when the
combustion engine starts. If the
symbol is filled in, it means that the
combustion engine is in use.
Indicates the power level when the
internal combustion engine is due to
start. If the symbol is not filled in, it
means that the combustion engine is
not in use.
Indicator that shows that the hybrid
battery is being charged, e.g. if the
brake pedal is gently depressed.
Driver-requested power
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the
quantity of fuel in the tank.
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time
to refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates
and changes to amber. The trip computer also
indicates the distance to empty tank.
Related information
•
•
•
•
84
Driver display (p. 81)
Hybrid battery gauge (p. 85)
Filling fuel (p. 477)
Fuel tank - volume (p. 680)
The hybrid gauge shows in different ways the
relationship between how much power is
being taken from the electric motor and how
much power is available.
Symbols in the hybrid gauge
Indicates current level for available
electric motor power. If the symbol
is filled in, it means that the electric
motor is in use.
If the symbol is not filled in, it means
that the electric motor is not in use.
The pointer in the hybrid gauge indicates the
amount of engine power requested by the
driver by regulating the accelerator pedal. The
higher the reading on the scale, the more
power is requested by the driver in the current
gear. The marker between the lightning flash
and the drop shows the point at which the
internal combustion engine starts.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Hybrid battery gauge
Example:
The hybrid battery gauge shows how much
energy there is in the hybrid battery.
The car is started but stationary, no power is requested.
The car generates current to the battery, the battery
is charged, e.g. when the brake pedal is pressed
lightly or during engine braking down a hill.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Drive modes (p. 462)
Driver display (p. 81)
Foot brake (p. 446)
Starting and stopping the combustion
engine in Twin Engine (p. 461)
The energy in the hybrid battery is used for the
electric motor, but also to cool or heat the car.
The trip computer calculates an approximate
distance for the energy left in the hybrid battery.
The electric motor cannot supply the amount of
engine power requested and the internal combustion
engine starts.
}}
85
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Symbols in the hybrid battery gauge
Trip computer
The car's trip computer records vales such as
e.g. distance, fuel consumption and average
speed whilst driving.
In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, information is recorded about both instantaneous
and average fuel consumption. The information from the trip computer can be shown in
the driver display.
•
•
Distance to empty battery
Tourist - alternative speedometer
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed
via system settings in the centre display.
Trip meter
There are two trip meters, TM and TA.
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset
automatically if the car is not used for at least
four hours.
The following information is registered while
driving:
•
•
•
•
Related information
The values apply from the trip meter's latest
reset.
•
•
•
Driver display (p. 81)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 413)
Hold and Charge function (p. 473)
Examples of trip computer information in the driver
display. The figure is schematic - parts may vary
depending on car model.
The following meters are included in the trip
computer:
•
•
•
•
86
Mileage
The
symbol in the hybrid battery gauge
indicates that the Hold function is activated,
and the
symbol indicates that the Charge
function is activated.
Trip meter
Odometer
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Distance to empty tank
Driving time
Average speed
Average fuel consumption
Odometer
The odometer records the car's total mileage.
This value cannot be reset to zero.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
This gauge shows the fuel consumption that
the car has at the moment. The value is updated approximately every second.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Distance to empty tank
The trip computer calculates the
remaining mileage with the fuel
available in the tank.
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km (20 miles)
and the remaining drivable fuel quantity.
When the gauge shows "----", there is not
enough fuel left to be able to calculate the
remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance.
Distance to empty battery
The approximate distance that can
be driven with the remaining amount
of energy in the hybrid battery is
indicated adjacent to this symbol.
The calculation is based on the average consumption of normally loaded vehicle, during
normal driving and taking into account
whether the air conditioning (AC) is switched
on or off. When changing between the Hybrid
and Pure drive modes, the calculated distance
increases since the Pure mode has reduced
climate settings (ECO climate).
control system, etc.) that are active - the
shorter the potential mileage.
No guaranteed range on electric power
remains when the gauge shows "----".
NOTE
In addition to high current take-off in the
passenger compartment, sudden acceleration and braking, high speed, heavy loads,
low outside temperature and uphill gradients also reduce the possible driving distance.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance.
Start value for fully charged hybrid battery
Since it is difficult to anticipate driving style
and other factors that affect the range for
electric operation, Volvo has decided to use a
start value when the car is fully charged. The
start value indicates an up-to figure instead of
a forecast for the range for electric operation.
The difference in start value between Hybrid
and Pure is due to the car being allowed to
use more energy from the hybrid battery in
Pure mode, as well as that the car changes
over to ECO climate.
Mileage for electric operation
In order to achieve the longest possible mileage for electric operation, the driver of an electrically powered car also has to think about
energy conservation. The more consumers
there are (stereo, electric heating in windows/
mirrors/seats, very cold air from the climate
Tourist - alternative speedometer
The alternative digital speedometer makes it
easier to drive in countries where speed limit
signs are in a different unit than that shown in
the car's instruments.
The digital speed is then shown in the opposite unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer. If the analogue speedometer is graduated in mph, the digital speedometer shows
the corresponding speed in km/h and vice
versa.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Show trip data in the driver display
(p. 88)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 89)
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 89)
Driver display (p. 81)
Changing system units (p. 130)
87
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Show trip data in the driver display
The trip computer's recorded and calculated
values can be shown in the driver display.
The values are saved in a trip computer app.
Via the app menu, you can choose which
information is shown on the driver display.
1.
Open the app menu in the driver display
by pressing (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message
first has to be confirmed by pressing the O
button (4) before the app menu can be
opened.)
3. Scroll down to the option buttons to
select which information to show in the
driver display:
•
•
•
•
•
2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left
or right with (2).
> The top four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TM. The next
four menu rows show measured values
for trip meter TA. Scroll up or down in
the list with (3).
Open and navigate in the app menu1 using the righthand steering wheel keypad.
App menu
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
1
88
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
•
Odometer
Distance to empty tank
Distance to empty battery
Tourist (alternative speedometer)
Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no
display of mileage
Instantaneous fuel consumption, average consumption for TM or TA, alternatively, no display of fuel consumption
Select or deselect an option with the O
button (4). The change is made immediately.
Related information
•
•
Trip computer (p. 86)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 89)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Resetting the trip meter
Reset the trip meter using the left-hand stalk
switch.
–
Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e.
mileage, average consumption, average
speed and driving time) with a long press
on the RESET button on the left-hand
stalk switch.
A short press on the RESET button resets
only the mileage.
The trip meter TA can only be reset automatically when the car has not been used for four
or more hours.
Show trip statistics in the centre
display
Trip statistics from the trip computer are displayed graphically in the centre display and
provide an overview that facilitates more fuelefficient driving.
Open the Driver
performance app in app
view in order to show the trip
statistics.
Each bar in the diagram symbolises a distance of 1, 10 or
100 km, alternatively miles. The bars are filled
in from the right as driving progresses. The bar
on the far right shows the value for the current
distance.
Trip statistics from the trip computer2.
NOTE
When driving with electric operation, fuel
consumption can be indicated in the trip
statistics if the additional heater3 is running.
The average fuel consumption and total driving time are calculated since the last time the
trip statistics were reset.
Fuel and electricity consumption are shown in
separate graphs. Electricity consumption is
"net" consumption, i.e. energy consumed
minus regenerated energy created during
braking.
Related information
•
•
Settings for trip statistics (p. 90)
Trip computer (p. 86)
Related information
•
Trip computer (p. 86)
2 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
3 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
on car model.
89
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Settings for trip statistics
Date and time
Reset or adjust settings for trip statistics.
1. Open the Driver performance app in app
view in order to show the trip statistics.
The clock is shown in both the driver display
and the centre display.
Clock location
Summer time
In certain countries, it is possible to select the
Auto Daylight Saving Time setting for automatic setting of summer time. For other countries, the Daylight Saving Time setting can
be selected manually.
2. Press Preferences to
•
change graph scale. Select resolution 1,
10 or 100 km/miles for the bar.
•
reset data after every trip. Performed
when the car has been stationary for
more than 4 hours.
•
reset data for the current trip.
Trip statistics, calculated average consumption and total driving time are always
reset simultaneously.
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed
via system settings in the centre display.
Related information
90
•
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 89)
•
•
Trip computer (p. 86)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 89)
zone is then adjusted automatically based on
the location of the car. For certain types of
navigation systems, the current location
(country) must also be set to obtain the right
time zone. If Auto Time is not selected, time
and data are adjusted with arrow up or arrow
down on the touch screen.
Related information
•
•
In certain situations, messages and information may cover the clock in the driver display.
In the centre display, the clock is located at
the top right of the status bar.
Date and time settings
–
Select Settings System Date and
Time in the centre display's top view to
change settings for time and date format.
Adjust the date and time by pressing the
up or down arrow on the touch screen.
Automatic time for cars with GPS
When the car is equipped with a navigation
system, Auto Time can be selected. The time
Driver display (p. 81)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Outside temperature gauge
Related information
The outside temperature is shown in the
driver display.
A sensor detects the temperature outside of
the car.
•
•
Driver display (p. 81)
Changing system units (p. 130)
Indicator symbols in the driver
display
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a
function is activated, that a system is operating, or that a fault or abnormal condition has
occurred.
Symbol
Specification
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems
does not behave as intended,
this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the
driver display. The information
symbol can also illuminate in
conjunction with other symbols.
Fault in brake system
If the car has been stationary, the gauge may
display a temperature reading that is too high.
When the outside temperature is in
the range –5 °C to +2 °C (23 °F to
36 °F), a snowflake symbol lights up
that warns of potentially slippery
conditions.
The symbol is also illuminated briefly in the
head-up display*, if the car is equipped with
one.
The symbol lights up when there
is a fault in the parking brake.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then
the system is not working. The
car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the
ABS function.
Change the unit for the temperature gauge,
etc. via system settings in the centre display's
top view.
}}
* Option/accessory.
91
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Symbol
Specification
Automatic brake on
The symbol illuminates when the
function is activated and the foot
brake or parking brake is acting.
The brake holds the car stationary when it has stopped.
Tyre pressure system
The symbol illuminates when tyre
pressure is too low. If there is a
fault in the tyre pressure system,
the symbol will flash for approx. 1
minute and then illuminate with a
constant glow. This may be
because the system cannot
detect or warn of low tyre pressure as intended.
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates after the
engine has been started then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Drive to a
workshop for checking. Volvo
recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop is contacted.
92
Symbol
Specification
Left and right-hand direction
indicator
The symbol flashes when the
direction indicators are used.
Symbol
Specification
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when
main beam is on and with main
beam flash.
Active main beam on
Position lamps
The symbol lights up when the
position lamps are switched on.
Fault in the headlamp system
The symbol illuminates if a fault
has occurred in the ABL function
(Active Bending Lights) or if
another fault has occurred in the
headlamp system.
Active main beam on
The symbol lights up blue when
active main beam is on.
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
active main beam is off.
The symbol lights up blue when
active main beam is on. Position
lamps are switched on.
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
active main beam is off. Position
lamps are switched on.
Main beam On
The symbol lights up when main
beam and the position lamps are
switched on.
Front fog lamps on
This symbol illuminates when the
front fog lamp is switched on.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the
rear fog lamp is switched on.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Symbol
Specification
Symbol
Specification
Rain sensor on
Stability system, sport mode
This symbol illuminates when the
rain sensor is on.
The symbol illuminates when the
sport mode is activated. Sport
mode allows for a more active
driving experience. The system
then detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel
movements and cornering are
more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled
skidding of the rear section up to
a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
Preconditioning on
The symbol illuminates when the
engine block and passenger
compartment heater/air conditioning are preconditioning the
car.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that
the stability system is operating.
If the symbol illuminates with
constant glow then there is a
fault in the system.
Symbol
Lane assistance and rain sensor
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Rain sensor is on.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is
on but road lines are not
detected. Rain sensor is on.
Reduced performance
In the event of a temporary powertrain fault, the car can go into a
Limp home mode with reduced
engine power to prevent damage
to the powertrain.
Lane assistance
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is
on but road lines are not
detected.
Specification
Related information
•
•
Driver display (p. 81)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 94)
Amber symbol: Lane assistance
warns/intervenes.
93
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Warning symbols in the driver
display
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated or that a serious fault or condition exists.
Symbol
Specification
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the
safety or drivability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the
driver display at the same time.
The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other
symbols.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates or
flashes if someone in a front seat
has not put on their seatbelt or if
someone in a rear seat has taken
off their seatbelt.
94
Symbol
Specification
Symbol
Specification
Airbags
Low oil pressure
If the symbol remains illuminated
or illuminates while driving, a
fault has been detected in one of
the car's safety systems. Read
the message in the driver display.
Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop is
contacted.
If this symbol illuminates while
driving when the engine's oil
pressure is too low. Stop the
engine immediately and check
the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates
and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the
brake fluid level may be too low.
Visit the nearest authorised
workshop to have the brake fluid
level checked and rectified.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a
constant glow when the parking
brake is applied.
A flashing symbol means that a
fault has arisen. Read the message in the driver display.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during
driving if a fault has occurred in
the electrical system. Visit a
workshop. Volvo recommends
that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.
Collision risk
City Safety warns of a risk of collision with other vehicles, pedestrians, cyclists or large animals.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Symbol
Specification
System malfunction
The symbol illuminates while
driving if there is something
wrong in the drive system. An
explanatory text is shown on the
driver display at the same time.
High engine temperature
The symbol switches on while
driving when the temperature of
the engine is too high. An explanatory text is shown on the driver
display at the same time.
Related information
•
Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 91)
•
Driver display (p. 81)
License agreement for the driver
display
A license is an agreement for the right to
operate a certain activity or the right to use
someone else's entitlement according to the
terms and conditions in the agreement. The
following text is Volvo's agreement with the
manufacturer or developer.
Boost Software License 1.0
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person or organization obtaining a copy
of the software and accompanying
documentation covered by this license (the
"Software") to use, reproduce, display,
distribute, execute, and transmit the Software,
and to prepare derivative works of the
Software, and to permit third-parties to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, all subject
to the following: The copyright notices in the
Software and this entire statement, including
the above license grant, this restriction and
the following disclaimer, must be included in
all copies of the Software, in whole or in part,
and all derivative works of the Software,
unless such copies or derivative works are
solely in the form of machine-executable
object code generated by a source language
processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE
DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
}}
95
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993
The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning
features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed
by the University of California, Berkeley
and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
96
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License
Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. Neither the name of the organisation nor
the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derive
from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license
Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The views and conclusions contained in the
software and documentation are those of the
authors and should not be interpreted as
representing official policies, either expressed
or implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
FreeType Project License
1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction The FreeType Project is
distributed in several archive packages;
some of them may contain, in addition to
the FreeType font engine, various tools
and contributions which rely on, or relate
to, the FreeType Project. This license
applies to all files found in such packages,
and which do not fall under their own
explicit license. The license affects thus
the FreeType font engine, the test
programs, documentation and makefiles,
at the very least. This license was inspired
by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses,
which all encourage inclusion and use of
free software in commercial and freeware
products alike. As a consequence, its main
points are that: o We don't promise that
this software works. However, we are be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as
is' distribution) o You can use this
software for whatever you want, in parts
or full form, without having to pay us.
(`royalty-free' usage) o You may not
pretend that you wrote this software. If
you use it, or only parts of it, in a program,
you must acknowledge somewhere in
your documentation that you've used the
FreeType code. (`credits') We specifically
permit and encourage the inclusion of this
software, with or without modifications, in
commercial products, provided that all
warranty or liability claims are assumed by
the product vendor. Legal Terms 0.
Definitions Throughout this license, the
terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
originally distributed by the authors (David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be
they named as alpha, beta or final release.
`You' refers to the licensee, or person
using the project, where `using' is a
generic term including compiling the
project's source code as well as linking it
to form a `program' or `executable'. This
program is referred to as `a program using
the FreeType engine'. This license applies
}}
97
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
98
to all files distributed in the original
FreeType archive, including all source
code, binaries and documentation, unless
otherwise stated in the file in its original,
unmodified form as distributed in the
original archive. If you are unsure whether
or not a particular file is covered by this
license, you must contact us to verify this.
The FreeType project is copyright (C)
1996-1999 by David Turner, Robert
Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights
reserved except as specified below. 1. No
Warranty THE FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS
PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT
WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE
OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE
FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not
signed this license, you are not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType
project is copyrighted material, only this
license, or another one contracted with
the authors, grants you the right to use,
distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by
using, distributing, or modifying the
FreeType project, you indicate that you
understand and accept all the terms of
this license.
2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met: o
Redistribution of source code must retain
this license file (`licence.txt') unaltered;
any additions, deletions or changes to the
original files must be clearly indicated in
accompanying documentation. The
copyright notices of the unaltered, original
files must be preserved in all copies of
source files. o Redistribution in binary
form must provide a disclaimer that states
that the software is based in part of the
work of the FreeType Team, in the
distribution documentation. We also
encourage you to put an URL to the
FreeType web page in your
documentation, though this isn't
mandatory. These conditions apply to any
software derived from or based on the
FreeType code, not just the unmodified
files. If you use our work, you must
acknowledge us. However, no fee need be
paid to us.
3. Advertising The names of FreeType's
authors and contributors may not be used
to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior
written permission. We suggest, but do
not require, that you use one or more of
the following phrases to refer to this
software in your documentation or
advertising materials: `FreeType Project',
`FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or
`FreeType Distribution'.
4. Contacts There are two mailing lists
related to FreeType: o
freetype@freetype.org Discusses general
use and applications of FreeType, as well
as future and wanted additions to the
library and distribution. If you are looking
for support, start in this list if you haven't
found anything to help you in the
documentation. o devel@freetype.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine
internals, design issues, specific licenses,
porting, etc. o http://www.freetype.org
Holds the current FreeType web page,
which will allow you to download our
latest development version and read
online documentation. You can also
contact us individually at: David Turner
<david.turner@freetype.org> Robert
Wilhelm <robert.wilhelm@freetype.org>
Werner Lemberg
<werner.lemberg@freetype.org>
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Libpng License
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy
between this copy and the notices in the file
png.h that is included in the libpng
distribution, the latter shall prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and
LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional
notices immediately following this sentence.
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through
1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c)
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer
and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors
satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy,
and effort is with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through
1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c)
1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer
and license as libpng-0.96, with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through
0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the
same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88,
with the following individuals added to the list
of Contributing Authors:
Eric S. Raymond
John Bowler
Gilles Vollant
Kevin Bracey
and with the following additions to the
disclaimer:
Sam Bushell
There is no warranty against interference with
your enjoyment of the library or against
infringement. There is no warranty that our
efforts or the library will fulfill any of your
particular purposes or needs. This library is
provided with all faults, and the entire risk of
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors" is defined as the
following set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS
IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42,
Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or
implied, including, without limitation, the
warranties of merchantability and of fitness for
any purpose. The Contributing Authors and
Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct,
indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or
consequential damages, which may result
from the use of the PNG Reference Library,
even if advised of the possibility of such
damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this source code, or
portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee,
subject to the following restrictions:
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996
Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
}}
99
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
1.
The origin of this source code must not be
misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked
as such and must not be misrepresented
as being the original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed
or altered from any source or altered
source distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage
the use of this source code as a component to
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this source code in a
product, acknowledgment is not required but
would be appreciated.
A "png_get_copyright" function is available,
for convenient use in "about" boxes and the
like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course)
is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and
"pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png"
(98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source
Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a
certification mark of the Open Source
Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson randeg@alum.rpi.edu
April 15, 2002
100
MIT License
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this
permission notice shall be included in all
copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
zlib License
The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year>
<copyright holders>
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will
the authors be held liable for any damages
arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including
commercial applications, and to alter it and
redistribute it freely, subject to the following
restrictions:
1.
The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that
you wrote the original software. If you use
this software in a product, an
acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but
is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly
marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original
software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered
from any source distribution.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0.
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version
2.0, Sept. 18, 2008)
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to the following conditions: The
above copyright notice including the dates of
first publication and either this permission
notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/
projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale,
use or other dealings in this Software without
prior written authorization from Silicon
Graphics, Inc.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
Application menu in driver display
Application menu (app menu) in the driver
display provides quick access to commonly
used functions for certain apps.
Related information
•
Driver display (p. 81)
The figure is schematic.
The app menu in the driver display can be
used instead of the centre display and is controlled using the right-hand keypad on the
steering wheel. The app menu makes it easier
to switch between different apps or functions
within the apps without having to let go of the
steering wheel.
App menu functions
Different apps give access to different types of
functions. The following apps and their associated functions can be controlled from the app
menu:
}}
101
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
App
Functions
Trip computer
Selection of trip meter, selection of what to show in the
driver display, etc.
Media
player
Selection of active source for
the media player.
Phone
Calling a contact from the call
list.
Navigation
Guide to destination, etc.
Handling the application menu in
the driver display
Press on open/close (1).
> The app menu opens/closes.
NOTE
It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message has
to be confirmed first before the app menu
can be opened.
The app menu closes automatically after a
period of inactivity or after certain options
have been selected.
Driver display (p. 81)
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Handling the application menu in the
driver display (p. 102)
–
The application menu (the app menu) in the
driver display is operated with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
Related information
•
•
•
Opening/closing the app menu
The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad. The figure is schematic.
Open/close
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
Navigating and selecting in the app
menu
1.
Navigate between the apps by pressing
on the left or right (2).
> Functions for previous/next app are
shown in the app menu.
2. Browse through the functions for the
selected app by tapping on up or down
(3).
3. Confirm or highlight an option for the
function by pressing on confirm (4).
> The function is activated and for some
options the app menu then closes.
102
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
If the app menu is opened again, the functions
of the most recently selected app are shown
first.
Related information
•
•
Messages in the driver display
The driver display can show messages to
inform or assist the driver in the event of different events.
Message composition may vary and they can
be shown together with graphics, symbols or
buttons for acknowledging the message or
accepting a request, for example.
Application menu in driver display (p. 101)
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
Examples of messages in the driver display. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car
model.
Examples of messages in the driver display.
The driver display shows messages that are of
high priority for the driver.
Messages can be shown in different parts of
the driver display depending on what other
information is currently being displayed. After
a while, or when the message has been
acknowledged/action taken if required, the
message disappears from the driver display. If
a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the Car Status app, which is opened from the
app view in the centre display.
}}
103
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Service messages
Shown below is a selection of important service messages and their meanings.
Message
Stop
safelyA
Turn off
engineA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Contact a workshopB to
check the car immediately.
Service
requiredA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Book time for
maintenance
Regular maintenance
Time for maintenance
Time for regular service contact a workshopB.
Shown before the next
service date.
Time for regular service contact a workshopB.
Shown at the next service date.
Specification
Regular maintenance
Time for regular service contact a workshopB.
Shown when the service
date has passed.
Maintenance
overdue
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Service urgent
Drive to workshopA
Regular maintenance
104
Specification
Message
Temporarily
offA
A
B
Managing messages in the driver
display
Messages in the driver display are handled
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
A function has been temporarily switched off and
is reset automatically
while driving or after
starting again.
Part of message, shown together with information on
where the problem has arisen.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 104)
•
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 105)
•
Message in centre display (p. 138)
Examples of messages in the driver display and the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad. The figure is
schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
Left/right
Confirm
Some messages in the driver display contain
one or more buttons for acknowledging the
message or accepting a request, for example.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
Handling a message saved from
the driver display
1.
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
Navigate between the buttons by pressing
on the left or right (1).
2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm (2).
> The message disappears from the
driver display.
Related information
•
•
•
1.
Close the message by pressing on confirm
(2), or allow the message to close automatically after a while.
> The message disappears from the
driver display.
If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the Car Status app, which is opened from the
app view in the centre display. The message
Car message stored in Car Status
application is shown in the centre display in
conjunction with this.
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 105)
–
Press the button to the right of the Car
message stored in Car Status
application message in the centre display.
> The saved message is shown in the Car
Status app.
To read a saved message later:
For messages without buttons:
–
Reading a saved message
To read a saved message immediately:
Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app.
Messages that are shown in
the driver display and that
need to be saved are added
in the Car Status app in the
centre display. The message
Car message stored in Car
Status application is shown
in the centre display in conjunction with this.
Open the Car Status app from the app
view in the centre display.
> The app is opened in the bottom tile of
the home view.
2. Select the Messages tab in the app.
> A list of saved messages is shown.
3. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the
left in the app shows information about
the message graphically.
Message in centre display (p. 138)
}}
105
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Related information
Managing a saved message
In maximised mode, some messages have
two buttons available to book service or read
the owner's manual.
•
•
To book service for a saved message:
•
–
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 104)
Message in centre display (p. 138)
In maximised mode for the message,
press Request appoint./Call to make
Appointment4 for help in booking service.
> With Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab opens in the app
and creates a request to book service
and repair work.
With Call to make Appointment: The
phone app is initiated and calls a service centre to book service and repair
work.
To read the owner's manual for a saved message:
–
In maximised mode for the message,
press Owner's manual to read about the
message in the owner's manual.
> The owner's manual opens in the centre display and shows information
linked to the message.
Saved messages in the app are deleted automatically each time the engine is started.
4 Market
106
dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Overview of centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled
from the centre display. Presented here is the
centre display and its options.
}}
107
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively5.
Function view - car functions that are activated or deactivated with a press. Certain
5 The
108
views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.
functions are also so-called trigger functions, which means they open a window
with setting options. Examples of these
include Camera. Settings for the head-up
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Climate controls (p. 211)
display* are also made from the function
view, but adjustments are made using the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Phone - the phone function can be
reached from here. Tap on the subview to
expand it.
•
•
Home view - the first view that is shown
when the screen is started.
Extra subview - recently used apps or car
functions that do not belong in any of the
other subviews. Tap on the subview to
expand it.
•
Changing the appearance in the centre
display (p. 129)
•
•
•
•
Changing system language (p. 130)
Application view (app view) - apps that
have been downloaded (third-party apps)
and apps for embedded functions, such as
FM radio. Tap on an app icon to open the
app.
Status bar - the activities in the car are
shown right at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown
on the left-hand side of the status bar,
while media-related information, the clock
and indication about on-going background
activity are shown on the right.
Top view - drag the tab down in order to
access the top view. Settings, Owner's
manual, Profile and the car's saved messages are accessed from here. In some
cases contextual settings (e.g. Navigation
Settings) and the contextual owner's
manual (e.g. Navigation Manual) can also
be accessed in the top view.
Navigation - leads to map navigation, with
e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Media - recently used apps associated
with media. Tap on the subview to expand
it.
Climate row - information and direct interaction to set temperature and seat heating
for example*. Tap on the symbol in the
centre of the climate row in order to open
the climate view with more setting
options.
Switching off and changing the volume of
the system sound in the centre display
(p. 129)
Changing system units (p. 130)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 649)
Message in centre display (p. 138)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 110)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
Function view in centre display (p. 120)
Apps (p. 504)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 122)
•
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
•
Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 131)
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)
Media player (p. 513)
Phone (p. 529)
* Option/accessory. 109
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing the centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled and
regulated from the centre display. The centre
display is a touch screen that reacts to touch.
Using the touch screen functionality in
the centre display
The screen reacts differently depending on
whether you press, drag or swipe across it.
Actions such as browsing between different
views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and
Procedure
110
moving apps can be performed by touching
the screen in different ways.
An infrared light curtain just above the surface
of the screen enables the screen to detect a
finger that is just in front of the screen. This
technology makes it possible to use the
screen even with gloves on.
Two people can interact with the screen at the
same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the
driver and passenger side respectively.
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
The table below presents the different procedures for operating the screen:
Execution
Result
Press once.
Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Press twice in quick succession.
Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map.
Press and hold.
Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map. Press and hold your finger
against the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.
Tap once with two fingers.
Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Procedure
Execution
Result
Drag
Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to
move apps or map points on the map. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Swipe/drag quickly
Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the
screen.
Note that touching the upper section of the screen may cause the top view to open.
Drag apart
Zooms in.
Drag together
Zooms out.
}}
111
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Returning to home view from another
view
1.
The control is used for many of the car's functions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of
one of the following:
Briefly press the home button below the
centre display.
> The last position of the home view is
shown.
•
drag the control to the desired temperature,
•
2. Briefly press again.
> All subviews of the home view are set
to their default mode.
tap on + or − in order to raise or lower the
temperature gradually, or
•
tap on the desired temperature on the
control.
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that
describes access to the different views is
shown on the screen.
Related information
The scroll indicator appears in the centre display
when it is possible to scroll in the view.
•
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 113)
Using the controls in the centre
display
•
Moving apps and buttons in centre display
(p. 122)
•
Keyboard in centre display (p. 124)
Scrolling in a list, article or view
When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen,
it is possible to scroll downward or upward in
the view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the view.
Temperature control.
112
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating centre
display
1.
The centre display can be dimmed and reactivated using the home button beneath the
screen.
Give a long press on the physical home
button below the screen.
> The screen goes dark except for the climate row, which continues to be
shown. All functions connected to the
screen are still running.
2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the
home button.
> The view that was displayed before the
screen was switched off will be shown
again.
NOTE
The screen cannot be deactivated when a
prompt to perform an action is shown on
the screen.
Home button for the centre display.
The effect of using the home button that the
screen dims and the touchscreen no longer
reacts to touch. The climate row will still be
shown. All functions connected to the screen
are still running, such as climate, audio, guidance* and apps. When the centre display is
dimmed, it is a good opportunity to clean the
screen. The dimming function can also be
used to fade the screen so that it does not disturb while driving.
NOTE
The centre display deactivates automatically when the engine is off and the driver's
door is opened.
Related information
•
•
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 649)
Changing the appearance in the centre
display (p. 129)
Navigating in the centre display's
views
There are five different basic views in the centre display: home view, top view, climate
view, application view (app view) and function view. The screen is started automatically
when the driver's door is opened.
Home view
Home view is the view that is shown when the
screen is started. It consists of four subviews:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra subview.
An app or car function selected from the app
or function view starts in the respective subview of the home view. E.g. FM radio starts in
the Media tile.
The extra tile shows the last used app or car
function that is not associated with any of the
other three areas.
The subviews show brief information about
each different app.
NOTE
When the car is started, the home view's
various sub-views show information on the
current status of apps.
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
}}
* Option/accessory. 113
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that
describes access to the different views is
shown on the screen.
Status bar
pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping
from the top downwards across the screen.
In the top view, access is always available to:
• Settings
• Owner's manual
• Profile
• The car's saved messages.
The activities in the car are shown at the top of
the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media-related information, the
clock and indication that background activity
is in progress are shown on the right.
•
Top view
Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation
Settings). Change settings directly in the
top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is
running.
•
Contextual Owner's Manual (e.g.
Navigation Manual). Gain access directly
in the top view to articles in the digital
owner's manual that are related to the
content displayed on screen.
In the top view, access is given to the following in some cases:
Climate view
The climate row is always visible at the bottom of the screen. The most common climate
settings can be made directly there, such as
setting temperature and seat heating*.
Press the symbol in the centre of the
climate row to open the climate view
and gain access to more climate settings.
Press the symbol to close the climate view and return to the previous
view.
Exit the top view - press outside the top view,
on the home button or at the bottom of the
top view and drag upward. The underlying
view is then visible and available for use again.
NOTE
Top view dragged down.
A tab is located in the centre of the status bar
at the top of the screen. Open the top view by
114
The top view is not available during starting/shutdown or when a message is
shown on the screen. It is also not available when climate view is shown.
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Application view
number of unread text messages for
Messages.
Function view
Tap on an app to open it. The app then opens
in the tile to which it belongs, e.g. Media.
You can scroll down in the app view, depending on the number of apps. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Go back to the home view again by swiping
from left to right6 across the screen, or by
pressing the home button.
Application view with the car's apps.
left6
Swipe from right to
across the screen in
order to access the application view (app
view) from the home view. Apps that have
been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps
for embedded functions, such as FM radio,
are found here. Certain apps show brief information directly in the app view, such as the
6 Applies
The function view with buttons for different car functions.
Swipe from left to right6 across the screen in
order to access the function view from the
home view. From here you can activate or
deactivate different car functions, e.g. BLIS*,
Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.
}}
to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
* Option/accessory.
115
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Depending on the amount of functions, it is
also possible here to scroll downward in the
view. Do this by swiping/dragging from the
bottom and up.
Unlike in app view, where an app is opened
with a press, a function is activated or deactivated by pressing the relevant function button.
Some functions (trigger functions) open in a
new window when pressed.
Go back to the home view again by swiping
from right to left6 across the screen, or by
pressing the home button.
Related information
•
Managing subviews in centre display
(p. 117)
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 122)
•
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
•
Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 131)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)
Driver profiles (p. 134)
Climate controls (p. 211)
Apps (p. 504)
Function view in centre display (p. 120)
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
6 Applies
116
to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing subviews in centre
display
Home view consists of four subviews:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra subview. These views can be expanded.
}}
117
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Expanding a subview from default mode
Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display.
118
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Expanding a subview:
–
For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone:
Press anywhere on the subview. When a
tile is expanded, the extra tile in the home
view is temporarily forced away. The other
two tiles are minimised and only certain
information is shown. When the extra tile
is tapped, the other three tiles are minimised and only certain information is displayed.
The expanded view provides access to the
basic functions of the app.
Closing an expanded subview:
–
When a new subview is opened in full-screen
mode, no information from the other subviews
is shown.
In expanded mode, open the
app in full screen - press on
the symbol.
There is always the option to go back to home
view by pressing the home button. To go back
to the home view's standard view from full
screen mode – press twice on the home button.
Related information
•
•
Press on the symbol to go
back to the expanded mode,
or press the home button at
the bottom of the screen.
•
Managing the centre display (p. 110)
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 113)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
The subview can be closed in three different ways.
•
Tap on the upper part of the expanded
subview.
•
Tap on another tile (this tile will then
open in expanded mode instead).
•
Briefly press the physical home button
below the centre display.
Opening or closing a subview in full
screen mode
The extra tile7 and the tile for Navigation can
be opened out in full screen mode, with even
more information and more setting options.
7
Home button for the centre display.
Does not apply to all apps or car functions opened via the extra tile.
119
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Function view in centre display
All the buttons for car functions are located in
the function view, one of the centre display's
basic views. Navigate to the function view
from home view by swiping from left to right
across the screen8.
Different types of buttons
There are three different types of buttons for
car functions; see below:
Type of button
Property
Affects car function
Function buttons
Have on/off positions.
Most buttons in function view are
function buttons.
When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button. Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.
Trigger buttons
Do not have on/off positions.
When a trigger button is depressed, a window for the function is opened. For example, it
may be a window to change seat position.
• Camera
• Headrest Fold
• Head-up Display Adjustments
Parking buttons
Have on, off and scan modes.
Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning.
8 Applies
120
to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
• Park In
• Park Out
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The buttons' different modes
When the LED indicator illuminates in green
on a function or parking button, the function is
activated. When a function is activated, extra
text with an explanation for certain functions is
shown. The text is shown for a few seconds
and then the button is shown with the LED
indicator illuminated.
The function is deactivated when the LED
indicator is extinguished.
For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only
at certain speeds is shown, for example,
when the button is depressed.
Press the button once briefly to activate or
deactivate the function.
When a warning triangle is shown in the righthand section of the button there is something
not working as intended.
Related information
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 110)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
121
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Moving apps and buttons in centre
display
NOTE
Hide the apps that you rarely or never use
by moving them to the bottom, off the visible screen. This way it will be easier to find
the apps you use more often.
The apps and buttons for car functions in the
app view and function view respectively can
be moved and organised as desired.
1. Swipe from right to left9 to access the app
view, or swipe from left to right9 to access
the function view.
NOTE
Apps and car function buttons cannot be
added to locations that are already occupied.
2. Tap on an app or button and hold it down.
> The app or button changes size and
becomes slightly transparent. It is then
possible to move it.
3. Drag the app or button to a vacant space
in the view.
The maximum number of rows available for
use in order to position apps or buttons is 48.
To move an app or button outside the visible
view, drag it to the bottom of the view. New
rows are then added, where the app or button
can be located.
Related information
•
•
•
Apps (p. 504)
Managing the centre display (p. 110)
Swipe across the screen to scroll up or down
in the view.
122
Overview of the symbols that can be shown
in the centre display's status bar.
The status bar shows activities in progress
and, in some cases, their status. Not all symbols are shown all the time due to the limited
space in the status bar.
Symbol
Specification
Connected to the Internet.
Roaming activated.
Function view in centre display (p. 120)
An app or button can thus be located further
down and is then not visible in the normal
mode for the view.
9 Applies
Symbols in the centre display's
status bar
to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
Signal strength in mobile phone
network.
Bluetooth device connected.
Bluetooth activated but no
device connected.
Information sent to and from
GPS.
Connected to Wi-Fi network.
Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot). The car then shares the
available connection.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Symbol
Specification
Car modem activated.
USB sharing active.
•
Connecting a device via USB port
(p. 520)
•
•
Phone (p. 529)
Date and time (p. 90)
Process in progress.
Timer for preconditioning active.
Audio source being played back.
Audio source stopped.
Phone call in progress.
Audio source muted.
News is received from the radio
channel.
Traffic information is received.
Clock.
Related information
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
•
•
Message in centre display (p. 138)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
* Option/accessory. 123
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Keyboard in centre display
The centre display keyboard makes it possible make entries using keys. It is also possible to "draw in" letters and characters on the
screen by hand.
The keyboard can be used to enter characters,
letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages from the car, enter passwords or search
for articles in the digital owner's manual.
The keyboard is only shown when entries can
be made on the screen.
124
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in
which the keyboard is being used.
}}
125
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Row of suggested words or characters10.
The suggested words are adjusted as new
letters are being entered. Browse among
the suggestions by pressing on the right
and left arrows. Tap on a suggestion to
select it. Note that this function is not supported by all language selections. If not
available, the row will not be shown on the
keyboard.
The characters available on the keyboard
depend on which language was selected
(see point 7). Tap on a character to enter
it.
The button works in different ways,
depending on the context in which the
keyboard is used - either to enter @ (when
an email address is entered) or to create a
new row (for normal text input).
Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible,
the button is not shown.
Used to enter capital letters. Press again
to enter one capital letter and then continue with lower-case letters. Another
press makes all letters capital letters. The
next press restores the keyboard to lowercase letters. In this mode, the first letter
after a full stop, exclamation mark or question mark is a capital letter. The first letter
in the text field is also a capital letter. In
text fields intended for names or
10
126
Applies to Asiatic languages.
addresses, each word automatically starts
with a capital letter. In text fields for password, web address or email address entry,
all letters are automatically lower case
unless otherwise set with the button.
Variants of a letter or character
Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then
shown with numbers. Press
, which
in number mode is shown instead of
, to return to the letter keyboard, or
to open the keyboard with special
characters.
Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The
available characters and word suggestions
(1) vary depending on the selected language. To make it possible to change languages for the keyboard, the languages
must first be added under Settings.
Space.
Undoes entered text. Pressing briefly deletes one character at a time. Hold the button depressed to delete characters more
quickly.
Changes keyboard mode to write letters
and characters by hand instead.
Pressing the confirmation button above the
keypad (not visible in the illustration) confirms
the entered text. The appearance of the button
differs depending on context.
Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can
be entered by holding down the letter or character. A box is displayed showing possible
variants of letters or characters. Press the
required variant. If no variant is selected, the
original letter/character is entered.
Related information
•
Changing keyboard language in centre
display (p. 127)
•
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 127)
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 110)
Managing text messages (p. 534)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing keyboard language in
centre display
Switching between different
languages in the keyboard
When a number of languages
have been selected in
Settings, the button in the
keyboard is used to switch
between the different languages.
To make it possible to switch between different languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings.
Adding or deleting languages in
settings
The keyboard is automatically set to the same
languages as the system language. The keyboard language can be manually adapted
without affecting the system language.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press System System Languages and
Units Keyboard Layouts.
3. Select one or more languages from the
list.
> It is now possible to switch between
the selected languages directly from
the keyboard for text input.
If no languages have been actively selected
under Settings, the keyboard retains the
same language as the car's system language.
To change keyboard language with list:
1.
Give a long press on the button.
> A list opens.
To change the keyboard language without displaying the list:
–
•
•
Applies to certain system languages.
The centre display keyboard allows you to
enter characters, letters and words on the
screen by "drawing" by hand.
Press the button on the keyboard to change from typing
with the keys to entering letters and characters by hand.
2. Select the required language. If more than
four languages have been selected under
Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list
from the keyboard.
> The keyboard is adapted to the
selected language and other word suggestions are given.
One short press of the button.
> The keyboard is adapted to the next
language in the list without displaying
the list.
Related information
11
Enter the characters, letters and
words manually in the centre
display
Changing system language (p. 130)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 124)
Area for writing characters/letters/words/
parts of word.
The text field where the characters or
word suggestions11 appear as they are
written on screen (1).
}}
127
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Suggestions for characters/letters/word/
part of word. It is possible to scroll
through the list.
Space. A space can also be created by
entering a dash (-) in the area for handwritten letters (1). See the heading "Entering a space in the free text field with handwriting recognition" below.
Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete
one character/one letter at a time. Wait a
moment before pressing again to delete
the next character/letter, etc.
Return to the keyboard with regular character input.
Switch off/on sound when entering.
Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible,
the button is not shown.
Change text input language.
12
128
Writing characters/letters/words by hand
1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts
of a word in the area for hand-written letters (1). Write a word or parts of a word
above each other or on a line.
> A number of suggested characters, letters or words is shown (3). The most
likely choice is found at the top of the
list.
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
2. Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a moment.
> The character/letter/word at the top of
the list is entered. It is also possible to
select a different character by pressing
the required character, letter or word in
the list.
For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.
Deleting/changing characters/letters
written by hand
Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping
across the handwriting field (1).
–
There are several options for deleting/
changing characters/letters:
•
Press the intended letter or word in the
list (3).
•
Press the text undo button (5) to delete
the letter and begin again.
•
Swipe horizontally from right to left12
over the area for handwritten letters (1).
Delete multiple letters by swiping over
the area several times.
•
Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes all of the entered text.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing row in the free text field with
handwriting
Changing the appearance in the
centre display
The appearance of the screen in the centre
display can be changed by selecting a theme.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car
Themes.
Displays
Display
3. Then select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.
Change row by hand by drawing the above character
in the handwriting field13.
Entering a space in the free text field with
handwriting recognition
As a supplement to these appearances, it is
possible to choose between Normal and
Bright. With Normal, the screen background
is dark and the text is light. This alternative is
the default for all themes. A light variant can
also be selected, in which the background is
light and the text is dark. This alternative can
be useful in e.g. strong daylight.
This alternative is always available for the user
and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.
Switching off and changing the
volume of the system sound in the
centre display
The centre display can be used to change the
volume of the system sound or switch off the
system sound altogether.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Sound
System Volumes.
3. Under Touch Sounds, drag the control to
change the volume/switch off screen
touch sounds. Drag the control to the
desired volume.
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Audio settings (p. 502)
Related information
Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right14.
•
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
•
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 113)
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 649)
Related information
•
13
14
Keyboard in centre display (p. 124)
For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.
For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left.
129
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing system units
Changing system language
Units settings are defined in the centre display's Settings menu.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
Language settings are defined in the centre
display menu Settings.
NOTE
Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner's information is not compliant with national or local
laws and regulations. Do not switch to a
language that is difficult to understand as
this may make it difficult to find your way
back through the screen structure.
2. Continue to System System
Languages and Units Units of
Measurement.
3. Select a unit standard:
• Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees
Other settings in the centre
display's top view
You can change settings and information for
many of the car's functions via the centre display.
1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab
at the top or by dragging/swiping from the
top downwards across the screen.
2. Press Settings to open the settings menu.
Celsius.
• Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees
1.
Celsius.
• US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahrenheit.
> The units in the driver display, centre
display and head-up display are
changed.
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Changing system language (p. 130)
2. Continue to System System
Languages and Units.
3. Select System Language. Languages
that support voice recognition have a
voice recognition symbol.
> The language in the driver display, centre display and head-up display is
changed.
Related information
•
•
•
130
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Changing system units (p. 130)
Top view with button for Settings.
3. Press on one of the categories and the
subcategories to navigate to the required
setting.
4. Change one or more settings. Different
types of setting are changed in different
ways.
> The changes are saved immediately.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Open contextual setup in the
centre display
2. Press Navigation Settings.
> A navigation settings page opens.
It is possible to use contextual setup for most
of the car's basic apps so that you can
change settings directly in the top view in the
centre display.
3. Change settings as desired and confirm
the selections.
Press Close or the physical home button
beneath the centre display to close setup
view.
Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual setting option, but not all.
Third party apps
A subcategory in the settings menu with different
types of settings (here, a multi-selector button and
radio buttons).
Third party apps are not included in the car's
system from the beginning, but are the type
that can be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here
the settings are always made inside the app
and not from the top view.
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 133)
Top view with button for contextual setting.
Contextual setting is a shortcut for accessing
a specific setting relating to the active function
shown on screen. The apps installed in the car
from the beginning, e.g. FM radio and USB,
are a part of Sensus and are part of the car's
embedded functions. The settings for these
apps can be changed directly via contextual
setting in the top view.
Related information
•
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
•
Downloading apps (p. 505)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
When contextual setup is available:
1.
Drag down top view when an app is in
expanded mode, e.g. Navigation.
131
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
Resetting settings in the centre
display
In the event of a change of ownership, user
data and system settings should be restored
to factory settings.
The settings in the car can be reset at different
levels. Restore all user data and system settings to the original factory settings in the
event of a change of ownership. In the event
of a change of ownership it is also important
to change the owner of the Volvo On Call*
service.
It is possible to reset the defaults for all settings defined in the centre display settings
menu.
Related information
• Reset Personal Settings - clears per-
•
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
•
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
(p. 138)
4. Press OK to confirm the reset.
For Reset Personal Settings, the reset
must be confirmed by pressing Reset for
the active profile or Reset for all
profiles.
> Selected settings are reset.
Two types of reset
There are two different types of resets for settings in the settings menu:
• Factory reset - clears all data and files
and resets all settings to their default values.
sonal data and resets personal settings to
their default values.
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 133)
Resetting settings
Follow these instructions to reset your settings.
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the
car is stationary.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Continue to System
Factory reset.
3. Select the required reset type.
> A pop-up window is shown.
132
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Table showing centre display
settings
The settings menu in the centre display has a
number of main categories and subcategories
where settings and information for many of
the car's functions are collected.
There are seven main categories: My Car,
Sound, Navigation, Media,
Communication, Climate and System.
In turn, each category contains a number of
subcategories and setting options. The tables
below show the first level of subcategories.
The setting options for a function or area are
described in more detail in the corresponding
section of the owner's manual.
Some settings are personal, which means that
they can be saved to Driver Profiles. Other
settings are global, which means they are not
linked to a driver profile.
My Car
Subcategories
Displays
Subcategories
Subcategories
Locking
TV*
Parking Brake and Suspension
Video
Wipers
Sound
Communication
Subcategories
Subcategories
Phone
Tone
Text Messages
Balance
Android Auto*
System Volumes
Apple CarPlay*
Navigation
Bluetooth Devices
Subcategories
Wi-Fi
Map
Car Wi-Fi Hotspot
Route and Guidance
Car Modem Internet*
Traffic
Volvo On Call*
Media
Volvo Service Networks
IntelliSafe
Subcategories
Climate
Drive Preferences/Individual Drive
Mode*
AM/FM radio
The main category Climate has no subcategories.
Lights and Lighting
Gracenote®
Mirrors and Convenience
DAB*
}}
* Option/accessory. 133
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
System
Subcategories
Driver Profile
Date and Time
System Languages and Units
Privacy and Data
Keyboard Layouts
Voice Control*
Factory reset
System Information
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
Driver profiles
Many of the settings made in the car can be
adapted according to the driver's personal
preferences and can be saved in one or more
driver profiles.
The personal settings are automatically saved
in the active driver profile. Each key can be
linked to a driver profile. When the linked key
is used, the car is adapted to the settings of
that specific driver profile.
What settings are saved in the driver
profiles?
Many of the settings defined in the car will be
saved automatically in the active driver profile
unless the profile is protected. In the car, the
settings defined are either personal or global.
Only personal settings are saved in driver profiles.
Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors, front seats, navigation*, audio and media
system, language and voice control.
Some settings, referred to as global settings,
can be changed but are not saved to a specific
driver profile. Changes to global settings affect
all profiles.
files. They remain the same regardless of
which driver profile is active.
Keyboard layout settings are an example of
global settings. If driver profile X is used to
add additional languages to the keyboard,
these remain available for use even if driver
profile Y is used. The keyboard layout settings
are not saved to a specific driver profile - the
settings are global.
Personal preferences
If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre
display brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by this setting. It has been saved to driver
profile X - the brightness setting is a personal
setting.
Related information
•
•
•
Selecting driver profile (p. 135)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 135)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 136)
•
•
Protect driver profile (p. 136)
•
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 133)
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
(p. 138)
Global settings
The global settings and parameters are not
changed when changing between driver pro-
134
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Selecting driver profile
When the centre display has been started,
the selected driver profile is shown at the top
of the screen. The driver profile last used is
the one that will be active next time the car is
unlocked. It is possible to change to another
driver profile after the car has been unlocked.
However, if the remote control key has been
linked to a driver profile then this is what is
selected when the car is started.
There are two options for changing to another
driver profile.
Option 1:
1.
Tap on the name of the driver profile
shown in the top of the centre display
when the display has been started.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is
shown.
2. Select the driver profile required.
3. Select the driver profile required.
Renaming a driver profile
4. Press Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the
system loads the settings for the new
driver profile.
It is possible to change the name of the different driver profiles used in the car.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
Option 3:
2. Press System
1.
3. Select Edit Profile.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
edited.
Drag down the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
3. Press System Driver Profiles.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is
shown.
4. Select the driver profile required.
> The driver profile is selected and the
system loads the settings for the new
driver profile.
3. Press Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the
system loads the settings for the new
driver profile.
Related information
Option 2:
•
•
1.
Drag down the top view in the centre display.
•
•
4. Tap in the box Profile Name.
> A keyboard appears, and it is possible
to
to change the name. Tap on
close the keyboard.
5. Save the name change by pressing Back
or Close.
> The name has now been changed.
NOTE
A profile name cannot start with a space,
as the profile name will not then be saved.
Driver profiles (p. 134)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 135)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 136)
Driver Profiles.
Related information
•
•
Selecting driver profile (p. 135)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 124)
2. Press Profile.
> The same list as for Option 1 is shown.
135
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Protect driver profile
In some cases it is preferable not to save various settings defined in the car to the active
driver profile. In this case, it is possible to
protect the driver profile.
NOTE
Protecting a driver profile is only possible
when the car is stationary.
To protect a driver profile:
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press System
Driver Profiles.
3. Select Edit Profile.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
edited.
4. Select Protect Profile to protect the profile.
5. Save your profile protection option by
pressing Back/Close.
> When the profile is protected, settings
defined in the car will not be saved
automatically to the profile. Instead,
your changes must be saved manually
under Settings System Driver
Profiles Edit Profile by pressing
Save current settings to the profile.
When the profile is unprotected, on the
other hand, your settings will be saved
automatically to the profile.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 134)
Linking remote control key to
driver profile
It is possible to link your key to a driver profile. The driver profile along with all of its settings will then be automatically selected
every time the car is used with that specific
remote control key.
The first time the remote control key is used, it
is not linked to any specific driver profile.
When the car is started, the Guest profile will
automatically be activated.
A driver profile can be selected manually without linking it to the key. When the car is
unlocked, the last active driver profile is activated. Once the key has been linked to a driver
profile, a driver profile does not need to be
selected when that specific key is used.
Linking a remote control key to a
driver profile
NOTE
Connecting a remote control key to a driver
profile is only possible when the car is stationary.
First select the profile to be linked to the key,
if the profile to be linked is not already active.
136
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The active profile can then be linked to the
key.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press System
Driver Profiles.
3. Select the desired profile. The display
returns to the home view. The Guest profile cannot be linked to a key.
5. Select Connect key to link the profile with
the key. It is not possible to link a driver
profile to a different key than the one currently being used in the car. If there are
multiple keys in the car, the message
More than one key is found, put the key
you want to connect on backup reader
will be displayed.
Related information
•
•
•
Driver profiles (p. 134)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 135)
Remote control key (p. 239)
4. Drag down the top view again and tap on
Settings System Driver Profiles
Edit Profile.
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
> When the message Profile connected
to key is shown, the key and the driver
profile are linked.
6. Press OK.
> This key is now linked to the driver profile and will remain linked as long as the
Connect key box is not unticked.
137
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Resetting settings in the driver
profiles
Settings that have been saved to one or more
driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary.
Message in centre display
The centre display can show messages to
inform or assist the driver in the event of different events.
NOTE
Related information
Factory reset is only possible when the
car is stationary.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press System Factory reset
Personal Settings.
Reset
3. Select one of the options Reset for the
active profile, Reset for all profiles or
Cancel.
Related information
•
•
Driver profiles (p. 134)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
Example of a message in the centre display's top
view.
The centre display shows messages that are
of lower priority for the driver.
Most messages are shown above the centre
display's status bar. After a while, or when any
required action related to the message has
been taken, the message disappears from the
status bar. If a message needs to be saved, it
is positioned in the top view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can
be shown together with graphics, symbols or
a button for activating/deactivating a function
linked to the message.
138
Pop-up messages
In some cases, a message is shown in the
form of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages
have higher priority than messages shown in
the status bar and require acknowledgement/
action before they disappear.
•
Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 139)
•
Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 139)
•
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing messages in the centre
display
Messages in the centre display are handled in
centre display views.
For messages without buttons:
–
Close the message by tapping on it, or
allow the message to close automatically
after a while.
> The message disappears from the status bar.
Handling a message saved from
the centre display
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display.
Related information
•
•
•
Example of a message in the centre display's top
view.
Some messages in the centre display have a
button (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message.
Message in centre display (p. 138)
Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 139)
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
Examples of saved messages and possible options in
the top view.
Messages that are shown in the centre display
that need to be saved are added in the top
view of the centre display.
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
–
Press the button to perform the action or
allow the message to close automatically
after a while.
> The message disappears from the status bar.
}}
139
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Reading a saved message
1. Open the top view in the centre display.
> A list of saved messages is shown.
Messages with an arrow to the right
can be maximised.
2. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the
left in the app shows information about
the message graphically.
Head-up display*
The head-up display supplements the car's
driver display and projects information from
the driver display onto the windscreen. The
projected image can only be seen from the
driver position.
Managing a saved message
Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message.
–
Related information
•
•
•
140
Message in centre display (p. 138)
Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 139)
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
The driver's ability to see the information in
the head-up display is impaired by the following
•
•
use of polarising sunglasses
a driving position which means that
the driver is not sitting centred in the
seat
•
objects on the display unit's cover
glass
•
unfavourable light conditions.
IMPORTANT
Press the button to perform the action.
Saved messages in the top view are deleted
automatically when the car is switched off.
NOTE
The head-up display shows warnings and
information relating to speed, cruise control
functions, navigation, etc. in the driver's field
of vision. Road Sign Information and incoming
phone calls can also be shown in the head up
display.
The display unit from which the information is projected is located in the instrument panel. To avoid damage to the display unit's cover glass - do not store any
objects on the cover glass and make sure
that no objects fall down onto it.
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The snowflake symbol illuminates in
the event of a risk of icy conditions.
NOTE
Certain visual defects may cause headaches and a feeling of stress during the use
of the head-up display.
Related information
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating the head-up
display* (p. 142)
Cleaning the head up display* (p. 650)
Head up display when replacing the windscreen* (p. 615)
City Safety in the head-up display
Examples of what can be shown in the display.
Speed
Cruise control
In the event of a collision warning, the information in the head-up display is replaced by
the warning symbol for City Safety. This
graphic is illuminated even if the head-up display is switched off.
Navigation
Road signs
A number of symbols can be shown temporarily in the head-up display, e.g.:
If the warning symbol illuminates read the warning message in the
driver display.
If the information symbol illuminates
- read the message in the driver display.
The warning symbol for City Safety flashes in order
to attract the driver's attention if there is a risk of collision.
* Option/accessory.
141
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating the
head-up display*
The head-up display can be activated and
deactivated when the car has been started.
Press the Head-up Display
button in the centre display
function view. An indicator in
the button illuminates when
the function is activated.
Related information
•
•
Settings for head-up display* (p. 142)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Settings for head-up display*
Adjust the settings for the head-up display's
projection onto the windscreen.
Settings can be defined when the car has
been started and a projected image is shown
on the windscreen.
Adjusting brightness and vertical
position
Selecting display options
Select which functions are to be shown in the
head-up display.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car Displays
Display Options.
Head-Up
1.
Press the Head-up Display Adjustments
button in the centre display function view.
2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position
of the projected image in the driver's field
of vision using the steering wheel's righthand keypad.
3. Select one or more functions:
•
•
•
•
Show Navigation
Show Road Sign Information
Show Driver Support
Show Phone
The setting is saved as a personal setting in
the driver profile.
Reducing the brightness
Increasing the brightness
Raising the position
142
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Lowering the position
Voice recognition
Confirm
Voice control15 allows you to control functions in the car, e.g. climate system, radio or
a Bluetooth-connected phone with spoken
commands. In cars equipped with Sensus
Navigation*, the navigation system can also
be controlled with voice recognition.
The brightness of the graphics is automatically
adapted to their background light conditions.
The brightness is also affected by the adjustment of the brightness in the car's other displays.
What is voice control?
The height position can be stored in the memory function for the power* front seat using the
keypad in the driver's door.
Calibrate the horizontal position
The head-up display's horizontal position may
need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display unit is replaced. Calibration means that
the projected image is rotated clockwise or
anticlockwise.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Select My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options Head-Up Display
Calibration.
3. Calibrate the image's horizontal position
with the steering wheel's right keypad.
15
Applies to certain markets.
Rotate anticlockwise
Rotate clockwise
Confirm
Related information
•
•
•
•
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Activating and deactivating the head-up
display* (p. 142)
Driver profiles (p. 134)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Voice control is an aid that can facilitate the
use of different commands in your car. In principle, it works like a normal application in
which you enter information in a fixed
sequence in order to perform a task, but
instead of typing on a keyboard you use voice
commands. It may therefore be a good idea to
learn how, and in what order, a voice command should be spoken in order to achieve the
desired result.
The voice control system allows you to control
certain infotainment and climate functions
using voice commands. The system can
respond with speech and by showing information in the driver display.
}}
* Option/accessory. 143
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
WARNING
The driver always holds overall responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner
and complying with all applicable rules of
the road.
Voice control system microphone
System updating
The voice recognition system is continuously
improved. It is recommended to always have
the latest version installed.
Download updates from
support.volvocars.com.
•
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 201)
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 147)
Using voice recognition
Start voice control16
To give commands via the
voice control system, you
have a "dialogue" with the
system. Depress the steering
wheel button for voice recognition
to activate the system and initiate a dialogue
using voice commands. After you have
pressed the button, a beep tone can be heard
and the voice control symbol is shown in the
driver display.
This shows that the system has started to listen and you can start to say the commands.
As soon as you start to talk, the system is
trained to recognise and understand your
voice. This takes several seconds and is done
automatically, which means that you do not
need to start any voice training manually.
Remember the following:
•
Speak after the tone with a normal voice
at a normal tempo.
•
Do not speak while the system is replying
(the system cannot understand commands during this time).
•
Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment by having the doors, windows and panoramic roof* closed.
Related information
•
•
•
144
Using voice recognition (p. 144)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
In general, the system works by listening for a
basic command which is followed by more
detailed commands that specify what you
want the system to do.
To change the system audio volume, turn the
rotary volume knob when the voice speaks. It
is possible to use other buttons during voice
control. However, other sounds will be
silenced during dialogue with the system,
which means that it is not possible to execute
any functions linked with audio using the buttons.
Cancel voice control
Voice control can be cancelled in different
ways:
•
•
Tap briefly on
and say "Cancel".
Give a long press on the steering wheel
until you hear
button for voice control
two beeps. This stops voice recognition
even when the system is speaking.
Voice control is also cancelled if you do not
reply during a dialogue. The system will first
ask for a reply three times and if there is still
no response then voice control will be cancelled automatically.
To speed up communication and skip the
prompts from the system, press the steering
16
17
. This canwheel button for voice control
cels the system voice and you can say the next
command.
Digits
The number commands are stated differently
depending on the function to be controlled:
Example of voice recognition control
•
Phone numbers and postcodes must be
spoken individually, number by number,
e.g. "zero, three, one, two, two, four, four,
three" (03122443).
•
House numbers can be spoken individually or in groups, e.g. "two, two" or
"twenty-two" (22). For English and Dutch,
several groups can be said in sequence,
e.g. "twenty-two, twenty-two" (22 22).
For English, double or triple can be used,
e.g. "double zero" (00). Numbers can be
given within the range 0-2300.
•
Frequencies can be spoken as "ninety
eight point eight" (98.8), "a hundred and
four point two" or "hundred four point
two" (104.2).
1.
Press
.
2. Say "Call [Forename] [Surname]
[number category]", e.g. "Call Robin
Smith Mobile".
> The system dials the selected contact
from the phonebook. If the contact has
several phone numbers (e.g. home,
mobile, work), the right category must
be referred to.
Commands/phrases
The following commands can generally be
used, regardless of the situation:
•
"Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction in the ongoing dialogue.
•
•
"Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.17
"Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system replies with the commands available
in the current situation, a prompt or an
example.
Commands for specific functions such as
phone and radio are described in specific sections.
Applies to certain markets.
Note that this only stops the dialogue when the system is not speaking. To do that, give a long press on
until two beep tones are heard.
}}
145
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Speed and repetition mode
It is possible to adjust the speed if the system
is speaking too quickly.
Repetition mode can be enabled so that the
system repeats what you have said.
To change the speed or activate/deactivate
repetition mode:
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press System
select settings.
Voice Control and
• Repeat Voice Command
• Speech Rate
Related information
Controlling a telephone with voice
recognition18
Call a contact, have messages read aloud or
dictate brief messages with voice control
commands to a Bluetooth connected telephone.
To specify a contact in the phone book, the
voice recognition command must include contact information that is entered in the phone
book. If a contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone numbers then the number category
can also be stated, e.g. Home or Mobile:
"Call Robin Smith Mobile".
Press
mands:
Voice recognition (p. 143)
•
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146)
"Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact from the phone book.
•
•
•
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
"Call [phone number]" - dials the phone
number.
•
•
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 147)
•
18
19
146
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Using voice recognition (p. 144)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 201)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 147)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
and say one of the following com-
•
•
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 201)
message. For this function to work, the
car must be connected to the Internet.
"Recent calls" - displays the call list.
"Read message" - message is read out. If
there are several messages - select which
message should be read out.
"Message to [contact]" – the user is
requested to say a brief message. The
message is then repeated aloud and the
user can choose to send19 or revise the
Applies to certain markets.
Only certain phones can send messages via the car. For information on which phones are compatible, see support.volvocars.com.
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Voice control of radio and media20
Commands for radio and media player device
control are shown below.
Tap on
and say one of the following commands:
•
"Media" - starts a dialogue for media and
radio and shows examples of commands.
•
"Play [artist]" - plays back music by the
selected artist.
•
"Play [song title]" - plays back the
selected song.
•
"Play [song title] from [album]" - plays
back the selected song from the selected
album.
•
"Play [TV channel name]" - starts the
selected TV channel*21.
•
"Play [radio station]" - starts playing
back the selected radio channel.
•
"Tune to [frequency]" - starts the
selected radio frequency in the current frequency band. If no radio source is active,
the FM band is started by default.
•
"Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" starts the selected radio frequency in the
selected frequency band.
•
"Radio" - starts FM radio.
20
21
22
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to certain markets.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
"Radio FM" - starts FM radio.
Settings for voice recognition22
"DAB " - starts DAB radio*.
Settings for the voice control system are
selected here.
"TV" - starts playback from TV*21.
"CD" - starts playback from CD*.
"USB" - starts playback from USB.
"iPod" - starts playback from iPod.
"Bluetooth" - starts playback from a
Bluetooth-connected media source.
"Similar music" - plays back music similar to the music currently playing back
from USB devices.
Related information
•
•
•
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Using voice recognition (p. 144)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146)
•
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 201)
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 147)
Settings
System
Voice Control
Settings can be made within the following
areas:
• Repeat Voice Command
• Gender
• Speech Rate
Audio settings
Select audio settings under:
Settings Sound
Voice Control
System Volumes
Language settings
Voice recognition is not possible for all languages. Languages available for voice recognition are marked with an icon in the language
.
list Changing the language also affects menu,
message and help texts.
Settings System System Languages
and Units System Language
}}
* Option/accessory. 147
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Related information
•
•
•
148
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Using voice recognition (p. 144)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146)
•
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 201)
•
•
•
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Audio settings (p. 502)
Changing system language (p. 130)
LIGHTING
LIGHTING
Lighting control
The different lighting controls are used to
control both exterior and interior lighting. The
left-hand stalk switch activates and adjusts
the exterior lighting. The interior brightness is
adjusted using a thumbwheel on the instrument panel.
Exterior lighting
Position
Specification
Position
Daytime running lights.
Specification
Daytime running lights and position lamps in daylight.
Main beam flash can be used.
Dipped beam and position
lamps in weak daylight or darkness, or when the front fog
lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are
activated.
Daytime running lights and position lamps.
Position lamps when the car is
parked.A
The Active main beam function
can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
Dipped beam and position
lamps.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam can be activated
when dipped beam is switched
on.
Main beam flash can be used.
Main beam flash can be used.
Active main beam on/off.
A
Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch.
When the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II, the following functions are available for the rotating ring's different positions:
150
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be
position from another position to switch
moved to
on only the position lamps instead of other lighting.
Volvo recommends that
when the vehicle is driven.
mode is used
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
WARNING
The car's lighting system is not able to
determine when daylight is too weak or
sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all
situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with a beam pattern suitable for the traffic situation and in
accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Thumbwheel in instrument panel
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Using direction indicators (p. 156)
Using main beam (p. 154)
Dipped beam (p. 153)
Rear fog lamp (p. 157)
Active bending lights* (p. 157)
Brake lights (p. 158)
Emergency brake lights (p. 158)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 159)
Adjusting light functions via the
centre display
Several light functions can be adjusted and
activated via the centre display. This applies
to active main beam, home safe lighting and
approach light, for example.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car
Lights and Lighting.
3. Select Exterior Lights or Interior
Lighting and then select the function that
needs to be adjusted.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Thumbwheel (to left) for adjusting interior brightness.
•
Lighting control (p. 150)
Active main beam (p. 154)
Using home safe lighting (p. 159)
Approach light duration (p. 160)
Using direction indicators (p. 156)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Function view in centre display (p. 120)
Related information
•
•
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 151)
Interior lighting (p. 160)
Position lamps (p. 152)
* Option/accessory.
151
LIGHTING
Position lamps
Position lamps can be used so that other road
users can see the car if it stops or is parked.
The position lamp is switched on with the
rotating ring on the stalk switch.
position from another position to switch on
only the position lamps instead of other lighting.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at
max. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed
exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime
running lights are switched on. The driver
.
should turn to a position other than
If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside, the rear position lamps come on (if not
already switched on) to warn road users
approaching from behind. This takes place
irrespective of the position of the rotating ring
or the ignition position of the car's electrical
system.
Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.
Turn the rotating ring to the
position the position lamps are switched on (number
plate lighting is switched on at the same
time).
If the car's electrical system is in ignition position II then the daytime running lights are
switched on instead of the front position
lamps. When the rotating ring is in this position, the position lamps are switched on
regardless of the ignition position of the car's
electrical system.
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating
ring can be moved to the position lamp
152
Daytime running lights
The car has sensors that detect the light conditions in the surroundings. The daytime running lights are switched on when the rotating
,
ring on the stalk switch is in position
or
as well as when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II. In position
, the headlamps change automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or
darkness.
Related information
•
•
Lighting control (p. 150)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the
position, the daytime running lights (DRL1) are
switched on when the car is driven in daylight.
The car automatically changes lighting from
daytime running light to dipped beam in weak
daylight or darkness. Changing to dipped
beam also takes place if the front fog lamp*
and/or rear fog lamp are activated.
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is
too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with the correct
beam pattern for the traffic situation and in
accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Dipped beam
When driving with the stalk switch's rotating
position, dipped beam is
ring in the
activated automatically in weak daylight or
darkness or when the car's electrical system
is in ignition position II.
Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand
mode for tunnel
stalk switch must be in
detection to work.
Related information
•
•
•
Related information
•
•
•
Tunnel detection
The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel
and switches from daytime running lights to
dipped beam.
Lighting control (p. 150)
Lighting control (p. 150)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Daytime running lights (p. 152)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Dipped beam (p. 153)
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in
position, dipped beam is also activated automatically if the rear fog lamp is activated.
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in the
position, dipped beam is always activated when the car's electrical system is in
ignition position II.
1
Daytime Running Lights
153
LIGHTING
Using main beam
Main beam is operated with the left-hand
stalk switch. Main beam is the car's strongest lighting and should be used when driving in the dark for better visibility, as long as
it does not dazzle other road users.
main beam by moving the stalk switch forwards.
Deactivate by moving the stalk switch
backwards.
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the driver display.
Active main beam
Active main beam is a function which uses a
camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams from
oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles
in front, and then switches from main beam
to dipped beam.
Related information
•
•
Lighting control (p. 150)
Active main beam (p. 154)
Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch backwards slightly
to main beam flash position. Main beam
comes on until the stalk switch is
released.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the
steering wheel stalk switch's rotating ring
2 or
is in position
. Activate
2 When
154
dipped beam is activated.
The symbol
represents active main beam.
The function can start while driving in the dark
when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h
(approx. 12 mph) or higher. The function can
also take streetlights into account. When the
camera sensor no longer detects any oncoming car or car in front, main beam is switched
on again after about a second.
LIGHTING
Activate active main beam
If this symbol is shown in the driver
display, together with the message
Active High Beam Temporarily
unavailable, then switching
between main and dipped beam must be persymbol extinformed manually. The
guishes when these message are shown.
Active main beam is activated and deactivated
by turning the left-hand stalk switch to posi. The rotating ring then returns to
tion
position
. When active main beam is
illuminates with a
activated, the symbol
white glow in the driver display. When main
beam is activated, the symbol shines blue.
The same applies if this symbol is
shown together with the message
Windscreen sensor Sensor
blocked, see Owner's manual.
If active main beam is deactivated while main
beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to
dipped beam.
Adaptive functionality
LED3
For cars with
headlamps*, active main
beam has adaptive functionality4. In this case,
unlike what happens during conventional dimming, the light beam continues to illuminate
with main beam on both sides of oncoming
traffic or vehicles ahead – only the part of the
light beam that points directly to the vehicle is
dimmed.
Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards
oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both
sides of the vehicle.
The main beam is partly dimmed, i.e. if the
light beam shines with slightly more than
in the driver
dipped beam, the symbol
display shines blue.
Limitations for active main beam
The camera sensor on which the function is
based has limitations.
Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy
rain. When active main beam becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no
longer blocked, the message goes out and the
symbol illuminates.
WARNING
Active main beam is an aid for using the
optimum beam pattern when conditions
are favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for
manually switching between main and
dipped beam when traffic situations or
weather conditions so require.
3 LED (Light Emitting Diode)
4 Depending on the car's equipment
level.
}}
* Option/accessory. 155
LIGHTING
||
Related information
•
•
•
Lighting control (p. 150)
Using main beam (p. 154)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
Using direction indicators
NOTE
The car's direction indicators are operated
with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction
indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the
stalk switch is moved.
•
This automatic flashing sequence can
be stopped by moving the stalk switch
immediately in the opposite direction.
•
If the symbol for direction indicators in
the driver display flashes more quickly
than normal - see the message in the
driver display.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to its
end position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicator lamps flash three times. If the
function is deactivated via the centre display, the lamps will flash once.
156
Related information
•
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 159)
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 151)
LIGHTING
Active bending lights*
Active bending lights are designed to provide
additional illumination in bends and junctions.
Cars with LED5 headlamps* can have active
bending lights, depending on the car's equipment level.
The function is only active in weak daylight or
darkness and only when the car is moving and
dipped beam is switched on.
Deactivating/activating the function
The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be deactivated/
activated via the centre display's function
view.
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger
than the normal rear lights and should only be
used in reduced visibility due to fog, snow,
smoke or dust so that other road users have
an early warning of a vehicle ahead.
Press the Active Bending
Lights button.
Related information
•
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
Active bending lights follow steering wheel
movements to provide additional illumination
in bends and junctions and can thereby provide the driver with improved visibility.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started. In the event of a fault in the
function, the
symbol illuminates in the
driver display at the same time as the driver
display shows an explanatory text.
5 LED
(Light Emitting Diode)
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 151)
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp is a lamp at the rear of the
car, on the driver's side.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on
when ignition position II is active and the
rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position
or
.
Press the button to switch the lights on/off.
The
symbol in the driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
}}
* Option/accessory. 157
LIGHTING
||
The rear fog lamp switches off automatically
when the car is switched off or when the
rotating ring on the stalk switch is set to the
or
position.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps
vary from country to country.
Related information
•
•
Lighting control (p. 150)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Brake lights
Emergency brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during braking.
The brake light is illuminated when the brake
pedal is depressed and when the car is braked
automatically by one of the driver support systems.
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about heavy braking.
Related information
•
•
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 158)
Brake functions (p. 445)
Driving support systems (p. 282)
The function means that the brake light
flashes instead of - as in normal braking shining with a constant glow.
The emergency brake lights are activated during heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at high speeds.
After the driver brakes to a low speed and
then releases the brake, the brake light returns
to normal glow.
The car's hazard warning flashers are activated at the same time. These flash until the
driver accelerates the car to a higher speed
again or switches off the car's hazard warning
flashers.
Related information
•
•
•
158
Brake lights (p. 158)
Foot brake (p. 446)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 159)
LIGHTING
Hazard warning flashers
Hazard warning flashers warn other road
users by means of all of the car's direction
indicators being activated simultaneously.
The function can be used to give a warning in
the event of traffic hazards.
NOTE
Regulations for the use of hazard warning
flashers may vary between countries.
Related information
•
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 158)
Using direction indicators (p. 156)
Using home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting
after the car has been locked.
To activate the function:
1.
Switch off the car.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward
toward the instrument panel and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
> A symbol in the driver display is illuminated to indicate that the function is
activated and outer lighting is switched
on: Position lamps, headlamp beams,
number plate lighting and lighting in
outer handles*.
Button for hazard warning flashers.
The length of time that home safe lighting
remains on can be set via the centre display.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers.
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 151)
•
Approach light duration (p. 160)
The hazard warning flashers are automatically
activated when the car brakes so powerfully
that the emergency brake lights are activated
and the speed is low. The hazard warning
flashers start to flash after the emergency
brake lights have stopped flashing and are
then deactivated automatically when the car
drives away again or are deactivated if the button is depressed.
Related information
* Option/accessory. 159
LIGHTING
Approach light duration
Interior lighting
Approach lighting is switched on when the
car is unlocked and is used to switch on the
car's lighting at a distance.
The function is activated when the remote
control key is used for unlocking. In daylight,
position lamps, interior roof lamps, floor lights
and cargo area lighting are activated. In weak
daylight or darkness, number plate lighting
and lighting in the outer handles are also activated* with their light source aimed towards
the ground.
The passenger compartment is equipped
with several types of lighting, e.g. general
interior lighting, adjustable decor illumination
and lock lighting.
The lighting stays on for approx. 2 minutes if
no doors are opened. If a door is opened
within the activation time, the time for the
interior lighting and lighting in the outer handles* will be extended.
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on and off manually at least
5 minutes from when:
•
the car has been switched off and its electrical system is in ignition position 0
•
the car has been unlocked, but it has not
yet been started.
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Reading lighting
The reading lamps on the right and left-hand
sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing the buttons in the roof console. Brightness
is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Passenger compartment lighting
The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are
switched on or off with a short press on the
button in the roof console.
Front roof lighting
The function can be activated and deactivated
via the centre display.
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 151)
•
•
Using home safe lighting (p. 159)
Remote control key (p. 239)
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps
and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Passenger compartment lighting
160
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Glovebox lighting
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
The automatic function is activated by a short
press on the AUTO button in the roof console.
With the automatic system activated, the light
indicator in the button illuminates and the passenger compartment lighting is switched on
and off according to the following.
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Sun visor mirror lighting*
The lighting for the mirror in the sun visor is
switched on and off respectively when the
cover is opened or closed.
Ground lighting*
The passenger compartment lighting comes
on when:
•
•
•
The ground lighting is switched on or off when
the corresponding door is opened or closed.
The car is unlocked
The car is switched off
Reading lamps above the rear seat.
The passenger compartment lighting goes off
when:
•
•
•
•
Lighting in the cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on or
off when the tailgate is opened or closed.
The car is locked
The car is started
Decor lighting
A side door is closed
A side door has remained open for approx.
2 minutes.
Rear roof lighting
The rear area of the car has reading lighting,
which is also used as passenger compartment
lighting.
Door sill lighting
The door sill lighting is switched on or off
when a door is opened or closed.
A side door is opened.
In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units,
one on each side of the roof.
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
briefly pressing the button on the lamp.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button
pressed in.
The ambient light is switched on when you
open the doors and is switched off when the
car is locked. The intensity of the decor lighting can be adapted in the centre display and
also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel
in the instrument panel.
Ambience lights*
The car is equipped with LEDs that make it
possible to change the colour of the light.
These lights are switched on when the car is
running. The ambience light can be adapted in
}}
* Option/accessory. 161
LIGHTING
||
the centre display and also precisely adjusted
using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Lighting in storage compartments in
doors
The lighting in the storage compartments in
the doors is switched on when you open the
doors and is switched off when the car is
locked. The brightness can be precisely
adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Lighting in the tunnel console's front
cup holder
The lighting in the front cup holders is
switched on when the car is unlocked and is
switched off when the car is locked. The
brightness can be precisely adjusted using the
thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Adjusting interior lighting (p. 162)
Lighting control (p. 150)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 588)
Adjusting interior lighting
The lamps inside the car come on differently
depending on the ignition position used. The
interior lighting can be adjusted with a
thumbwheel in the instrument panel, and certain light functions can also be adjusted via
the centre display.
The thumbwheel on the
instrument panel, to the left
of the steering wheel, is used
to adjust the brightness of
the display light, control light,
ambient light and ambience
light*
Adjusting ambient decor illumination
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting.
3. Choose between the following settings:
•
Under Ambient Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
•
Under Ambient Light Level, select
from Reduced and Full.
Changing the brightness of the lights
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood
Lighting.
3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity,
select from Off, Low and High.
Changing the colour of the light
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood
Lighting.
3. Choose between By Temperature and
By Colour in order to change the colour of
the light.
With the By Temperature option, the
light changes according to the set passenger compartment temperature.
With the By Colour option, the Theme
Colours subcategory can be used to
adjust further.
Adjusting ambience light*
The car is equipped with a number of LEDs
that make it possible to change the colour of
the light. These lights are switched on when
the car is running.
162
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Related information
•
•
•
Interior lighting (p. 160)
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 151)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
163
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Windows, glass and mirrors
The car contains several different windows,
glass panes and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are laminated.
The windscreen has laminated glass, and laminated glass is available as an option for certain
other glass areas. Laminated glass is reinforced, which provides better protection
against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
windscreen* (p. 218)
Pinch protection for windows and
sun blinds
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 219)
All power windows and sun blinds* have
pinch protection which is deployed if they are
blocked by any object while opening or closing.
In the event of blocking, the movement stops
and then reverses automatically to approx.
50 mm (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked
position (or to full ventilation position).
The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass.
It is possible to force pinch protection when
closing has been cancelled, e.g. when ice is
formed, by continuing to press the control in
one and the same direction.
The symbol is shown on the windows where the
glass is laminated1
If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a
reset sequence can be tested.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
166
WARNING
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function
must be reset to work properly. A reset
must take place for pinch protection to
work.
Panorama roof* (p. 173)
Power windows (p. 167)
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 170)
Using the sun blind* (p. 169)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Related information
•
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 167)
•
Operating power windows (p. 168)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 177)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
•
Using the sun blind* (p. 169)
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 174)
Reset sequence for pinch
protection
If a problem occurs with the electrical functions for the electric windows, a reset
sequence can be tested.
Power windows
Each door has a control panel for the electrically-driven power windows. The driver's
door has controls for operating all windows
and also to activate the child safety locks.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function
must be reset to work properly. A reset
must take place for pinch protection to
work.
If a problem persists, or if it concerns the panoramic roof, contact a workshop2.
Reset the power window
1. Start with the window in closed position.
2. Then operate the controls in the manual
position 3 times upwards to closed position.
> The system is initialised automatically.
Related information
2 An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
•
•
Operating power windows (p. 168)
Driver's door control panel.
Electric child safety locks* that deactivate
the controls in the rear doors to prevent
doors or windows from being opened
from the inside.
Controls for rear windows.
Controls for front windows.
Using the sun blind* (p. 169)
}}
* Option/accessory. 167
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
||
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may
be trapped by the moving parts.
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
•
•
•
Operating power windows
Using the driver's door control panel, all
power windows can be operated - using the
control panels in the other doors operates the
power window in the individual door.
The power windows are equipped with pinch
protection. If any fault arises with the pinch
protection, a reset sequence can be tested.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows
by setting the car's electrical system in
ignition position 0, and then take the
remote control key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may
be trapped by the moving parts.
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
•
•
Related information
•
•
Operating power windows (p. 168)
•
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 167)
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
•
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows
by setting the car's electrical system in
ignition position 0, and then take the
remote control key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto. Move one of the
controls gently up or down. The power
windows move up or down as long as the
control is held in position.
Operating with auto. Move one of the controls up or down to the end position and
release it. The window runs automatically
to its end position.
In order for the power windows to be used,
the ignition position must be I or II. The power
windows can be operated for a few minutes
after the car has been switched off and after
the ignition has been switched off - although
not after a door has been opened. It is only
possible to operate one control at a time.
It can also be operated using a remote control
key or keyless opening* with the door handle.
168
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers
are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with a remote control key
or keyless opening* with a door handle.
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
Using the sun blind*
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 241)
The sun blinds are built into each rear door.
Rear door – manually operated
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind
noise when the rear windows are open is
to also open the front windows slightly.
NOTE
The windows cannot be opened at speeds
above approx. 180 km/h (approx.
112 mph), but they can be closed.
The driver always bears responsibility for
following traffic regulations in force.
NOTE
It may not be possible to operate windows
at low temperatures.
The figure is schematic - the version may vary.
Hook with associated catch
–
The window can still be opened and closed
with the sun blind up.
Related information
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
Power windows (p. 167)
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 167)
•
Power windows (p. 167)
Related information
•
•
•
Pull up the sun blind and attach it to the
hook in the upper door frame.
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 167)
* Option/accessory. 169
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Rearview and door mirrors
The rearview mirrors and door mirrors can be
used to give the driver better visibility to the
rear.
Interior rearview mirror
The interior rearview mirror is adjusted by
angling it manually. The interior rearview mirror is equipped with HomeLink*, automatic
dimming* and compass*.
•
•
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 219)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirrors and dazzle the driver.
Use dimming when disturbed by light from
behind.
Manual dimming
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed
with a control in the mirror's lower edge.
Door mirrors
WARNING
Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal
vision. Objects may appear to be further
away than they actually are.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with
the joystick in the driver's door control panel.
There are also a number of automatic settings
that can be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*.
Related information
170
HomeLink®*
(p. 494)
•
•
•
Compass* (p. 497)
•
Angling the door mirrors (p. 171)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
(p. 170)
Control for manual dimming.
1.
Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal mode by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
The control for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the interior rearview and door mirrors. Automatic dimming is always active
while driving, apart from when gearbox
reverse position is selected.
For the door mirrors to be equipped with automatic dimming, the interior rearview mirror
must also be equipped with automatic dimming.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or
objects in the seats or in the cargo area in
such a way that light is prevented from
reaching the sensors, then the dimming
function of the interior rearview and door
mirrors is reduced.
NOTE
When sensitivity is changed there is no
immediately noticeable change in dimming, but the change takes place gradually.
Dimming sensitivity will affect both the interior
rearview mirror and the door mirrors.
To change dimming sensitivity:
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press My Car
Convenience.
Mirrors and
3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
The interior rearview mirror contains two sensors - one forward facing and one rearward
facing - that work together to identify and
eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing
sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.
Angling the door mirrors
To ensure better visibility to the rear, the door
mirrors need to be set to the preferences of
the driver. There are a number of automatic
settings that can also be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*.
Using controls for door mirrors
Related information
•
•
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 170)
Angling the door mirrors (p. 171)
Controls for door mirrors.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with
the joystick in the driver's door control panel.
Ignition position must be at least I.
1.
Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
}}
* Option/accessory.
171
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
||
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
Folding in rearview mirrors
electrically*
A door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking, for example.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces.
–
1.
Note that the button may need to be pressed
twice, depending on whether it was already
preselected. The button flashes when the door
mirror is angled down. When reverse gear is
disengaged, the door mirror automatically
starts to return after approx. 3 seconds and
then reaches its original position after approx.
8 seconds.
Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously.
2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the
fully retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending* to work correctly.
1.
Fold in the door mirrors by pressing down
the L and R buttons simultaneously.
2. Fold them out again by pressing the L
and R buttons simultaneously.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
3 Only
172
Angling during parking3
Automatic angling during parking3
With this setting, the door mirror is automatically angled down when reverse gear is
selected. The folded position is preset and
cannot be adjusted.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car
Convenience.
You can make the door mirror return to its
original position by pressing the L or R button
twice.
Automatic retraction when locking*
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key, the door mirrors can be
automatically retracted/extended. However, if
the mirrors have been folded in manually then
they have to be folded out manually as well.
1.
2. Press My Car
Convenience.
Mirrors and
3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate/deactivate.
Related information
•
•
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 170)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
(p. 170)
•
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 219)
Mirrors and
3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse,
select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and to select which
review mirror should be angled.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
in combination with power seat with memory buttons*.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Panorama roof*
The panorama roof is divided into two glass
sections. The front section can be opened
vertically at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizontally (open position). The rear
section is fixed roof glass.
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and
a sun blind made of perforated fabric and
located under the glass roof to provide extra
protection from factors such as strong sunlight.
WARNING
IMPORTANT
Children, other passengers or objects may
be trapped by the moving parts.
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
•
•
•
Never leave children alone in the car.
•
Remove ice and snow before opening
the panoramic roof. Take care not to
scratch surfaces or damage strips.
•
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
Wind deflector
Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows
by setting the car's electrical system in
ignition position 0, and then take the
remote control key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated
with a control located in the roof.
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun
blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II.
•
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
•
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is
raised when the panorama roof is in the open
position.
Related information
•
•
•
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 174)
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 176)
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
}}
* Option/accessory. 173
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
Operating the panorama roof*
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 241)
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control in the roof panel and both
are equipped with pinch protection.
WARNING
IMPORTANT
•
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
•
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
Children, other passengers or objects may
be trapped by the moving parts.
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
•
•
Never leave children alone in the car.
•
Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows
by setting the car's electrical system in
ignition position 0, and then take the
remote control key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
•
Remove ice and snow before opening
the panoramic roof. Take care not to
scratch surfaces or damage strips.
•
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun
blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II.
It can also be operated using a remote control
key or keyless opening* with the door handle.
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers
are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with a remote control key
or keyless opening* with a door handle.
174
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
IMPORTANT
Open and close ventilation position
Check that the panoramic roof is properly
closed when closing.
Fully open and close the panoramic
roof using the roof control
The movement of the roof is stopped if the
control is released during manual operation, or
when the glass reaches the comfort position4
or the maximum opening or closing position.
The movement of both panoramic roof and
sun blind are also stopped if the roof control is
operated again in the opposite direction to the
current direction of movement.
The panoramic roof and the sun blind are also
equipped with pinch protection. If any fault
arises with the pinch protection, a reset
sequence can be tested.
NOTE
For manual opening, the sun blind must be
fully open before the panoramic roof can
be opened. When the procedure is
reversed, the panoramic roof must be fully
closed before the sun blind can be fully
closed.
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the control upward
once.
Close by pressing the control downward
once.
When the ventilation position is selected the
front glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If
the sun blind is fully closed when ventilation
position is selected, then it opens automatically approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
Operation, manual mode
Operation, automatic mode
The sun blind follows automatically if the panoramic roof is closed from ventilation position.
NOTE
It may not be possible to operate windows
at low temperatures.
4 Comfort
position is a position where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.
}}
175
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
||
Manual operation
1. To open the sun blind - press the control
backwards to the position for manual
opening.
2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for manual opening.
3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum
position - press the control backwards a
third time to the position for manual opening.
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in
reverse order - press the control forward/
downward to the manual closing position
instead.
Automatic operation
1. Open the sun blind to maximum position press the control backward to the position
for automatic opening and release.
2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for automatic
opening and release.
3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum
position - press the control backwards a
third time to the position for automatic
opening and release.
downward to the automatic closing position
instead.
Automatic closing of the
panoramic roof's* sun blind
Automatic operation - rapid opening or
closing
The panoramic roof and sun blind can be
opened or closed simultaneously:
With this function, the sun blind is closed
automatically 15 minutes after the car has
been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This
is in order to lower the passenger compartment temperature and protect the car's
upholstery from sun-fading.
The function is deactivated when the car is
supplied from the factory and can be activated
or deactivated in the centre display.
–
To open - press the control rearward to
the automatic operation position twice
and release.
–
To close - press the control forward/
downward to the automatic operation
position twice and release.
Related information
•
•
Panorama roof* (p. 173)
1.
2. Press My Car
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
Locking.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
activate/deactivate.
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 176)
•
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
NOTE
The sun blind is also closed when all windows are closed using the remote control
key or keyless opening* with a door handle.
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 241)
Related information
•
•
•
Panorama roof* (p. 173)
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 174)
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in
reverse order - press the control forward/
176
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
Wiper blades and washer fluid
Using windscreen wipers
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 241)
Together with the washer fluid, the wipers
aim to improve visibility as well as headlamp
pattern.
The washer nozzles are heated* automatically
in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
from freezing.
The windscreen wipers are designed to clean
the windscreen. Different settings for the
windscreen wipers are set using the righthand stalk switch.
Information indicating that the washer fluid
needs topping up appears in the driver display
when there is approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer
fluid remaining.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 178)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 182)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 179)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 181)
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 665)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 664)
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 663)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 662)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 177)
Right-hand stalk switch.
The thumbwheel is used to set rain sensor
sensitivity and wiper swipe frequency.
Single sweep
Lower the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
}}
* Option/accessory. 177
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
||
Intermittent wiping
Move the lever up to switch the wipers
to intermittent wiping. Set the number
of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel
when intermittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to
sweep at normal speed.
Raise the stalk switch further for the
wipers to sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 177)
Using the rain sensor
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 179)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 181)
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitivity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel
on the right-hand stalk switch.
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 665)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 664)
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 663)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 662)
Before activating the wipers - ensure that
the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that
any snow or ice on the windscreen and
rear window is scraped away.
Right-hand stalk switch.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Related information
•
•
•
178
Using the rain sensor (p. 178)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 182)
Rain sensor button
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
When the rain sensor is activated, the rain
is shown in the driver
sensor symbol
display.
Activating the rain sensor
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or in ignition position I or II while
the windscreen wiper stalk switch is in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
.
sensor button
Related information
•
Move the lever down to make the wipers
move.
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
•
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. An
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upward.
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 182)
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 177)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 181)
Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button
or moving the stalk
switch up to another wiper program.
•
•
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in
ignition position 0 or when the engine is
switched off.
•
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically
when wiper blades are set in service position.
The rain sensor is reactivated when service
mode has been deactivated.
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 179)
Filling washer fluid (p. 665)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 664)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 663)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 662)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 177)
Using the rain sensor's memory
function
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen.
Activating/deactivating the memory
function
The memory function for the rain sensor can
be activated in such a way that the rain sensor
button does not need to be depressed each
time the car is started:
1.
2. Press My Car
Wipers.
3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
deactivate the memory function.
Related information
•
•
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deactivate the rain sensor while the car is running or when the car's electrical system is
in ignition position I or II. The symbol in the
driver display extinguishes.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
Using the rain sensor (p. 178)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 182)
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 177)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 665)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 181)
}}
179
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 664)
Using windscreen and headlamp
washers
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 663)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 662)
Windscreen and headlamp washers are
designed to clean the windscreen and headlamps. Windscreen and headlamp washers
are started using the right-hand stalk switch.
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 177)
Starting windscreen and headlamp
washers
IMPORTANT
Avoid activating the washer system when
it is frozen or the washer reservoir is
empty, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the pump.
Headlamp washing*
To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at a defined interval when the headlamps are switched on.
Reduced washing
Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.
–
180
Move the right-hand stalk switch toward
the steering wheel to start the windscreen
and headlamp washers.
> The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps once the stalk switch
has been released.
If only approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir and the message
Washer fluid Level low, refill, together with
the
symbol, is shown in the driver display, then the supply of washer fluid to the
headlamps is switched off. This is to prioritise
cleaning the windscreen and the visibility
through it. The headlamps are only washed if
main or dipped beam is switched on.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 178)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 182)
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 177)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 181)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 179)
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 665)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 664)
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 663)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 662)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 177)
Using the rear window wiper and
washer
The rear windscreen washer and wiper are
designed to clean the rear window. Washing/
wiping is started and settings are changed by
means of the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch.
Activating the rear window wiper and
washer
NOTE
The rear window wiper motor is equipped
with overheating protection which means
that it is switched off if it overheats. The
rear window wiper works again after a
cooling-down period.
Select
for intermittent wiping with
the rear window wiper.
–
Select
for continuous speed with the
rear window wiper.
Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch forward to start rear window
washing and wiping.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 178)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 182)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 179)
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 177)
Filling washer fluid (p. 665)
}}
181
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 664)
Using automatic rear windscreen
wiping when reversing
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 662)
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 663)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 177)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 662)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 177)
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are switched on initiates rear window
wiping. The function stops when reverse gear
is disengaged.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press My Car
Wipers.
3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deactivate wiping when reversing.
If the rear windscreen wiper is already operating at a constant speed then no change takes
place when reverse gear is engaged.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 177)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 181)
•
•
•
182
Using the rain sensor (p. 178)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 179)
Filling washer fluid (p. 665)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 664)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 663)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Manual front seat
The car's front seats have a range of setting
options in order to enhance comfort.
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down.
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Change the backrest inclination by turning
the control knob.
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving.
Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the
event of heavy braking or an accident.
Related information
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat
cushion* by pumping up/down.1
Change the length* of the seat cushion by
pulling the lever up and moving the seat
cushion forward/backward by hand.
Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting the handle and adjusting the distance
to the steering wheel and pedals. Check
that the seat is locked after the position
has been adjusted.
Change the lumbar support* by pressing
the button upward/downward/forward/
back2.
1 Only applies to the driver's seat.
2 Applicable to four-way lumbar support*.
184
•
•
•
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
•
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
•
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forwards/backwards.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Power* front seat
The car's front seats have a range of setting
options in order to enhance comfort. The
power seat can be moved forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards. The front
edge of the seat cushion can be raised/
lowered as well as adjusted in length* and the
backrest inclination can be changed. The
lumbar support* can be adjusted upward/
downward/forward/backward.3
Seat setup can take place when the engine is
running and within a certain time after unlocking the door without the engine running.
Adjustment can also be performed within a
certain time after the engine has been
switched off.
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
•
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
•
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
IMPORTANT
The power seats have overload protection
that is triggered if any seat is blocked by an
object. If this happens, remove the object
and then move the seat again.
Related information
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
3 Applicable to four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar
4 Not available in cars with two-way lumbar support*.
support* is adjusted forwards/backwards.
Adjusting the power* front seat
Set the preferred seat position using the control on the front seat's seating section. To set
the various comfort functions, turn the multifunction control4 up/down.
The illustration shows the controls from a car with
four-way lumbar support*. Cars with two-way lumbar
support* do not have the rotatable multifunction control.
In cars with four-way lumbar support*,
turn the multifunction control4 up/down to
set the different comfort functions. In cars
with two-way lumbar support*, use the
round button to adjust the lumbar support
forward/backward.
Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge
by adjusting the control up/down.
}}
* Option/accessory. 185
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
||
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down.
Move the seat forward/backward by
adjusting the control forward/backward.
Change the backrest inclination by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
The backrests of the front seats cannot be
lowered fully forward.
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
Storing position for seat, door
mirrors and head-up display*
You can store the position for power* seat,
door mirrors and head-up display* in the
memory buttons.
Store two different positions for the power*
seat, the door mirrors and the head-up display* using the memory buttons. The buttons
are located on the inside of one of the front
doors or both*.
Related information
•
•
•
186
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
•
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
•
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Button M for storing settings.
Memory button.
Memory button.
Storing a position
1.
Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display to the desired position.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
2. Press and hold the M button depressed.
The light indicator in the button illuminates.
3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1
or 2 button.
> When the position has been stored in
the selected memory button, an acoustic signal can be heard and the light
indicator in the M button extinguishes.
•
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
Using a stored position for seat,
door mirrors and head-up display*
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
If the positions for the power* seat, the door
mirrors and the head-up display* have been
stored, they can be activated by using the
memory buttons.
•
•
Angling the door mirrors (p. 171)
Using a stored setting
Settings for head-up display* (p. 142)
If none of the memory buttons is depressed
within three seconds then the M button extinguishes and no storing takes place.
The seat, the door mirrors or the head-up-display must be readjusted before a new memory
can be set.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
•
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
A stored setting can be used with the front
door either open or closed:
Open front door
– Depress one of the memory buttons 1 ( )
or 2 ( ) with a short press. Power seat,
door mirrors and head-up display move
and then stop at the positions stored in
the selected memory button.
}}
* Option/accessory. 187
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
||
Closed front door
– Hold one of the memory buttons 1 ( ) or
2 ( ) depressed until seat, door mirrors
and head-up display stop in the positions
that are stored in the selected memory
button.
If the memory button is released, the movement of the seat, door mirrors and head-up
display will be stopped.
WARNING
•
Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children
should never be left unattended in the
vehicle.
•
Movement of the seat can be STOPPED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel.
•
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
Make sure there is nothing under the
seats when they are being adjusted.
Related information
•
•
•
•
188
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
•
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
•
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
•
•
Angling the door mirrors (p. 171)
Massage settings* in the front seat
Both the multi-function control on the side of
the seat and the centre display can be used in
order to change the settings. The range of
settings is shown in the centre display.
Settings for head-up display* (p. 142)
Multi-function control, located on the side of the
seat's seating section.
Settings for massage
The following setting options are available for
massage:
• On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch
on/off the massage function.
• Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage programs. Select between Swell,
Tread, Advanced, Lumbar and
Shoulder.
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
• Intensity: Select between Low, Normal
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Adjusting massage settings* in the
front seat
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
Both the multi-function control on the seat
and the centre display can be used in order to
change the settings. The range of settings is
shown in the centre display.
and High.
• Speed: Select between Slow, Normal
and Fast.
Restarting massage
The massage function is deactivated automatically after 20 minutes. Reactivation of the
function is performed manually.
–
Tap on Restart, which is shown in the
centre display, to restart the selected massage program.
> The massage program restarts. If no
action is taken, the message remains
shown in the top view.
Adjusting massage settings in the
front seat
The front seat has massage in the backrest.
The massage is performed by air cushions that
can massage with different settings.
The massage function can only be activated
when the car's engine is running.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
•
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
1.
Activate the multi-function control by turnupwards/downwards.
ing the control
The seat settings view will be shown in
the centre display.
}}
* Option/accessory. 189
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
||
2. Select Massage in the seat settings view.
3. To choose between the different massage
functions, select either directly in the centre display or by moving the cursor up/
down using the multi-function control's
/lower
button. Change the
upper
setting in the selected function directly in
the centre display, by pressing the arrows,
or by using the multi-function control's
button.
front /rear
Adjusting* the length of the seat
cushion in the front seat
2. Select Cushion extension in the seat settings view.
Depending on equipment level selected, seat
cushion length is adjusted either using the
multifunction control* on the side of the
seat's seat cushion, or manually using a control on the front of the seat cushion.
Adjusting the length of the seat
cushion using the multifunction
control
•
Press the front section of the four-way
to extend the seat cushion.
button
•
Press the rear section of the four-way
button
to retract the seat cushion.
Adjusting the length of the seat
cushion manually
Related information
•
•
•
•
190
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
•
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
Multifunction control, located on the side of the seat
cushion.
•
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
1.
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
Activate the multi-function control by turnupwards/downwards.
ing the control
The seat settings view will be shown in
the centre display.
Control for seat cushion adjustment.
1.
Grip the handle
on the front of the seat
and pull upwards.
2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion.
3. Release the handle and make sure that the
seat cushion has reached the correct position.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the side support* in the
front seat
Increase comfort in the front seat by adjusting the sides of the backrest.
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
•
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
•
Press the front section of the four-way
button to increase side support .
•
Press the rear section of the four-way
button to decrease side support .
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Multi-function control, located on the side of the
seat's seating section.
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to
provide side support. Both the multi-function
control on the seat and the centre display can
be used in order to change the settings. The
range of settings is shown in the centre display.
•
2. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings
view.
To adjust the side support:
1.
Activate the multi-function control by turning the it up/down . The seat settings
view will be shown in the centre display.
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
•
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
* Option/accessory. 191
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Adjusting the lumbar support* in
the front seat
The lumbar support is adjusted using a control on the side of the seat cushion.
The lumbar support is adjusted using the multifunction control in cars with four-way lumbar
support*, or using the round button in cars
with two-way lumbar support*. The control is
located on the side of the seat's seating section. Depending on the equipment level
selected, the lumbar support can be adjusted
forward/back and up/down (four-way lumbar
support) or forward/back (two-way lumbar
support).
2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view.
Adjust the lumbar support in the car
using the four-way lumbar support
Adjust the lumbar support in the car
using the two-way lumbar support
1.
1.
•
Press the round button up /down
to move the lumbar support upwards/
downwards.
•
Press the front section
of the button
to increase lumbar support.
•
Press the rear section
of the button
to decrease lumbar support.
Multifunction control in cars with four-way lumbar
support*.
Activate the multi-function control by turnupwards/downwards.
ing the control
The seat settings view will be shown in
the centre display.
Press the front section
of the round
button to increase lumbar support.
of the round but2. Press the rear section
ton to decrease lumbar support.
Control in cars with two-way lumbar support*.
192
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
•
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
•
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
The front passenger seat can be adjusted
from the driver's seat.
Activating the function
The function is activated via the function view
in the centre display:
Press the Adjust Passenger
Seat button to activate.
Move the passenger seat forward/backward by adjusting the control forward/
backward.
Adjust passenger seat
From activation of the function, the driver
must adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If no adjustment is made within this
time the function is deactivated.
The driver adjusts the passenger seat using
the controls on the driver's seat:
Change the passenger seat's backrest
inclination by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
}}
* Option/accessory. 193
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
Lowering the backrests in the rear
seat
•
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
•
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
The rear seat's backrest is divided into two
parts. The two parts can be folded forward
individually.
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
WARNING
•
Adjust the seat and fix it before driving
away. Take care when adjusting the
seat. Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can lead to trapping injuries.
•
When loading long objects, they must
always be strapped in securely to avoid
injury and damage during sudden braking.
•
Always switch off the engine and apply
the parking brake when loading and
unloading the car.
•
For cars with automatic gearbox, set
the gear selector in P to prevent it from
being moved by mistake.
IMPORTANT
The seat cushion on the integrated child
seat* must be in the lowered position
before lowering the rear seat backrest.
The armrest* for the centre seat must be
raised before lowering the seat.
The through-load hatch in the rear seat
must be closed before lowering.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests
can be fully folded forward.
Lowering the backrest
To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car
must be stationary and at least one rear door
open.
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down.
The seat belts must not be connected
either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.
194
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head
restraint.
WARNING
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it
is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
Adjusting the head restraints in the
rear seat
Adjust the centre seat head restraint according to the height of the passenger. Fold down
the outer seat head restraints* to improve
rearward visibility.
Adjust the head restraint for the
centre seat
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head
restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up.
Ensure that there are no occupants or objects
in the rear seat.
The head restraints of the outer seats must
always be raised when there are passengers on any of the rear seats.
Lower the centre seat's head restraint
manually.
Pull the handles located on the car's left
and right-hand backrests forwards to fold
down the left and right-hand part of the
rear seat respectively.
3. The backrest disengages from the lock
and needs to be lowered manually to the
horizontal position.
Raising the backrest
Raising the backrest to upright position is carried out manually:
1.
Related information
•
Adjusting the head restraints in the rear
seat (p. 195)
•
•
Private locking (p. 275)
Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 275)
The centre seat's head restraint must be
adjusted according to the passenger's height
so that, if possible, the whole of the back of
the head is covered. Slide it up manually as
required.
Move the backrest up/back.
2. Press the backrest until the lock engages.
3. Raise the head restraints manually.
}}
* Option/accessory. 195
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
||
Fold down the rear seat's outer head
restraints using handles
For cars with electronically controlled folding*,
the outer head restraints can be folded using
handles on the top side of the seat, see figure
. Note that this method also folds the backrests. If only the head restraints shall be
folded, e.g. to improve visibility, it can be performed from the centre display instead*. For
cars without electric folding, the head
restraints are fixed.
To lower the head restraint, the button (see
illustration) must be depressed while the
restraint is carefully moved down.
Press the Headrest Fold
button to activate/deactivate
lowering.
WARNING
The centre seat head restraint must be in
its lowest position when the centre seat is
not used. When the centre seat is used, the
head restraint must be correctly adjusted
to the height of the passenger so that it
covers the whole of the back of the head if
possible.
Fold down the rear seat's outer head
restraints via the centre display*
The outer head restraints can be retracted via
the centre display's function view. You can
lower the head restraints in ignition position 0.
196
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if
there are passengers in any of the outer
rear seats.
Related information
•
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 194)
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked position after being folded up.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Steering wheel controls and horn
Horn
The steering wheel houses the horn and controls for e.g. the driver support systems and
voice recognition.
Steering lock
The steering wheel lock makes it difficult to
steer the car if it is stolen, for example. A
mechanical noise can be perceived when the
steering lock is locked or unlocked.
Activating the steering lock
The steering lock is activated when the car is
locked from the outside and the engine is
switched off. If the car is left unlocked then
the steering lock will be activated automatically after a while.
The horn is located in the centre of the steering
wheel.
Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.
Controls for driver support systems5.
Related information
•
•
Steering lock (p. 197)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing
in an automatic gearbox.
Controls for voice recognition and menu,
message and phone handling.
5 Speed
Deactivating the steering lock
The steering lock is deactivated when the car
is unlocked from outside. If the car is not
locked, the steering wheel lock will be deactivated as long as the remote control key is in
the passenger compartment and the car is
started.
Related information
•
•
Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 197)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Limiter, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist.
* Option/accessory. 197
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Adjusting the steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions.
order to give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.
Adjusting the steering wheel in a car
without a knee airbag
Adjusting the steering wheel in a car with a
knee airbag
Lever for steering wheel adjustment.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for
depth.
The steering wheel is adjusted in different
ways depending on whether or not the car is
equipped with knee airbag6.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away. The steering wheel must
never be adjusted while driving.
With speed related power steering the level of
steering force can be adjusted. Steering force
is regulated according to the car's speed in
6 The
198
1.
Lever for steering wheel adjustment.
1.
Push the lever forwards to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press
the steering wheel lightly at the same time
as you move the lever back.
Pull the lever backwards to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
3. Push the lever forwards to secure the
steering wheel. If the lever is stiff, press
the steering wheel lightly at the same time
as you move the lever back.
Related information
•
•
•
Steering lock (p. 197)
Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 197)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
CLIMATE
Climate
Climate zones
Climate control - sensors
The car is equipped with electronic climate
control. The climate control system cools or
heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the
passenger compartment.
All climate control system functions are controlled from the centre display and physical
buttons in the centre console.
The number of climate zones that the car is
divided into governs the options for setting
different temperatures for different parts of
the passenger compartment.
The climate control system has a number of
sensors to help control the climate in the car.
Sensor location
2-zone climate
Some functions for the rear seat can also be
controlled from the climate controls* at the
rear of the tunnel console.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Climate zones (p. 200)
Climate control - sensors (p. 200)
Perceived temperature (p. 201)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 201)
Parking climate (p. 223)
Heater (p. 232)
Air quality (p. 202)
Air distribution (p. 205)
Climate controls (p. 211)
Climate zones with 2-zone climate.
With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the
passenger compartment can be set separately
for the left and right-hand sides.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 200)
Sun sensor - on the upper side of the
instrument panel.
Moisture sensor - in the casing by the
interior rearview mirror.
Outside temperature sensor - in the righthand door mirror.
Temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment - by the physical buttons in
the centre console.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
200
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
With the Interior Air Quality System* there is
also an air quality sensor that is fitted into the
climate control system air intake.
Related information
•
•
Climate (p. 200)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204)
Perceived temperature
The climate control system regulates the climate in the passenger compartment based
on the perceived temperature, not on actual
temperature.
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physically
perceived temperature as affected by factors
such as the ambient temperature, air speed,
humidity, solar radiation, etc. in and around
the car at the time.
The system includes a sun sensor which
detects on which side the sun is shining into
the passenger compartment. This means that
the temperature can differ between the right
and left-hand side's air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on
both sides.
Controlling climate control with
voice recognition1
Voice recognition commands for the climate
control system to e.g. change temperature,
activate a heated seat* or change fan level.
Press
and say one of the following commands:
•
"Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate
control and shows examples of commands.
•
"Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
the desired temperature.
•
"Raise temperature"/"Lower
temperature" - raise/lower the temperature setting one step.
•
"Sync temperature" - synchronises the
temperature for all climate zones in the car
with the temperature set for the driver's
side.
•
"Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the
desired air flow.
•
"Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" closes the desired air flow.
•
"Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" changes the air flow to Max/Off.
•
"Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" raises/lowers the fan level one step.
Related information
•
1
Applies to certain markets.
Climate (p. 200)
}}
* Option/accessory. 201
CLIMATE
||
•
"Turn on auto" - activates automatic regulation of the climate control.
•
"Air condition on"/"Air condition off" activates/deactivates the air conditioning.
"Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" raises/lowers the setting for the heated
seat* one step.
•
"Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off
seat ventilation" - activates/deactivates
the seat ventilation*.
"Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat
ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for
the ventilated seat* one step.
•
"Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" activates/deactivates the air circulation.
•
"Turn on defroster "/"Turn off
defroster" - activates/deactivates defrosting of windows and door mirrors.
•
"Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max
defroster off" - activates/deactivates the
max defroster.
Related information
•
•
202
•
"Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
electric defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated windscreen*.
•
•
•
•
Climate (p. 200)
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Using voice recognition (p. 144)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 147)
Air quality
The materials selected for the passenger
compartment and the air cleaning system
ensure that the air quality in the passenger
compartment is high.
Materials in the passenger
compartment
The interior of the passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable,
even for people with contact allergies and for
asthma sufferers.
Tested materials have been developed in order
to reduce the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and to contribute to making the
passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
•
"Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
defroster" - activates/deactivates the
heated rear window and door mirrors.
The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and
easy to remove and clean.
•
"Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
steering wheel heat off" - activates/
deactivates the heated steering wheel*.
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo to clean the interior.
•
"Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
setting for the heated steering wheel* one
step.
•
"Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
- activates/deactivates the heated seat*.
Air cleaning system
In addition to the passenger compartment filter, the car is equipped with an air cleaning
system that helps to maintain high air quality
in the passenger compartment.
Related information
•
•
Climate (p. 200)
Clean Zone* (p. 203)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
•
•
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204)
Clean Zone*
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204)
The Clean Zone function checks and indicates whether or not all conditions have been
met for good air quality in the passenger
compartment.
•
•
Passenger compartment filter (p. 205)
That the air quality system Interior Air
Quality System* is activated.
That the ventilation fan is activated.
That the air recirculation is deactivated.
NOTE
Clean Zone does not indicate that the air
quality is good. It only indicates that the
conditions for good air quality have been
met.
Related information
The indicator is visible in the climate view
in the centre display.
•
•
•
•
Air quality (p. 202)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 205)
The indicator is visible in the climate row
when the climate view is not open.
If the conditions have not been met then the
Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions
have been met, this is indicated by the text
changing colour to blue.
Conditions that need to be met:
•
•
That all doors and the tailgate are closed.
That all side windows and the panorama
roof* are closed.
* Option/accessory. 203
CLIMATE
Clean Zone Interior Package*
Interior Air Quality System*
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises a series of modifications that keep the
passenger compartment even clearer from
allergy and asthma-inducing substances.
The following is included:
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully
automatic air quality system that separates
gases and particles to reduce the levels of
odours and contaminants in the passenger
compartment.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such
as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and
ground-level ozone.
•
•
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is unlocked
with the remote control key. The fan fills
the passenger compartment with fresh air.
The function starts when required and is
disengaged automatically after a time or
when one of the passenger compartment
doors is opened. The amount of time the
fan runs is reduced gradually due to
reduced need up until the car is 4 years
old.
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 205)
If the air quality sensor senses that the outside
air is contaminated, the air intake is closed
and air recirculation is activated.
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger
compartment.
The fully automatic air quality system
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS).
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so
as to prevent misting.
Air quality (p. 202)
Clean Zone* (p. 203)
In the event of misting, the defrost functions for windscreen, side windows and
rear window should be used.
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 205)
Related information
204
•
Activating and deactivating the air quality
sensor* (p. 205)
•
•
Air quality (p. 202)
Clean Zone* (p. 203)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
The air quality sensor is part of the fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality
System (IAQS).
It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor should be activated/deactivated.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/
deactivate the air quality sensor.
Passenger compartment filter
Air distribution
All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter.
The climate control system distributes the
incoming air via a number of different vents in
the passenger compartment.
Replacing the passenger
compartment filter
To maintain high climate system performance,
the filter must be changed at regular intervals.
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the
recommended replacement intervals. If the car
is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter
more often.
NOTE
Related information
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204)
Automatic and manual air distribution
With auto-regulated climate control running
the air distribution takes place automatically. If
necessary, the air distribution can be controlled manually.
Adjustable air vents
Some of the air vents in the car are adjustable,
which means that you can open/close the vent
to aim the air flow.
There are different types of passenger
compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Air quality (p. 202)
Clean Zone* (p. 203)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204)
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger
compartment.
Four on the instrument panel and one on
each of the door pillars between the front
and rear doors.
}}
* Option/accessory. 205
CLIMATE
||
Related information
Climate (p. 200)
•
•
•
Changing air distribution (p. 206)
•
Table of air distribution options (p. 208)
Changing air distribution
The air distribution can be changed manually
if required.
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 207)
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
The air distribution buttons in the climate view.
Air distribution - windscreen defroster
vents
Air distribution - air vents in instrument
panel and centre console
Air distribution - air vents in the floor
2. Press one or more of the air distribution
buttons in order to open/close the corresponding air flow.
> The air distribution is changed and the
buttons illuminate/extinguish.
Related information
•
•
•
206
Air distribution (p. 205)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 207)
Table of air distribution options (p. 208)
CLIMATE
Opening, closing and aiming the
air vents
Some air vents in the passenger compartment can be opened, closed and aimed individually.
If the car's outer vents are aimed at the side
windows then misting can be eliminated.
Related information
•
•
•
Air distribution (p. 205)
Changing air distribution (p. 206)
Table of air distribution options (p. 208)
If the car's outer vents are aimed inwards
then, in a hot climate, a comfortable environment is obtained in the passenger compartment.
Opening and closing the air vents
Air vents on the instrument panel:
–
Turn the rotary knob in the middle of the
air vent to open/close the air flow from the
vent.
The air flow is at maximum when the
marking on the knob is in vertical position.
Air vents in the door pillars:
–
Roll the thumbwheel under the air vent in
order to open/close the air flow from the
vent.
The longer the white lines on the thumbwheel that are visible, the higher the air
flow.
Aiming the air vents
–
Move the lever in the middle of the air vent
horizontally/vertically to direct the air flow
from the vent.
207
CLIMATE
Table of air distribution options
The air distribution can be changed manually
if required. The following options are available
for setting.
Air distribution
Purpose
If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate
control.
208
Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air
vents.
Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to achieve this, fan level must not be low).
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows
from other air vents.
Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.
Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other
air vents.
Provides heat or cooling to the floor.
CLIMATE
Air distribution
Purpose
Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel.
Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.
Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some
air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or
humid climate.
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at
the floor. Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor temperatures.
Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor.
Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.
}}
209
CLIMATE
||
Related information
•
•
•
210
Air distribution (p. 205)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 207)
Changing air distribution (p. 206)
CLIMATE
Climate controls
Main climate
In addition to the climate row's functions,
other main climate functions can also be controlled in the Main climate tab.
The climate control system's functions are
controlled from physical buttons in the centre
console, the centre display and the climate
controls at the rear of the tunnel console*.
Physical buttons in centre console
Temperature controls for driver and passenger side.
Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver
and front passenger seat, as well as
heated steering wheel*.
Button for heated windscreen* and max
defroster.
Button for heated rear window and door
mirrors.
Climate row in centre display
The most common climate functions can be
regulated from the climate row.
Button for access to the climate view. The
graphic on the button shows activated climate settings.
Climate view in centre display
Open climate view by pressing the
symbol in the middle of the climate
row.
Depending on equipment level, the
climate view can be divided into several tabs.
Change between the tabs by swiping left/right
or by pressing the respective heading.
Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting the windows and door mirrors.
AC - Controls for air conditioning.
Recirc - Controls for air recirculation.
Controls for air distribution.
* Option/accessory.
}}
211
CLIMATE
||
Fan control.
AUTO - Auto regulating the climate.
Parking climate
The car's parking climate control can be regulated in the Parking climate tab.
Climate controls at rear of tunnel
console*
If the car is equipped with heated rear seats*
there are physical buttons at the rear of the
tunnel console for controlling this function.
Related information
•
•
Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 212)
•
Activating and deactivating heated rear
seat* (p. 213)
•
Activating and deactivating ventilated
front seat* (p. 214)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
steering wheel* (p. 215)
•
•
212
Climate (p. 200)
Activating auto climate control (p. 215)
Activating and deactivating air recirculation (p. 216)
•
Activating and deactivating max defroster
(p. 217)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
windscreen* (p. 218)
•
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 219)
Activating and deactivating heated
front seat*
Regulating fan level for front seat (p. 220)
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
Synchronising temperature (p. 222)
Activating and deactivating air conditioning (p. 222)
1.
Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row
in the centre display in order to open the
controls for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with ventilated
seats or heated steering wheel (for the
driver's side), the button for heated seats
is immediately available in the climate
row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated
seats in order to change between the four
levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button
shows the set level.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation or
who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.
Related information
•
•
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated front seat* (p. 213)
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated front
seat*
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated seats should be activated/deactivated
when the engine is started. With automatic
start activated, heating will start in the event
of low ambient temperature.
1.
Activating and deactivating heated
rear seat*
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear seat from the rear seat
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level
and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level
to activate/deactivate automatic start of
heated driver's and passenger seat.
> An "A" is shown at each button for
heated front seats in the climate row
when automatic starting has been activated.
4. Select Low, Medium or High to select
level after the function has been activated.
Related information
•
•
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 212)
Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel
console.
–
Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's physical buttons for heated seats at
the rear of the tunnel console to switch
between the four levels: Off, High,
Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the LEDs in the
button show the set level.
}}
* Option/accessory. 213
CLIMATE
||
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation or
who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating
ventilated front seat*
The seats can be ventilated to provide
increased comfort in a hot climate, for example.
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases
the cooler the passenger compartment air
becomes. The system can be activated when
the engine is running.
1.
2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated
seats in order to change between the four
levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button
shows the set level.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 211)
Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row
in the centre display in order to open the
controls for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated
seats or heated steering wheel (for the
driver's side), the button for ventilated
seats is immediately available in the climate row.
214
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is
cold.
1.
Press the driver's side steering wheel and
seat button in the climate row of the centre display in order to open the controls for
seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated
seats or ventilated seats, the button for
heated steering wheel is immediately
available in the climate row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated
steering wheel in order to change
between the four levels: Off, High,
Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button
shows the set level.
Related information
•
•
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated steering
wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is
cold.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated steering wheel should be activated/
deactivated when the engine is started. With
automatic start activated, heating will start in
the event of low ambient temperature.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level to activate/deactivate automatic
start of heated steering wheel.
> An "A" is shown at the button for
heated steering wheel in the climate
row when automatic starting has been
activated.
4. Select Low, Medium or High to select
level after the function has been activated.
Activating auto climate control
With auto climate control activated, multiple
climate functions are controlled automatically.
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2. Give a short or long press on AUTO
Climate.
•
Short press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled automatically.
Long press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled automatically, temperature and
fan speed are changed to standard settings: 22 °C (72 °F) and level 3.
> Auto-regulation of the climate is activated and the button illuminates.
•
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
steering wheel* (p. 215)
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated steering wheel* (p. 215)
}}
* Option/accessory. 215
CLIMATE
||
NOTE
Temperature and fan speed can be
changed without deactivating the automatically-regulated climate control system.
The automatically-regulated climate control system is deactivated when the air distribution is changed manually or when
maximum defroster is activated.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating air
recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the
passenger compartment.
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2. Press Recirc.
> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car is recirculated for too
long then there is a risk of misting on the
insides of the windows.
NOTE
It is not possible to activate air recirculation when max defroster is activated.
216
Related information
•
•
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating time setting
for air recirculation (p. 217)
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating time
setting for air recirculation
Activating and deactivating max
defroster
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the
passenger compartment.
It is possible set whether the air recirculation
timer should be activated/deactivated. When
the timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically switched off after 20 minutes.
Max defroster is used to quickly remove mist
and ice from windows.
Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation of
the climate and air recirculation, activates air
conditioning and changes the fan level to 5
and the temperature to HI.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
NOTE
Changing the fan level to 5 increases the
noise level.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Recirculation Timer to activate/
deactivate the air recirculation timer.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating air recirculation (p. 216)
When max defroster is deactivated, the climate control system returns to the previous
settings.
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from centre console
There is a physical button in the centre console for quick access to max defroster.
With heated windscreen* the max defroster
can only be activated individually from the climate view in the centre display.
Physical button in the centre console.
Cars without heated windscreen:
–
Press the button.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Cars with heated windscreen:
–
Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
•
•
Activated heated windscreen
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster
are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
•
}}
* Option/accessory. 217
CLIMATE
||
NOTE
Max defroster starts with a certain delay in
order to avoid a short increase in fan level if
the heated windscreen is deactivated by
two quick presses of the button.
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from centre display
1.
Activating and deactivating the
heated windscreen*
Activating and deactivating heated
windscreen from centre display
A heated windscreen is used to quickly
remove mist and ice from the window.
Activating and deactivating heated
windscreen from centre console
In the centre console is a physical button for
rapid access to the heated windscreen.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2. Press Electric.
> Heated windscreen is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
NOTE
2. Press Max.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 211)
Physical button in the centre console.
–
Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
•
•
Activated heated windscreen
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster
are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
•
218
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
NOTE
The heated windscreen may affect the performance of transponders and other communication equipment.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Related information
•
•
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated windscreen* (p. 219)
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated
windscreen*
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door
mirrors
A heated windscreen is used to quickly
remove mist and ice from the window.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated windscreen should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when
there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off
automatically when the windscreen/window is
sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is
gone.
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
windows and mirrors.
1.
Activating and deactivating heated
rear window and door mirrors from
centre console
In the centre console is a physical button for
rapid access to the heated rear window and
door mirrors.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated windscreen.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
windscreen* (p. 218)
Physical button in the centre console.
–
Press the button.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors
are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
}}
* Option/accessory. 219
CLIMATE
||
Activating and deactivating heated
rear window and door mirrors from
centre display
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2. Press Rear.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors
are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Related information
•
•
2 For
220
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating automatic
starting of the heated rear window and
door mirrors (p. 220)
2-zone climate, also rear seat.
Activating and deactivating
automatic starting of the heated
rear window and door mirrors
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
windows and mirrors.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated rear window and door mirrors should
be activated/deactivated when the engine is
started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating
switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the
ice or misting is gone.
1.
Regulating fan level for front seat2
The fan can be set to several different automatically controlled fan speeds for the front
seat.
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated rear
window and door mirrors.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 219)
Fan control buttons in the climate view.
2. Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or
Max.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons
for the selected level illuminate.
CLIMATE
IMPORTANT
If the fan is fully switched off then the air
conditioning is not engaged, which results
in a risk of misting on the insides of the
windows.
Regulating temperature for front
seat3
The temperature can be set to the desired
number of degrees for the front seat's climate
zones.
NOTE
The climate control system automatically
adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
level based on requirements. This means
that the fan speed may change even
though the fan level is the same.
Temperature control.
2. Regulate the temperature by either of the
following:
Related information
•
•
Climate controls (p. 211)
Temperature buttons in the climate row.
1.
drag the control to the desired temperature, or
press +/− to raise/lower the temperature gradually.
> The temperature changes and the button shows the set temperature.
•
Press the left or right-hand side temperature button in the centre display's climate
row to open the controls.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature
than the actual desired temperature.
Related information
•
3 For
Climate controls (p. 211)
2-zone climate, also rear seat.
221
CLIMATE
Synchronising temperature
Related information
The temperature in the car's different climate
zones can be synchronised with the temperature set on the driver's side.
•
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating air
conditioning
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as required.
When the air conditioning is activated, the climate control system automatically controls
starting and switching off as required.
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature controls.
1.
Press the driver's side temperature button
in the centre display's climate row in order
to open the controls.
2. Press Synchronise temperature.
> The temperature for all zones in the car
is synchronised with the temperature
set for the driver's side and the synchronisation symbol is shown adjacent
to the temperature button.
2. Press AC.
> The air conditioning is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
NOTE
Close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* so that the air conditioning should
work as well as possible.
The synchronisation is stopped by means of a
further press on Synchronise temperature or
by means of changing the temperature settings for a climate zone other than the driver's.
222
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
NOTE
It is not possible to activate the air conditioning when the fan control is in Off position.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 211)
Parking climate
Preconditioning
Parking climate control is a generic term for
various functions that improve the passenger
compartment climate when the car is parked,
e.g. preconditioning.
Functions belonging to the parking
climate control are controlled from
the Parking climate in climate view
in the centre display. Open climate
view by pressing the symbol in the middle of
the climate row.
Preconditioning is a climate function which, if
possible, attempts to reach comfort temperature in the passenger compartment before
departure.
Preconditioning can use direct start or be set
via the timer.
The function utilises several systems in different cases:
•
In a cold climate, the parking heater
warms up the passenger compartment to
a comfortable temperature.
•
The air conditioning, in a hot climate, cools
the passenger compartment to the comfort temperature.
•
Activation of heated steering wheel* and
heated seats* for driver and passenger can
be selected.
•
Heated windscreen, rear window and door
mirrors are automatically activated as
required.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Climate (p. 200)
Preconditioning (p. 223)
Climate comfort when parking (p. 229)
Symbols and messages for parking climate control (p. 230)
During preconditioning in a hot climate, condensation from the air conditioning may drip
under the car. This is normal.
}}
* Option/accessory. 223
CLIMATE
||
NOTE
Preconditioning is available only when the
car is connected to an electrical socket4. A
charging station which is not always
active, e.g. on account of a timer, may
cause preconditioning to malfunction.
If the car is not connected to an electrical
socket, it is still possible to cool the passenger compartment briefly in a warm climate by starting preconditioning directly.
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach comfort temperature and not the temperature
set in the climate control system.
Related information
•
•
•
Parking climate (p. 223)
Start and switch off preconditioning
(p. 224)
Preconditioning time setting (p. 225)
4 Applicable
5 Applicable
224
to electric heater.
to electric heater.
Start and switch off
preconditioning
Preconditioning heats or cools the passenger
compartment, if possible, prior to driving. The
function can use direct start from the centre
display or a mobile phone.
Start and switch off from car
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
3. Select whether seat heating and steering
wheel heating should be activated during
preconditioning by ticking/unticking the
boxes for the respective function.
4. Press Preconditioning.
> Preconditioning is started/switched off
and the button is illuminated/extinguished.
NOTE
Preconditioning is available only when the
car is connected to an electrical socket5. A
charging station which is not always
active, e.g. on account of a timer, may
cause preconditioning to malfunction.
If the car is not connected to an electrical
socket, it is still possible to cool the passenger compartment briefly in a warm climate by starting preconditioning directly.
NOTE
The car's doors and windows should be
closed during the preconditioning of the
passenger compartment.
CLIMATE
Related information
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning6:
•
In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater
starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long
grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For
example, deep snow inside the front
right-hand wheel housing can obstruct
the heater’s ventilation.
•
•
•
Parking climate (p. 223)
Preconditioning (p. 223)
Preconditioning time setting (p. 225)
Preconditioning time setting
The timer can be set so that the preconditioning is finished at a predetermined time.
The timer can handle up to 8 different settings
for:
•
•
NOTE
If the car is not connected to an electrical
socket, it is still possible to cool the passenger compartment briefly in a warm climate by starting preconditioning directly.
Starting from the app*
The passenger compartment can also be preconditioned with the car remote start function
(Engine Remote Start - ERS)7 via the Volvo
On Call* app.
6 Applicable to fuel-driven
7 Certain markets.
auxiliary heater.
A time on one or more days of the week,
with or without repetition.
Preconditioning is available only when the
car is connected to an electrical socket8. A
charging station which is not always
active, e.g. on account of a timer, may
cause preconditioning to malfunction.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a
long time in advance.
Start of preconditioning and information about
the selected settings can be managed from a
device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Preconditioning heats or cools the passenger
compartment (using the car's air conditioning)
to comfort temperature.
A time on a single date
Related information
•
•
Preconditioning (p. 223)
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning (p. 226)
}}
* Option/accessory. 225
CLIMATE
•
Activating and deactivating time setting
for preconditioning (p. 227)
Adding and editing time setting for
preconditioning
•
Removing time setting for preconditioning
(p. 228)
The timer for preconditioning can manage up
to 8 time settings.
Adding a time setting
3. Press Add timer.
> A pop-up window is shown.
NOTE
It is not possible to add a time setting if
there already are 8 settings entered for the
timer. Delete a time setting in order to be
able to add a new one.
4. Tap on Date to set the time for a single
date.
Tap on Days to set the time for one or
more days of the week.
With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition
by ticking/unticking the box for Repeat
weekly.
The button to add a time setting in the Parking
climate tab in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
5. With Date: Select the date for preconditioning by scrolling the date list with the
arrows.
With Days: Select the days of the week
for preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for the days of the week.
6. Set the time when the preconditioning
should be finished by scrolling with the
arrows.
8 Applicable
226
to electric heater.
CLIMATE
7. Tap on Confirm in order to add the time
setting.
> The time setting is added to the list and
is activated.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning9:
•
•
•
In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater
starts.
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long
grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For
example, deep snow inside the front
right-hand wheel housing can obstruct
the heater’s ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a
long time in advance.
Editing a time setting
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
9 Applicable
to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
3. Press the time setting that is to be
changed.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4. Edit the time setting in the same way as
described in "Adding a time setting"
above.
Activating and deactivating time
setting for preconditioning
A time setting in the timer for preconditioning
can be activated or deactivated based on
need.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Preconditioning (p. 223)
Preconditioning time setting (p. 225)
Activating and deactivating time setting
for preconditioning (p. 227)
Removing time setting for preconditioning
(p. 228)
The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the
climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping on the timer button to the right of the
setting.
> The time setting is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
}}
227
CLIMATE
||
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning10:
•
In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater
starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long
grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For
example, deep snow inside the front
right-hand wheel housing can obstruct
the heater’s ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a
long time in advance.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Preconditioning (p. 223)
Removing time setting for
preconditioning
A time setting for preconditioning that is no
longer required can be deleted.
The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning (p. 226)
3. Press Edit list.
4. Press the delete icon to the right in the
list.
> The icon changes to the text Delete.
5. Press Delete to confirm.
> The time setting is removed from the
list.
10
228
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
•
•
•
•
Preconditioning time setting (p. 225)
Removing time setting for preconditioning
(p. 228)
Related information
Preconditioning (p. 223)
Preconditioning time setting (p. 225)
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning (p. 226)
Activating and deactivating time setting
for preconditioning (p. 227)
CLIMATE
Climate comfort when parking
The climate in the car's passenger compartment can be maintained while the car is
parked, e.g. if the engine needs to be
switched off but the driver or passenger(s)
wants to remain in the car and maintain the
level of climate comfort.
Starting climate comfort retention is only possible via direct start.
The function utilises several systems in different cases:
•
•
Residual heat from the engine, in a cold
climate, heats the passenger compartment to comfort temperature.
When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily.
Use of the function is intended to maintain
climate comfort when driver or passengers
remain inside the car.
Starting and switching off climate
comfort when parking
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily.
Use of the function is intended to maintain
climate comfort when driver or passengers
remain inside the car.
Climate comfort retention maintains the climate in the passenger compartment after
driving. The function can use direct start from
the centre display.
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
Related information
•
Climate comfort when parking (p. 229)
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
3. Press Keep climate comfort.
> Climate comfort retention is started/
switched off and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
NOTE
It is not possible to start climate comfort
retention if there is not enough residual
heat in the engine to maintain the passenger compartment climate, or if the outside
temperature is above approx. 20°C (68°F).
Related information
•
•
Parking climate (p. 223)
Starting and switching off climate comfort
when parking (p. 229)
229
CLIMATE
Symbols and messages for parking
climate control
A number of symbols and messages regarding parking climate control can be shown in
the driver display.
Symbol
Specification
Parking climate
Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as
possible.
Parking climate
Temporarily unavailable
Parking climate
Unavailable Fuel level too lowB
Parking climate
Unavailable Charge level too low
230
This symbol illuminates in the driver
display11 when the parking heater is
active.
Message
Service required
11
Messages relating to parking climate control
can also be displayed in a device which has
the Volvo On Call* app.
Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a workshopA to check the function.
Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking
heater. Fill the vehicle's fuel tank.
Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the hybrid battery is too low
to start the parking heater. Start the car.
Applies to fuel-driven heater.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Symbol
Message
Specification
Parking climate
The parking climate control cannot be activated if the charging cable is not connected. Connect the charging cable.
Unavailable, not connected to the
mainsC
Parking climate
Limited Charge level too low
A
B
C
The running time for parking climate control is limited when the state of charge in the hybrid
battery is low. Start the car.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Applies to fuel-driven heater.
Applies to electric heater.
Related information
•
Parking climate (p. 223)
231
CLIMATE
Heater
Battery and charging
The heater has two subfunctions that help to
heat the passenger compartment or engine in
different situations.
The heater is powered by the car's hybrid battery. If the charge level of the hybrid battery is
too low, then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message.
The heater has two subfunctions:
•
•
Parking heater - heats the passenger compartment, if necessary, when the parking
climate control's preconditioning is activated.
Additional heater - heats the passenger
compartment and engine, if necessary,
during driving.
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the heater.
If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the
heater is switched off automatically and the
driver display shows a message.
NOTE
NOTE
Make sure that there is enough charge in
the battery if the heater needs to be used.
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
fuel tank if the heater needs to be used.
Fuel and refuelling14
WARNING
Either a fuel-driven heater or an electric heater
is used, depending on the market12.
Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
The heater is fitted in the front right-hand
wheel housing.
Check in the driver display that
the heater is switched off. This
symbol is lit when it is working as
a parking heater.
NOTE
When the heater is running13, smoke may
be emitted from the right-hand front wheel
housing and a low hum may be heard. A
ticking sound from the fuel pump may also
be heard from the rear section of the car.
This is perfectly normal.
12
13
14
232
Related information
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel
tank.
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding which markets use which type of heater.
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
Applies to fuel-driven heater.
•
•
•
Climate (p. 200)
Parking heater (p. 233)
Additional heater (p. 234)
CLIMATE
Parking heater
The parking heater heats the passenger compartment as necessary before driving if the
car's preconditioning is activated.
The parking heater is one of two subfunctions
of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the
front right-hand wheel housing.
When this symbol illuminates in the
driver display, the parking heater
may be active15.
NOTE
When the heater is running16, smoke may
be emitted from the right-hand front wheel
housing and a low hum may be heard. A
ticking sound from the fuel pump may also
be heard from the rear section of the car.
This is perfectly normal.
The parking heater starts automatically if the
parking climate's preconditioning is activated
and the passenger compartment needs to be
heated up.
15
16
17
18
19
Applies to fuel-driven heater.
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
Depending on factors such as battery level,
passenger compartment temperature and
ambient temperature, the heater has different
running times, but never longer than 40
minutes.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
fuel tank if the parking heater needs to be
used17.
Make sure that there is enough charge in
the hybrid battery if the parking heater
needs to be used.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning18:
•
In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater
starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long
grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For
example, deep snow inside the front
right-hand wheel housing can obstruct
the heater’s ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a
long time in advance.
WARNING
If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts
of smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds
coming from the parking heater19, switch
off the heater and, if possible, pull out its
fuse. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair.
}}
233
CLIMATE
||
Related information
•
•
Heater (p. 232)
Additional heater (p. 234)
Additional heater
Related information
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving.
The additional heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in
the front right-hand wheel housing.
•
•
•
NOTE
When the heater is running20, smoke may
be emitted from the right-hand front wheel
housing and a low hum may be heard. A
ticking sound from the fuel pump may also
be heard from the rear section of the car.
This is perfectly normal.
The additional heater starts and is controlled
automatically when heating is required while
the car is being driven.
It switches off automatically when the car is
switched off.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs to be
used21.
20
21
234
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
Heater (p. 232)
Parking heater (p. 233)
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of auxiliary heater (p. 235)
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of auxiliary heater
Related information
•
Additional heater (p. 234)
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving.
It is possible to set whether automatic start
for the additional heater should be activated/
deactivated.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Additional Heater to activate/
deactivate automatic start of the additional heater.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the automatic
start for the additional heater should be
switched off for short driving distances22.
NOTE
If the auxiliary heater's automatic starting
is deactivated, this may impede comfort in
the passenger compartment as the climate
control system will then have no heat
source during electrical operation.
22
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
235
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Lock confirmation
The car indicates with hazard warning flashers when the car is locked or unlocked.
Lock and alarm indicator on the
instrument panel
Indication in lock buttons
The lock and alarm indicator shows the status
of the locking system:
Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.
Front door
Exterior indication
Locking
•
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
locking by flashing and retracting the door
mirrors1.
Unlocking
•
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
unlocking by two flashes and extending
the door mirrors1.
All doors, the tailgate and the bonnet must be
closed for the car to indicate that it is locked.
If locking takes place with just the driver door
closed2, locking will take place but the lock
indication with hazard warning flashers will
only take place when all doors, the tailgate
and the bonnet have been closed.
1 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
2 Not applicable to with cars equipped with keyless
238
•
•
A long flash indicates locking.
•
Rapid flashes after disarming the alarm*
indicate that the alarm has been triggered.
Short flashes indicate that the car is
locked.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button of either front door indicates that all doors
are locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will
extinguish in both doors.
locking/unlocking*.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Rear door*
Lock indication setting
Remote control key
It is possible to select various options for how
the car confirms locking and unlocking in the
settings menu in the centre display.
To change the locking response setting:
The remote control key locks and unlocks the
doors and tailgate. The remote control key
needs to be inside the car for it to be started.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car
Locking.
3. Press Visible Locking Feedback to
select when the car is to give a visible
response:
• Lock
• Unlock
• Both
Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button for one of the doors indicates that the door
in question is locked. If any door is unlocked,
its lamp will extinguish while the others will
continue to illuminate.
Other indication
The home safe lighting and approach light
functions can also be activated when locking
and unlocking.
Related information
•
•
•
Lock indication setting (p. 239)
Approach light duration (p. 160)
Using home safe lighting (p. 159)
Or switch off the function by selecting
Off .
To change the setting for retractable rearview
mirrors* when locking:
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car
Convenience.
Mirrors and
3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate or deactivate the function.
Related information
•
Lock confirmation (p. 238)
Remote control key3 or key tag (Key Tag)*.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting since the car is equipped with
support for keyless starting (Passive Start) as
standard. You simply need to have the key in
the front part of the passenger compartment.
For cars equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking (Passive Entry)* the key can be anywhere in the car to start the car. In this case, a
slightly smaller, lighter key tag (Key Tag) is
also supplied.
The remote control keys can be linked to different driver profiles to save personal preferences in the car.
}}
* Option/accessory. 239
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Remote control key buttons
automatically when the button is held
depressed. The tailgate is also closed with
a long press – acoustic warning signals
sound.
Panic function – Used to attract attention in an emergency. Press and hold the
button for at least 3 seconds or press it
twice within 3 seconds to activate the
direction indicators and the horn. The
function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function
switches off automatically after 3 minutes.
The remote control key has four buttons - one on the
left-hand side and three on the right-hand side.
Locking – Pressing the button locks the
doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also
arms the alarm*.
Press and hold to close all of the windows
and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
Unlocking – Pressing the button unlocks
the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and
also deactivates the alarm.
A longer press opens all windows simultaneously. This total airing function can be
used, for example, to quickly air the car in
hot weather.
WARNING
If anyone is left in the car, make sure the
power windows and panoramic roof* are
de-energised by always taking the remote
control key with you when you leave the
car.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
•
A remote control key or key tag left in
the car will be deactivated when the
car is locked and the alarm is armed
using another valid key. The "Double
lock" function is also deactivated. The
key left behind is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
•
A Red Key left in the car will be deactivated even when the car is locked
using Volvo On Call, and reactivated
when the car is unlocked using Volvo
On Call or with another valid key.
Button-less key (Key Tag)*
The key tag provided with the keyless locking
and unlocking function works in the same way
as the standard remote control key as regards
keyless starting and locking and unlocking.
The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10
metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes. It has
no detachable key blade and the battery cannot be replaced.
Tailgate – Unlocks the tailgate only and
disarms its alarm. On cars with power
operated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened
3 The
240
figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Red Key - restricted remote control
key*
NOTE
When the remote control key is placed in
the cup holder, make sure that no other car
keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus
(e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or
chargers) are in the cup holder. Several car
keys close to each other in the cup holder
can cause interference with each other.
A Red Key is a key that makes it possible to
set restrictions for some of the car's properties, e.g. the car's maximum speed and the
loudspeaker system's maximum volume. A key
for any car owner who wants their car to be
driven responsibly even when someone else is
driving it.
Interference
Related information
Remote control key functions for keyless starting and keyless locking and unlocking* can be
disrupted by electromagnetic fields and
screening.
•
•
Starting the car (p. 440)
•
•
Remote control key range (p. 243)
•
•
•
Detachable key blade (p. 249)
NOTE
Avoid storing the remote control key close
to metal objects or electronic apparatus,
e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or
chargers - preferably no closer than
10-15 cm (4-6 inches).
The buttons on the remote control key can be
used to lock and unlock all doors and the tailgate simultaneously.
Locking with the remote control key
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 241)
Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 244)
Immobiliser (p. 252)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 136)
If there is still interference - use the remote
control key's detachable key blade to unlock
and then place the key in the backup reader in
the cup holder to disarm the car and allow the
car to be started.
4 If
Locking and unlocking with the
remote control key
the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking* then all side doors must be closed.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
–
Press the remote control key
lock the car.
button to
For the lock sequence to be activated, the
driver door must be closed4. If any of the other
doors or the tailgate are open, these are
locked and alarmed* only when they are
closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are
activated when all the doors and the tailgate
are closed and locked.
}}
* Option/accessory. 241
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Automatic relocking
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
•
•
A remote control key or key tag left in
the car will be deactivated when the
car is locked and the alarm is armed
using another valid key. The "Double
lock" function is also deactivated. The
key left behind is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
A Red Key left in the car will be deactivated even when the car is locked
using Volvo On Call, and reactivated
when the car is unlocked using Volvo
On Call or with another valid key.
Locking when the tailgate is open
NOTE
Unlocking with the remote control key
5 If
242
Press the remote control key
unlock the car.
When the remote control key does not
work
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and
making another unlock attempt.
button to
Settings for remotely controlled
and inside unlocking
It is possible to select different sequences for
remotely controlled unlocking.
To change setting:
1.
•
Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 242)
•
Unlocking the tailgate with the remote
control key (p. 243)
•
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
•
Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 251)
Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 244)
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car Locking
Interior Unlock.
Remote and
3. Select option:
• All Doors - unlocks all doors simultaneously.
If it is not possible to lock or unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be discharged - in which case, lock or unlock the
driver's door with the detachable key blade.
Related information
If the car has been locked while the tailgate is open, be careful not to leave the
remote control key in the cargo area when
the tailgate is closed and the car is completely locked5.
–
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car
from being left unlocked unintentionally.
•
Single Door - unlocks the driver's
door. Unlocking all of the doors
requires two presses on the remote
control key's unlock button.
The settings made here also affect central
unlocking via opening handles from the inside.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 241)
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 266)
the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.*
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Unlocking the tailgate with the
remote control key
2. With the power operated tailgate option* Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the
button
remote control key's
> The tailgate is unlocked and opened,
while the side doors remain locked and
their alarm functions armed.
It is possible to unlock just the tailgate by
pressing a button on the remote control key.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 241)
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 269)
Remote control key range
In order for the remote control key to work
properly it needs to be within a certain distance from the car.
For manual use
The remote control key's functions for e.g.
locking/unlocking that are activated by pressor
have a range that extends
ing on
approx. 20 metres (65 feet) from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being
pressed - move closer and try again.
For keyless* use
1.
butPress the remote control key's
ton.
> The tailgate is unlocked but remains
closed.
The side doors are still locked and the
alarm is armed*. The lock and alarm
indicator on the instrument panel extinguishes in order to show that the entire
car is not locked.
Lightly grasp the rubberised pressure
plate beneath the tailgate handle to
open the tailgate. If the tailgate is not
opened within 2 minutes then it is
relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered by the system's antennas.
For keyless use, a remote control key or the
button-less key (Key Tag) must be within a
semicircular area with a radius of approx.
}}
* Option/accessory. 243
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
1.5 metres (5 feet) on both long sides and
approx. 1 metre (3 feet) from the tailgate.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
The car can always be locked/unlocked
with the key blade.
Replacing the battery in the
remote control key
The battery in the remote control key needs
to be replaced when it has become discharged.
NOTE
All batteries have a limited service life and
must eventually be replaced (does not
apply to Key Tag). The service life of the
battery varies depending on how often the
vehicle/key is used.
If the remote control key is removed
from the car
If the remote control key is removed
from the car when the engine is running, the warning message Car key
not found Removed from car is
shown in the driver display and an acoustic
reminder sounds when the last door is closed.
The message extinguishes when the key is
returned to the car, followed by a press of the
right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last
door is closed.
Related information
•
•
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
Always try moving closer to the car and
making another unlock attempt.
The battery in the button-less key6 (Key Tag)
cannot be replaced - a new key can be
ordered from an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT
A discharged Key Tag must be handed
over to an authorised Volvo workshop. The
key must be deleted from the car since it is
still possible to use it to start the car via
back-up start.
The battery for the remote control key should
be replaced if
•
the information symbol illuminates and the
message Car key battery low is shown in
the driver display
•
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within
20 metres (65 feet) of the car.
Antenna locations for the start and lock
systems (p. 265)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 262)
6 Supplied
244
NOTE
with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Opening the key and changing the
battery
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom
edge by the key ring to the right. Slide the
front side's shell a few millimetres
upwards.
Turn the key, move the button to the
side and slide the back shell a few millimetres upwards.
Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the
battery cover anticlockwise until the markings meet at the OPEN text.
The shell will then come free and can
be lifted off the key.
Carefully lift away the battery cover by
pressing e.g. a fingernail into the recess.
Then prize the battery cover upwards.
The shell will then come free and can
be lifted off the key.
}}
245
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, subsection 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory
or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria.
The battery (+) side is facing upwards.
Then carefully prize loose the battery as
illustrated.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their
contact surfaces with your fingers as this
may impair their function.
Install a new battery with the (+) side up.
Avoid touching the remote control key's
battery contacts with your fingers.
Place the battery in the holder with the
edge down. Then slide the battery forwards so that it fastens under the two
plastic catches.
Press the battery down so that it fastens under the upper black plastic catch.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation
CR2032, 3 V.
246
Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise until the marking aligns with the
CLOSE text.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Ordering more remote control keys
Reposition the rear side's shell and
press it down until a clicking sound can be
heard.
Turn the remote control key over and
refit the front side's shell by pressing it
down until a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the
shell is properly positioned and securely
attached.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the
shell is securely attached.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the
environment.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 251)
•
•
Starting the car (p. 440)
The car is supplied with two remote control
keys. A button-less key is supplied if the car
is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*. Additional keys can be ordered.
A total of twelve keys can be programmed and
used for one single car. If additional keys are
ordered, additional driver profiles are added one per new remote control key. This also
applies for the key tag.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then a new
one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The
remaining remote control keys must be taken
to the workshop. The code of the missing key
must be erased from the system as a theft
prevention measure.
The current number of keys registered to the
car can be checked via driver profiles in the
centre display's top view, select Settings
System Driver Profiles.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
Remote control key (p. 239)
* Option/accessory. 247
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Red Key - restricted remote
control key*
A Red Key makes it possible for the car's
owner to set limitations for certain of the
car's properties. The limitations are intended
to encourage the car to be driven in a safe
manner, e.g. when being loaned out.
Driver profile for Red Key
Settings for Red Key*
A Red Key is connected to a special Red Key
driver profile, and when it is active, the key's
settings cannot be changed. It is not possible
to change to another driver profile either; this
requires a normal remote control key.
The holder of a regular remote control key
can change settings for a Red Key. However,
certain driver support functions are always
active.
The Red Key driver profile is activated when
the car is unlocked with a Red Key without a
normal remote control key in the vicinity.
1.
NOTE
In the event of a change of driver, the car
must be locked and unlocked in order to
activate a new driver profile.
Ordering Red Key
For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's
maximum speed, set speed reminders and
determine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume. In addition, some of the car's
driver support systems will always be active.
Other functions of the key are the same as
those of a normal remote control key.
The restrictions are intended to act as measures to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby
making it feel safer to hand over the car to e.g.
young drivers, valet parking or a workshop.
One or more Red Key can be ordered from a
Volvo dealer. A total of eleven keys with
restrictions can be programmed and used for
a single car - at least one must be a normal
remote control key.
Related information
•
•
Settings for Red Key* (p. 248)
Remote control key (p. 239)
To change setting:
Unlock the car with the normal remote
control key.
2. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
3. Press System Driver Profiles Red
Key.
> The following settings can be defined:
• Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise
Control*
• Reduced Maximum Volume
• Max Speed Limit
• Speed Limit Warning
Details and settings on first use
Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise Control
Set the time gap (1 is the shortest and 5 is
the longest gap).
On first use, the setting is 5.0.
Reduced Maximum Volume
Lower maximum volume for media
sources.
On first use, the function is "On".
248
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Max Speed Limit
Set a maximum speed for this key.
On first use, the function is "On" and the
speed is 120 km/h (75 mph).
•
Setting interval: 50-250 km/h
(30-160 mph)
•
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
Speed restriction symbol.
•
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
Detachable key blade
Road Sign Information*
The remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which a number of
functions can be activated and some operations carried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
Related information
•
Red Key - restricted remote control key*
(p. 248)
The key blade's application areas
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade
Speed Limit Warning
Warns when car moves above set values.
On first use, the function is "On" and the values are 50, 70 and 90 km/h (30, 45 and
55 mph).
•
•
•
Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
Max. number of simultaneous reminders:
6
•
the left-hand7 front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key
•
•
all doors are emergency-locked
the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated and deactivated.
The button-less key8 does not have a detachable key blade. If necessary, use the detachable
key blade from the normal remote control key.
Driver support functions
The following driver support functions will
always be active for the user of a Red Key:
•
•
•
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
Lane assistance (LKA)*
Distance Warning*
City Safety
}}
* Option/accessory. 249
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Detaching the key blade
Related information
Detach the key blade by angling it up.
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom
edge by the key ring to the right. Guide
the front side's shell a few millimetres
upwards.
The shell will then come free and can
be lifted off the key.
Return the key blade to its intended position in the remote control key after use.
Refit the shell by pressing it downward
until a clicking sound is heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the
shell is securely attached.
7 This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive.
8 Supplied with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.
250
•
Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 251)
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking and unlocking with the
detachable key blade
5. Pull out the handle.
> The door opens.
Amongst other things, the detachable key
blade can be used to unlock the car from the
outside - e.g. if the remote control key's battery has become discharged.
Locking will be performed in the same way,
but with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees
instead of clockwise in step (3).
Unlocking
Switch off the alarm and start the car*
NOTE
When the door is unlocked using the key
blade and is then opened, the alarm is triggered.
2. Then turn the start knob clockwise and
release it.
> The alarm signal stops sounding and
the alarm is switched off.
Locking
It is also possible to lock the car with the
remote control key's detachable key blade e.g.
in the event of a loss of power or if the key's
battery has become discharged.
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and
instead have a lock switch on the end of each
door which must be depressed using the key
blade - they are then mechanically locked/
blocked to prevent them being opened from
outside.
Pull out the front door handle on the lefthand side9 to its end position so that the
lock cylinder become visible.
The doors can still be opened from the inside.
Insert the key in the lock cylinder.
Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key
blade is pointing straight back.
Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting position. Remove the key from the
lock cylinder and release the handle so
that the rear section of the handle is resting against the car again.
9 This
applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive.
The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
Deactivate the alarm as follows:
1.
Place the remote control key on the key
symbol in the backup reader in the bottom
of the cup holder in the tunnel console.
}}
* Option/accessory. 251
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with
the child safety locks.
–
Remove the detachable key blade from
the remote control key. Insert the key
blade in the hole for lock reset and press
the key in until it bottoms, approx. 12 mm
(0.5 inches).
•
A door's lock reset only locks that particular door - not all doors simultaneously.
•
A manually locked rear door with activated manual or electric child safety
locks cannot be opened from either the
outside or the inside. A rear door that is
locked in this way can only be
unlocked with the remote control key
or central locking button.
Immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents an unauthorised
person from starting the car.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key.
The following error message in the driver display is related to the electronic immobiliser:
Symbol
Related information
•
•
•
Message
Specification
Car key not
found
Error reading the
remote control
key during starting - place the
key on the key
symbol in the cup
holder and try
again.
See
Owner's
manual
Starting the car (p. 440)
Detachable key blade (p. 249)
Activating and deactivating alarms*
(p. 278)
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
•
Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 244)
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside. To return to position A, the
inner door handle must be opened.
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
Related information
•
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
Ordering more remote control keys
(p. 247)
The doors can also be unlocked with the
unlock button on the remote control key or
with the central locking button on the driver's
door.
252
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Type approval for the remote
control key system
Type approval for the car's remote key system can be seen in the following tables.
Lock system keyless start (Passive
Start) and keyless locking/unlocking
(Passive Entry*)
For detailed information on type approval, go
to www.volvocars.com.
CEM marking for the remote control key system. For
supplementary type approval numbers, see following
tables.
Country/Area
Type approval
Europe
Delphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367 Wuppertal hereby declares that
this VO3-134TRX conforms to the essential property requirements
and other relevant provisions contained in directive 2014/53/EU
(RED).
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
Jordan
TRC/LPD/2014/250
Serbia
P1614120100
Argentina
CNC ID: C-14771
}}
* Option/accessory. 253
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Type approval
Brazil
MT-3245/2015
Indonesia
Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015
Malaysia
RAAT/37A/1215/S(15-5198)
Mexico
IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396
Russia
The United Arab Emirates
254
ER37847/15
DA0062437/11
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
Namibia
TA-2016-02
South Africa
TA-2014-1868
Remote control key
Country/Area
Type approval
Europe
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8423 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551
Velbert, Germany
Jordan
TRC/LPD/2015/104
}}
255
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Morocco
Type approval
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico
IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8423
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1)
es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2)
este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la
que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Namibia
256
TA-2015-102
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
Oman
Serbia
}}
257
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Type approval
South Africa
TA-2015-432
The United Arab
Emirates
Key Tag
Country/Area
Type approval
Europe
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8432 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551
Velbert, Germany
Jordan
258
TRC/LPD/2015/107
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Morocco
Type approval
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico
IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8432
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1)
es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2)
este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la
que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Namibia
TA-2015-103
}}
259
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Oman
Serbia
260
Type approval
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
South Africa
TA-2015-414
The United Arab
Emirates
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
261
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless and touch-sensitive
surfaces*
With the keyless locking and unlocking function, carrying the remote control key in a
pocket or bag will suffice. The car is locked or
unlocked via a touch-sensitive surface on the
door handle.
Touch-sensitive surfaces
Door handle
The outside of the door handles contains a
recess for locking, while the inside contains a
touch-sensitive surface for unlocking.
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
262
NOTE
It is important that only one touch-sensitive surface is activated at a time. Gripping
the handle while touching the lock surface
risks giving double commands. This means
that the requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not be executed, or will be executed with a delay.
Related information
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 264)
Tailgate handle
The tailgate handle has a rubberised pressure
plate that is only used for unlocking.
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated
in connection with car washing if the
remote control key is in range.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless locking and unlocking*
Keyless locking
Keyless unlocking
With keyless locking and unlocking, it is sufficient to touch the door handle's touch-sensitive surface to lock or unlock the car.
All side doors must be closed to be able to
lock the car. The tailgate, on the other hand,
can be open when locking the car with a side
door handle.
–
NOTE
One of the car's remote control keys must
be within range for locking and unlocking
to work.
–
Touch the marked surface towards the
rear on the outside of a door handle after
the door has been closed. Or press the
button on the underside of the tailgate before it closes.
> The lock indicator on the instrument
panel starts to flash to indicate the car
is locked.
To close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* simultaneously - place a finger against
the touch-sensitive recess on the outside of
the door handle and hold it there until all of the
side windows and the panoramic roof have
been closed.
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated
in connection with car washing if the
remote control key is in range.
Locking when the tailgate is open
If the car has been locked and the tailgate is
still open, make sure that the remote control
key is not left in the cargo area when the tailgate is closed.
NOTE
Grasp a door handle or gently press the
rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to unlock the car.
> The lock indicator on the instrument
panel stops flashing to indicate that the
car is unlocked.
Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate can only be
used for unlocking.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car
from being left unlocked unintentionally.
If the key is detected inside the car, the
tailgate will not lock when it is closed.
}}
* Option/accessory. 263
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Related information
•
•
•
Settings for Keyless entry* (p. 264)
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 264)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 262)
Settings for Keyless entry*
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
It is possible to select different sequences for
Keyless entry.
To change setting:
With keyless locking and unlocking, it is sufficient to touch the touch-sensitive surface on
the tailgate handle to unlock the tailgate.
1.
NOTE
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Tap on My Car
Unlock.
Locking
One of the car's remote control keys must
be within range behind the car for unlocking to work.
Keyless
3. Select option:
• All Doors - unlocks all doors simultaneously.
• Single Door - unlocks selected door.
Related information
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 262)
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
To open:
1.
264
Press gently on the rubberised pressure
plate beneath the tailgate handle.
> The lock is released.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
2. Lift by the outside handle in order to open
the tailgate.
IMPORTANT
•
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the
rubberised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the
rubber panel.
Antenna locations for the start and
lock systems
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should
not come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to
the keyless system's antennas with their
pacemaker. This is to prevent interference
between the pacemaker and the keyless
system.
An antenna for the keyless starting system
and antennas for the keyless locking system*
are built into the car.
Related information
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 262)
•
Remote control key range (p. 243)
It is also possible to unlock the tailgate handsfree with a foot movement under the rear
bumper, see separate section.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 262)
Antenna locations:
Under the cup holder in the front section
of the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the left-hand
rear door10
In the upper front section of the right-hand
rear door10
In the cargo area10
Remote control key range (p. 243)
Opening and closing the tailgate with foot
movement* (p. 273)
* Option/accessory. 265
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking and unlocking from inside
the car
Alternative unlocking method
Locking using a button in the front
door
The doors and tailgate can be locked and
unlocked from inside using the central locking controls in the front doors.
–
Central locking
Locking using a button in the rear
door*
Press the
button - both front doors
must be closed.
> All doors and the tailgate are locked.
Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the side
door11.
–
Locking and unlocking button with indicator lamp in
the front door.
Unlocking using a button in the front
door
–
10
11
12
266
Press the
button to unlock all side
doors and the tailgate.
Pull the opening handle on one of the side
doors and release.
> Depending on the settings in the
remote control key, either all doors will
be unlocked or only the selected door
will be unlocked and opened.
To change this setting, tap on Settings
My Car Locking Remote and
Interior Unlock in the centre display's
top view.
Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
The rear door lock buttons lock their respective rear door.
Unlocking the rear door
–
Pull the opening handle.
> The rear door is unlocked and opened12.
Only in cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
Provided that the child safety lock is not activated.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Related information
•
Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 242)
•
Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of
the car (p. 267)
•
Activating and deactivating child safety
locks (p. 268)
Unlocking the tailgate from the
inside of the car
The tailgate can be unlocked from inside by
pressing the button on the instrument panel.
–
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 266)
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 269)
Brief press on the
button on the
instrument panel.
> The tailgate can be unlocked and
opened from the outside by grasping
the rubberised pressure plate.
With the power operated tailgate option*:
–
Long press on the
button on the
instrument panel.
> The tailgate is opened.
* Option/accessory. 267
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
NOTE
The child safety locks prevent the rear doors
being opened from inside.
The child safety locks may be either manual or
electric*.
Activating and deactivating manual
child safety locks
•
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock
do not have a manual child lock.
Activating and deactivating electric*
child safety locks
The electric child safety locks can be activated
and deactivated in all ignition positions higher
than 0. Activation and deactivation can be
performed up to 2 minutes after switching off
the car, provided that no door is opened.
When the electric child safety lock is active
then the rear
•
windows can only be opened with the
driver's door control panel
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
To deactivate the locks:
–
Press the button in the driver's door control panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Deactivated and the
button's lamp goes out - the locks are
deactivated.
When the car is switched off, the current setting is stored – if the child safety locks are
activated when the car is switched off, the
function will continue to be activated next
time the car is started.
Manual child safety locks. Not to be confused with
manual door locks.
–
2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are
active.
Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
268
Button for electric activation and deactivation.
1.
Start the car or choose an ignition position
higher than 0.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Symbol
Message
Specification
Rear child
lock Activated
Child safety
locks are activated.
Rear child
lock Deactivated
Child safety
locks are deactivated.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 266)
•
Detachable key blade (p. 249)
Automatic locking when driving
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically when the car starts to move.
To change this setting:
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car
Locking.
Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate
Function where the tailgate can be opened
and closed at the touch of a button.
Opening
Choose one of the following options to open
the power operated tailgate:
3. Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving
to deactivate or activate this function.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 266)
–
Long press on the remote control key's
button. Keep it depressed until the
tailgate starts to open.
}}
* Option/accessory. 269
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
–
Long press on the instrument panel's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
starts to open.
–
Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
Press the
button on the underside of
the tailgate to close.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
remains unlocked.
–
Closing
Choose one of the following options to close13
the power operated tailgate:
NOTE
–
13
270
•
The button is active 24 hours after the
hatch has been left open. Thereafter, it
must be closed manually.
•
If the flap has been open for more than
30 minutes, it will close at a slow
speed.
Light press on the tailgate handle.
A car with keyless locking and unlocking* has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
–
Long press on the
button on the
remote control key.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound – the tailgate
remains unlocked.
–
Long press on the
button on the
instrument panel.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound – the tailgate
remains unlocked.
–
Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound – the tailgate
remains unlocked.
Closing and locking
IMPORTANT
During manual tailgate operation, open or
close it slowly. Do not use force to open/
close it if there is resistance. It may be
damaged and stop working correctly.
Cancel opening or closing
Press the
button on the underside of
the tailgate to close it and simultaneously
lock13 the tailgate and doors (all doors
must be closed for locking).
> The tailgate closes automatically – the
tailgate and doors are locked, and the
alarm* is armed.
–
NOTE
13
detected sufficiently close to the tailgate.
•
One of the car's remote control keys
must be within range for locking and
unlocking to work.
•
When using keyless* locking or closing,
three signals will sound if the key is not
A car with keyless locking and unlocking* has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
Cancel opening or closing in one of the following ways:
•
•
•
Press the button on the instrument panel.
Press the remote control key's button.
Press the closing button on the underside
of the tailgate.
•
Press the rubberised pressure plate
beneath the outside handle.
•
Using a foot movement*.
The tailgate's movement is interrupted and
stops. The tailgate can then be operated manually.
If the tailgate is stopped close to closed position, the next activation will open the tailgate.
}}
* Option/accessory. 271
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Pinch protection
Pre-tensioned springs
If something with sufficient resistance prevents the tailgate from opening or closing then
the pinch protection is activated.
•
•
Adapt the tailgate's opening position to low
roof height.
To adjust max. opening:
During opening - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal sounds.
1.
During closing - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal
sounds and the tailgate returns to the programmed max. position.
WARNING
Watch out for the risk of crushing when
opening and closing.
Open the tailgate - stop it in the open
position.
NOTE
It is not possible to program an opening
position lower than half-open tailgate.
The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated
tailgate.
WARNING
Check that there is nobody near the tailgate before starting to open or close it as a
crush injury may have severe consequences.
Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for
the power operated tailgate. They are pretensioned with high pressure and can
cause injury if opened.
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
Related information
272
Programming maximum opening
for power operated tailgate*
•
Programming maximum opening for
power operated tailgate* (p. 272)
•
Opening and closing the tailgate with foot
movement* (p. 273)
•
Remote control key range (p. 243)
button on the underside of
2. Press the
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two short acoustic signals sound to
indicate that the set position has been
saved.
To reset max. opening:
–
Manually move the tailgate to its highest
possible position – press and hold the
button on the tailgate for at least
3 seconds.
> Two acoustic signals sound to indicate
that the set position has been cleared.
The tailgate will then assume its maximum position when opened.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
•
If the system has been operating continuously for a long time, it is switched
off to avoid overload. It can be used
again after about 2 minutes.
Related information
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 269)
Opening and closing the tailgate
with foot movement*
A function which allows the tailgate to open
and close by moving a foot under the rear
bumper makes life easier when your hands
are full.
If the car is equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking* then you can unlock the tailgate
with a foot movement.
The function with both opening and closing of
the tailgate is also available when the car is
equipped with power operated tailgate*.
NOTE
The foot-operated tailgate function is available in two versions:
•
Opening and closing with foot movement
•
Only unlocking with foot movement
(lift up the tailgate manually to open it)
The sensor is located on left of centre in the bumper.
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range behind the car, approx. 1 metre
(3 feet), for opening and closing to be possible. This also applies to an already unlocked
car in order to avoid accidental opening e.g. in
a car wash.
Note that the function for opening and
closing with foot movement requires
power operated tailgate*.
}}
* Option/accessory. 273
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Opening and closing with foot
movement
Cancelling opening or closing with foot
movement
– Make one slow forward kicking motion
when opening or closing is in progress in
order to stop the movement of the tailgate.
•
Remote control key range (p. 243)
The remote control key does not have to be in
the vicinity of the car to cancel opening or
closing of the tailgate.
If the tailgate is stopped close to closed position, the next activation will open the tailgate.
NOTE
Kicking motion within the detector's activation area.
–
Make one slow, forward kicking motion
under the left part of the rear bumper.
Then take a step back. The bumper must
not be touched.
> A short acoustic signal sounds when
opening or closing is activated - the
tailgate is opened/closed.
If several kicking motions take place without
an approved remote control key being located
behind the car, opening will not be possible
until after a certain delay.
Do not leave your foot positioned under the
car during the kicking motion. This could
cause activation to fail.
274
There is a risk of reduced function, or no
function, if the rear bumper is loaded with
large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar.
For this reason, make sure you keep it
clean.
NOTE
Pay attention to the possibility that the system may be activated in a car wash or similar if the remote key is within range.
Related information
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 262)
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 269)
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Private locking
The tailgate can be locked with the private
locking function which prevents it from being
opened, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar.
The private locking function
button is located in the centre display function view.
Depending on the current
status of the lock, Private
Locking Unlocked or
Private Locking Locked is
shown.
Activating and deactivating private
locking
Private locking is activated with a function
button in the centre display and an optional
PIN code.
Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 275)
1.
Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
NOTE
The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a
minimum for the private locking function to
be activated.
Private locking has two codes:
•
A security code is created the first time
the function is used.
•
A new PIN code is selected every time the
function is activated.
Related information
•
To create a security code:
Enter the security code before using
for the first time
A security code needs to be selected during
the first time the function is used. It can then
be used to deactivate private locking if the
selected PIN code has been forgotten or lost.
The security code acts as a PUK code for all
subsequent PIN codes set for the private locking function.
Save the security code in a safe place.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the preferred security code and
press Confirm.
> The security code is saved. The private
locking function is now ready for activation.
Activate private locking
1.
Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
}}
275
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
2. Enter the code to be used in order to
unlock the tailgate after locking and tap on
Confirm.
> The tailgate is locked. Confirmation of
locking takes place by means of a
green indicator being shown by the
button in the function view.
Deactivate private locking
1.
Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the code that was used for locking
and tap on Confirm.
> The tailgate is unlocked. Confirmation
of unlocking takes place by means of
the green indicator by the button in the
function view extinguishing.
Forgotten PIN code
If the PIN code has been forgotten or the
wrong PIN code has been entered more than
three times, the security code can be used to
deactivate private locking.
14
276
If the car is unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the
Volvo On Call app, private locking will be
deactivated automatically.
Alarm*
The alarm provides audible and visual warnings if anyone enters the car without a valid
remote control key or manipulates the starter
battery or alarm siren.
When armed, the alarm is triggered if:
Forgotten security code
If the security code has also been forgotten,
contact an authorised Volvo dealer for help
with deactivating private locking.
•
Related information
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is
opened14
•
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
•
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
•
•
the starter battery's cable is disconnected
•
Private locking (p. 275)
the siren is disconnected.
Alarm signals
When the alarm has been triggered, the following happens:
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off.
•
Hazard warning flashers flash for
5 minutes or until the alarm is switched
off.
If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified,
the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times14.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Alarm indicator
ment - air currents are also registered. For this
reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left
with a window or the panoramic roof* open or
if the passenger compartment heater is used.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any
such attempts may affect the terms of the
insurance.
To avoid this:
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
•
•
•
LED not lit – alarm not armed.
The LED flashes once every other second
– alarm is armed.
After the alarm has been disarmed, the
LED flashes rapidly for a maximum of
30 seconds or until ignition position I has
been activated - the alarm has been triggered.
Movement and tilt sensors*
Movement and tilt sensors react to movements inside the car, if the window is broken
or if anyone tries to steal the wheels or tow
the vehicle away.
•
Close the window and panoramic roof
when leaving the car.
•
If the passenger compartment or parking
heater is to be used – direct the airflow
from the air vents so that they do not point
upwards in the passenger compartment.
Alternatively, use a reduced alarm level to
temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt
sensors.
Related information
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating alarms*
(p. 278)
Reduced alarm level* (p. 279)
Double lock* (p. 279)
Also switch off the movement and tilt sensors
when the car is being transported on a ferry or
train as these movements may affect the car
and trigger the alarm.
In the event of an alarm system fault
If there is a fault in the alarm system,
the driver display shows the symbol
and the message Alarm system
failure Service required. In which
case, contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The movement sensor triggers an alarm in the
event of movement in the passenger compart-
* Option/accessory. 277
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Activating and deactivating
alarms*
1.
The alarm is armed when the car is locked.
Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade.
> The alarm is triggered.
Arming the alarm
Lock and arm the car alarm as follows
•
press the remote control key's lock button
.
•
touch the marked surface on the outside
of the door handles or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate15.
If the car is equipped with both keyless locking/unlocking* and a power-operated tailgate*,
the
button on the underside of the tailgate can also be used to lock the car and arm
the car alarm.
A red LED on the instrument panel flashes once
every two seconds when the car is locked and the
alarm is armed.
Deactivate the alarm
Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows
•
press the remote control key's unlock button .
•
grip one of the door handles or press gently on the tailgate's rubberised pressure
plate15.
Deactivate the alarm without a functioning
remote control key
The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if
the remote control key does not work, e.g. if
the remote control key's battery is dead.
15
278
The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
2. Place the remote control key on the key
symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel
console's cup holder.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release
it.
> The alarm is deactivated.
Switching off a triggered alarm
–
Press the remote control key's unlock button or set the car in ignition position I by
turning the start knob clockwise and then
releasing.
Applies to cars with keyless locking and unlocking*.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Automatic arming and rearming of the
alarm
Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the
car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (which disarms the alarm) but none of the
doors or the tailgate is opened within two
minutes, then the alarm is automatically rearmed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Reduced alarm level*
Double lock*
A reduced alarm level means that the movement and tilt sensors are temporarily
switched off.
Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in
order to avoid accidental triggering of the
alarm - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or
during transport on a car train or car ferry.
Double lock means that all opening handles
are released mechanically when locking from
the outside, which makes it impossible to
open the doors from the inside.
Double lock is activated when locking with a
remote control key or with keyless locking*,
and takes place with a delay of approx.
10 seconds after the doors have locked. If a
door is opened within the delay time then the
sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.
Press the Reduced Guard
button in the centre display
function view to switch off
the movement and tilt sensors when subsequently locking the car.
In certain markets, the alarm is armed automatically after a certain delay after the driver's
door has been opened and closed without
being locked.
To change this setting:
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car
Locking.
3. Select Passive Arming Deactivation to
deactivate the function temporarily.
Related information
•
Alarm* (p. 276)
At the same time, the double lock function is
deactivated, i.e. unlocking from inside is possible.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again,
the reduced alarm level must be reactivated.
The car can only be unlocked with a remote
control key, keyless unlocking* or the Volvo
On Call* app when double lock is activated.
The front left door can also be unlocked with
the detachable key blade. If the car is
unlocked with the detachable key blade, the
alarm will be triggered.
NOTE
Related information
•
•
Alarm* (p. 276)
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
The alarm is triggered if anyone
attempts to open the doors from
inside.
Double lock* (p. 279)
}}
* Option/accessory. 279
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the function in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
Related information
•
Temporarily* deactivating double locks
(p. 280)
•
Alarm* (p. 276)
Temporarily* deactivating double
locks
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the double lock function should be deactivated, to allow unlocking from the inside.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the function in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again,
the double lock function must be deactivated
again.
The system is reset the next time the engine is
started.
Related information
•
•
Double lock* (p. 279)
Alarm* (p. 276)
Press the Reduced Guard
button in the centre display's
function view in order to
deactivate the double lock
function temporarily.
This also means that the alarm's movement
and tilt detectors* are switched off.
After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the
centre display and double locks are temporarily deactivated in the subsequent locking of
the car.
In conventional locking, the electrical sockets
are deactivated immediately, but when double
locks are temporarily deactivated, they will be
active for a maximum of 10 minutes after locking.
280
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driving support systems
The car is equipped with different driver support systems which can assist the driver in
different situations, either actively or passively.
For example, the systems can help the driver
to:
•
•
maintain a set speed
maintain a certain time interval to the vehicle ahead
•
prevent a collision by giving a warning to
the driver and braking the car
•
help the driver to park.
Some of the systems are fitted as standard
while others are options – which alternative
applies is market dependent.
Related information
282
•
IntelliSafe – driver support and safety
(p. 33)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Cornering support* (p. 325)
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
Speed-dependent steering force
Radar unit (p. 328)
Speed related power steering causes the
steering wheel force to increase with the
speed of the car so as to be able to give the
driver enhanced sensitivity.
On motorways the steering is firmer. When
parking and at low speed steering is light and
requires less effort.
Camera unit (p. 337)
City Safety™ (p. 343)
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 357)
BLIS* (p. 358)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 362)
Road Sign Information* (p. 366)
Driver Alert Control (p. 373)
Lane assistance (p. 375)
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 382)
Park Assist* (p. 388)
Park assist camera* (p. 393)
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 403)
NOTE
In rare situations the power
steering may become too hot and
then needs to be temporarily
cooled – during this time the
power steering operates with reduced
power and turning the steering wheel may
then be perceived to be slightly heavier.
Then the message Power steering
Assistance temporarily reduced and this
symbol are shown in the driver display.
While the power steering is working at
reduced power, the driver support functions and steering assistance system are
not available.
Speed limiter (p. 290)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 294)
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
Cruise control (p. 297)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
If the temperature increases too much, the
servo may be forced to switch off completely. In such a situation, the driver display shows the Power steering failure
Stop safely message, combined with a
symbol.
Change the steering force level*
Steering wheel resistance can be adjusted
when using INDIVIDUAL drive mode.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Select My Car Drive Modes
Steering Force.
Steering wheel resistance selection can only
be accessed if the car is stationary or is moving at low speed and in a straight line.
General speed warning1
Electronic stability control
At speeds between 80-120 km/h
(50-75 mph) the driver is warned by an acoustic signal every other minute.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC2) helps the
driver to avoid skidding and improves the
car's traction.
The driver display shows this
symbol when the system is
engaged.
At speeds above 120 km/h (75 mph) the
driver is warned by an acoustic signal every
other second.
Braking from the system may
be heard as a pulsing sound,
and the car may accelerate
more slowly than expected when applying the
throttle.
The system consists of the following subfunctions:
•
•
•
•
Stability function3
Spin control and traction control system
Engine Drag Control
Trailer stability assist
Related information
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Drive modes (p. 462)
1 Only applies to India.
2 Electronic Stability Control
3 Also known as Active Yaw Control.
}}
* Option/accessory. 283
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
•
•
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Stability function3
The function checks the driving and brake
force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.
3 Also known as Active Yaw Control.
4 Engine Drag Control
5 Trailer stability assist is included when
6 Trailer Stability Assist
284
Spin control and traction control
system
The function is active at low speed and brakes
the drive wheels that spin so that additional
traction shall be transferred from the drive
wheels that are not spinning.
The function can also prevent the driving
wheels from spinning against the road surface
during acceleration.
Related information
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating sport mode for
electronic stability control (p. 285)
•
Symbols and messages for electronic stability control (p. 287)
•
Trailer stability assist* (p. 488)
Engine Drag Control
Engine Drag Control (EDC4) can prevent involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down
or engine braking when driving in low gear on
slippery road surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car.
Trailer stability assist*5
Trailer stability assist (TSA6) stabilises a car
towing a trailer in situations where they begin
snaking.
NOTE
Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if ESC
Sport Mode is activated.
the Volvo genuine towbar is installed.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Electronic Stability Control in sport
mode
The stability system (ESC7) is always activated – it cannot be switched off. However,
the driver can select ESC Sport Mode,
which allows for a more active driving experience.
With the ESC Sport Mode subfunction
selected, intervention from the system is
reduced and the car is allowed to skid more
and greater control than normal is thus transferred to the driver.
When ESC Sport Mode is selected, the function can be considered as deactivated, despite
the function continuing to help the driver in
many cases.
NOTE
With ESC Sport Mode selected, Trailer
Stability Assist (TSA8) is deactivated.
ESC Sport Mode also provides more traction
even if the car has become bogged down or is
driving on a loose surface, such as in sand or
deep snow.
7 Electronic Stability Control
8 Trailer Stability Assist
9 Electronic Stability Control
Related information
•
•
•
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
Activating or deactivating sport mode for
electronic stability control (p. 285)
Trailer stability assist* (p. 488)
Activating or deactivating sport
mode for electronic stability
control
The stability system (ESC9) is always activated – it cannot be switched off. However,
the driver can select sport mode, which
allows for a more active driving experience.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
The driver display indicates activated
ESC Sport Mode by displaying this
symbol with a constant glow until
the function is deactivated or the
engine is switched off. The next time the
engine is started, the system is back in its normal mode again.
The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be
selected when one of the following functions
is activated:
}}
* Option/accessory. 285
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
•
•
•
•
Speed limiter
Cruise control
Adaptive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
Related information
286
•
Electronic Stability Control in sport mode
(p. 285)
•
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for
electronic stability control
be shown on the driver display. Here are
some examples.
A number of symbols and messages regarding electronic stability control (ESC10) can
Symbol
Message
Specification
Constant glow for approx. 2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light.
The system is being activated.
Constant glow.
Sport mode is activated. NOTE: The system is not deactivated in this mode – it is partly
reduced.
ESC
The system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is
reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
Temporarily off
ESC
The system is disengaged. Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Service required
A text message can be cleared by briefly
button, located in the centre
pressing the
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
10
If a message remains: Contact a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
Electronic Stability Control
287
DRIVER SUPPORT
Distance Warning*11
The Distance Warning function can assist the
driver to notice that the time interval to the
vehicle ahead may be too short. This requires
the car to be equipped with a head-up display* to be able to display Distance Warning.
the vehicle ahead travelling in the same direction. No distance information is provided for
oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may
make the visual warning signal in the windscreen difficult to recognise.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the
time the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot
Assist* is active.
Distance Warning symbol on the windscreen with
head-up display.
In cars equipped with head-up display, a symbol is shown on the windscreen for as long as
the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter
than the preset value. However, this assumes
that the Show Driver Support function is
activated via the settings in the car's menu
system.
Distance warning is active at speeds
above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to
11
288
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the time
window to the vehicle ahead is shorter
than the preset value – the speed of the
driver's vehicle is not affected.
Related information
•
•
•
•
First aid kit* (p. 604)
Activating or deactivating distance warning (p. 289)
Limitations of Distance Warning (p. 289)
Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 322)
Distance Alert
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 319)
Activating or deactivating distance
warning12
•
Head-up display* (p. 140)
The distance warning function can be deactivated. The function is only available in cars
that can show information on the windscreen
with a so-called head-up display*.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
Distance Warning is activated automatically
each time the engine is started.
Related information
•
•
12
13
Distance Alert
Distance Alert
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
Limitations of Distance Warning (p. 289)
Limitations of Distance Warning13
The distance warning function may have limitations in certain situations. The function is
only available in cars that can show information on the windscreen with a so-called headup display*.
WARNING
•
A vehicle's size may affect the ability to
be detected, e.g. motorcycles, which
could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter time window than
set or that the warning is temporarily
absent.
•
Extremely high speeds can cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter time
window than that set due to limitations
in radar unit range.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
}}
* Option/accessory. 289
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
•
•
•
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Speed limiter
A speed limiter (SL14) can be likened to a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set maximum speed by the speed
limiter.
: From active mode – deactivates/
changes the speed limiter to standby
mode
: Reduces stored maximum speed
Marker for stored max speed
The car's current speed
Stored maximum speed
Buttons and symbols for the function.
: Activates the speed limiter from
standby mode and resumes stored maximum speed
: Increases the stored maximum
speed
: From standby mode – activates the
speed limiter and stores current speed
14
290
Speed Limiter
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Limitations for speed limiter (p. 293)
Selecting and activating speed limiter
(p. 291)
Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 292)
Temporary deactivation of speed limiter
(p. 293)
•
Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 321)
Selecting and activating speed
limiter
•
Automatic speed limiter (p. 294)
The speed limiter function (SL15) must first be
selected and activated in order to be able to
regulate the speed.
The speed limiter cannot be activated until
after the engine has been started. The lowest
maximum speed that can be stored is
30 km/h (20 mph).
1.
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the symbol
(4).
for the speed limiter
> The symbol is grey – the speed limiter
is in standby mode.
2. When speed limiter is selected – press the
steering wheel button
(2) to activate.
> The symbol is white – the speed limiter
is started and the current speed is
stored as maximum speed.
}}
291
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
•
•
•
Speed limiter (p. 290)
Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 292)
Deactivating the speed limiter
The speed limiter
and switched off.
(SL16)
can be deactivated
Temporary deactivation of speed limiter
(p. 293)
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The symbol and indicators turn grey –
the speed limiter is set in standby mode
and the driver can exceed the set speed
limit.
2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator for speed limiter (4) are switched off
– which deletes the stored maximum
speed.
292
Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter
•
•
•
1.
15
16
Related information
Speed limiter (p. 290)
Selecting and activating speed limiter
(p. 291)
Temporary deactivation of speed limiter
(p. 293)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Temporary deactivation of speed
limiter
The speed limiter (SL17) can be temporarily
deactivated and set in standby mode.
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
The speed limiter can also be temporarily
deactivated and overridden with the accelerator pedal without the speed limiter first having
to be set in standby mode - e.g. to be able to
quickly accelerate the car out of a situation.
•
Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 292)
Limitations for speed limiter
Speed limiter (SL18) has certain general limitations.
On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter’s (SL19) braking effect may be inadequate
and hence the stored maximum speed may be
exceeded. In this case, the driver is alerted by
the message Speed limit exceeded in the
driver display.
NOTE
A text message that the maximum speed is
exceeded will be activated if the speed has
been exceeded by at least 3 km/h
(approx. 2 mph).
In which case, proceed as follows:
1.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
release it to interrupt acceleration when
the desired speed has been reached.
> In this mode, the speed limiter is still
activated and the driver display's symbol is therefore WHITE.
Related information
•
Speed limiter (p. 290)
2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when
the temporary acceleration is finished.
> The car is then engine-braked automatically to below the last stored maximum
speed.
Related information
•
•
17
Speed limiter (p. 290)
Selecting and activating speed limiter
(p. 291)
Speed Limiter
293
DRIVER SUPPORT
Automatic speed limiter
(ASL20)
The Automatic Speed Limiter
function helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum speed to the speed shown on the road
signs.
The Speed Limiter function (SL21) can be
changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL).
The automatic speed limiter uses speed information from the Road Sign Information*
(RSI22) function to automatically adapt the
car's maximum speed.
WARNING
Even if the driver clearly sees the speedrelated road sign, the speed information
from the Road Sign Information* (RSI)
function to ASL may be incorrect – in such
cases the driver must intervene him/herself
and accelerate or brake to a suitable speed.
18
19
20
21
22
294
WARNING
•
•
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
Is SL or ASL active?
Symbols in the driver display show which
speed limiter function is active:
Symbol
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
SL
ASL
✓
✓
A
✓
Sign symbol after "70" = ASL is
activated.
A
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby
mode.
Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter
Automatic Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter
Road Sign Information
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The ASL symbol
The sign symbol (displayed alongside the stored speed, "70", in the
centre of the speedometer) can be
shown in three colours with the following meanings:
Activating or deactivating the
automatic speed limiter
NOTE
The automatic speed limiter function (ASL23)
can be activated and deactivated as a supplement to the speed limiter (SL24).
Activating the automatic speed limiter
Colour of
sign symbol
Meaning
Greenish yellow
ASL is active
Grey
Orange
ASL has been set in
standby mode
ASL is in temporary
standby mode - e.g. due to
a traffic sign not being
read
Related information
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating the automatic
speed limiter (p. 295)
Changing the tolerance for the automatic
speed limiter (p. 296)
•
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 297)
•
•
Speed limiter (p. 290)
23
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
1.
> GREEN button indication – the function is activated and the driver display
shows a sign symbol in the centre of
the speedometer.
.
2. Press the steering wheel button
> ASL is activated with the car’s current
speed.
•
If the automatic speed limiter function
is activated, Road Sign Information* is
shown in the driver display even if
RSI25 is not activated.
•
To remove road sign information from
the driver display, you must deactivate
both automatic speed limiter and RSI.
•
When the Automatic Speed Limiter
function is activated but RSI is deactivated, no warnings are given from RSI.
RSI must also be activated in order to
receive warnings.
Deactivating the automatic speed
limiter
To deactivate the automatic speed limiter:
–
Tap on the button in the function view.
> GREY button indication – ASL is
switched off and SL is activated
instead.
WARNING
After switching from ASL to SL the car will
no longer follow the signed speed limit but
only the stored maximum speed.
Road Sign Information* (p. 366)
Automatic Speed Limiter
}}
* Option/accessory. 295
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
Speed limiter (p. 290)
•
•
•
Automatic speed limiter (p. 294)
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 366)
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 297)
Changing the tolerance for the
automatic speed limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter function
(ASL26) can be set for different tolerance levels. The tolerance is adjusted in the same way
as the speed setting is in the speed limiter.
If, for example, the car follows a signed speed
limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the driver can
instead choose to allow the car to maintain
75 km/h (47 mph).
–
Press the steering wheel button
(1)
until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of
the speedometer (2) changes to 75 km/h
(47 mph).
> After which, the car uses the selected
tolerance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as
signs passed are showing 70 km/h
(43 mph).
The tolerance is followed until a road sign with
a lower or higher speed is passed - then the
car follows the new signed speed limit instead
and the tolerance is deleted from the memory.
NOTE
The maximum selectable tolerance is
+/- 10 km/h (5 mph).
Related information
•
•
Buttons and symbols for the function.
24
25
26
296
•
Automatic speed limiter (p. 294)
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 297)
Road Sign Information* (p. 366)
Speed Limiter
Road Sign Information – RSI
Automatic Speed Limiter
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for automatic speed
limiter
Automatic speed limitation (ASL27) takes
place using speed information from the Road
Sign Information function* (RSI28) – not from
the speed limit road signs that the car
passes.
If road sign information cannot interpret and
provide speed information to the driver support systems, the automatic speed limiter sets
in standby mode and changes to normal
speed limiter. In such cases the driver must
intervene and brake to a suitable speed.
Cruise control
The cruise control (CC29) helps the driver
maintain an even speed, which can result in
more relaxed driving on motorways and long,
straight roads in regular traffic flows.
Overview
: From active mode – deactivates/
changes cruise control to standby mode
: Reduces stored speed
Marker for stored speed
The car's current speed
Stored speed
NOTE
In cars equipped with adaptive cruise control* (ACC30), it is possible to switch
between cruise control and adaptive cruise
control.
The automatic speed limiter will be reactivated
when road sign information can once again
interpret and provide speed information.
Related information
•
•
•
Speed limiter (p. 290)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 294)
Road Sign Information* (p. 366)
Buttons and symbols for the function.
: Activates cruise control from standby
mode and resumes stored speed
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode – activates
cruise control and stores current speed
27
28
29
30
Automatic Speed Limiter
Road Sign Information – RSI
Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control
}}
* Option/accessory. 297
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
To do so, proceed as follows:
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
–
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Related information
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Using engine braking instead of the
foot brake
With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with
less frequent application of the foot brake. On
a downhill gradient it may sometimes be
desirable to start moving a little faster and
limit the acceleration by engine braking. In this
case the driver can temporarily disable foot
brake application by Cruise Control.
298
•
•
•
•
•
•
Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway down and release.
> Cruise Control will disengage its automatic foot braking and then uses
engine braking only.
Selecting and activating cruise
control
The cruise control function (CC31) must first
be selected and activated in order to be able
to regulate the speed.
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 298)
Deactivating cruise control (p. 299)
Standby mode for cruise control (p. 300)
Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 321)
Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 306)
In order to start the cruise control from the
standby mode, the car's current speed must
be 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher.
1.
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the symbol
(4).
for cruise control
> The symbol is grey – cruise control is in
standby mode.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
2. When cruise control is selected – press
(2) to actithe steering wheel button
vate.
> The symbol is white – cruise control is
started and the current speed is stored
as maximum speed. The lowest speed
that can be stored is 30 km/h
(20 mph).
Deactivating cruise control
Cruise control
switched off.
(CC32)
can be deactivated and
Related information
•
•
Cruise control (p. 297)
Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 306)
•
Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 298)
•
Standby mode for cruise control (p. 300)
Reactivating cruise control to the last
stored speed
When cruise control is selected – press
to activate.
the steering wheel button
> The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour
from GREY to WHITE — the car will
now follow the most recently stored
speed again.
–
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
•
•
•
31
32
1.
(2).
Press the steering wheel button
> The symbol and indicators turn grey –
cruise control is set in standby mode.
2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator for cruise control (4) are switched
off – which deletes the stored maximum speed.
Cruise control (p. 297)
Deactivating cruise control (p. 299)
Standby mode for cruise control (p. 300)
Cruise Control
Cruise Control
* Option/accessory. 299
DRIVER SUPPORT
Standby mode for cruise control
(CC33)
Cruise control
can be deactivated and
set in standby mode. This can take place due
to driver intervention or automatically.
Standby mode means that the function is
selected in the driver display but not activated.
In this case, cruise control does not regulate
speed.
Standby mode on driver intervention
The cruise control is deactivated and set in
standby mode if any of the following occurs:
•
•
•
•
The foot brake is used.
Automatic standby mode
Automatic standby mode may occur if:
•
•
•
•
engine speed is too low/high
brake temperature is too high
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then control the speed himself/herself.
The adaptive cruise control (ACC35) helps the
driver to maintain an even speed combined
with a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.
An adaptive cruise control can provide a more
relaxing driving experience on long journeys on
motorways and long straight main roads in
smooth traffic flows.
Related information
•
•
The gear selector is moved to N position.
The clutch pedal is held depressed for
longer than 1 minute.
wheels lose traction
Adaptive cruise control*34
•
Cruise control (p. 297)
Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 298)
Deactivating cruise control (p. 299)
The driver maintains a speed higher than
the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then control the speed himself/herself.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the setting - the car returns to the last
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
33
34
35
300
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to
the vehicle ahead.
The driver selects the desired speed and a
time interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and radar unit detects a slower vehicle in
front of the car, the speed is adapted automatically via the preset time interval to the vehicle.
Cruise Control
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
When the road is clear again the car returns to
the selected speed.
If the cornering support* function is activated,
this may also affect the speed of the car.
WARNING
•
•
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Adaptive Cruise Control regulates the speed
with acceleration and braking. It is normal for
the brakes to emit a low sound when they are
being used to adjust the speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that
demand sudden braking the driver must brake
himself/herself. This applies in cases of large
speed differences or if the vehicle in front
brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the
radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or
not at all.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot
see any vehicle in front then the car will
instead maintain the speed set and stored by
the driver. This also takes place if the speed of
the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the
stored speed.
•
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 306)
•
Symbols and messages for adaptive
cruise control* (p. 308)
•
Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 319)
•
•
Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 322)
•
Automatic braking with driver support
(p. 323)
•
Change of target with driver support
(p. 320)
•
Overtaking Assistance (p. 327)
Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 321)
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components
must only be performed at a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Controls and display mode for adaptive
cruise control* (p. 302)
Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 303)
* Option/accessory. 301
DRIVER SUPPORT
Controls and display mode for
adaptive cruise control*36
Increases the time interval to vehicles
ahead
A summary of how adaptive cruise control
(ACC37) is controlled using the left-hand keypad on the steering wheel and how the function is shown in the display.
Reduces the time interval to vehicles
ahead
Related information
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 306)
Target vehicle indicator: the function has
detected and is following a target vehicle
at the preset time interval
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
Driver display
: From standby mode - activates and
stores the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes to standby mode
Indication of speeds.
: Activates the function from standby
mode and resumes stored speed
: Increases the stored speed
: Reduces stored speed
36
37
302
Stored speed.
Speed of vehicle ahead.
Current speed of your car.
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Selecting and activating adaptive
cruise control*38
•
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed
must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
Adaptive cruise control (ACC39) must first be
selected and then activated to enable it to
control speed and distance.
1.
Press the steering wheel button ◀ (2) or ▶
(3) to scroll to the adaptive cruise control
symbol
(4).
> The symbol is grey – the adaptive
cruise control is in standby mode.
Additional indicators in the driver
display
The time interval is only
adjusted to the vehicle ahead
by the ACC when the distance symbol shows two
vehicles.
2. When speed limiter is selected – press the
(1) to activate.
steering wheel button
> The symbol is white – the speed limiter
is started and the current speed is
stored as maximum speed.
Reactivating adaptive cruise control to
the last stored speed
When the adaptive cruise control is
selected – press the steering wheel butto activate.
ton
> The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour
from GREY to WHITE — the car will
now follow the most recently stored
speed again.
–
To start the function requires the following:
•
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of
the car, or the current speed must be at
least 15 km/h (9 mph).
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored speed, and the lower
speed is that of the vehicle
ahead (target vehicle).
Related information
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Deactivating adaptive cruise control*
(p. 304)
•
Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 306)
•
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 306)
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
38
39
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory. 303
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivating adaptive cruise
control*40
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control (ACC41) can be
deactivated and switched off.
•
With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must intervene and regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
•
When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too
close to a vehicle ahead, the driver may
be warned of the short distance by the
Distance Warning* function instead.
Standby mode for adaptive cruise
control*42
Adaptive cruise control (ACC43) can be deactivated and set to standby mode. This can
take place due to driver intervention or automatically.
Standby mode means that the function is
selected in the driver display but not activated.
Adaptive cruise control does not then regulate
the speed or distance to the vehicle in front.
Standby mode on driver intervention
Related information
•
•
1.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The symbol and indicators turn grey –
the adaptive cruise control is set in
standby mode. The indicator for time
interval and symbol for target vehicle, if
activated, are also switched off.
•
•
2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator for adaptive cruise control (4) are
switched off – which deletes the stored
maximum speed.
40
41
304
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 303)
Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 306)
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 306)
The adaptive cruise control is deactivated and
set in standby mode if any of the following
occurs:
•
•
•
•
The foot brake is used.
The gear selector is moved to N position.
The driver maintains a speed higher than
the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1
minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the setting - the car returns to the last
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
Automatic standby mode may occur if:
•
With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must intervene and regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
•
•
When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too
close to a vehicle ahead, the driver may
be warned of the short distance by the
Distance Warning* function instead.
•
the speed is below 5 km/h ((3 mph)) and
the vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
•
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
the driver opens the door.
Automatic standby mode
Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other
systems, e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC44.
If any of these other systems stops working,
adaptive cruise control is deactivated automatically.
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display.
•
42
43
44
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
the speed is below 5 km/h ((3 mph)) and
ACC is uncertain whether the vehicle
ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object,
such as a speed bump.
•
Deactivating adaptive cruise control*
(p. 304)
•
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 306)
the driver takes off the seatbelt.
engine speed is too low/high.
one or more wheels lose traction.
brake temperature is high.
the parking brake is applied.
the camera and radar unit is covered by
e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/
radio waves are blocked).
Related information
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 303)
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Adaptive Cruise Control
Electronic Stability Control
* Option/accessory. 305
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for adaptive cruise
control*45
WARNING
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC46) may have
limitations in certain situations.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on
level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the
vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill
slopes - in which case, be extra attentive and
ready to brake.
This is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible
and must intervene if the system does
not detect a vehicle ahead.
•
The function does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
•
Do not use the function in demanding
situations, such as in city traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a
lot of water or slush on the road, in
heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads or on slip roads.
Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car
has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to
the car.
Miscellaneous
Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected
when the adaptive cruise control is activated.
Change between cruise control
and adaptive cruise control*47 in
the centre display
When the normal cruise control (CC48) is
selected in the driver display, it is possible to
change to adaptive cruise control (ACC49) in
the centre display's function view.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – adaptive
cruise control is deactivated and normal
cruise control is set in standby mode.
•
GREY button indication – normal cruise
control is deactivated and adaptive cruise
control is set in standby mode.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
A symbol in the driver display shows which
cruise control is active:
Cruise control
(CC)
Related information
•
•
45
46
47
48
306
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
A
A
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
A
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby
mode
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Adaptive Cruise Control
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
49
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Cruise control (p. 297)
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory. 307
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for
adaptive cruise control*50
A number of symbols and messages regarding the adaptive cruise control (ACC51) can
be shown via the driver display and/or the
head-up display*.
In the following illustrative example, the road
sign information* (RSI52) function informs the
driver that the maximum permitted speed is
130 km/h (80 mph).
The previous illustration shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to
follow.
The previous illustration shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and at the same time is following a
vehicle ahead which is keeping the same
speed.
50
51
52
308
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Adaptive Cruise Control
Road Sign Information
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbol
Message
Specification
The symbol is WHITE.
The car is maintaining the stored speed.
Adaptive Cruise Contr.
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
Unavailable
The symbol is GREY.
Adaptive Cruise Contr.
Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The symbol is GREY.
Windscreen sensor
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
* Option/accessory. 309
DRIVER SUPPORT
Pilot Assist*53
Pilot Assist can help the driver to drive the
car between the lane's side markings using
steering assistance as well as to maintain an
even speed, combined with a preselected
time interval to the vehicle ahead.
How Pilot Assist works
The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended
for use on motorways and similar major roads
where it can contribute to more comfortable
driving and a more relaxed driving experience.
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to
the vehicle ahead and detects side markings.
Camera and radar unit
The driver selects the desired speed and a
time interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist
scans the distance to the vehicle ahead and
the lane's side markings on the road surface
using the camera and radar unit. The preset
time interval is maintained with automatic
speed adjustment whilst the steering assistance helps to position the car in the lane.
WARNING
Pilot Assist steering assistance is automatically deactivated and is resumed without
prior warning.
The current status of steering
assistance is indicated by the
colour of the steering wheel's
symbol:
If the cornering support* function is activated,
this may also affect the speed of the car.
Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into
account the speed of the preceding car and
the lane markings. The driver can at any time
ignore the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and steer in another direction, e.g. to
change lane or avoid an obstruction on the
road.
• GREEN steering wheel indicates active steering assistance
• GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indicates deactivated steering assistance.
If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambiguously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit
does not see the lane's side markings, Pilot
Assist temporarily deactivates steering assistance, but resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again - although the speed and distance control functions remain active. The
steering wheel vibrates slightly when deactivated temporarily in order to alert the driver to
the change.
Distance readers
Readers, side markings
53
310
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to
emit a low sound when they are being used to
adjust the speed.
Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed
smoothly. In situations that demand sudden
braking the driver must brake himself/herself.
This applies in cases of large speed differences or if the car in front brakes suddenly. Due
to the limitations of the camera and radar unit,
braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.
Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in
the same lane at a time interval set by the
driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle
in front then the car will instead maintain the
speed set and stored by the driver. This also
takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead
increases and exceeds the stored speed.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components
must only be performed at a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Round bends and when the road splits
Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who
should therefore not wait for the steering
assistance from Pilot Assist but should always
be prepared to increase his/her own steering
input, especially in bends.
•
When the car approaches an exit or if the
lane splits, the driver should steer towards
the desired lane in order to specify the
desired direction to Pilot Assist.
Pilot Assist strives to keep the car in
the middle of the lane
When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it strives to
position the car in between the lane markings
and therefore it is recommended to let the car
find a good placement to achieve as smooth a
driving experience as possible. The driver
checks that the car is positioned safely in the
lane, and always has the ability to adjust the
position by making his/her own steering corrections.
•
If Pilot Assist does not position the car in
an appropriate way in the lane, it is recommended to turn Pilot Assist off or switch
to adaptive cruise control*.
Hands on the steering wheel
In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver’s
hands must be on the steering wheel.
If Pilot Assist detects that the
driver is not holding the
steering wheel, the driver is
prompted after a pause to
actively steer the car, via a
symbol and a text message.
If the driver's hands still cannot be detected
on the steering wheel after a few seconds, the
prompt to actively steer the car is repeated,
supplemented by an acoustic warning signal.
If Pilot Assist cannot detect the driver's hands
on the steering wheel after a further few seconds, the warning signal becomes intensive
and the steering function is deactivated. Pilot
Assist must then be restarted using the steer.
ing wheel button
}}
* Option/accessory. 311
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 313)
•
•
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 316)
•
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 318)
•
Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 321)
•
•
Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 322)
•
Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 319)
•
Automatic braking with driver support
(p. 323)
•
Controls and display view for Pilot Assist*
(p. 312)
Controls and display view for Pilot
Assist*54
A summary of how Pilot Assist is controlled
using the left-hand keypad on the steering
wheel and how the function is shown in the
display.
Controls
: Increases the stored speed
: Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles
ahead
Reduces the time interval to vehicles
ahead
◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive
cruise control
Function symbol
Change of target with driver support
(p. 320)
Overtaking Assistance (p. 327)
: Activates Pilot Assist from standby
mode and resumes the stored speed and
time interval
Symbols for target car
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
Buttons and symbols for the function.
Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
assistance
▶: Switches from adaptive cruise control*
to Pilot Assist
: From standby mode - activates Pilot
Assist and stores the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes Pilot Assist to standby mode
54
312
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver display
Selecting and activating Pilot
Assist*55
•
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed
must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
Pilot Assist must first be selected and then
activated to be able to control speed and distance and to give steering assistance.
1.
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the symbol
for Pilot Assist
(4).
> The symbol is grey – Pilot Assist is in
standby mode.
2. When Pilot Assist is selected – press the
steering wheel button
(2) to activate.
> The symbol is white – Pilot Assist is
started and the current speed is stored
as maximum speed.
Indication of speeds.
Reactivating Pilot Assist to last stored
speed
Stored speed
–
Speed of vehicle ahead
Current speed of your car
Related information
•
55
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required
that:
•
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of
the car, or the current speed must be at
least 15 km/h (9 mph).
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
When Pilot Assist is selected – press the
to activate.
steering wheel button
> The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour
from GREY to WHITE — the car will
now follow the most recently stored
speed again.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
}}
* Option/accessory. 313
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Deactivate Pilot Assist*56
NOTE
Note that Pilot Assist only works when the
driver has hands on the steering wheel.
WARNING
Pilot Assist can be deactivated and switched
off.
Additional indicators in the driver
display
Pilot Assist only regulates the
time interval to the vehicle
ahead when the distance
symbol shows a vehicle (1)
above the steering wheel
symbol.
Pilot Assist steering assistance is only active
when the steering wheel symbol (2) has
changed from GREY to GREEN.
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored speed, and the lower
speed is that of the vehicle
ahead (target vehicle).
Related information
•
•
•
56
314
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 314)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 316)
•
With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the
driver must intervene and steer, regulating both speed and distance to the
vehicle ahead.
•
When Pilot Assist is in standby mode
and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of the
short distance by the distance warning* function instead.
Related information
•
•
1.
(2).
Press the steering wheel button
> The symbol and indicators turn grey –
Pilot Assist is set in standby mode. The
indicator for time interval and symbol
for target vehicle, if activated, are also
switched off.
2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator for Pilot Assist (4) are switched off
– which deletes the stored maximum
speed.
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 303)
•
Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 306)
•
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 306)
•
Temporary disabling of steering assistance
with Pilot Assist* (p. 316)
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Standby mode for Pilot Assist*57
WARNING
Pilot Assist can be deactivated and set in
standby mode. This can take place due to
driver intervention or automatically.
Standby mode means that the function is
selected in the driver display but not activated.
In this case, Pilot Assist does not regulate the
speed or distance to the vehicle in front, or
provide steering assistance.
Standby mode on driver intervention
Pilot Assist is deactivated and set in standby
mode if any of the following occurs:
•
•
•
The foot brake is used.
The gear selector is moved to N position.
The direction indicators are used for
longer than 1 minute.
•
The driver maintains a speed higher than
the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
•
The clutch pedal is depressed for
approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with
manual gearbox.
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display.
•
Automatic standby mode may occur if, for
example:
•
•
•
the driver opens the door.
•
•
•
•
•
the parking brake is applied.
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and
Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an
object, such as a speed bump.
Automatic standby mode
Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems,
e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC58. If any of
these other systems stops working, Pilot
Assist is deactivated automatically.
57
58
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
brake temperature is high.
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and
the vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot
Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.
•
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 313)
Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 314)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 316)
the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel.
engine speed is too low/high.
the driver takes off the seatbelt.
one or more wheels lose traction.
the camera and radar unit is covered by
e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/
radio waves are blocked).
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Electronic Stability Control
* Option/accessory. 315
DRIVER SUPPORT
Temporary disabling of steering
assistance with Pilot Assist*59
Pilot Assist steering assistance can be temporarily disabled and resumed without prior
warning.
When the direction indicators are used, Pilot
Assist steering assistance is temporarily disengaged. When this is no longer the case,
steering assistance is automatically reactivated if the lane's side markings can still be
detected.
Limitations of Pilot Assist*60
The Pilot Assist function may have limitations
in certain situations.
The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can
help the driver in many situations. But the
driver is at all times responsible for maintaining a safe distance to surrounding objects and
a correct position in the lane.
If Pilot Assist is unable to interpret the lane
clearly, e.g. if the camera or radar unit is
unable to see the side markings for the lane,
Pilot Assist temporarily disables steering
assistance – speed and distance regulation
functions remain active. Steering assistance is
resumed when the lane can be interpreted
again. In these situations, slight vibration in
the steering wheel may alert the driver to the
fact that steering assistance has been deactivated temporarily.
Related information
•
•
•
•
59
60
316
WARNING
In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering
assistance may have difficulty helping the
driver in the right way or it may be automatically deactivated - in which case, the
use of Pilot Assist is not recommended.
Examples of such situations may be that:
•
the lane markings are worn, missing or
cross each other.
•
lane division is unclear, for example,
when the lanes divide or merge or at
exits or in the event of multiple sets of
markings.
•
edges or other lines than lane markings
are present on or near the road, e.g.
kerbs, joints or repairs to the road surface, edges of barriers, roadside edges
or strong shadows.
•
•
•
the lane is narrow or winding.
the lane contains ridges or holes.
weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain,
snow or fog or slush or impaired view
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 313)
Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 314)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 316)
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
with poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet road surface etc.
•
The driver should also note that Pilot Assist
has the following limitations:
•
•
High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers, etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they may be detected incorrectly
as lane markings, with a subsequent
risk of contact between the car and
such obstacles. The driver must ensure
him/herself that the car is at a suitable
distance from such obstacles.
The camera and radar sensor does not
have the capacity to detect all oncoming objects and obstacles in traffic
environments, e.g. potholes, stationary
obstacles or objects which completely
or partially block the route.
•
Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.
•
The recommended steering input is
force limited, which means that it cannot always help the driver to steer and
keep the car within the lane.
•
In cars equipped with Sensus
Navigation*, the function has the
option of using information from map
data, which may result in varied performance.
Pilot Assist is switched off if the power
steering for speed related steering
force is working with reduced power –
e.g. during cooling due to overheating.
WARNING
Pilot Assist must only be used if there are
clear lane lines painted on each side of the
lane. All other use involves increased risk of
contact with surrounding obstacles that
cannot be detected by the function.
WARNING
•
•
•
This is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible
and must intervene if the system does
not detect a vehicle ahead.
The function does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
Do not use the function in demanding
situations, such as in city traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a
lot of water or slush on the road, in
heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads or on slip roads.
The driver always has the possibility of correcting or adjusting a steering intervention
imposed by Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to the desired position.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily
intended for use when driving on level road
surfaces. The function may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes in which case, be extra attentive and ready to
brake.
Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy
load or a trailer is connected to the car.
NOTE
Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the
car's electrical system.
Miscellaneous
Off Road drive mode cannot be selected
when Pilot Assist is activated.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
}}
* Option/accessory. 317
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
•
•
•
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Drive modes (p. 462)
Symbols and messages for
Pilot Assist*61
A number of symbols and messages regarding Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver
display and/or the head-up display*.
In the following illustrative example, the road
sign information (RSI62) function informs the
driver that the maximum permitted speed is
130 km/h (80 mph).
The previous illustration shows that Pilot
Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph)
and at the same time is following a vehicle
ahead which is keeping the same speed.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance
since the lane's side markings cannot be
detected.
The previous illustration shows that Pilot
Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph)
and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance
since the lane's side markings cannot be
detected.
61
62
318
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Road Sign Information
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The previous illustration shows that Pilot
Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph)
and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides steering assistance as the
lane markings can be detected.
Related information
•
•
Warning from driver support in the
event of a collision risk
The driver support systems of adaptive cruise
control* and Pilot Assist* can warn the driver
if the distance to the vehicle ahead suddenly
becomes too short.
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 316)
The previous illustration shows that Pilot
Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph)
and at the same time is following a vehicle
ahead which is keeping the same speed.
Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assistance since the lane's side markings can be
detected.
Audio and symbol for collision warning.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a
risk of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision
Distance measurement with the camera
and radar unit
Adaptive cruise control and Pilot Assist use
approx. 40% of the capacity of the foot brake.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily
than the driver support is capable of and the
driver does not brake, the warning lamp and
}}
* Option/accessory. 319
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
acoustic warning are activated to alert the
driver that immediate intervention is required.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may
make the visual warning signal in the windscreen difficult to recognise.
WARNING
The driver support systems only warn of
vehicles which their radar unit has detected
– hence a warning may not be given, or it
may be given with a certain delay. Never
wait for a warning. Apply the brakes when
the situation requires.
Change of target with driver
support
The driver supports of adaptive cruise control* and Pilot Assist*, in combination with
automatic transmission, have a change of target function at certain speeds.
Change of target
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen.
In cars equipped with a head up display*, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a
flashing symbol.
320
When the driver supports are following
another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h
(20 mph) and changes target vehicle – from a
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle – the
driver supports will slow down for the stationary vehicle.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
When the driver supports are following
another vehicle at speeds in excess of
approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target
is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the driver supports will
ignore the stationary vehicle and instead
accelerate to the stored speed.
•
Set the stored speed for driver
support
•
It is possible to set stored speed for the
speed limiter, cruise control, adaptive cruise
control* and Pilot Assist* functions.
If the driver increases the car's speed using
the accelerator pedal before pressing the
steering wheel button
(1), the speed
stored will be the car's speed when the button
is depressed, provided the driver's foot is on
the accelerator pedal at the moment when the
button is depressed.
The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the setting - the car returns to the last
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
The driver supports are disengaged and set in
standby mode:
•
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h
((3 mph)) and the driver supports are
uncertain whether the target object is a
stationary vehicle or another object, such
as a speed bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h
((3 mph)) and the vehicle ahead turns off
so that the driver supports no longer have
a vehicle to follow.
Related information
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
: Increases the stored speed.
: Reduces stored speed.
Stored speed.
–
Change a set speed with short presses on
(1) or
the steering wheel buttons
(2) or by pressing and holding them.
•
Short presses: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
•
Press and hold: Release the button
when the speed indicator (3) has
moved to the desired speed.
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
Automatic gearbox
The driver support functions can follow
another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed is
30 km/h (20 mph) – even though it is capable
of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a
speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot
be selected/stored.
}}
* Option/accessory. 321
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Manual gearbox
the driver support functions can follow
another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h
(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h (87 mph).
The lowest programmable speed is 30 km/h
(20 mph) – the maximum speed is 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Speed limiter (p. 290)
Set time interval to vehicle ahead
NOTE
It is possible to set the time interval to the
vehicle ahead to be maintained by the adaptive cruise control*, Pilot Assist* and Distance
Warning* functions.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
driver display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the
longer the time interval. One
line represents about 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines represents
about 3 seconds.
When the symbol in the driver display
shows two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front at a pre-set time interval.
When only one car is shown, there is no
vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead.
Cruise control (p. 297)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display
shows a car and a steering wheel, Pilot
Assist follows a vehicle in front at a preset
time gap.
When only one steering wheel is shown,
there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead.
Control for time interval.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
–
322
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2)
to increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the
current time interval.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary significantly in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the
vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably. At
low speed, when the distances are short, the
adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
NOTE
•
The higher the speed the longer the
calculated distance in metres for a
given time interval.
•
Only use the time intervals permitted
by local traffic regulations.
•
If the driver supports do not seem to
respond with a speed increase when
activated, it may be because the time
window to the vehicle ahead is shorter
than the set time window.
WARNING
•
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
•
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action in an
unexpected traffic situation.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Automatic braking with driver
support
The driver supports of adaptive cruise control* and Pilot Assist* have a special brake
function in slow traffic and while stationary.
Brake function in slow queues and
while stationary
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed
approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before
the vehicle in front starts moving again then
the driver support function is set in standby
mode with automatic braking.
–
The function is reactivated in one of the
following ways:
•
•
Press the steering wheel button
.
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The function resumes following the
vehicle ahead if it starts moving forward within approx. 6 seconds.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
}}
* Option/accessory. 323
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
Driver supports only warn of obstacles
which their radar unit has detected –
hence a warning may not be given, or it
may be given with a certain delay.
•
Never wait for a warning or intervention. Apply the brakes when the situation requires.
NOTE
The driver supports can hold the car stationary for a maximum of 5 minutes – then
the parking brake is applied and the function is disengaged.
Before the driver supports can be reactivated, the parking brake must be released.
Cessation of automatic braking
In some situations, automatic braking ceases
on coming to a standstill and the function is
set in standby mode. This means that the
brakes are released and the car may start to
roll - the driver must therefore intervene and
brake the car himself/herself to keep it stationary.
•
the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R
position
•
the driver sets the function in the standby
mode.
Automatic activation of parking brake
In certain situations, the parking brake is
applied in order to keep the car stationary.
This takes place if the function is holding the
car stationary with the foot brake and:
•
the driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seatbelt
•
the function has kept the car stationary for
more than approx. 5 minutes
•
•
the brakes have overheated
The driver can select different driving styles
for how driver support should maintain the
preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Selection is made via the drive mode control
DRIVE MODE.
Select one of the following options:
• Pure – The driver support focuses on
good fuel economy, which means longer
time interval to the vehicle ahead.
• Hybrid – The driver support focuses on
following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible.
• Power – The driver support focuses on
following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead more closely, which in certain
cases may mean heavier acceleration and
braking.
the driver switches the engine off manually.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Drive mode for driver support
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
•
•
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
Brake functions (p. 445)
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Drive modes (p. 462)
Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 322)
This may take place in the following situations:
324
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
the parking brake is applied
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cornering support*63
Curve Speed Assist can help the driver to
reduce speed ahead of sharper bends if the
preset speed for the driver support adaptive
cruise control* or Pilot Assist* is estimated as
being too high.
The calculation is made using information
from map data in the car's satellite navigator
Sensus Navigation*. After the bend has been
passed, the car resumes the previously preset
speed.
In connection with the function reducing the car's speed,
this symbol is shown in the
driver display.
The driver can cancel the function at any time
by choosing to brake or by using the accelerator pedal.
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
Drive modes (p. 462)
Drive modes
Assistance during cornering depends on the
drive mode set. If the drive mode options are
unavailable, the function selects the Comfort
option. Using the Dynamic option, the car
negotiates bends with sporty characteristics
and with slightly more powerful acceleration
out of the bends.
63
This function is only available in certain markets.
* Option/accessory. 325
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating or deactivating
cornering support*
The cornering support function can be activated as a complement to the adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist*. The driver can also
choose to deactivate the function.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
During subsequent engine starting, the last
used setting is reactivated or settings are followed that were made in the driver profile
linked to the key used64.
Related information
•
•
64
65
326
Cornering support* (p. 325)
Limitations for cornering support*
(p. 326)
Limitations for cornering support*
The cornering support function may have limitations in certain situations. This function is
only available in certain markets.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of limitations.
•
Cornering support may have limited performance on smaller roads and in built-up
areas.
•
On slip roads or intersections, the cornering support may be switched off temporarily.
•
If the satellite navigator65 map data is not
updated, cornering support may have limited functionality.
•
If the satellite navigator65 does not have
contact with the satellite system, cornering support may have limited functionality.
•
On new or rebuilt roads, map data may be
incorrect.
•
When calculating a suitable cornering
speed, any risk of reduced traction due to
adverse weather or road conditions is not
included.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information
•
•
Cornering support* (p. 325)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
These options are market-dependent.
Only with Volvo's satellite navigator Sensus Navigation* installed.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Overtaking Assistance
WARNING
Overtaking Assistance can help the driver
when overtaking other vehicles. The function
can be used with adaptive cruise control* or
Pilot Assist*.
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
How overtaking assistance works
When adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist is
following another vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to overtake by activating
the direction indicator66, the systems help by
accelerating the vehicle towards the vehicle
ahead before the driver's vehicle reaches the
overtaking lane.
•
The function then delays reducing speed in
order to avoid premature braking when the
driver’s car is approaching a slower vehicle.
The function remains active until the driver’s
vehicle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is
used to indicate a change of lane or exit to
another road – the car will then accelerate
briefly.
66
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Use Overtaking Assistance
Overtaking assistance can be used with
adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist*. There
are a number of criteria if Overtaking Assistance is to be used.
The following conditions must exist for Overtaking Assistance to be activated:
•
there must be a vehicle in front (the “target vehicle”)
•
your car's current speed is
at least 70 km/h (43 mph)
•
the stored speed must be high enough
for overtaking to take place safely.
To start the Overtaking Assistance:
–
Activate the direction indicator.
Use the left-hand direction indicator in a
left-hand drive car right in a right-hand
drive car.
> Overtaking Assistance is started.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Use Overtaking Assistance (p. 327)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
}}
* Option/accessory. 327
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
When using the Overtaking Assistance
System, the driver should be aware that
there may be undesired acceleration if the
conditions suddenly change.
Radar unit
Related information
The radar unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of sensing
other vehicles.
•
•
Some situations should therefore be avoided, such as if:
•
the car is approaching an exit for turnof that is in the same direction as overtaking would normally occur.
•
the vehicle ahead slows down before
the driver's car has crossed over into
the overtaking lane.
•
the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
down.
•
a right-hand drive car is driven in a
county with left-hand traffic (or vice
versa).
Situations of this type are avoided by temporarily setting adaptive cruise control or Pilot
Assist to standby mode.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
328
Overtaking Assistance (p. 327)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
•
Recommended maintenance for camera
and radar unit (p. 342)
•
Type approval for radar device (p. 329)
Radar unit location.
The radar unit is used by the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
Distance Warning*
Adaptive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
Lane assistance
City Safety
Modification of the radar unit could result in its
use being illegal.
Standby mode for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 304)
Standby mode for Pilot Assist* (p. 315)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Type approval for radar device
Here you can find type approval for the car's
radar units for adaptive cruise control*
(ACC67), Pilot Assist* and BLIS*68.
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
✓
Botswana
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência
a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
✓
Modelo: L2C0054TR
4122-14-8645
Brazil
EAN: (01)07897843840855
✓
Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode
causar interferência em sistemas devidamente autorizados.
03563-17-05364
67
68
Adaptive Cruise Control
Blind Spot Information
}}
* Option/accessory. 329
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
Hereby, Delphi Electronics and Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
2014/53/EU (RED). The original declaration of conformity can be accessed at the following
link www.delphi.com/automotive-homologation.
✓
Frequency Band: 76GHz – 77GHz
Maximum Output Power: 55dBm EIRP
The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E.
Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
Europe
Hereby, Hella KgaA Hueck & Co., declares that RS4 is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU.
✓
The Declaration of conformity may be consulted at Hella KGaA Hueck & Co., Rixbecker
Straße 75/ 59552 Lippstadt, Germany and on the website www.hella.com/vcc.
Frequency Band: 24050-24250 MHz
Maximum Output Power: 20 dBm EIRP
The United
Arab Emirates
(UAE)
Ghana
330
Registered No: ER37536/15
✓
Dealer No: DA37380/15
✓
✓
Registered No: ER53878/17
Dealer No: DA44932/15
NCA Approved: 1R3-1M-7E1-0B7
DRIVER SUPPORT
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
37295/POSTEL/2014
✓
4927
Certificate number: 50459/SDPPI/2017
Indonesia
Country of origin Germany
✓
Certificate number: 53578/SDPPI/2017
Country of origin China
PLG ID: 6051
✓
Jamaica
✓
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Jordan
✓
✓
Malaysia
This product contains a Type Approved Module by Jamaica: SMA – “RS4”.
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
CID F 15000578
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Morocco
✓
NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
}}
331
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
✓
Symbol
Type approval
IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0299
Radar de corto alcance
RS4
Hella KGaA Hueck & Co
Mexico
✓
IFETEL: RLVHERS17-0286
La operación de este equipo esta sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que
este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo
debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
Moldova
332
✓
✓
Nigeria
✓
Oman
✓
Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the Nigerian
Communications Commission.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
Type approval
✓
Russia
✓
Serbia
И011 14
✓
✓
Singapore
И011 17
DA 105753
✓
✓
South Africa
Symbol
DA 103238
TA-2014/1824
✓
TA-2016/3407
}}
333
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
Certification No.
✓
MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR
South Korea
MSIP-CMM-HLA-RS4
✓
✓
이 기기는 무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판 매자 또는 사용 자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바 라
며, 가정외의 지역에서 사용 하는 것을 적으 로 합니다
CCAB15LP0560T3
CCAB17LP0470T5
Taiwan
334
✓
警語 經型式認證合格之低 率射頻電機,非經許可,公司 商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率
大 率或變更原設計之特性及 能 低 率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法
通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應立即停用 ,並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用 前項合法通信,指依
電信法規定作業之無線電通信 低 率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波輻
射性電機設備之干擾
DRIVER SUPPORT
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
є, щ
Delphi
(
✓
ь
)
ь
є
RACAM/SRR2
КМ № 679
24
Delphi
: Delphi.
(П
П
2009 .)
: 24,05 – 24,25
П
Ukraine
✓
ь
: 20 Б (
.) EIRP
HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA
є, щ
є
2014/53/Є . П
www.hella.com/vcc
RS4
ь
:
: 24,05 – 24,25
П
Vietnam
✓
Zambia
✓
ь
: 20 Б (
.) EIRP
}}
335
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Type approval for radio equipment
Market
Symbol
Europe
Type approval
Hereby, Volvo cars, declares that all radio equipment's are in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU.
R 204-750001
Japan
This device is granted pursuant to the Japanese Radio Law and the Japanese Telecommunications Business Law. This
device should not be modified (otherwise the granted designation number will become invalid).
For detailed information on type approval, go
to support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
•
•
•
336
Radar unit (p. 328)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
BLIS* (p. 358)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Camera unit
Related information
The camera unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of for example
detecting lane lines or traffic signs.
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
Recommended maintenance for camera
and radar unit (p. 342)
Location of the camera unit.
The camera unit is used by the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
Lane assistance*
Steering assistance at risk of collision
City Safety
Driver Alert Control*
Road Sign Information*
Active main beam*
Park Assist*
* Option/accessory. 337
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for camera and radar
unit
The camera and radar unit has certain limitations – which in turn also limit those functions that use the unit. A driver should be
aware about the following examples of limitations.
Camera and radar
Blocked unit
The camera unit is placed inside the upper
section of the windscreen together with the
car's radar unit.
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
inside or outside of the windscreen, in front of
or around the camera and radar unit – this
may interfere with camera and radar-based
functions. This may result functions being
reduced, being switched off completely or giving incorrect function responses.
If the driver display shows this symbol and the message "Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual", this means that
the camera and radar unit cannot detect other
vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and large animals in front of the car, and that the car's
camera-based and radar-based functions may
be disrupted.
The marked area must be cleaned regularly and kept
free from stickers, objects, shade film, etc.
338
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown,
along with the appropriate action:
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is
dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera
and radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the
camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cause
Action
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the
radar signals or camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered
road surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the
camera and radar unit.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Strong oncoming light
No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light conditions.
High temperature
At very high temperatures the camera and
radar unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera and radar unit restarts automatically when
the temperature has fallen sufficiently.
The following is also applicable so as not to
risk incorrect function for the driver supports
that use the radar unit:
•
Damaged windscreen
NOTE
If not rectified it can lead to reduced performance for the driver support systems
that use the camera and radar unit. This
may result functions being reduced, being
switched off completely or giving incorrect
function responses.
69
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If a scratch, crack or stone chip appears
on the windscreen in front of any of the
"windows" for the camera and radar unit
and covers an area of
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
more, a workshop69 must be contacted so
that the windscreen can be replaced.
•
Volvo recommends not repairing cracks,
scratches or stone chips in the area in
front of the camera and radar unit – the
entire windscreen should be replaced
instead.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact a
workshop69 to verify that the correct
windscreen has been ordered and will be
fitted.
•
The same type of windscreen wipers or
windscreen wipers approved by Volvo
must be fitted when the windscreen is
replaced.
•
When replacing the windscreen, the camera and radar unit must be recalibrated by
a workshop69 to ensure the functionality
of all the camera and radar-based systems
in the car.
Radar
Vehicle speed
The radar unit's ability to detect a vehicle
ahead is greatly reduced if the speed of the
vehicle ahead is very different to the speed of
your own car.
}}
339
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Limited field of vision
The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not
detected, or the detection is made later than
expected.
vehicle that drives in between your car and
the vehicle ahead.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the
lane can remain undetected.
In bends, the radar unit may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
Low trailers
dust storms and snow flurries. Under such
conditions, the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or
temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface,
dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings
can also significantly reduce camera function
when it is used to scan the carriageway to
detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals and
other vehicles.
Low trailer in radar shadow.
Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar
unit to detect, or are not detected at all - the
driver should therefore be particularly careful
when driving behind low trailers when the
adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* is activated.
The radar unit's field of vision.
Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting vehicles at close distances - e.g. a
340
Camera
Impaired vision
The cameras have limitations similar to the
human eye, i.e. may "see" worse in for example intense snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist camera*
Blind sectors
Defective camera
If a camera sector is black
and contains this symbol
then it means that the camera is out of order.
brightness and quality. Poor light conditions
can result in reduced image quality.
Rear parking camera
WARNING
The following illustration
shows an example.
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a
trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward
are switched off and will not warn of any
obstacles.
There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields
of vision.
In the park assist camera's 360° view* obstacles/objects may "vanish" in the gaps
between the individual cameras.
WARNING
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if
it only looks like a relatively small part of
the image is obscured, a relatively large
sector could be hidden from view. An
obstacle could thereby go undetected until
the car is very close to it.
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted
on the rear of the car could obscure the
camera's view.
The car's left-hand camera is out of order.
A black camera sector is also shown in the following instances, but then without the symbol for defective camera:
•
•
•
open door
open tailgate
Related information
•
•
•
folded-in door mirror.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions.
Because of this, the image may vary slightly in
•
Camera unit (p. 337)
Radar unit (p. 328)
Recommended maintenance for camera
and radar unit (p. 342)
Park assist camera* (p. 393)
* Option/accessory. 341
DRIVER SUPPORT
Recommended maintenance for
camera and radar unit
Related information
•
•
•
In order that the camera and radar unit shall
function correctly, they must be kept clear of
dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly
with water and car shampoo.
•
NOTE
Camera unit (p. 337)
Radar unit (p. 328)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
Park assist camera* (p. 393)
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may cause incorrect warning signals,
reduced or no function.
Location of rear radar units. Keep the surface indicated clean – on both the left and right-hand sides of
the car.
Location of the parking sensors.
•
To ensure best possible functionality, the
surfaces in front of the sensors must be
kept clean.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
the area of the sensors.
•
Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - be careful
not to scratch the lenses.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components
must only be performed at a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
342
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety™
Safety70
City
can use lights, sound and a
brake pulse warning to alert the driver to
pedestrians, cyclists, larger animals and vehicles that appear suddenly.
The function helps the driver by automatically
braking the car in the event of an imminent
risk of collision if the driver does not react in
time by braking and/or swerving.
WARNING
City Safety activates a short, sharp braking
procedure, normally stopping the car just
behind the vehicle in front.
City Safety is activated in situations where the
driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
City Safety is designed to be activated as late
as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention. Automatic braking takes place
only after or at the same time as the collision
warning.
Location of the radar unit.
City Safety can help to prevent a collision or
reduce the collision speed.
City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at
risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal, cyclist or a vehicle.
The City Safety function can help the driver to
avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g.
when changes in the traffic ahead, combined
with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
70
The function is not available in all markets.
The driver or passengers are not normally
aware of City Safety - it only intervenes in a
situation where a collision is immediately
imminent.
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Subfunctions for City Safety (p. 344)
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety (p. 346)
}}
343
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 347)
•
City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles
(p. 352)
•
Automatic braking in the event of an impeded evasive manoeuvre with City Safety
(p. 352)
•
•
•
•
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 350)
City Safety steering assistance for evasive
manoeuvre (p. 351)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 353)
Messages for City Safety (p. 356)
Subfunctions for City Safety
City
can help the driver to avoid a
collision with a vehicle, a cyclist, a pedestrian
or a larger animal in front by reducing the
car's speed with the auto-brake function.
If the speed difference is greater than the following specified speeds, the City Safety autobrake function cannot prevent a collision but
mitigates the consequences of it.
Vehicles
For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce
the speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).
cyclists
For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed
by up to 50 km/h (30 mph).
Pedestrians
For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed
by up to 45 km/h (28 mph).
Large animals
In the event of a risk of a collision with a large
animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed
by up to 15 km/h (9 mph).
The brake function for large animals is primarily intended to reduce the force of the impact
at higher speeds and is most effective at
speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less
effective at lower speed.
71
344
The function is not available in all markets.
Subfunctions for City Safety
Safety71
Function overview.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a
risk of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision
Distance measurement with the camera
and radar unit
City Safety carries out three steps in the following order:
1.
Collision warning
2. Brake support
3. Auto Brake
The following text explains what happens during the three steps:
DRIVER SUPPORT
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision.
In cars equipped with a head up display*, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a
flashing symbol.
large animals that are crossing the road in
front of the car.
In the event of a risk of collision with a pedestrian, larger animal, cyclist or vehicle/vehicles
the driver's attention is alerted by means of a
visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning.
There is no brake pulse warning at lower
speeds, sudden driver braking or acceleration.
The brake pulse frequency varies according to
the car's speed.
2 - Brake support
If the risk of collision has increased further
after the collision warning then the brake support is activated.
Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking
action if the system considers that the braking
is not sufficient to avoid a collision.
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen.
3 - Auto Brake
The automatic brake function is activated last.
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may
make the visual warning signal in the windscreen difficult to recognise.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started
to take evasive action and the risk of collision
is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place irrespective
of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking
then takes place with full brake force in order
to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake
force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
vehicles that are stationary or moving in the
same direction as the car and are ahead. City
Safety can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or
The seatbelt tensioner can be activated in connection with the engagement of the automatic
brake function.
NOTE
In some situations, the action of Auto-brake
may begin with light braking and then progress to full brake action.
When City Safety has prevented a collision
with a stationary object, the car remains stationary in anticipation of positive action by the
driver. If the car has been braked to avoid collision with a slower vehicle in front, its speed is
reduced to match that of the vehicle in front.
NOTE
On cars with manual gearbox, the engine
stops when the Auto-brake function has
stopped the car, unless the driver has managed to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
The driver can always interrupt a braking intervention by firmly depressing the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE
When City Safety brakes, the brake lights
come on.
When City Safety is activated and brakes the
vehicle, the driver display shows a text message to the effect that the function is/has
been active.
}}
* Option/accessory. 345
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
City Safety must not be used by the driver
to change his/her driving style - the driver
must not rely on City Safety alone and
allow it to do the braking.
Setting the warning distance for
City Safety
City Safety72 is always activated but the
driver can select the warning distance for the
function.
NOTE
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
The City Safety function cannot be deactivated. It is activated automatically when
the engine/electric operation is started and
remains switched on until the engine/electric operation is switched off.
City Safety™ (p. 343)
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 350)
City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles
(p. 352)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 353)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50)
When warnings are perceived as being too
frequent or disturbing, the warning distance
can be reduced, which reduces the total number of warnings and instead leads to City
Safety giving a warning at a later stage.
The Late warning distance should therefore
only be used in exceptional cases, as in
dynamic driving.
The warning distance determines the sensitivity of the system and regulates the distance at
which a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning should be deployed.
To select warning distance:
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
in the centre display's top view.
2. Under City Safety Warning, select Late,
Normal or Early to set the desired warning distance.
If the Early setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in
certain situations, the Normal or Late warning distance can be selected.
72
346
The function is not available in all markets.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
•
No automatic system can guarantee
100% correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never test City Safety by
driving at people, animals or vehicles this may cause severe damage and
injury and risk lives.
•
City Safety warns the driver when
there is a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten the driver’s reaction time.
•
Even if the warning distance has been
set to Early warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles ahead
suddenly brake heavily.
•
73
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for
Rear Collision Warning* is deactivated if
the warning distance for collision warning
in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
Related information
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 343)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 353)
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 357)
Detection of obstacles with City
Safety
City Safety73 can help the driver to detect
vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians.
Vehicles
City Safety detect most vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as the
driver's own car. This function can also detect
oncoming vehicles and cross traffic in certain
cases.
In order that City Safety shall be able to detect
a vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and
rear lights must be working and clearly illuminated.
With the warning distance set at Early,
the warnings will come more in
advance. This may mean that the warnings come more frequently than at the
warning distance Normal, but it is recommended since it can make City
Safety more effective.
The function is not available in all markets.
}}
* Option/accessory. 347
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Cyclists
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all cyclists in all
situations and, for example, cannot see:
•
•
Examples of what City Safety interprets as a cyclist
— with clear body outline and bicycle outline.
Good performance requires that the system
function that detects a cyclist must receive the
clearest possible information about the body
and bicycle outline, requiring the ability to
identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders,
legs, upper and lower body plus a normal
human pattern of movement.
partially obscured cyclists.
cyclists if the background contrast of
the cyclist is poor – warning and brake
interventions may then be late or not
occur at all.
•
cyclists wearing clothing that obscures
the body outline.
•
bicycles loaded with large objects.
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety
distance adapted to the speed.
Pedestrians
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle
are not visible to the function's camera then
the system cannot detect a cyclist.
For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle
designed for adults.
Examples of what the system regards as pedestrians
with clear body outlines.
348
Good performance requires that the system
function that detects a pedestrian must
receive the clearest possible information about
the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and
lower body plus a normal human pattern of
movement.
In order that it shall be possible to detect a
pedestrian there must be a contrast with the
background and this will be affected by such
things as clothes, the background and the
weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian
may either be detected late or not at all, which
may mean that warnings and braking are late
or omitted.
City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
Large animals
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all pedestrians in
all situations and, for example, cannot see:
•
•
•
City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all large animals
in all situations and, for example, cannot
see:
partially obscured pedestrians, people
in clothing that hides their body contour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm
(32 in.).
pedestrians if the background contrast
of the pedestrians is poor - warning
and brake interventions may then be
late or not occur at all.
pedestrians who are carrying larger
objects.
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety
distance adapted to the speed.
Examples of what City Safety interprets as large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with clear
body outline.
Good performance requires that the system
function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk
and horse) must receive the clearest possible
information about the body outline, requiring
the ability to identify the animal directly from
the side in combination with what is a normal
pattern of movement for the animal.
If parts of the animal's body are not visible to
the function's camera then the system cannot
detect the animal.
•
•
partially obscured large animals.
•
•
large animals that run or move quickly.
•
small animals such as dogs and cats,
for example.
larger animals seen from the front or
from behind.
large animals if the background contrast of the animals is poor - warning
and brake interventions may then be
late or not occur at all.
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety
distance adapted to the speed.
Related information
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 343)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 353)
City Safety can also detect large animals in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps.
349
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety in cross traffic
•
Safety74
City
can help the driver when turning
and crossing the path of another oncoming
vehicle at an intersection.
Sector in which City Safety can detect
oncoming crossing vehicles.
For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle
on a collision course, the oncoming vehicle
must first enter the sector in which City Safety
can analyse the situation.
Related information
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 343)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 353)
Limitations for City Safety in cross
traffic
In some cases City Safety may have difficulty
helping the driver deal with collision risks due
to oncoming cross traffic.
Examples are:
•
stability control ESC intervenes in the
event of slippery driving conditions
•
The following further criteria must also be fulfilled:
if the oncoming vehicle is detected too
late
•
•
your car must be travelling at no less than
4 km/h (3 mph)
if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by
something
•
•
your car must turn to the left in markets
with right-hand traffic (or to the right in
left-hand traffic)
if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps
switched off
•
if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpredictable manner, for example, abruptly
changes lanes at a late stage.
74
350
the oncoming vehicle must have its headlamps switched on.
The function is not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information
•
•
•
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 350)
City Safety steering assistance for
evasive manoeuvre
helps to straighten the car again after passing
the obstacle.
City Safety steering assistance can help the
driver to steer away from a vehicle/obstacle
when it is not possible to avoid a collision
simply by braking. City Safety steering assistance cannot be switched off, it is always
activated.
City Safety steering assistance can detect:
Limitations of City Safety (p. 353)
•
•
•
•
vehicles
cyclists
pedestrians
larger animals.
Related information
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 343)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 353)
Your car steers away
Slow moving/stationary vehicles or obstacles.
City Safety engages by amplifying the driver's
steering input, which only occurs after the
driver has begun an evasive manoeuvre - and
then only if the driver is not steering enough to
avoid a collision.
In parallel with the amplified steering input,
the brake system is also used to further
amplify the steering input. The function also
351
DRIVER SUPPORT
Automatic braking in the event of
an impeded evasive manoeuvre
with City Safety
City Safety75 has the facility to assist the
driver by automatically braking the car earlier
when it is not possible to avoid a collision by
only steering away.
City Safety assists the driver by continuously
attempting to anticipate whether there are
"escape routes" to the side in case a slow or
stationary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late
stage.
City Safety does not intervene with the autobrake function as long as the driver him/
herself has the opportunity to avoid a collision
via a steering manoeuvre.
However, if City Safety anticipates that an
evasive manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an adjacent lane, the function can assist
the driver by automatically starting to brake at
an earlier stage.
City Safety brakes for oncoming
vehicles
City Safety can assist the driver to use emergency braking for an oncoming vehicle in
your car's lane.
If an oncoming vehicle enters your car's lane
and a collision is unavoidable, City Safety can
reduce the car's speed with a view to reducing
the violence of the impact.
Related information
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 343)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 353)
Your car
Oncoming vehicles
Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle
ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier.
Your car
Slow/stationary vehicle
75
352
The function is not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
For this function to work, the following criteria
must be met:
•
your car must be travelling at more than
4 km/h (3 mph)
•
•
the road section must be straight
•
your car must be positioned straight in its
own lane
•
the oncoming vehicle must be within your
car's lane markings
•
the oncoming vehicle must have its headlamps switched on
•
this function can only handle "front to
front" collisions
•
this function can only detect vehicles with
four wheels.
your car's lane must have clear lane markings
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions due to
an impending collision with an oncoming
vehicle always come very late.
Related information
•
•
76
77
City Safety™ (p. 343)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 353)
The function is not available in all markets.
Electronic Stability Control
Limitations of City Safety
Safety76
The City
function may have limitations in certain situations.
Surroundings
Low objects
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than
the bonnet limit the function.
Skidding
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance
is extended, which may reduce the capacity of
City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the anti-lock brakes and the stability
control ESC77 are designed to give the best
possible braking force with maintained stability.
Oncoming light
The visual warning signal in the windscreen
may be difficult to notice in the event of strong
sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are
being worn or if the driver is not looking
straight ahead.
Heat
In the event of high passenger compartment
temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight,
the visual warning signal in the windscreen
may be temporarily disengaged.
The camera and radar unit's field of view
The camera's field of vision is limited, which is
why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and
vehicles in some situations cannot be
detected, or they are detected later than
anticipated.
Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others and if it is dark, motorcycles may be
detected late or not at all.
If a text message in the driver display indicates
that the camera and radar unit is obstructed,
City Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large animals, cyclists, vehicles or road
lines ahead of the car. This means that the
functionality of City Safety may be reduced.
However, an error message is not shown in all
situations where the windscreen sensors are
obstructed. The driver must therefore take
care to keep the area of windscreen in front of
the camera and radar unit clear.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components
must only be performed at a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
}}
353
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Driver intervention
Reversing
When your own car is reversing, City Safety is
temporarily deactivated.
Low speed
City Safety is not activated at very low speeds
- below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system
therefore does not intervene in situations
where your car is approaching a vehicle ahead
very slowly, e.g. when parking.
Active driver
Driver commands are always prioritised,
which is why City Safety does not intervene or
postpone warning/intervention in situations
where the driver is steering and accelerating in
a decisive manner, even if a collision is
unavoidable.
Miscellaneous
WARNING
WARNING
•
Warnings and brake interventions
could be implemented late or not at all
if a traffic situation or external influences mean that the camera and radar
unit cannot detect pedestrians,
cyclists, large animals or vehicles correctly.
•
For vehicles to be detected at night,
their headlamps and rear lamp cluster
must be switched on and shining
clearly.
•
The camera and radar unit has a limited
range for pedestrians and cyclists. The
system can provide effective warnings
and brake interventions as long as the
relative speed is below 50 km/h
(30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds
up to 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for large animals is less than 15
km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved at
vehicle speeds above 70 km/h
(43 mph). The warning and brake intervention for large animals is less effective at lower speeds.
•
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles and large animals could be
Driver supports only warn of obstacles
which their radar unit has detected –
hence a warning may not be given, or it
may be given with a certain delay.
•
Never wait for a warning or intervention. Apply the brakes when the situation requires.
Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore delay a collision warning and intervention
in order to minimise unnecessary warnings.
354
DRIVER SUPPORT
disengaged due to darkness or poor
visibility.
•
•
•
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
Do not place, stick or mount anything
on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera
and radar unit — this can interfere with
camera-dependent functions.
Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of
the camera sensor may reduce its functionality, fully deactivate it or give
incorrect function response.
WARNING
•
•
The City Safety auto-brake function
can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed, but to ensure full brake
performance the driver should always
depress the brake pedal – even when
the car auto-brakes.
The warning and steering assistance
are only activated if there is a high risk
of collision – you must therefore never
wait for a collision warning or for City
Safety to intervene.
•
The warning and brake intervention for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
•
City Safety does not activates any
auto-brake functions in the event of
heavy acceleration.
play's Settings menu, the car is not equipped
with this function.
Search path in the top view of the centre display:
•
Settings
My Car
IntelliSafe
Related information
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 343)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Market limitation
City Safety is not available in all countries. If
City Safety does not appear in the centre dis-
355
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for City Safety
A number of messages regarding City Safety
can be shown in the driver display. Here are
some examples.
Message
Specification
City Safety
When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be
illuminated in connection with a text message being shown.
Automatic intervention
City Safety
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Reduced functionality Service
required
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information
•
356
City Safety™ (p. 343)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Rear Collision Warning*78
WARNING
Warning79
The Rear Collision
(RCW) function
can help the driver to avoid being hit by a
vehicle approaching from behind.
Drivers in vehicles behind can be warned
about an imminent collision by the function
flashing intensively with the direction indicators.
If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the
function detects that the car is in danger of
being hit from behind, the seatbelt tensioners
may tension the front seatbelts. The Whiplash
Protection System is also activated in the
event of a collision.
•
Rear collision warning.
The function is not available in all markets.
Rear collision warning.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
In certain cases the Rear Collision Warning
(RCW) may have difficulty helping the driver
in the event of a collision risk.
This can, for example, be if:
•
the vehicle approaching from behind is
detected too late
•
the vehicle approaching from behind
changes lane at the last moment
•
a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system - the
function is then deactivated automatically.
NOTE
In certain markets, RCW does not give a
warning with the direction indicators due
to local traffic regulations - in such cases,
this part of the function is deactivated.
Related information
•
•
78
79
80
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
Immediately before a collision from behind,
this function may also activate the foot brake
in order to reduce the forward acceleration of
the car during the collision. However, the foot
brake is only activated if the car is stationary.
The foot brake releases immediately if the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
This function is activated automatically each
time the engine is started.
•
Limitations of Rear Collision
Warning*80
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning*
(p. 357)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 45)
}}
* Option/accessory. 357
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for
Rear Collision Warning* is deactivated if
the warning distance for collision warning
in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late".
BLIS*
The BLIS81 function is intended to help the
driver detect vehicles diagonally behind and
to the side of the car so as to provide assistance in heavy traffic on roads with several
lanes in the same direction.
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
NOTE
Principle of BLIS
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Zone in blind spot
Zone for quickly approaching vehicle.
The system is designed to react when:
Related information
•
•
•
81
358
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 357)
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety (p. 346)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
Location of BLIS lamp.
BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning
of:
•
•
vehicles in the car's blind spot
quickly approaching vehicles in the left
and right lanes closest to the car.
•
•
your car is overtaken by other vehicles
another vehicle is quickly approaching
your car.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the
indicator lamp on the door mirror on the affected side illuminates with a constant glow. If
the driver activates the direction indicator on
the same side as the warning, the indicator
lamp will change over from a constant glow to
flashing with a more intense light.
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
BLIS is active when the driver's vehicle is travelling at a speed above 10 km/h (6 mph).
WARNING
If passing vehicles drive more than 15 km/h
(9 mph) faster than the driver's vehicle, BLIS
will not react.
NOTE
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle.
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
•
•
82
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating BLIS
The BLIS82 function can be activated or deactivated.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
If BLIS is activated when starting the engine,
the function is confirmed by the door mirror
indicator lamps blinking once.
If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was
switched off, it will continue to be deactivated
when the engine is next started and no indicator lights will then be illuminated.
Related information
•
•
BLIS* (p. 358)
Limitations of BLIS (p. 360)
Activating or deactivating BLIS (p. 359)
Limitations of BLIS (p. 360)
Messages for BLIS (p. 361)
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory. 359
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of BLIS
WARNING
The BLIS83 function may have limitations in
certain situations.
•
•
BLIS does not work on sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is
reversing.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information
Keep the surface indicated clean – on both the left
and right-hand sides of the car84.
•
•
BLIS* (p. 358)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
Examples of limitations:
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may reduce the functions and deactivate
alerts.
•
The BLIS function is automatically deactivated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is
connected to the car's electrical system.
•
For good performance of BLIS, there
should be no bicycle rack, luggage carrier
or similar mounted on the car's towbar.
83
84
360
Blind Spot Information
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for BLIS
A number of messages regarding BLIS85 can
be shown in the driver display. Here are some
examples.
Message
Specification
Blind spot sensor
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Service required
Blind spot system off
BLIS and CTAB have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
Trailer attached
A
B
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Cross Traffic Alert*
A text message can be cleared by briefly
button, located in the centre
pressing the
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information
•
•
85
BLIS* (p. 358)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 362)
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory. 361
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cross Traffic Alert*86
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a driver support
that supplements BLIS87 and is designed to
help the driver detect traffic crossing behind
the car when it is reversing.
The auto-brake subfunction can help the
driver to stop the car in the event of a risk of
collision with an unobserved vehicle.
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and
pedestrians.
CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or
if reverse gear has been selected.
If CTA senses that something is approaching
from the side, this is also indicated with:
•
an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in
the left-hand or right-hand speaker
according to the direction from which the
object approaches.
•
an illuminated icon in the Park Assist
System graphic on the screen.
•
an icon on the Park assist camera top
view.
Examples of areas where CTA can assist the driver to
detect obstacles during reversing.
CTA supplements BLIS by detecting the
approach of crossing traffic during reversing,
such as when reversing out of a parking
space.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In
favourable conditions it may also be able to
86
87
362
Illuminated icon for CTA in the Park Assist
System graphic on the screen.
If the driver does not observe the warning
from CTA and a collision is unavoidable, the
auto-brake function takes effect to stop the
car, after which the driver display shows an
explanatory text message on why the car was
braked.
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating Cross Traffic
Alert* (p. 363)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 363)
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 365)
BLIS* (p. 358)
Park Assist* (p. 388)
Activating or deactivating Cross
Traffic Alert*88
The driver can select to switch off the warning in the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function –
the auto brake subfunction cannot be
switched off, however, and continues to be
active.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – warning signal
and indication on display for the function
is deactivated.
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert*89
The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function with
auto-brake may have limited functionality in
certain situations. Brake intervention is active
at speeds below 15 km/h.
WARNING
The auto-brake subfunction can only
detect and brake for other vehicles that are
moving – not for stationary obstacles, a
cyclist or a pedestrian, for example.
CTA has a certain limitation – the CTA sensors
cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or
obstructions, for example.
Here are some examples of situations where
CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited
and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
The function is activated automatically each
time the engine is started.
Related information
•
•
88
89
Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 362)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 363)
}}
* Option/accessory. 363
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
object changes and the blind sector rapidly
decreases.
Examples of further limitations
• The auto-brake subfunction only detects
moving vehicles and therefore cannot
"see" and brake for stationary obstacles, a
cyclist or a pedestrian, for example.
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may reduce the functions and deactivate
alerts.
•
CTA is automatically deactivated if a
trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected
to the car's electrical system.
•
For good performance of CTA, there
should be no bicycle rack, luggage carrier
or similar mounted on the car's towbar.
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information
In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely
“blind” on one side.
Blind CTA sector.
•
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 362)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”.
However, as your car slowly reverses, the
angle it makes with the obstructing vehicle/
364
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert*90
A number of messages regarding Cross
Traffic Alert (CTA) can be shown in the driver
display. Here are some examples.
Message
Specification
Blind spot sensor
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Service required
Blind spot system off
BLISB and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
Trailer attached
A
B
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Blind Spot Information System
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information
•
•
•
90
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 362)
BLIS* (p. 358)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 363)
Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
* Option/accessory. 365
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information*
(RSI91)
The Road Sign Information function
can help the driver to observe speed-related
road signs and certain prohibition signs.
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*.
WARNING
•
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Examples of readable signs92.
RSI can provide information about such things
as current speed, when a motorway or road is
starting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited
or when the direction of travel is one-way.
If the car passes a speed limit sign, it will be
shown on the driver's display and the head-up
display*.
91
92
366
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
Related information
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating road sign information* (p. 367)
•
Display mode for road sign information*
(p. 367)
•
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation* (p. 370)
•
Warning for speed limitation and speed
camera from road sign information*
(p. 370)
•
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 372)
Road Sign Information
Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating or deactivating road
sign information*
NOTE
The Road Sign Information function (RSI93) is
optional – the driver can choose to activate or
deactivate this function.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
•
If the automatic speed limiter function
is activated, road sign information is
shown in the driver display even if the
Road Sign Information function is not
activated.
•
To remove road sign information from
the driver display, you must deactivate
both the automatic speed limiter and
Road Sign Information.
•
When the automatic speed limiter
function is activated but Road Sign
Information is deactivated, no warnings are given from Road Sign Information. Road Sign Information must
also be activated in order to receive
warnings.
Related information
•
•
•
93
94
95
Road Sign Information* (p. 366)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 294)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 372)
RSI: Road Sign Information.
Road Sign Information
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
Display mode for road sign
information*
The Road Sign Information function (RSI94)
shows road signs in different ways depending on the sign and the situation.
Example95 of detected speed information.
When the function detects a road sign with an
imposed speed limit, the driver display shows
the sign as a symbol combined with a coloured indication on the speedometer.
If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*,
speed-related information is also obtained
from map data, which means that the driver
display can show or change information on
the speed limit without having passed a
speed-related sign.
}}
* Option/accessory. 367
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
An additional95 sign, such as
"no overtaking", may be
shown together with the
speed limit symbol.
– indirect speed limit signs are only displayed
if map data has no information on the speed
limit for the road section in question.
Example of direct speed limit
sign95.
Example of indirect speed limit sign95:
End of all restrictions.
If the driver enters a road
marked with a no-entry sign
at the roadside, the symbol
for this sign95 flashes on and
off on the driver display as a
warning.
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
about 5 minutes until the next speed-related
sign is passed.
End of motorway.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
information from map data is used to determine whether the car is being driven in the
wrong direction.
The driver can also get an acoustic warning
when driving towards a road marked with a
no-entry sign if the Road Sign Audio
Warning function is activated.
Speed limit or end of motorway
When the function detects an "indirect speed
limit sign" stating the end of the current speed
limit – e.g. at the end of a motorway – a symbol appears with the corresponding road sign
in the driver's display.
If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*,
speed limit signs are shown in the driver display when map data contains information on
the speed limit for the road section in question, even if no direct sign has been passed. If
there is no information in map data, the sign
goes off after approx. 3 minutes after the last
passing of a speed limit sign.
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
10-30 seconds and remains so until the next
speed related sign is passed.
Changed speed limit
When passing a direct speed limit sign when a
speed limit changes, a symbol with the corresponding road sign appears in the driver's display.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
direct speed limit signs are normally displayed
95
368
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Additional signs
Examples of additional signs95.
Sometimes different speed limits are signed
for the same road - an additional sign then
indicates the circumstances under which the
different speeds apply. The road section may
be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain
and/or fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
If a trailer is connected to the car's electrical
system and you pass a speed sign with the
additional sign "trailer", the indicated speed
will appear on the driver display.
95
96
Some speed limits only apply
after a certain distance or at a
certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to this
fact by means of a symbol for
an additional sign below the
speed symbol. The additional
symbol in the driver display will show either
“DIST” or “TIME”.
Related information
•
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 366)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 372)
A symbol for additional sign
in the form of an empty frame
under the driver display's
speed symbol95 means that
the function has detected an
additional sign with supplementary information for the
current speed limit.
Sign for "School" and "Children at
play"
If a warning sign95 for
"School" or "Children at play"
is included in the satellite
navigator's map data96, the
driver display shows a sign of
this type.
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
Only in cars with Sensus Navigation*.
* Option/accessory. 369
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation*
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
speed information is read from the navigation
unit in the following cases:
•
On detection of signs that indirectly indicate a speed limit, such as motorway, dual
carriageway and city limit signs.
•
If a previously detected speed sign is
assumed not to apply any longer, but no
new sign has been detected.
Warning for speed limitation and
speed camera from road sign
information*
A speed warning is always given if the speed
limit is exceeded in connection with speed
camera information.
Road sign information (RSI97) includes subfunctions that can warn the driver if a speed
limit has been exceeded or in connection with
speed cameras.
Speed Limit Warning warns the driver when
the applicable speed limit or a preselected
"top speed" is exceeded – this warning is
repeated once after approx. 1 minute within
the same speed limit area unless the driver
reduces the speed.
A new warning for exceeding the speed limit,
including a reminder, will be given only when
the car reaches a new/different speed limit
area.
NOTE
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*.
NOTE
If a downloaded third-party app is used for
navigation then there is no support for
speed-related information.
Examples of information on speed camera and speed
limit in the driver display.
Speed Limit Warning
Related information
•
97
98
370
Road Sign Information* (p. 366)
The speed warning is given
by the driver display symbol98 showing the applicable
maximum permitted speed
temporarily flashing when
this speed is exceeded.
To get an acoustic warning if you exceed
the required speed, the Speed Limit
Warning function must be activated and
the Road Sign Audio Warning subfunction must be set to On. An acoustic warning is then given if the car's speed exceeds
the speed indicated by the Road Sign
Information function in the driver display.
Road Sign Information
Road signs are customised for each market – the one shown here is just an example.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Warning for speed camera
A car equipped with road
sign information and Sensus
Navigation can provide information on an upcoming
speed camera in the driver
display.99
If the car exceeds a detected speed limit with
the Speed Limit Warning function activated,
a speed warning is given when the car
approaches a speed camera, provided that the
navigation map for the area in question contains information on speed cameras.
NOTE
An option is available to receive an acoustic warning for speed cameras independently of the car's speed and exceeded
speed limit, and even if the Road Sign
Audio Warning function is deactivated.
•
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 366)
•
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 372)
Activating or deactivating warnings from
road sign information* (p. 371)
3. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by
pressing the up/down arrows on the
screen.
The subfunction Speed Limit Warning for
Road Sign Information (RSI100) is optional –
the driver can choose to activate or deactivate this subfunction.
Note that the function does
not give any consideration to
selected limit adjustment
when the driver display
shows the speed camera
symbol.
Activating speed warning
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2. Select Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed
limit selector appears.
Adjust the limit for Speed Warning
The driver can select to receive a warning at a
higher speed than the signed speed.
Select limit for speed warning as follows:
1.
Related information
99 Information on speed cameras
100Road Sign Information
Activating or deactivating
warnings from road sign
information*
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2. Select Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed
limit selector appears.
on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas.
Activating acoustic warning in
connection with speed warning.
Change setting for acoustic warning as follows:
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2. Select/deselect Road Sign Audio
Warning to activate/switch off the acoustic warning.
With the Road Sign Audio Warning function
activated, the driver is also warned when driving towards one-way traffic/no-entry entrance.
Activate Speed camera warning
If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation* and
map data contains information on speed cam-
}}
* Option/accessory. 371
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
eras, the driver can opt to receive an audible
warning when approaching a speed camera.
Limitations of Road Sign
Information*
Change setting for acoustic warning as follows:
The Road Sign Information (RSI101) function
may have limitations in certain situations.
Examples of what can reduce the function are
as follows:
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2. Select/deselect Speed Camera Audio
Warning to activate/switch off the audible speed camera warning.
Related information
•
•
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 366)
Warning for speed limitation and speed
camera from road sign information*
(p. 370)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 372)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE
The RSI function may interpret some types
of bicycle rack, connected to the electrical
socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In
such cases, the driver display may show
incorrect speed information.
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
NOTE
Rotated or damaged signs
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Signs positioned high above the roadway
Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned signs
Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt
maps102
Digital road
are out-of-date, inaccurate or have no speed information103.
Related information
•
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 366)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*.
101 Road Sign Information
102 In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*.
103Map data with speed information does not
372
exist for all areas.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver Alert Control
WARNING
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is
intended to help make the driver aware that
he or she is starting to drive less consistently,
e.g. if the driver becomes distracted or starts
to fall asleep.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily
intended for major roads. The function is not
intended for city traffic.
The function is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long
as the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph).
Driver Alert Control should not be used to
extend a period of driving. The driver
should instead plan for breaks at regular
intervals and make sure they are well
rested.
WARNING
An alarm from Driver Alert Control should
be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is
often not aware of his/her own condition.
The car is being driven erratically in the lane.
If driving behaviour becomes
noticeably inconsistent, the
driver is alerted by this symbol in the driver display, combined with an acoustic signal
and the text message Time
If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued:
•
Stop the car safely as soon as possible
and rest.
Studies have shown that it is just as dangerous to drive while tired as it is to drive
under the influence of alcohol or other
stimulants.
to take a break.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*
and has the function Rest Stop Guidance
activated, suggestions for an appropriate
place for a break are also displayed.
DAC reads the position of the car in the lane.
A camera detects the edge markings painted
on the carriageway and compares the alignment of the road with the driver’s steering
wheel movements.
The warning is repeated after a time if driving
behaviour has not improved.
}}
* Option/accessory. 373
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
•
•
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
374
Activating or deactivating Driver
Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can
be activated or deactivated.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
Select rest stop guidance in the
event of a warning from Driver
Alert Control
3. Select or deselect Alertness Warning to
activate or deactivate the function.
In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
the driver can activate a guide that can automatically suggest an appropriate rest area
when Driver Alert Control (DAC) issues a
warning.
It is possible to select whether the Rest Stop
Guidance function should be activated or
deactivated.
Related information
1.
2. Select My Car
Alert Control.
•
•
IntelliSafe
Driver
Driver Alert Control (p. 373)
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
(p. 375)
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Select My Car
Alert Control.
IntelliSafe
Driver
3. Select or deselect Rest Stop Guidance
to activate or deactivate the function.
Related information
•
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 373)
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
(p. 375)
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating Driver Alert
Control (p. 374)
•
Select rest stop guidance in the event of a
warning from Driver Alert Control (p. 374)
•
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
(p. 375)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
Lane assistance
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
The function of the Lane Keeping Aid
(LKA104) is to help the driver to reduce the
risk of the car accidentally leaving its own
lane on motorways and similar major routes.
Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its
lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in
the steering wheel.
•
•
in strong side winds
on rutted road surfaces.
WARNING
In some cases, driving behaviour is not
affected despite driver fatigue – e.g. when
using the Pilot Assist* function – resulting
in the driver not getting a warning from
DAC.
Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
range 65–200 km/h (40–125 mph) on roads
with clearly visible side lines.
On narrow roads the function may be unavailable, in which case it goes into standby mode.
The function becomes available again when
the road is wide enough.
Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane.
It is therefore important to always stop and
take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue, regardless of whether the function has
given a warning.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations.
Related information
•
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 373)
A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
104 Lane
Keeping Aid
}}
* Option/accessory. 375
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in
accordance with the following:
• Assist activated: When the car is
approaching a lane line, the function will
actively steer the car back into its lane by
applying a slight torque to the steering
wheel.
• Warning activated: If the car is about to
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
cross a lane line, the driver is warned by
means of vibrations in the steering wheel.
There is also an option where both steering
assistance and warning are activated simultaneously.
NOTE
When a direction indicator/flasher is
switched on, there are no steering corrections or alerts from lane assistance.
Lane assistance does not intervene
Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside
curves.
In some situations, lane assistance allows lane
lines to be crossed without intervening with
either steering assistance or a warning – e.g.
when using the direction indicators or cutting
bends.
Hands on the steering wheel
For steering assistance with lane assistance to
work, the driver must have his/her hands on
the steering wheel, which the system will continue to monitor.
If the driver does not keep
his/her hands on the steering
wheel, a warning signal is
heard and a message encourages the driver to steer the
car actively:
376
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering
If the driver follows the prompt to start steering, the function is set in standby mode and
this message is shown:
• Lane Keeping Aid Standby until
steering applied
The function will then be unavailable until the
driver starts to steer the car again.
Activating or deactivating lane
assistance
Selecting assistance option for
lane assistance
The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) function (LKA105)
is optional – the driver can choose to activate
or deactivate this function.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
The driver can select how the Lane Keeping
Aid (LKA106) should react if the car leaves its
lane.
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
in the centre display's top view.
Related information
•
•
•
•
2. In the event of Lane Keeping Aid Mode,
select how the function should react:
• Assist – the driver is given steering
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating lane assistance
(p. 377)
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 378)
•
Symbols and messages for lane assistance (p. 379)
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
Related information
105 Lane
106Lane
•
•
Lane assistance (p. 375)
•
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 378)
Selecting assistance option for lane assistance (p. 377)
assistance without a warning.
• Both – the driver is given a warning
both from the steering wheel vibrating
and from steering assistance.
• Warning – the driver is only warned by
steering wheel vibration.
Related information
•
Lane assistance (p. 375)
Keeping Aid
Keeping Aid
377
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Lane assistance
Related information
In certain demanding conditions lane assistance (LKA107) may have difficulty helping the
driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this function.
Examples of such conditions are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
road works
winter road conditions
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility
roads with unclear or non-existent side
markings
•
sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
•
as the steering servo for speed-dependent
steering wheel resistance is working at
reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to
overheating.
The function is unable to detect barriers, rails
or similar obstacles at the side of the carriageway.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
107 Lane
378
Keeping Aid
Lane assistance (p. 375)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
on the driver display. Here are some examples.
A number of symbols and messages regarding lane assistance (LKA108) can be shown
Symbol
Message
Specification
Driver support system
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Reduced functionality Service required
Windscreen sensor
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
Lane Keeping Aid
Apply steering
Lane Keeping Aid
The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her
hands on the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car.
LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.
Standby until steering applied
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
108Lane
Keeping Aid
}}
379
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
A text message can be cleared by briefly
button, located in the centre
pressing the
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information
•
•
•
380
Lane assistance (p. 375)
Display mode for lane assistance (p. 381)
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 378)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Display mode for lane assistance
Unavailable
Lane assistance
is visualised by
symbols in the driver display depending on
the situation.
Here are some examples of
symbols and the situations in
which they are shown:
Available
Related information
•
•
(LKA109)
Lane assistance (p. 375)
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 378)
Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are GREY.
The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane
lines, the speed is too low or the road is too
narrow.
Indication of steering assistance/warning
Available — the lane lines in the symbol are WHITE.
Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane
lines.
Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the
symbol are COLOURED.
Lane assistance indicates that the system is
giving a warning and/or attempting to steer
the car back into the lane.
109Lane
Keeping Aid
381
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance at risk of
collision
The function Collision avoidance assistance
can help the driver reduce the risk of the car
leaving its lane unintentionally and/or colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by
actively steering the car back into its lane
and/or swerving.
The function consists of these subfunctions:
•
•
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision*
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision
After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text
message:
Collision avoidance assistance Automatic
intervention
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating steering assistance in the event of a collision risk
(p. 383)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
(p. 383)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 384)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 385)
•
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 386)
•
Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision (p. 387)
NOTE
It is always the driver who decides how
much the car should steer – the car can
never take command.
382
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating or deactivating steering
assistance in the event of a
collision risk
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance
assistance function is deactivated, all subfunctions are switched off:
The steering assistance function is optional –
the driver can choose to activate or deactivate it.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
This function is activated automatically each
time the engine is started110.
Steering assistance upon risk of
run-off
•
Steering assistance at risk of road
departure
•
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming collision
Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance in the event of runoff risk can help the driver and reduce the risk
of the car accidentally leaving the road by
actively steering the car back onto the road.
The function has two activation levels on intervention:
•
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision*
•
•
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to
always have it activated since it improves
driving safety in most cases.
Steering assistance only
Steering assistance with brake intervention
Steering assistance only
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 382)
•
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 386)
Intervention with steering assistance.
110 In
certain markets, the setting used when the engine is switched off is reactivated.
}}
* Option/accessory. 383
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Steering assistance with brake intervention
driving the car, activation of the function will
be delayed.
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
Related information
Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance upon risk of headon collision can help a distracted driver who
does not notice that the car is heading into
the opposite lane.
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 382)
•
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 386)
Intervention with steering assistance and braking.
Brake intervention helps in situations where
steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The
brake force is adapted automatically depending on the situation at the time of road run-off.
The function is active within the speed range
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with
clearly visible lane markings/lines.
A camera scans the edges of the road and the
painted side markings. If the car is about to
leave the side of the road, the car is steered
back onto the road and if the steering intervention is not enough to avoid run-off, the
brakes are also activated.
However, the function does not intervene with
either steering assistance or brake intervention if the direction indicators are used. And if
the function detects that the driver is actively
384
The function can assist by guiding the car back to its
own lane.
Oncoming vehicles
Your car
At the same time as steering intervention is
activated, collision warning for driver support
is also activated. However, the brake pulse
included in the collision warning will not be
activated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The function is active within the speed range
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with
clearly visible lane markings/lines.
If the car is about to leave its own lane while
an oncoming vehicle is approaching at the
same time, the function can help the driver to
steer the car back into its own lane.
However, the function does not intervene with
steering assistance if the direction indicator is
used. And if the function detects that the
driver is actively driving the car, activation of
the function will be delayed.
Steering assistance upon risk of
rear-end collision*
the driver to steer the car back into its own
lane.
Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance if there is a risk of
rear-end collision can help a distracted driver
who does not notice that the car is about to
leave its own lane while an oncoming vehicle
is approaching at the same time, either from
behind or in the blind spot.
The function can even assist if the driver intentionally changes lanes using direction indicators without noticing that another vehicle is
approaching.
The lamps in the door mirrors flash during
steering intervention, regardless of whether
the BLIS111 function is activated.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 382)
•
Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 319)
•
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 386)
The function is active within the speed range
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with
clearly visible lane markings/lines.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 382)
•
•
BLIS* (p. 358)
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 386)
The function can assist by steering the car back to its
own lane.
Other vehicle in the blind spot
Your car
If the car is about to leave its own lane while
another vehicle is in the blind spot, or another
vehicle is approaching rapidly in an adjacent
lane at the same time, the function can help
111
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory. 385
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for steering assistance
at risk of collision
In certain situations the function may have
limited functionality and fail to intervene in
the following cases, for example:
• for small vehicles, such as motorcycles
•
if the majority of the car has steered into
the adjacent lane
•
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information
•
on roads/in lanes with unclear or non-existent lane markings
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 382)
•
•
outside the speed range 60-140 km/h
(37-87 mph)
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
(p. 383)
•
•
as the steering servo for speed-dependent
steering wheel resistance is working at
reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to
overheating.
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 384)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 385)
Other demanding situations can include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
road works
winter road conditions
narrow roads
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility.
In these demanding situations, the function
may have difficulty helping the driver correctly.
In such cases it is recommended to switch off
this function.
386
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for
steering assistance upon risk of
collision
A number of symbols and messages regarding steering assistance may be shown in the
driver display. Here are some examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
Collision avoidance assistance
When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the
system has been activated.
Automatic intervention
Windscreen sensor
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 382)
•
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 386)
387
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist*
The Park Assist Pilot function can assist the
driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by
indicating the distance to obstacles through
acoustic signals combined with a graphic in
the centre display.
The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the
audio system is muted automatically.
WARNING
The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to
the sides is active when the car is moving but
stops after the car has been stationary for
approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind is also active when the car is
stationary.
At a distance within approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from
an obstacle behind or in front of the car, the
tone is constant and the active sensor's field
closest to the car symbol is filled.
At a distance within approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft)
from an obstacle To the sides, the tone pulses
intensively and the active sector field changes
colour from ORANGE to RED.
Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors.
The centre display shows an overview of the
relationship between the car and detected
obstacles.
The highlighted sector indicates the location
of the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to
a highlighted sector box at the front/back, the
shorter the distance between the car and
detected obstacle.
The side sectors change colour as the distance
between the car and an object is reduced.
388
The volume of the parking assistance signal
can be adjusted while the signal is sounding
by means of the [>II] knob on the centre console. Adjustment can also be performed in the
top view's Settings menu option.
NOTE
Except in the sector nearest to the car
symbol, audible warnings are only given for
objects directly in the path of the car.
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the
sides* (p. 389)
Activating or deactivating the parking
assistance system* (p. 390)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
Symbols and messages for Park Assist
Pilot (p. 392)
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and
along the sides*
•
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 391)
Park Assist Pilot has different behaviour
depending on which part of the car is
approaching an obstacle.
NOTE
Parking assistance is deactivated when the
parking brake is used or P mode is
selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
Forwards
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived
as an obstacle.
Backwards
The warning signal has a constant tone at less than
approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle.
The Parking Assistance System's front detectors are activated automatically when the
engine is started. They are active at speeds
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range is approx. 80 cm (2.5 ft)
in front of the car.
The warning signal has a constant tone at less than
approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle.
The sensors for reverse are activated if the car
rolls backward without a gear engaged or
}}
* Option/accessory. 389
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
when the gear lever is moved to reverse position.
The measuring range is approx. 1.5 metres
(5 ft) behind the car.
When reversing with a trailer connected to the
car's electrical system, parking assistance
backward is deactivated automatically.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike
carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may
need to be switched off manually in order
that the sensors do not react to them.
Along the sides
Parking assistance side sensors are activated
automatically when the engine is started. They
are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range is approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft)
from the sides.
However, the detection range of the side sensors increases significantly when the steering
angle of the front wheels is increased, and
obstacles of up to approx. 90 cm (3 ft) located
diagonally behind or in front of the vehicle are
detected when the steering wheel is turned.
Activating or deactivating the
parking assistance system*
The park assist function can be activated or
deactivated.
The front and side parking assistance detectors are activated automatically when the
engine is started. The rear detectors are activated if the car rolls backwards or when
reverse gear is engaged.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
Related information
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 388)
Sensor fields for parking assistance system (p. 398)
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
In cars equipped with a park assist camera*,
Park Assist Pilot can also be activated or deactivated from the relevant camera view.
Related information
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 388)
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 391)
The warning signal pulses intensively at less than
approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from an obstacle.
390
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Parking assistance
The Parking Assistance System cannot
detect everything in all situations and may
therefore have limited functionality in some
cases.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations:
WARNING
•
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Pay particular attention if there are
people and animals near the car.
•
Bear in mind that the front of the car
may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre.
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or
low barriers may be in the "signal shadow"
and are then temporarily not detected by
the sensors - the pulsating tone may then
unexpectedly stop instead of changing
over to the expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects,
such as projecting loading docks.
•
NOTE
Since a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, towbar protrusion is
included when the function measures the
distance to an object behind the car.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 388)
In such situations, pay extra attention
and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current
parking manoeuvre - there may be a
high risk of damage to vehicles or
other objects since information from
the sensors is not always reliable in
such situations.
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a
trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward
are switched off and will not warn of any
obstacles.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning
signals that are caused by external sound
sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,
exhaust noises from motorcycles, etc.
* Option/accessory. 391
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot
can be shown in the driver display and/or the
centre display. Here are some examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings for obstacles/objects.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Unavailable Service required
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information
•
•
392
Park Assist* (p. 388)
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 391)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist camera*
Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar park assist line*113
The park assist camera can assist the driver
when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating obstacles with a camera image and
graphics in the centre display.
The parking assistance camera is a support
function which is activated automatically
when reverse gear is selected or manually via
the centre display.
CTA* - activates/deactivates Cross Traffic
Alert
Objects/obstacles may be closer to the car
than they appear to be on screen.
WARNING
•
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Pay particular attention if there are
people and animals near the car.
•
Bear in mind that the front of the car
may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre.
Example of camera view.
Zoom112 - zoom in/out
360° view* - activates/deactivates all
cameras
PAS* - activates/deactivates the Parking
Assistance System
Lines - activates/deactivates park assist
lines
112 The park assist lines are switched off when
113 Not available for all models and markets.
zooming in.
}}
* Option/accessory. 393
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
•
•
Activate park assist camera (p. 399)
•
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 388)
Symbols and messages for Park assist
camera (p. 401)
Park assist camera locations and
surveillance areas*
The function can display a composite 360°
view and separate views for each of the four
cameras: rear, front, left or right camera view.
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 362)
Related information
•
•
394
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Park assist camera locations and surveillance areas* (p. 394)
•
Park assist lines for park assist camera*
(p. 396)
•
Sensor fields for parking assistance system (p. 398)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
A camera symbol on the centre display's car symbol indicates which of the cameras is
active.
360° view*
Forwards
If the car is also equipped
with Park Assist System*
then distance to detected obstacles is illustrated with fields in different colours.
The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually.
Backwards
The forwards parking camera is located in the grille.
The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with
approximate coverage area.
The front camera can be helpful on an exit
road with limited visibility to the sides, e.g.
when there are high hedges. It is active at
speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph) - following
which, the front camera is switched off.
The 360° view function activates all parking
cameras, whereupon the four sides of the car
are shown simultaneously in the centre display, which helps the driver to observe what is
around the car when manoeuvring at slow
speeds.
From the 360° view, each camera view can
be activated separately:
•
Press the screen for the desired “field of
vision” of the camera, e.g. on the surface
in front of/above the front camera.
The backwards-facing camera is fitted above the registration plate.
If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph)
and the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph)
within 1 minute after the forward-facing camera has been extinguished, the camera is reactivated.
The backward-facing camera shows a wide
area behind the car. For certain models, part
of the bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in some cases.
Objects shown in the centre display may
appear slightly tilted — this is normal.
}}
* Option/accessory. 395
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
The sides
Park assist lines for park assist
camera*
The Park assist cameras indicate the position
of the car in relation to its surroundings by
displaying lines on the screen.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and
respond directly to steering wheel movements, showing the driver the path the car will
take - also when the car is turning.
These park assist lines include the car's most
protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and
corners.
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is
not connected electrically to the car,
the park assist lines on the display
show the route the car will take – not
the trailer.
•
The screen shows no park assist lines
when a trailer is connected electrically
to the car's electrical system.
•
Park assist lines are not shown when
zooming in.
The side cameras are positioned in each door mirror.
The side cameras can show what is along
each side of the car.
Related information
•
•
•
Park assist camera* (p. 393)
Activate park assist camera (p. 399)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
Example of park assist lines.
Park assist lines show the intended route for
the car's external dimensions with the current
steering wheel angle - this can facilitate parallel parking, reversing into tight spaces and
when connecting a trailer.
396
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
IMPORTANT
•
Remember, that with the rear camera
view selected, the monitor only displays the area behind the car. Be
aware of the sides and front of the car
when manoeuvring in reverse.
•
The same applies vice versa - note
what happens to the rear parts of the
car when the front camera view is
selected.
•
Note that the park assist lines show
the shortest route. Therefore, pay extra
attention to the car's sides so that they
do not go against/over something
when the steering wheel is turned
when driving forward or that the front
sweeps against/over something when
the steering wheel is turned when
reversing.
Park assist lines in 360° view*
Towbar assist line*
360° view with park assist lines.
With the 360° view, park assist lines are
shown behind, in front of and at the side of the
car (depending on the direction of travel):
•
•
When driving forwards: Front lines
When reversing: Side lines and reversing
lines.
With front or rear camera selected, the park
assist lines appear regardless of the car's
direction of travel.
With one side camera selected, the park assist
lines only appear when reversing.
Towbar with park assist line.
Towbar - activates the towbar assist line.
Zoom - zoom in/out.
The camera can facilitate connecting up to a
trailer by showing an assist line representing
the towbar's intended "path" to the trailer.
}}
* Option/accessory. 397
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
1.
Press Towbar (1).
> The park assist lines for the towbar's
intended "path" appear - the car's park
assist lines disappear simultaneously.
Park assist lines for both car and towbar cannot be shown at the same time.
2. Press Zoom (2) when a more precise
manoeuvring is required.
> The camera view zooms in.
Sensor fields for parking
assistance system
If the car is equipped with parking assistance
system* then the distance is shown in the
360° view with coloured fields for each sensor that registers an obstacle.
Sensor fields backwards and forwards
Related information
•
•
Park assist camera* (p. 393)
Park assist camera locations and surveillance areas* (p. 394)
•
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
•
Towbar* (p. 483)
The fields for the sensors for forwards and
reverse change colour as the distance to the
obstacle decreases – from AMBER through
ORANGE to RED.
Field colour
reverse
Distance in metres
(feet)
Yellow
0,6-1,5 (2,0-4,9)
Orange
0,3–0,6 (1,0–2,0)
Red
0-0,3 (0-1,0)
Field colour
forwards
Distance in metres
(feet)
Yellow
0,6–0,8 (2,0–2,6)
Orange
0,3–0,6 (1,0–2,0)
Red
0-0,3 (0-1,0)
For RED sensor fields, the pulsating acoustic
signal changes over to a constant tone.
The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the
car symbol.
398
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Sensor field to the sides
Warning signals depend on the intended route
of the car. When the steering wheel is turned,
therefore, there may also be a warning for
obstacles diagonally in front of or diagonally
behind the car, not just straight ahead or
directly behind.
Right-hand side rear sensor field
Activate park assist camera
Obstacle sector in the car's intended route
in reverse – depending on steering wheel
angle.
The park assist camera is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged or manually with one of the centre display's function
buttons.
The colour of the side fields changes with
reduced distance to the obstacle – from
AMBER to RED.
Colour of side
fields
Distance in metres
(feet)
Yellow
0,25–0,9 (0,8–3,0)
Red
0–0,25 (0–0,8)
In the case of RED sensor fields, the acoustic
signal changes from pulsing to intensively
pulsing.
Parking sensor sectors where obstacles can be
detected.
Left-hand side front sensor field
Obstacle sector in the car's intended route
forwards – depending on steering wheel
angle
Sector with RED field colour and intensively pulsing tone
Related information
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 388)
Park assist camera* (p. 393)
Park assist camera locations and surveillance areas* (p. 394)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
Camera view when reversing
When reverse gear is engaged, the screen
shows the 360° view if it or any of the side
views was the last used camera view, otherwise the rear view is shown.
Camera view for manual camera
activation
Activate the parking camera
with this button in the centre
display's function view.
The screen then initially
shows the last used camera
view. However, after each
engine start, the previously shown side view is
replaced by the 360° view and the previously
shown zoomed rear view is replaced by the
rear view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
Automatic deactivation of camera
The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h
(16 mph) to avoid distracting the driver – it
}}
* Option/accessory. 399
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
reactivates automatically if the speed drops to
22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute, on the condition that the speed has not exceeded
50 km/h (31 mph).
Other camera views are extinguished at
15 km/h (9 mph) and not reactivated.
Related information
•
•
•
400
Park assist camera* (p. 393)
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 391)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera
Symbols and messages for Park assist camera can be shown in the driver display and/or
the centre display. Here are some examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings
and field marks for obstacles/objects.
The camera is disengaged.
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Unavailable Service required
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
}}
401
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
•
•
402
Park assist camera* (p. 393)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist Pilot*
WARNING
(PAP114)
Park Assist Pilot
can assist the driver
to manoeuvre the car while parking. The
function can also assist with steering when
driving out from parallel parking.
The function first checks if a space is large
enough and if so then assists the driver to
steer the car into the space.
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
The centre display indicates with symbols,
graphics and text the various operations to be
carried out and when to do so.
•
•
•
Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist
Pilot* (p. 407)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 408)
Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 410)
Related information
•
•
•
114 Park
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 404)
Using Park Assist Pilot* (p. 405)
Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory. 403
DRIVER SUPPORT
Parking variants with Park Assist
Pilot*
Perpendicular parking
Related information
•
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP115) can be used for
both parallel and perpendicular parking.
Parallel parking
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 403)
Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist
Pilot* (p. 407)
Principle for perpendicular parking.
The function parks the car using the following
steps:
The principal of parallel parking.
The function parks the car using the following
steps:
1.
A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
3. The car is positioned in the space by
means of driving forward/backward.
With the Park Out function, a parallel-parked
car can also get help from the function with
leaving the parking space.
115 Park
404
1.
A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space and
then positioned in the space by means of
driving forward/backward.
NOTE
When leaving a parking space, the Park
Out function must only be used for a parallel-parked car - it does not work for a perpendicular-parked car.
Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Using Park Assist Pilot*
NOTE
Park Assist Pilot (PAP116) helps the driver
park via three steps. The function can also
help the driver to leave a parking space.
This function measures space and steers the
car – the driver's job is to:
•
keep an eye on what is happening around
the car
•
follow the instructions in the centre display
•
select a gear (reverse/forward) – an
acoustic signal indicates when the driver
should change gear
•
•
regulate and maintain a safe speed
brake and stop.
Symbols, graphic and/or text appear on the
centre display when the different steps are to
be performed.
The function can be activated if the following
criteria are met once the engine has been
started:
•
•
The distance between the car and parking
spaces should be 0.5–1.5 metres
(1.6–5.0 ft) while the function is searching
for a parking space.
Parking with Park Assist Pilot
The function parks the car using the following
steps:
1.
A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
Principle for searching before parallel parking.
3. The car is positioned into the space - the
system may then request that the driver
changes gear and brakes.
Find and measure parking spaces
The function can be activated
in the centre display's function view.
It can also be accessed from
the camera views.
No trailer is attached to the car
Speed is lower than 30 km/h (20 mph).
•
•
116 Park
Assist Pilot
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
Principle for searching before perpendicular parking.
Drive no faster than 30 km/h (20 mph) for
parallel parking or 20 km/h (12 mph) for perpendicular parking.
}}
* Option/accessory. 405
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
1.
Tap on the Park In button in the function
view or in the camera view.
> The function searches for a parking
space and checks whether it is big
enough.
Reversing in to the parking space
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the
centre display.
2. Be prepared to stop the car when the
graphic and message on the centre display state that a suitable parking space
has been found.
> A pop-up window is shown.
3. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular
parking and select reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without
touching the steering wheel - and no
faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).
NOTE
•
Keep your hands away from the steering wheel when the function is activated.
•
Make sure that the steering wheel is
not hindered in any way and can rotate
freely.
•
To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned
before starting to drive backward/
forward.
Principle for reversing into parallel parking.
NOTE
The function searches the area for parking,
displays instructions and guides the car in
on its passenger side. But if required the
car can also be parked on the driver's side
of the street:
•
Activate the direction indicator to the
driver's side - then the system
searches for a parking space on that
side of the car instead.
Principle for reversing into perpendicular parking.
1.
406
Check that the area behind the car is clear,
then engage reverse gear.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Positioning the car in the parking space
1.
Move the gear selector to the gear position as instructed by the system, wait until
the steering wheel has been turned and
drive forward slowly.
2. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the
centre display.
Leaving parallel parking with Park
Assist Pilot*
The Park Out function can help the driver to
leave a parking space when the car is parallel
parked.
NOTE
When leaving a parking space, the Park
Out function must only be used for a parallel-parked car - it does not work for a perpendicular-parked car.
3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly backwards.
4. Be prepared to brake the car when
instructed by the graphic and message on
the centre display.
Principle for positioning during parallel parking.
The function is deactivated automatically and
the graphics and message show that parking
is complete. It may be necessary for the driver
to correct the car’s position. Only the driver
can determine whether the car is properly
parked.
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by Park Assist Pilot
(PAP117) compared with when Park Assist
System uses the sensors.
Principle for positioning during perpendicular parking.
Related information
•
•
117
Park Assist Pilot
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 403)
The Park Out function is activated in the centre display's
function view or in the camera view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
1.
Tap on the Park Out button in the function view or in the camera view.
2. Use the direction indicator to select the
direction in which the car should leave the
parking space.
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 408)
}}
* Option/accessory. 407
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the
centre display - follow the instructions in
the same way as for the parking procedure.
Note the steering wheel can "spring" back
when the function is completed - the driver
may then need to turn the steering wheel back
to the maximum steering angle in order to
leave the parking space.
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
(PAP118)
The Park Assist Pilot
function cannot
detect everything in all situations and may
therefore have limited functionality.
WARNING
Parking is discontinued
A parking sequence will be discontinued:
•
•
if the driver moves the steering wheel
if the car is driven too quickly - above
7 km/h (4 mph)
•
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
if the driver presses Cancel in the centre
display
•
Pay particular attention if there are
people and animals near the car.
•
If the function considers that the driver can
leave the parking space without any extra
manoeuvring then the function will be stopped, even if the driver may consider that the
car is still in the parking space.
•
Bear in mind that the front of the car
may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre.
when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic stability control are engaged - e.g.
when a wheel loses grip on a slippery road
•
as the steering servo for speed-dependent
steering wheel resistance is working at
reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to
overheating
Related information
Objects situated higher than the sensor
detection area are not included when calculating the parking manoeuvre, which
could cause the function to swing into the
parking space too early – such parking
spaces should be avoided for this reason.
•
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 403)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 408)
IMPORTANT
Where applicable, a message in the centre
display states the reason for a parking
sequence being discontinued.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations:
118 Park
408
Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, the function
is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is
interference with the sensors from external
sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the
system works.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes
and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
There are also a few details to bear in mind
while parking, e.g.:
•
The driver is always responsible for determining whether the space selected by the
function is suitable for parking.
•
Do not use the function if snow chains or
a spare wheel are fitted.
•
Do not use the function if cargo items are
protruding from the car.
•
Heavy rain or snow may cause the system
to measure the parking space incorrectly.
•
During the search and check-measurement of the parking space, the function
may miss objects positioned deep in the
parking space.
•
Parking spaces on narrow streets are not
always feasible, since the space required
for manoeuvring may not be sufficient.
•
Use approved tyres119 with the correct tyre
pressure - this affects the ability of the
function to park the car.
•
The function bases itself on the locations
of vehicles already parked nearby – if they
are inappropriately parked, your own car's
tyres and wheel rims may be damaged by
contact with the kerb.
•
Perpendicular parking spaces may be
missed or offered unnecessarily if one
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
will reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.
Driver responsibility
The driver should bear in mind that the function is an aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic
function. The driver must therefore be prepared to interrupt a parking step.
119 ”Approved
parked car is protruding more than other
parked cars.
•
The function is designed for parking on
straight streets – not sharp curves or
bends. For this reason, make sure the car
is parallel to the potential parking spaces
when the function measures the space.
Related information
•
•
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 403)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 338)
tyres” refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.
* Option/accessory. 409
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
Messages for Park Assist Pilot (PAP120) can
be shown in the driver display and/or the
centre display. Here are some examples.
Message
Specification
Park Assist System
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Unavailable Service required
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information
•
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 403)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 408)
120 Park
410
Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory.
HYBRID INFORMATION
HYBRID INFORMATION
General information about Twin
Engine
Twin Engine runs like a regular car, but certain functions differ from a car that only runs
on petrol or diesel. The electric motor drives
the car mostly at low speeds, the petrol
engine at higher speeds, as well as during
more active driving.
The driver display shows some information
that is unique to the Twin Engine - charging
information, selected drive mode, distance to
empty battery as well as the hybrid battery's
charge level.
It is possible to set the car in different drive
modes while driving, e.g. electric operation
only or, when power is required, both electric
motor and petrol engine. The car calculates a
combination of drivability, driving experience,
environmental impact and fuel economy
according to the drive mode selected.
In order that the car should have optimal function it is important that the hybrid battery with
associated electrical drive systems, as well as
the petrol engine and its drive systems, have
the correct operating temperature. Battery
capacity may be reduced considerably if the
battery is too cold or too hot. Preconditioning
prepares the car's drive systems and the passenger compartment before departure so that
both wear and energy needs during the journey are reduced. The range for the hybrid battery increases.
412
The hybrid battery which drives the electric
motor is charged via a charging cable but can
also be charged by gentle braking and engine
braking in gear position B. The hybrid battery
can also be charged by the car's engine.
High-voltage current
Important to know
Car without power
Bear in mind that important functions such as
the brakes and power steering are inoperable
when the car is without power.
WARNING
Several components in the car work with
high-voltage current that could be dangerous in the event of incorrect intervention.
These components, and all orange-coloured cables, must only be handled by
qualified personnel.
WARNING
In a de-energised car with the electric
motor and fuel-driven engine switched off
it is not possible to brake the car.
Towing not permitted
Towing the Twin Engine is not permitted since
this damages the electric motor.
Exterior engine noise
WARNING
Remember that the car does not emit any
engine noise when it is only powered by
the electric motor and may therefore be
difficult to notice by children, pedestrians,
cyclists and animals. This is especially true
at low speeds, such as in car parks.
Do not touch anything that is not clearly
described in the owner's manual.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 413)
Hybrid gauge (p. 84)
Drive modes (p. 462)
Start and switch off preconditioning
(p. 224)
•
•
Hybrid battery (p. 628)
•
•
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
Factors that affect range when running on
electricity (p. 471)
Towing (p. 491)
HYBRID INFORMATION
Charging the hybrid battery
WARNING
In addition to the fuel tank, as in a conventional car, the car is equipped with a
rechargeable battery - a so-called hybrid battery of the lithium-ion type.
The hybrid battery is charged using a charging
cable which is located in a storage compartment in the cargo area.
Replacing the hybrid battery must only be
performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Electric operation is not possible if the temperature of the battery is too low or too high. If
drive mode PURE is then selected, the combustion engine starts.
NOTE
Volvo recommends a charging cable in
accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC
61851 which supports temperature monitoring.
The time it takes for the hybrid battery to be
charged is dependent on the charging current
that is used.
Charging with fixed control unit in
accordance with mode 31
Charging cable handle and charging input socket.
Charging status is indicated in three ways:
NOTE
The capacity of the hybrid battery decreases slightly with age and use, which may
result in increased use of the petrol engine
and thereby slightly increased fuel consumption.
1
European standard - EN 61851-1.
If the hybrid battery's temperature is below
-10 ºC (14 ºF) or above 40 ºC (104 ºF) then it
may mean that some of the car's functions are
changed or unavailable because the capacity
of the hybrid batteries is reduced outside this
temperature range.
•
Indicators on the charging cable's control
unit.
•
Indicator lamp in the car's charging input
socket.
•
Illustration and text in the driver display.
In certain markets the control unit is installed
within a charging station connected to the
mains power circuit. In which case, the charging cable has no control unit of its own.
Instead, it has a special connector that is used
to connect the charging cable to the charging
station. Follow the instructions at the charging
station.
The starter battery is charged when the hybrid
battery is charging and terminated when the
hybrid battery is fully charged.
}}
413
HYBRID INFORMATION
||
Charging with the petrol engine
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
The car generates current to the battery and the battery is charged, e.g. when the brake pedal is pressed
gently or during engine braking down a hill.
The car can also generate power for the hybrid
battery and the battery is charged.
•
The hybrid battery is recharged during
gentle braking with the brake pedal. The
car's kinetic energy is then converted to
electrical energy, which is used to charge
the hybrid battery.
•
In gear position B, the car uses electric
motor braking when the accelerator pedal
is released, while the hybrid battery is
recharged at the same time.
•
The hybrid battery can also be charged by
the car's engine.
2 The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.
3 Applies to charging cables with controls on the control unit.
414
Charging cable (p. 416)
Charging current (p. 414)
Opening and closing the hatch for the
charging input socket (p. 421)
Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 421)
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 433)
Charging status in the charging cable's
control unit (p. 426)
•
Charging status in the car's charging input
socket (p. 424)
•
Charging status in the car's driver display
(p. 431)
•
Symbols and messages relating to Twin
Engine in the driver display (p. 435)
•
•
•
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
Changing drive mode (p. 465)
Long-term storage of vehicles with hybrid
batteries (p. 437)
Charging current
Charging current is used for charging the
hybrid battery as well as preconditioning of
the car. Charging takes place with a charging
cable connected to the car's charging input
socket and a 230 V socket2 (alternating current). Depending on charging cable3, different amperage loads (6–16 A) can also be set
using the control unit.
When the charging cable is activated, the
driver display shows a message and a lamp in
the car's charging input socket illuminates.
The charging current is mainly used for battery
charging, but is also used for preconditioning
the car. When the car's hybrid battery is
charged, the starter battery is also charged.
IMPORTANT
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 V socket (alternating current) while
charging is in progress - there is then a risk
of damaging the 230 V socket. Always
stop charging first before unplugging the
charging cable from the car's charging
input socket and then from the 230 V
socket.
HYBRID INFORMATION
Fuse
NOTE
•
•
If the weather is very hot or very cold,
some of the charging current is used to
heat/cool the hybrid battery and the
passenger compartment, which results
in a longer charging time.
The charging time is extended if preconditioning has been selected. The
time required depends mainly on the
outside temperature.
Amperage on the control
unit3
Charging time varies with the amperage setting on the control unit. The following charging
times are applicable when air conditioning or
any other consumer is not affecting charging.
If charging time seems long, it should be
investigated.
A
Current intensity
(A)A
Charging time
(hours)
6
6
10
3.5
16
2,5
Maximum charging current may vary depending on market.
3 Applies
Normally several 230 V consumers are
included in a fuse circuit, so additional consumers (e.g. lighting, vacuum cleaner, electric
drill, etc.) can be on the same fuse.
Example 13
If the car is connected to a 230 V/10 A socket
and the control unit is set at 16 A, then the car
will attempt to draw 16 A from the 230 V
mains power circuit - after a while the overloaded 10 A fuse for the socket will be tripped
and battery charging stopped.
In which case, reset the fuse for the socket
and select a lower charging current on the
control unit.
Example 23
If the car is connected to a 230 V/10 A socket
and the control unit is set at 10 A, then the car
will draw 10 A from the 230 V mains power
circuit. If additional consumers are connected
to the same socket (or another socket in the
same fuse circuit) then there is a risk that the
fuse for the socket/fuse socket will be overloaded and triggered, at which point battery
charging is stopped.
Example 33
If the car is connected to a 230 V/10 A socket
and the control unit is set at 6 A, then the car
will only draw 6 A from the 230 V mains
power circuit. Battery charging will of course
take longer, but then additional consumers
can be connected at the same time to the
same socket/fuse circuit as long as the total
load does not exceed the capacity of the
socket/fuse circuit.
Related information
•
•
•
Charging cable (p. 416)
The charging cable's control unit (p. 419)
Charging status in the car's driver display
(p. 431)
•
Charging status in the car's charging input
socket (p. 424)
•
Start and switch off preconditioning
(p. 224)
•
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 433)
In such cases, reset the fuse for the socket/
fuse circuit and select a lower charging current on the control unit - or disconnect other
consumers from the socket/fuse circuit.
to charging cables with controls on the control unit.
415
HYBRID INFORMATION
Charging cable
The charging cable with its control unit is
used to charge the car's hybrid battery.
The charging cable is located in the storage compartment under the cargo area's floor hatch.
WARNING
•
The charging cable has a built-in circuit
breaker. Charging must only take place
with grounded and approved sockets.
•
Children should be supervised when in
the vicinity of the charging cable when
it is plugged in.
•
High voltage in the charging cable.
Contact with high voltage can cause
death or serious personal injury.
•
Do not use the charging cable if it is
damaged in any way. A damaged or
inoperative charging cable must only
be repaired by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
•
Always position the charging cable so
that it will not be driven over, stepped
on, tripped over or damaged in some
other way, or cause personal injury.
•
Disconnect the charger from the wall
outlet before cleaning it.
•
Never connect the charging cable to an
extension cord or a multiple plug
socket.
WARNING
Only use the charging cable provided with
your car or a replacement cable recommended by Volvo.
Specifications, charging cable
Ambient temperature
416
-32 ºC to 50 ºC
(-25 ºF to 122 ºF)
Also, refer to the manufacturer's instructions for using the charging cable and its
components.
IMPORTANT
Multiple plugs, extension cables, overvoltage protection or similar devices must not
be used together with the charging cable
since this may involve a risk of fire, electric
shocks, etc.
An adapter between the 230 V socket
(alternating current) and the charging cable
may only be used if the adapter is
approved in accordance with IEC 61851
and IEC 62196.
IMPORTANT
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 V socket (alternating current) while
charging is in progress - there is then a risk
of damaging the 230 V socket. Always
stop charging first before unplugging the
charging cable from the car's charging
input socket and then from the 230 V
socket.
IMPORTANT
Clean the charging cable with a clean
cloth, moistened with water or a mild
detergent. Do not use chemicals or solvents.
HYBRID INFORMATION
•
Temperature monitoring of the charging
cable (p. 419)
Ground fault breaker in the
charging cable
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 413)
The control unit for the charging cable charging cable has a built-in ground fault breaker
that protects the car and the user from electric shocks caused by system faults.
WARNING
WARNING
The charging cable and its associated parts
must not be swamped or immersed in
water.
Charging the hybrid battery must only take
place with grounded and approved 230 V
sockets (alternating current). If the capacity
for the socket or fuse circuit is unknown,
ask a licensed electrician to check the
capacity. Charging above the capacity of a
fuse circuit may lead to fire or damage the
fuse circuit.
WARNING
•
The charging cable's overvoltage protection helps to protect the car's
charging system, but cannot guarantee
that overload will never occur.
•
Never use visibly worn or damaged
electrical sockets. This could cause fire
or serious injury.
•
Never connect the charging cable to a
cable extension.
•
Maintenance or replacement of the
hybrid battery must only be performed
by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
IMPORTANT
Avoid exposing the control unit and its plug
to direct sunlight. In such cases, the overheating protection in the plug is at risk of
reducing or interrupting the charging of the
hybrid battery.
Related information
•
•
The charging cable's control unit (p. 419)
Ground fault breaker in the charging cable
(p. 417)
}}
417
HYBRID INFORMATION
||
IMPORTANT
The ground fault breaker does not protect
the 230 V socket (alternating current)/
electrical installation.
Control unit with both indicators and
controls
If the control module's built-in ground fault
breaker is tripped then the car symbol illuminates with red constant glow - check the
230 V socket (alternating current).
Control unit with only indicators
Control unit LED4 lamps.
LED lamp 1
LED lamp 2
If the control module's built-in ground fault
breaker is tripped, LED lamp 2 flashes red
while LED lamp 1 is extinguished - check the
230 V socket (alternating current).
4 LED
418
(Light Emitting Diode)
IMPORTANT
•
•
•
Check the capacity of the socket.
Other electronic equipment connected
to the same fuse circuit must be disconnected if the total load is exceeded.
Do not connect the charging cable if
the socket is damaged.
Related information
•
•
•
Charging cable (p. 416)
The charging cable's control unit (p. 419)
Charging status in the charging cable's
control unit (p. 426)
HYBRID INFORMATION
Temperature monitoring of the
charging cable
For the car's hybrid battery to be charged
safely every time, the control unit for the
charging cable and the plug have built-in
monitoring devices for the temperature.
Temperature monitoring takes place in the
control unit and the plug.
NOTE
Volvo recommends a charging cable in
accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC
61851 which supports temperature monitoring.
IMPORTANT
If the temperature monitoring has automatically lowered the charging current
repeatedly and charging has been interrupted then the cause of the overheating must
be investigated and rectified.
The charging cable's control unit
The charging cable's control unit can consist
of only indicators or of both indicators and
controls, depending on charging cable.
Related information
•
•
Charging cable (p. 416)
The charging cable's control unit (p. 419)
Monitoring in the control unit
Charging is switched off if the temperature of
the control unit is too high. This is to protect
the electronics. This may take place at a high
outside temperature, for example, and/or
when strong sunlight shines directly on the
control unit.
Monitoring at the plug
If the temperature at the power source to
which the charging cable is connected is too
high, the charging current is reduced. If the
temperature exceeds a critical level, charging
is stopped completely.
}}
419
HYBRID INFORMATION
||
Control unit with only indicators
LED lamp 1 shows different colours
depending on charging status.
Control unit with both indicators and
controls
LED lamp 2 shows different colours
depending on charging status.
Control unit LED5 lamps.
Control unit indicators and controls.
5 LED
420
(Light Emitting Diode)
HYBRID INFORMATION
Indicator shows selected charging current.
The symbol illuminates when the charging
cable is plugged into a 230 V socket
(alternating current).
Opening and closing the hatch for
the charging input socket
The flap for the hybrid battery's charging
input socket is opened manually.
The symbol illuminates when the charging
cable is plugged into the car's charging
input socket.
IMPORTANT
Never connect the charging cable when
there is a risk of thunderstorm or lightning
strike.
NOTE
The charging cable will remember the last
setting of the charging current. It is therefore important to adjust the setting if
another 230 V socket (alternating current)
is used at the next charging.
Related information
NOTE
Press in the rear section of the cover and
release.
Volvo recommends a charging cable in
accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC
61851 which supports temperature monitoring.
Open the cover.
Close the cover for the charging input socket
in reverse order.
•
•
•
Charging current (p. 414)
Related information
Charging cable (p. 416)
•
•
•
•
Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 421)
6 The
voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.
Charging status in the charging cable's
control unit (p. 426)
The car's hybrid battery is charged with a
charging cable between the car and a 230 V
socket6 (alternating current).
Only use the charging cable supplied with the
car or a replacement cable recommended by
Volvo.
Pushbuttons to increase and decrease the
charging current.
On the charging cable's control unit, set the
required charging current 6–16 A. On delivery,
the lowest possible charging current is preset.
Start charging the hybrid battery
Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 421)
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 433)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 413)
}}
421
HYBRID INFORMATION
||
WARNING
•
•
•
WARNING
The hybrid battery must only be
charged at maximum permitted charging current or lower in accordance with
applicable local and national recommendations for hybrid charging from
230 V sockets (alternating current)/
plugs.
Charging the hybrid battery must only
take place from an approved grounded
230 V socket7 or from a charging station with a loose charging cable (Mode
3) supplied by Volvo.
The control unit's ground fault breaker
protects the car, but there may still be
a risk of overloading the 230 V mains
power circuit.
•
Avoid visible worn or damaged mains
sockets since they may lead to fire
damage and/or personal injury if used.
•
•
Never use an extension cable.
Never use an adapter.
•
The charging cable has a built-in circuit
breaker. Charging must only take place
with grounded and approved sockets.
•
Children should be supervised when in
the vicinity of the charging cable when
it is plugged in.
•
High voltage in the charging cable.
Contact with high voltage can cause
death or serious personal injury.
•
Do not use the charging cable if it is
damaged in any way. A damaged or
inoperative charging cable must only
be repaired by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
•
Always position the charging cable so
that it will not be driven over, stepped
on, tripped over or damaged in some
other way, or cause personal injury.
•
Disconnect the charger from the wall
outlet before cleaning it.
•
Never connect the charging cable to an
extension cord or a multiple plug
socket.
Also, refer to the manufacturer's instructions for using the charging cable and its
components.
7 Or equivalent sockets with a different voltage, depending on
8 Applies to charging cable with controls on the control unit.
422
market.
IMPORTANT
•
Check that the 230 V socket (alternating current) has adequate power
capacity for charging electric vehicles
– in the event of uncertainty, the
socket must be checked by a qualified
professional.
•
If the socket has unknown power
capacity – use the lowest level on the
control unit8.
Take the charging cable out from the storage
compartment under the cargo area floor. Note
HYBRID INFORMATION
that the car must be switched off prior to
charging.
Connect the charging cable to a 230 V
socket. Never use an extension cable.
For charging cables with controls on the
control unit: Set the correct charging current (for existing 230 V socket) on the
control unit.
Open the charging hatch. Remove the
charging handle's protective cover and
then press the handle the whole way into
the socket for the car.
Clamp the charging handle's cover in
place as illustrated.
IMPORTANT
To avoid damage to the paint, e.g. in the
event of high winds, position the charging
handle's protective cover so that it does
not touch the car.
}}
423
HYBRID INFORMATION
||
3. The charging cable's charging handle is
fastened/locked in, and charging starts
within 5 seconds. When charging has
started, the LED lamp in the charging
input socket flashes with a green glow.
The driver display shows the remaining
estimated charging time or whether
charging is not working as intended.
Related information
•
•
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 413)
The charging cable's control unit (p. 419)
Opening and closing the hatch for the
charging input socket (p. 421)
•
Charging status in the car's charging input
socket (p. 424)
Battery charging can be interrupted for a
while if the car is unlocked:
•
Charging status in the car's driver display
(p. 431)
•
and the door is opened - charging
restarts within a few minutes.
•
Charging status in the charging cable's
control unit (p. 426)
•
without the door being opened - the car
is relocked automatically. Charging
restarts after 1 minute.
•
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 433)
Charging status in the car's
charging input socket
The charging input socket shows the charging status using an LED lamp.
LED lamp location in the car's charging input socket.
IMPORTANT
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 V socket (alternating current) while
charging is in progress - there is then a risk
of damaging the 230 V socket. Always
stop charging first before unplugging the
charging cable from the car's charging
input socket and then from the 230 V
socket.
Condensation from the air conditioning may
drip under the car during charging. This is normal and takes place due to cooling of the
hybrid battery.
424
The LED lamp shows the existing status while
charging is in progress. If the LED lamp does
not illuminate, check that the cable is firmly
plugged into the wall socket and the socket in
the car. The white, red or yellow lamps are
activated when the passenger compartment
lighting is switched on - they remain switched
on for a while after the passenger compartment lighting has been switched off.
HYBRID INFORMATION
LED lamp's
glow
Specification
White
LED light.
Yellow
Waiting modeA - waiting
for charging to start.
Flashing green
Charging in progressB.
Green
Charging completeC.
Red
A fault has arisen.
A
B
C
For example, after a door has been opened or if the charging cable's handle is not locked in.
The slower the flashing, the closer to fully charged.
Extinguishes after a while.
Related information
•
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 413)
Charging status in the car's driver display
(p. 431)
•
Charging status in the charging cable's
control unit (p. 426)
•
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 433)
425
HYBRID INFORMATION
Charging status in the charging
cable's control unit
Control unit with only indicators
LED lamp 2
Different indicators on the charging cable's
control unit show the status of ongoing
charging as well as status after completed
charging.
Control unit LED9 lamps.
9 LED
426
(Light Emitting Diode)
LED lamp 1
HYBRID INFORMATION
LED 1
LED 2
Status
Specification
Recommended action
Flashes blue,
amber and
red
Flashes blue,
amber and red
Initiation
Self-test.
Wait until the self-test is completed.
Illuminates in
blue
Extinguished
Standby
The charging cable is not connected to
the car.
Connect the charging cable to the car's charging
input socket.
Flashes blue
Extinguished
Standby
Charging is possible but is not activated by the electronics in the car.
Wait until charging starts.
Flashes blue
Flashes blue
Charging in progress.
•
The car's electronics have started
charging.
•
Charging in progress.
Wait until the battery is fully charged.
Extinguished
Flashes amber
Charging in progress.
Temperature monitoring has detected
an increased temperature. Charging
continues with reduced power level.
Restart charging. If the problem persists - consult
a qualified professional.
Extinguished
Illuminates in
amber
Charging is not
possible.
Temperature monitoring has triggered
for the 230 V socket.
Restart charging. If the problem persists - consult
a qualified professional.
Extinguished
Flashes red
Charging is not
possible.
The ground fault breaker on the charging cable has triggered.
1.
Unplug the charging cable from the 230 V
socket.
2. The ground fault breaker is reset after 10 seconds and the unit restarts.
3. Plug the charging cable into the 230 V
socket.
4. If the problem persists - consult a qualified
professional.
}}
427
HYBRID INFORMATION
||
428
LED 1
LED 2
Status
Specification
Recommended action
Flashes red
Illuminates in
red
Charging is not
possible.
Charging cable connected to ungrounded 230 V socket.
Plug the charging cable into a grounded 230 V
socket. If the problem persists - consult a qualified
professional.
Flashes red
Flashes red
Charging is not
possible.
Internal fault. The charging cable is
damaged and must be repaired.
Contact a qualified professional.
HYBRID INFORMATION
Control unit with both indicators and
controls
Control unit indicators and controls.
}}
429
HYBRID INFORMATION
||
Control unit indicators
Status
Specification
The indicator for charging current (1) is
extinguished. The car symbol (4) illuminates with a constant green glow.
Standby
•
The charging cable is connected to the
car.
•
Charging is possible but has not yet
been activated by the electronics in the
car.
Existing charge current is shown by a
green indicator (1). The car symbol (4)
illuminates with a constant green glow.
Charging in
progress.
•
The car's electronics have started charging.
•
Charging in progress.
The indicator for charging current (1) is
extinguished. The car symbol (4)
flashes red.
Charging is not
possible.
•
There is a communication error between
the control unit and the car.
•
The ventilation for the car's electronics is
not adequate, not activated or defective.
The car symbol (4) illuminates with a
constant red glow.
Charging is not
possible.
•
The ground fault breaker on the charging
cable has triggered.
Recommended action
Wait until the battery is fully charged.
Wait until the battery is fully charged.
1.
Check all connections or use
another 230 V socket (alternating
current).
2. Restart the battery charging.
1.
Unplug the charging cable from the
230 V socket.
2. The ground fault breaker is reset
and the unit restarts.
3. If the problem persists - consult a
qualified professional.
The indicator for charging current (1)
and the house symbol (2) flash red.
Charging is not
possible.
Related information
•
•
•
430
•
Charging status in the car's driver display
(p. 431)
•
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 433)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 413)
The charging cable's control unit (p. 419)
Charging status in the car's charging input
socket (p. 424)
Temperature monitoring has triggered for
the 230 V socket.
Restart charging. If the problem persists - consult a qualified professional.
HYBRID INFORMATION
Charging status in the car's driver
display
is shown for as long as the driver display is
operating.
The driver display shows the status for charging with both image and text. The information
Image
A
Message
Specification
Fully charged at: [Time] is shown together with an animation with
blue pulsating light through the charging cable.
Charging continues and an approximate time for when
the battery is estimated to be fully charged is shown.
The text Charging complete is shown. An illustration of the car is
shown with an LED indicator at the charging input socket that illuminates in green.
The battery is fully charged.
The text Charging error is shown. The LED indicator at the charging
input socket illuminates in red.
A fault has occurred, check the connection of the
charging cable to the car's charging input socket and to
the 230 V socketA (alternating current).
The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.
}}
431
HYBRID INFORMATION
||
NOTE
If the driver display is not used for a while
then it is dimmed. Reactivate the display
by means of one of the following:
•
•
•
depress the brake pedal
open one of the doors
set the car in ignition position I by turning the START knob clockwise and
releasing.
Related information
•
•
432
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 413)
Symbols and messages relating to Twin
Engine in the driver display (p. 435)
•
Charging status in the car's charging input
socket (p. 424)
•
Charging status in the charging cable's
control unit (p. 426)
•
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 433)
HYBRID INFORMATION
Stop charging of hybrid battery
Finish charging by unlocking the car, unplugging the charging cable from the car's charging input socket and then from the 230 V
socket10 (alternating current).
IMPORTANT
Before the charging cable is disconnected
from the car's charging input socket, the
car must be unlocked using the unlock button on the remote control key. This must
be carried out even if the doors on the car
are already unlocked. If the car is not
unlocked using the unlock button, this may
lead to damage to the charging cable or to
the system.
Unlock the car with the remote control key
- charging is finished and the charging
cable's locked handle releases/is
unlocked.
10
The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.
Return the charging cable to the storage
compartment under the cargo area floor.
The charging cable is locked
automatically
NOTE
Always unlock the car so that charging is
stopped before the connection to the
230 V socket (alternating current) is
unplugged. Note that the charging cable
must be unplugged from the car's charging
input socket before being unplugged from
the 230 V socket, partly to avoid damage
to the system and partly to avoid stopping
the charging unintentionally.
Unplug the cable from the 230 V socket.
Unplug the cable from the car's charging
input socket and close the hatch.
If the charging cable is not unplugged from
the charging input socket, it is locked in again
automatically shortly after unlocking in order
to maximise charging and range, as well as to
facilitate preconditioning prior to the journey.
The charging cable can be unplugged again if
the car is unlocked using the remote control
key. For cars with Passive Entry*, you can lock
and unlock using the handle again.
Related information
•
Opening and closing the hatch for the
charging input socket (p. 421)
•
Charging cable (p. 416)
}}
* Option/accessory. 433
HYBRID INFORMATION
||
434
•
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 413)
Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 421)
HYBRID INFORMATION
Symbols and messages relating to
Twin Engine in the driver display
A number of symbols and messages regarding Twin Engine can be shown in the driver
Symbol
display. They may also be shown in combination with general indicator and warning symbols and are then extinguished when the
problems have been rectified.
Message
Specification
12 V Battery
Hybrid battery fault. Contact a workshopA to check the battery as soon as possible.
Charging fault, service urgent. Drive
to workshop
12 V Battery
Charging fault Stop safely
Hybrid battery fault. Stop the car safely and contact a workshopA to have the battery checked
as soon as possible.
12 V Battery
Hybrid battery fault. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.
Fuse failure Service required
HV battery
Overheated, stop safely
Reduced performance
Max car speed limited
Propulsion system
Harsh behaviour at low speed, car
ok to use
The temperature of the hybrid battery seems to be rising abnormally. Stop the car and switch
off the engine. Wait at least 5 minutes before continuing to drive. Call a workshopA or check
from the outside that everything seems normal before continuing to drive.
The hybrid battery is not sufficiently charged for driving at high speeds. Charge the battery as
soon as possible.
The hybrid system does not function as intended. Contact a workshopA to check the function
as soon as possible.
}}
435
HYBRID INFORMATION
||
Symbol
Message
Specification
Hybrid system failure
The hybrid system is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.
Service required
Charge cable
Remove before start
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
•
436
Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 421)
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 433)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 413)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 94)
•
Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 91)
•
•
Hybrid gauge (p. 84)
Hybrid battery gauge (p. 85)
Shown when the driver tries to start the car and the charging cable is connected to the car.
Disconnect the charging cable and close the charging hatch.
HYBRID INFORMATION
Long-term storage of vehicles with
hybrid batteries
To minimise hybrid battery degradation during prolonged storage (longer than 1 month)
of the vehicle a charge level of approximately
25% is recommended as indicated on the
driver display.
Proceed as follows:
2. If storage has lasted longer than 6 months
or the hybrid battery charge level is significantly lower than 25% – charge the battery to approx. 25% again to compensate
for the natural self-discharge that occurred
during the prolonged storage. Continuously check the charge level in the driver
display.
NOTE
Choose the coolest location possible for
the vehicle in order to minimise aging of
the battery during long-term storage. During summer the vehicle should preferably
remain indoors or outdoors in the shade,
depending on where the temperature is
lowest.
Related information
1.
If the state of charge is high – run the car
until approx. 25% remains. If the state of
charge is low – charge the battery until a
level of approx. 25% is reached.
•
•
•
Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 421)
Hybrid battery gauge (p. 85)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 413)
437
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the car
To start the car:
The car is started using the start knob in the
tunnel console when the remote control key
is in the passenger compartment.
IMPORTANT
The car cannot be started if the charging
cable is still engaged. Make sure the
charging cable is removed from the charging input socket before the starting the car.
1.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
WARNING
Before starting:
•
•
Fasten the seatbelt.
•
Make sure that the brake pedal can be
fully depressed.
Adjust the seat, steering wheel and
mirrors.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting the car since it is equipped with
support for keyless starting (Passive start).
1
440
The remote control key must be inside the
car. For cars with Passive Start, the key
needs to be located in the front part of the
passenger compartment. With the option
for keyless locking/unlocking* of the car,
the key can be anywhere in the car.
2. Hold the brake pedal depressed1 fully. For
cars with automatic gear changing, make
sure that gear position P or N is selected.
For cars with a manual gearbox, make
sure that the gear lever is in neutral position or that the clutch pedal is depressed.
engine remains switched off. This means that
after the start knob has been turned clockwise, the electric motor has ”started” and the
car is ready to drive. A started car is indicated
by the driver display's indicator lamps extinguishing and its preset theme illuminating.
However, there are situations where the petrol
engine is started instead, e.g. in the event of
the temperature being too low or if the hybrid
battery needs charging.
Error messages
If the Car key not found message is shown in
the driver display when starting, place the
remote control key by the backup reader. Then
try to start the car again.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and then
release it. The control automatically
returns to its starting position.
When the engine is started, the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its
overheating protection triggers.
When starting in normal conditions, the car's
electric drive motor is prioritised - the petrol
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
If the car is moving, the engine can be started by turning the start knob clockwise.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTE
WARNING
Always take the remote control key out
from the car when leaving the car and
make sure the car's electrical system is in
ignition position 0 - especially if there are
children in the car.
When the remote control key is positioned
by the backup reader, make sure that there
are no car keys, metal objects or electronic
apparatus by the backup reader, (e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several car keys close to one another
by the backup reader may cause interference with each other.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible,
which minimises exhaust emissions and
protects the environment.
If the message Car start System check, wait
is shown in the driver display when starting,
wait until the message disappears and then
try to start the car again.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover.
Related information
•
•
•
•
NOTE
The car cannot be started if the hybrid battery is discharged.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving.
Switching off the car
The car is switched off using the start knob in
the tunnel console.
•
Switching off the car (p. 441)
Start knob in the tunnel console.
To switch off the car:
–
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 481)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 443)
Turn the start knob clockwise and release
it - the car is switched off. The control
automatically returns to its starting position.
If the gear selector for cars with an automatic
gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls:
–
Turn the knob clockwise and hold it until
the car is switched off.
Related information
•
•
•
Starting the car (p. 440)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
}}
441
STARTING AND DRIVING
•
•
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 481)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 443)
Ignition positions
The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make
the different functions available.
In order to facilitate the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off,
the car's electrical system can be set in three
different levels – 0, I and II. These levels are
described with the denomination "ignition
position" throughout the owner's manual.
Level
0
The following table shows the functions available in each ignition position/level:
Functions
•
Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminatedA.
•
•
Power* seats can be adjusted.
•
The centre display is started
and can be usedA.
•
The infotainment system can
be usedA.
The power windows can be
used.
In this mode, the functions are controlled by time and are switched off
automatically after a short while.
I
•
•
•
Panorama roof, power windows, 12V power socket in the
passenger compartment,
Bluetooth, navigation, phone,
ventilation fan and windscreen
wipers can be used.
Power seats can be adjusted.
12 V power sockets* in the
cargo area can be used.
Power is taken from the battery
in this ignition position.
442
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Level
II
Functions
•
•
The headlamps come on.
•
Several other systems are activated. However, heating in seat
cushions and the rear window
can only be activated after the
car has been started.
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds.
Selecting ignition mode
•
The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make
the different functions available.
Ignition position I – Turn the start knob
clockwise and release it. The control automatically returns to its starting position.
•
Ignition position II – Turn the start knob
clockwise and hold it in position for
approx. 5 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting
position.
•
Back to ignition position 0 – To return to
ignition position 0 from position I and II –
Turn the start knob clockwise and release.
The control automatically returns to its
starting position.
Selecting ignition position
This ignition position consumes a
lot of current from the battery
and should therefore be avoided!
A
Related information
Also activated when the door is opened.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Starting the car (p. 440)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Start knob in the tunnel console.
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 481)
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 443)
Ignition position 0 – Unlock the car and
store the remote control key inside the
car.
•
•
•
•
•
Starting the car (p. 440)
Switching off the car (p. 441)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 481)
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or
the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear
changing, when these ignition positions
are to be selected.
443
STARTING AND DRIVING
Alcohol lock*
The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent
the car from being driven by individuals under
the influence of alcohol. Before the engine
can be started the driver must take a breath
test that verifies that he/she is not under the
influence of alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration
takes place in accordance with each market's
limit value in force for driving legally.
The car has an interface for the electrical connection of the different makes and models of
alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The
interface facilitates alcohol lock connection,
and gives the option of an integrated function
including messages related to the alcohol lock
in the car's main display. For information
about a specific alcohol lock, please refer to
the owner's manual from the respective alcohol lock manufacturer.
•
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
In the event of an emergency situation or if
the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible
to bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive
the car.
For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the
separate instructions for that specific lock.
Activating the bypass function (Bypass)
NOTE
All bypass activation is logged and saved in
the memory in the alcohol lock's control
unit. It is not possible to undo a bypass.
The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass
instead?, is shown in the screen:
•
If "Cancel/Yes" is shown - select bypass
by pressing the right arrow button on the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad and
then on the O button.
•
If "Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing the O button.
WARNING
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
Related information
•
•
•
444
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 444)
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock* (p. 445)
The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the car
can be started.
The number of bypasses possible before service is required is selected during alcohol lock
installation.
Starting the car (p. 440)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
•
•
•
•
Alcohol lock* (p. 444)
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock* (p. 445)
Starting the car (p. 440)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock*
The alcohol lock is activated automatically
and is then ready for use when the car is
opened.
To bear in mind
In order to obtain correct function and as
accurate a measurement result as possible:
Brake functions
The car's brakes are used to reduce the
speed or prevent the car from rolling.
In addition to the foot brake and parking
brake, the car is equipped with several automatic brake assist functions. These can assist
the driver by not needing to keep his/her foot
on the brake pedal when at a traffic light, or
when starting on an uphill gradient.
•
Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes
before the breath test.
Depending on the car's equipment, the following auto braking functions are available:
•
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an
incorrect measurement result.
•
Automatic brake when stationary (Auto
Hold)
•
•
•
Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist)
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 444)
Alcohol lock* (p. 444)
Starting the car (p. 440)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Auto braking after a collision
City Safety
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Foot brake (p. 446)
Parking brake (p. 448)
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 452)
Auto braking after a collision (p. 453)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 453)
City Safety™ (p. 343)
* Option/accessory. 445
STARTING AND DRIVING
Foot brake
The foot brake is part of the brake system.
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If
a brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal
will engage deeper. Higher pressure on the
pedal will therefore be needed to produce the
normal braking effect.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the electric motor or internal combustion engine is
running.
low speed. The test may be felt as pulses in
the brake pedal.
Light braking charges the hybrid
battery
The electric motor's engine brake is used during light braking. The car's kinetic energy is
then converted to electrical energy instead,
which is used to charge the hybrid battery.
Battery charging with electric motor braking is
indicated in the driver display.
Anti-lock braking system
2 Anti-lock
446
Braking System
Specification
Check the brake fluid level. If the
level is low, fill with brake fluid
and check for the cause of the
brake fluid loss.
Fault in pedal sensor.
Constant glow for more than 2
seconds: Fault in the ABS system. The car's normal brake system is still working, but without
the ABS function.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a
heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using
engine braking in gearshift mode B.
A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the car has been started when
the driver releases the brake pedal. A further
automatic test of the system may be made at
Symbol
Constant glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started: Automatic function check.
If the foot brake is used when the car is
switched off, greater pedal pressure is
required to brake the car.
The car has anti-lock brakes (ABS2), which
prevents the wheels from locking while braking and allows maintained steering control.
Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when
this is engaged and this is normal.
Symbols in the driver display
The driver display indicates charging during electric
motor braking.
This function is active in the speed interval
150-5 km/h (93-3 mph). During heavier braking, as well as outside the speed interval, braking is supplemented by the hydraulic brake
system. The driver's display shows this by the
indicator being down in the red zone.
If the message Brake pedal
Characteristics changed Service required is shown, the system for "Brake-by-wire" is disengaged. A higher pedal pressure is
required to produce braking
effect.
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
If both the warning lamps for brake fault
and ABS fault illuminate at the same time,
a fault has occurred in the brake system.
•
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to
the nearest workshop and have the
brake system checked - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
•
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level
in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive
further before topping up the brake
fluid. The reason for the loss of brake
fluid must be investigated.
Brake assistance
Braking on wet roads
(BAS3)
The brake assist system
helps to
increase brake force during braking, and can
thereby shorten the braking distance.
The system detects the way in which the
driver brakes and increases brake force where
necessary. The brake force can be boosted up
to the level when the ABS system is engaged.
The function is suspended when the pressure
on the brake pedal decreases.
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 446)
When driving for a prolonged period of time
in heavy rain without braking, the braking
effect may be delayed slightly when next
using the brakes.
This may also be the case after a car wash. It
is then necessary to depress the brake pedal
more forcefully. You should therefore maintain
a greater distance to the vehicles in front.
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads
or using a car wash. This warms up the brake
discs, enabling them to dry faster and protecting them against corrosion. Bear in mind the
current traffic situation when braking.
Related information
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake assistance (p. 447)
•
•
Foot brake (p. 446)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 448)
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 452)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 453)
Braking on wet roads (p. 447)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 448)
Brake system maintenance (p. 448)
Brake lights (p. 158)
3 Brake
Assist System
447
STARTING AND DRIVING
Braking on gritted roads
Brake system maintenance
Parking brake
When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt
may form on the brake discs and brake linings.
This may extend braking distance. You should
therefore maintain a greater safety distance to
vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do
the following:
Check brake system components regularly
for wear.
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. After
replacing brake linings and brake discs, braking effect is only adapted after they have been
"worn in" for a few hundred kilometres (miles).
Compensate for the reduced braking effect by
depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that are
approved for your Volvo.
The parking brake prevents the car from rolling away from stationary by means of
mechanically locking/blocking two wheels.
•
Brake now and again to remove any layer
of salt. Make sure that other road users
are not put at risk by the braking.
•
Gently depress the brake pedal after finishing driving and before starting your next
trip.
IMPORTANT
Related information
•
•
The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.
Foot brake (p. 446)
Braking on wet roads (p. 447)
Contact a workshop for information about
the procedure or engage a workshop to
carry out the inspection - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
448
Foot brake (p. 446)
The control for the parking brake is located in the
tunnel console between the seats.
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the electrically-operated parking brake is
being applied. The noise can also be heard
during the automatic function checking of the
parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake
is activated, it only acts on the rear wheels. If
it is activated when the car is moving then the
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts
on all four wheels. Brake function changes
over to the rear wheels when the car is almost
stationary.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 449)
•
•
Parking on a hill (p. 451)
•
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 452)
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 451)
Activating and deactivating the
parking brake
Use the parking brake to prevent the car from
rolling from stationary.
Symbol in the driver display
Symbol
Specification
The symbol is illuminated when
the parking brake is activated.
Activating the parking brake
If the symbol flashes, it indicates
a fault has occurred. Read the
message in the driver display.
Automatic activation
The parking brake is activated automatically
1.
Pull the control upward.
> The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the parking brake is activated.
2. Check that the car is stationary.
•
when the car is switched off and the setting for automatic activation of the parking
brake is activated in the centre display.
•
when gear position P is selected on a
steep hill.
•
if the Auto hold (Automatic brake when
stationary) function is activated and
• the car has been stationary for a long
time (5-10 minutes)
•
•
the car is switched off
the driver leaves the car.
}}
449
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Emergency brake
In an emergency, the parking brake can be
activated when the car is in motion by pulling
and holding up the control. Braking stops
when the control is released, or if the accelerator pedal is depressed.
NOTE
Deactivate automatically
1. Start the car.
Automatic parking brake activation
setting
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. Select
gear position D or R and depress the
accelerator pedal.
> The parking brake releases and the
symbol in the driver display extinguishes.
Choose whether the parking brake is to be
activated automatically when the car is
switched off.
To change setting:
An acoustic signal sounds while emergency braking is active at high speeds.
NOTE
For automatic deactivation, either the
driver has to have put on their seatbelt or
the driver door has to be closed.
Deactivating the parking brake
Related information
Deactivate manually
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Press the control down.
> The parking brake releases and the
symbol in the driver display extinguishes.
450
•
Automatic parking brake activation setting
(p. 450)
•
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 451)
•
•
Parking brake (p. 448)
Parking on a hill (p. 451)
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension to select or deselect the
function Auto Activate Parking Brake.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 449)
•
Parking brake (p. 448)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Parking on a hill
Always use the parking brake when parking
on a hill.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear
or the automatic transmission's P position
is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in
all situations.
If the car is parked facing uphill:
•
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
•
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
car to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline.
Avoid this by pulling the control upwards
while driving the car away. Release the control
when the engine achieves traction.
In the event of a fault in the
parking brake
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is
not possible to deactivate or activate the
parking brake after several attempts.
An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving with the parking brake activated.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
If the symbol flashes, it indicates
a fault has occurred. See the
message in the driver display.
Fault in brake system. See the
message in the driver display.
If the car must be parked before a possible
fault is rectified, then the wheels must be
turned as for parking on a hill and the gear
selector must be in position P.
Information message in driver
display.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can be neither deactivated nor activated. Connect a donor battery if the battery
voltage is too low.
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electricallyoperated parking brake - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Specification
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 449)
•
•
•
Parking on a hill (p. 451)
Starter battery (p. 624)
Volvo service programme (p. 608)
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 449)
451
STARTING AND DRIVING
Automatic braking when stationary
Automatic brake when stationary (Auto hold)
means that the driver can release the brake
pedal while maintaining braking effect when
the car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction.
When the car has stopped, the brakes are
activated automatically. The function can use
either foot brake or parking brake to hold the
car stationary and it works on all gradients.
When driving off, the brakes are released
automatically if the driver is wearing the seatbelt or the driver's door is closed.
NOTE
When braking to a standstill on an uphill or
downhill slope, the brake pedal should be
depressed a little harder before being
released to ensure the car does not roll.
The parking brake is activated if
•
•
•
•
452
the car is switched off
the driver's door is opened
the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled
the car has been stationary for a longer
time (5-10 minutes).
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
Specification
The symbol is illuminated when
the function uses the foot brake
to keep the car stationary.
Activating and deactivating the
automatic brake at a standstill
The automatic brake function at a standstill is
activated using the button in the tunnel console.
The symbol is illuminated when
the function uses the parking
brake to keep the car stationary.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the automatic
brake at a standstill (p. 452)
•
•
•
Foot brake (p. 446)
Parking brake (p. 448)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 453)
–
Press the button in the tunnel console to
activate or deactivate the function.
> The indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated. Activated function remains even when the
car is started next time.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Applicable when switching off
If the function is active and holds the
car with the foot brake (A-symbol
illuminated in the driver display), the
brake pedal must be depressed at
the same time as the button is depressed in
order to deactivate.
•
The function remains deactivated until it is
reactivated.
•
When the function is deactivated, hill start
assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the
car from rolling backwards when starting
on an uphill gradient.
Related information
•
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 452)
Help when starting on a hill
(HSA4)
Hill start assist
prevents the car from
rolling backwards when starting on an uphill
gradient. When reversing uphill, it prevents
the car from rolling forwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake
pedal to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after
several seconds or when the driver starts to
drive away.
Hill start assist is available even when the
function for automatic brake when stationary
(Auto hold) is deactivated.
Related information
•
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 452)
•
Foot brake (p. 446)
Auto braking after a collision
In the event of a collision in which the activation level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioners or airbags, or if a collision
with a large animal is detected, the car's
brakes are automatically applied. This function is to prevent or reduce the effects of any
subsequent collision.
After a serious collision there is a risk that it is
no longer possible to control and steer the car.
In order to avoid or mitigate a possible further
collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's path, the auto braking system is activated automatically and brakes the car in a
safe manner.
Brake lights and hazard warning lights are
activated during braking. When the car has
stopped, the hazard warning lights continue to
flash and the parking brake is applied.
If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a
risk of being hit by following traffic, the system can be overridden by the driver depressing the accelerator pedal.
The function assumes that the brake system is
intact after the collision.
Related information
•
•
•
4 Hill
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 357)
BLIS* (p. 358)
Brake functions (p. 445)
Start Assist
* Option/accessory. 453
STARTING AND DRIVING
Gearbox
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain
(power transmission) between engine and
drive wheels. The function of the gearbox is
to change the gear ratio depending on speed
and power requirements.
The car has an eight-speed automatic gearbox, and an electric motor for rear-wheel drive.
The number of gear changes means that the
engine's torque and power range can be used
effectively. Two of the gears are overdrive
gears that save fuel when driving at constant
engine speed. It is also possible to select
gears manually. The driver display shows
which gear position is currently in use.
With an automatic gearbox, the system
selects a gear so that you can drive as
energy-efficiently as possible. The gearbox
also has a manual gearshift mode.
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
Gear shift indicator (p. 459)
If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the
driver display shows a symbol and a message.
Symbol
Overview of gear lever and shift pattern in the driver
display.
The driver display shows the gear position
selected:
R, N, D or B. The P position is electrical.
During manual gear changing, the gear being
used is also shown.
454
To prevent damage to any drive system
components, the working temperature of
the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of
overheating, a warning symbol illuminates
in the driver display and a text message is
shown - follow the recommendation given.
Symbols in the driver display
Related information
•
•
IMPORTANT
Specification
Information or error message for
gearbox. Follow the recommendation given.
Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow the recommendation given.
Reduced performance/Acceleration performance reduced
In the event of a temporary powertrain fault, the car can go into a
Limp home mode with reduced
engine power to prevent damage
to the powertrain.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 455)
Gear positions for automatic
gearbox
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* (p. 457)
With an automatic gearbox, an appropriate
gear is selected automatically depending on
the need for speed and power.
Gear selector inhibitor (p. 458)
Changing gear
Kick-down function (p. 459)
The gear selector is the shift-by-wire-type
where shifting is performed electronically
instead of mechanically. This means simpler
shifting and more distinct gear positions.
Gear shift indicator (p. 459)
Gear positions
Park position - P
Overview of gear lever and position P
The park position is activated via the P button
next to the gear selector.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the
P position is engaged.
Overview of gear lever and gear positions.
Change gear position by pressing the springloaded gear selector forwards or backwards,
or sideways for manual shifting.
Select the P position when the car is parked or
when starting the engine. The car must be stationary when the park position is selected.
To select another gear position when the park
position is selected, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition position must be II.
To park - first apply the parking bake and then
select park position.
}}
* Option/accessory. 455
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear
or the automatic transmission's P position
is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in
all situations.
NOTE
To be able to lock the car and arm the
alarm, the gear position must be in P.
Help functions
The system will change to P position automatically
•
•
if the car is switched off in position D or R.
if the driver unfastens the seatbelt and
opens the driver's door when the car is
running with the gear selector in a position
other than P.
To park a car without wearing the seatbelt and
with the door open - exit the P position by
selecting R or D again.
If the car is switched off in neutral position,
there is no automatic change-over to P position. This is to allow you to wash the car in the
type of car wash that requires the car to be
rolled through the facility.
456
Reverse position - R
Select position R to reverse. The car must be
stationary when reverse position is selected.
Brake position - B
Neutral position - N
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in N position.
To be able to move the gear selector from the
N position to another gear position, the brake
pedal must be depressed and the ignition
position must be II.
Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up
and down takes place automatically based on
the level of acceleration and speed.
The car must be stationary when changing
gear from R position to D position.
Overview of brake positions in the driver display.
From B position, it is possible to change gear
manually. The B position can be selected at
any time during travel. The car brakes using its
electric motor when the accelerator pedal is
released, while also charging the hybrid battery. This gives more opportunities for
recharging the hybrid battery, since charging
also takes place without the driver using the
brake pedal.
Select brake position by moving the gear
selector backwards from the D position. The
driver display shows which gear is being used.
STARTING AND DRIVING
•
Press the gear selector to the right to "+"
(plus) to change up one step and release
it.
•
Press the gear selector to the left to "–"
(minus) to change down one step and
release it.
•
Press the gear selector backwards to
return to the D position.
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
The steering wheel paddles are a complement to the gear selector and make it possible to change gear manually without releasing hands from the steering wheel.
The gearbox automatically shifts down if the
speed decreases to a level lower than appropriate for the selected gear, in order to avoid
jerking and stalling.
Driver display when changing gear with steering
wheel paddles.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
Gear selector inhibitor (p. 458)
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* (p. 457)
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
Kick-down function (p. 459)
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
Activating the steering wheel paddles
To be able to change gear with the steering
wheel paddles they must first be activated:
–
Pull one of the paddles toward the steering wheel.
> A figure in the driver display indicates
current gear.
Driver display when changing gear with steering
wheel paddles in manual gearshift mode.
Switch
To change gear one step:
–
Pull one of the paddles backwards towards the steering wheel - and release.
}}
* Option/accessory. 457
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle provided that the engine speed does not
leave the permitted range. After each gear
change the figure in the driver display changes
to show the current gear.
Deactivating the function
Manual deactivation in gear position D and
B
– Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by
pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward
the steering wheel and holding in place
until the figure in the driver display for the
current gear extinguishes.
> The gearbox returns to gear position D
and B depending on the position
selected before the paddles were activated.
Automatic deactivation
In gear position D the steering wheel paddles
are deactivated after a short time if they are
not used. This is indicated by means of the figure for the current gear extinguishing.
In gear position B there is no automatic deactivation.
Related information
458
•
•
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
•
Gear shift indicator (p. 459)
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 455)
Gear selector inhibitor
Related information
The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental changing between different gear positions
in an automatic gearbox.
•
•
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special safety systems.
From park position - P
To be able to move the gear selector from the
P position to another gear position, the brake
pedal must be depressed and the ignition
position must be II.
From neutral position - N
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from the
N position to another gear position, the brake
pedal must be depressed and the ignition
position must be II.
Message in the driver display
If the gear selector is inhibited, a message is
shown in the driver display, e.g. Gear lever
Press brake pedal to activate gear lever.
The gear selector is not inhibited mechanically.
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 455)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Kick-down function
Gear shift indicator
Kick-down can be used when maximum
acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
The gear shift indicator in the driver display
shows the current gear during manual gearshifting and when it is appropriate to engage
the next gear for optimum fuel economy.
For eco-driving during manual gear changing,
it is important to drive in the right gear and to
change gear in good time.
NOTE
On automatic cars, the gear shift indicator
is only available on certain markets.
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
If the accelerator is released from the kickdown position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Safety function
To prevent over-revving of the engine, the
gearbox control program has a protective
downshift inhibitor.
The gearbox does not permit downshifting/
kick-down which would result in an engine
speed high enough to damage the engine.
Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift
down in this way at high engine speed – the
original gear remains engaged.
On kick-down the car can shift down one or
more steps at a time, depending in engine
speed. The car shifts up when the engine has
reached is maximum engine speed in order to
prevent engine damage.
Gear shift indicator in the driver display5.
The gear shift indicator is shown in gear position B. The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in the driver display and indicates
recommended shifting to a higher gear by a
flashing plus sign.
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
5 The
figure is schematic – parts may vary depending on car model.
459
STARTING AND DRIVING
All-wheel drive
(AWD6)
All-wheel drive
means that the car is
driving all four wheels at the same time,
which improves traction.
The electric motor that drives the rear wheels
enables electric all-wheel drive functionality.
All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending
on the selected drive mode.
Related information
•
•
Drive modes (p. 462)
Gearbox (p. 454)
Drive systems
Volvo's Twin Engine combines an internal
combustion engine that drives the front
wheels with an electric motor that drives the
rear wheels.
Two drive systems
Depending on the driver-selected drive mode
and available electric energy, the two drive
systems can be used either individually or in
parallel.
The electric motor is supplied its energy from
a hybrid battery fitted in the tunnel console.
The hybrid battery can be charged in a wall
socket, or in a special charging station. The
internal combustion engine can also charge
the hybrid battery with a special high-voltage
generator.
Both the internal combustion engine and electric motor can generate motive force directly
to the wheels. An advanced control system
combines the properties of both drive systems
in order to provide optimum driving economy.
Hybrid battery - The function of the hybrid
battery is to store energy. It receives
energy when charging from the mains
power circuit, during regenerative braking
or from the high-voltage generator. It provides energy for electric operation as well
as for temporarily operating the electric air
conditioning during the preconditioning of
the passenger compartment.
Internal combustion engine - The internal
combustion engine starts when the
energy level in the hybrid battery is insufficient for the engine power that the driver
requests.
High voltage generator7 - Charges the
hybrid battery. Starter motor for the internal combustion engine. Can support the
6 All Wheel Drive
7 CISG (Crank Integrated
460
Starter Generator) - Combined high-voltage generator and starter motor.
STARTING AND DRIVING
internal combustion engine with extra
electrical energy.
Starting and stopping the
combustion engine in Twin Engine
Electric motor - Powers the car in electric
operation. If necessary, provides extra torque and power during acceleration. Provides electrical all-wheel drive functionality. Recycles brake energy to electrical
energy.
An advanced control system determines the
extent to which the car is driven on internal
combustion engine, electric motor or both in
parallel. During electric operation, the car
may sometimes need to start the internal
combustion engine automatically due to
external circumstances, e.g. in low outside
temperatures, which is completely normal. In
addition, the internal combustion engine
always starts when the hybrid battery reaches its lowest state of charge.
Related information
•
General information about Twin Engine
(p. 412)
•
Starting and stopping the combustion
engine in Twin Engine (p. 461)
•
•
•
Drive modes (p. 462)
Gearbox (p. 454)
Factors that affect range when running on
electricity (p. 471)
Emission control
To ensure that emission control operates as
energy-efficiently as possible, the internal
combustion engine must be run for several
minutes once it has been started. The duration
of the internal combustion engine's running
time varies depending on the temperature of
the catalytic converter.
Related information
•
•
•
Drive systems (p. 460)
Economical driving (p. 470)
Drive modes (p. 462)
Climate settings at low temperatures
In low outside temperatures, the internal combustion engine sometimes starts automatically
in order to achieve the desired passenger
compartment temperature and air quality. The
amount of time that the internal combustion
engine runs can be affected by
•
•
•
lowering the temperature
reducing the fan strength
activating drive mode Pure.
Electric operation in low or high
temperatures
In low or high outside temperatures, the car's
range and output for electric operation may be
reduced and affect how often the internal
combustion engine is started automatically.
461
STARTING AND DRIVING
Drive modes
Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving characteristics in order to enhance the
driving experience and facilitate driving in
special situations.
Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly
have access to the car's numerous functions
and settings for different driving needs. Each
drive mode is adapted to provide optimum
driving characteristics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Steering
Engine/gearbox/all-wheel drive
Brakes
Shock absorption
Driver display
Climate settings
Select the drive mode adapted for the current
driving conditions. Remember that not all
drive modes are available in all situations.
Selectable drive modes
WARNING
Remember that the car does not emit any
engine noise when it is only powered by
the electric motor and may therefore be
difficult to notice by children, pedestrians,
cyclists and animals. This applies in particular at low speeds, such as in car parks.
462
WARNING
Do not leave the car in an unventilated area
with activated drive mode and the fueldriven engine switched off - automatic
engine start occurs at low energy level in
the hybrid battery, and the exhaust gases
could then cause serious injury to people
and animals.
Hybrid
• This is the car's normal mode where the
electric motor and internal combustion
engine work together.
When the car starts, it is in the Hybrid mode.
The control system uses both the electric
motor and internal combustion engine – individually or in parallel – and adapts use with
regard to performance, fuel consumption and
comfort. The capacity to run solely with the
electric motor depends on the hybrid battery's
energy level and, for example, the need for
heating or cooling in the passenger compartment.
If high power output is available, it is possible
to drive with electrical power alone. When the
accelerator pedal is depressed, only the electric motor is activated until a certain position is
reached. The internal combustion engine
starts when this position is exceeded and the
energy level in the battery is insufficient for the
engine power that the driver requests with the
accelerator pedal.
At low energy level (hybrid battery almost
empty) the battery's energy level must be
maintained, leading to the internal combustion
engine starting more often. Charge the hybrid
battery from a 230 VAC socket with the
charging cable, or activate Charge in the function view in order to restore the capacity to
run on electricity alone.
The drive mode is designed for low energy
consumption with a mix of the electric motor
and the internal combustion engine, without
compromising the climate comfort and driving
experience. When higher acceleration is
required, maximum additional power from the
electric drive line is used.
The car also senses if the driving conditions
require all-wheel drive and automatically
engages it if necessary. All-wheel drive and
electric additional power are always available
regardless of the battery's state of charge.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Information in the driver display
When driving in hybrid mode the driver display
shows a hybrid gauge. The pointer in the
hybrid gauge indicates how much energy the
driver requests with the accelerator pedal. The
marking between the lightning bolt and the
drop shows how much energy is available.
The driver display for propulsion with both the electric motor and internal combustion engine.
The driver display also shows when
energy is returned to the battery
(regenerated) during light braking.
Pure
• Drive the car with electric motor, with
energy consumption as low as possible
and with lowest possible carbon dioxide
emissions.
The drive mode prioritises driving on the
hybrid battery. This means, for example, that
the output of certain climate settings is
reduced to provide the longest possible mileage on electric power alone.
The Pure mode is available when the hybrid
battery has a sufficiently high energy level. The
internal combustion engine also starts in the
Pure mode if the energy level in the battery
falls too low. The internal combustion engine
also starts
•
•
if the speed exceeds 125 km/h (78 mph)
•
in the event of system/component limitations, e.g. low outside temperature.
if the driver requests more motive force
than electric drive can provide
NOTE
When the Pure drive mode is activated,
several parameters in the climate control
system's settings are changed, and several
electricity consumer functions are reduced.
Certain settings can be reset manually, but
full functionality is only regained by leaving
Pure drive mode or adapting Individual
drive mode with full climate functionality.
In the event of difficulties due to misting,
press the button for max. defroster which has
normal functionality.
The drive mode is adapted for maximum range
with electric propulsion and especially developed for urban traffic. Pure means lowest
combustion even when the hybrid battery is
empty. The climate in the passenger compartment is regulated to Eco climate, and in slippery driving conditions, more wheel spin can
be permitted before all-wheel drive is activated automatically.
ECO climate control
In the Pure drive mode, eco climate control is
activated automatically in the passenger compartment in order to reduce energy consumption.
}}
463
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Constant AWD
• Improve the car's roadholding and traction
with enhanced all-wheel drive.
The drive mode locks the car in all-wheel drive.
An adapted distribution between the front and
rear axle torque provides good traction, stability and roadholding, for example on slippery
roads, when driving with a heavy trailer, or
when towing. Constant AWD drive mode is
always available regardless of the battery's
state of charge.
Both the internal combustion engine and electric motor are engaged in order to drive all four
wheels, which results in increased fuel consumption.
Both the internal combustion engine and electric motor are engaged in order to drive all four
wheels, which results in increased fuel consumption.
The drive mode is adapted for maximum performance and response on acceleration. It
changes the internal combustion engine's
accelerator pedal response, gear shift pattern
and boost pressure system. Chassis settings,
steering and brake response are also as good
as possible. Power drive mode is always available regardless of the battery's state of
charge.
In the car's other drive modes, the car automatically adapts the need for all-wheel drive to
the road surface, and can engage the electric
motor or start the internal combustion engine
when necessary.
The Power mode is also available in the
Polestar Engineered version*.
Power
• The car has sportier characteristics and
faster response to accelerating.
Select a drive mode to start from, and then
adjust the settings according to the desired
driving characteristics. These settings are
saved in an individual driver profile.
The drive mode adapts the combined power
from the internal combustion engine and electric motor by means of the car being driven by
both front and rear wheels. The gear changes
become faster and more distinct, and the
gearbox prioritises a gear with greater trac8 The
464
tion. Steering response is faster and shock
absorption is harder.
Individual
Adapting a drive mode according to individual preferences.
•
Settings view8 for individual drive mode.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Individual Drive Mode
and select Individual Drive Mode.
An individual drive mode is only available if it is
first activated in the centre display.
figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
3. In Presets, select a drive mode to start
from: Pure, Hybrid, Power or Polestar
Engineered*.
Possible adjustments apply to settings for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Related information
•
•
•
Driver Display
Steering Force
Powertrain Characteristics
Brake Characteristics
•
•
Changing drive mode (p. 465)
Economical driving (p. 470)
Energy distribution in hybrid drive using
map data* (p. 466)
Hybrid gauge (p. 84)
General information about Twin Engine
(p. 412)
Changing drive mode
Select the drive mode adapted for the current
driving conditions.
Change the drive mode using the control in
the centre console.
Remember that not all drive modes are available in all situations.
To change drive mode:
Suspension Control
ECO Climate
Using the electric motor or internal
combustion engine
An advanced control system determines the
extent to which the car is driven on internal
combustion engine, electric motor or both in
parallel.
The primary function is to use the engine or
motor and the available energy in the hybrid
battery as efficiently as possible, with regard
to the characteristics of the different drive
modes as well as the driver's request for
power via the accelerator pedal.
There are also cases where temporary limitations in the system, or functions governed by
legal requirements aimed at maintaining a low
level of total emissions for the car, may use
the internal combustion engine to a greater
extent.
1.
Press the drive mode control DRIVE
MODE.
> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
display.
2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until
the desired drive mode is highlighted.
}}
* Option/accessory. 465
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
3. Press the drive mode control or tap
directly on the touch screen to confirm the
selection.
> The selected drive mode is indicated in
the driver display.
Related information
•
Drive modes (p. 462)
Energy distribution in hybrid drive
using map data*
The Hybrid drive mode is the car's normal
mode where the electric motor and internal
combustion engine work individually or
together in hybrid drive. If a destination has
been selected in the navigation system*, the
Predictive Efficiency9 function distributes the
electric energy consumption in an intelligent
way along the whole driving distance using
the map data.
Fuel consumption can then be reduced compared with normal hybrid drive when the car is
first driven on electricity, to then change over
to being driven by the internal combustion
engine when the hybrid battery has been discharged.
Function
If the distance to the selected destination is
greater than the estimated range when running on electricity, this function distributes the
electric energy for consumption that is as
energy-efficient as possible for the entire distance to be travelled. This makes it possible to
avoid situations where normal hybrid drive
would otherwise use a large proportion of the
electric energy, for example, to run electric
drive at high speed on a motorway and then
use the internal combustion engine at low
speed in urban driving.
9 Certain
466
The greatest fuel saving is achieved when
•
the distance to be travelled begins with
driving on a motorway
•
the distance to be travelled is between 50
and 100 km (30 and 60 miles)
•
the hybrid battery is fully charged at the
beginning.
Conditions for the function
For the function to work requires that a number of conditions are met:
•
A destination is set in the navigation system and the driving distance to the destination is longer than the range possible
only on electric drive.
• Hybrid drive mode is selected.
• The Hold and Charge functions are deactivated.
•
The hybrid battery is charged.
Tips for use
If the car is used for commuting to work and it
is not possible to charge the car at the place of
work, specify the place of work as an intermediate destination and your home as the
final destination. The discharging of the hybrid
battery will then take place over your runs
both to and from work.
markets only.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Add similar commuting routes, i.e. the route
between two charging points, as Favourites
in the navigation system to facilitate arrival.
Related information
•
•
Drive modes (p. 462)
Economical driving (p. 470)
467
STARTING AND DRIVING
Level control* and shock
absorption
Level control and shock absorption are regulated automatically in the car.
With rear level control, the car maintains the
same height at the rear regardless of load.
Level control can also occur even after the car
has been parked.
Shock absorption (Four-C)
During transport
On a car equipped with Four-C the shock
absorption is adapted according to the drive
mode selected and the speed of the car.
Shock absorption is normally set for optimum
comfort and is regulated continuously depending on the road surface, the car's acceleration,
braking and cornering.
During transport of the car on a ferry, train or
truck, the car must be lashed around the tyres
and not around other parts of the chassis.
Changes in the air suspension may occur during transport, which could affect the lashing
negatively.
Symbols and messages in driver display
Symbol
Message
Specification
Suspension
The active suspension has been switched off manually by the user.
Deactivated by user
Suspension
Temporarily reduced performance
Suspension
The active suspension's performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system use. If this message appears frequently (e.g. several times in one week) contact a
workshopA.
A fault has occurred. Visit a workshopA as soon as possible.
Service required
468
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbol
Message
Specification
Suspension failure
Stop safely
A critical fault has occurred. Stop safely, have the car transported (raised with all wheels
on the flat-bed) to a workshopA.
Suspension
A fault has occurred. If the message appears whilst driving, contact a workshopA.
Slow down Car too high
Suspension
Level control of the car's rear axle to target height in progress.
Auto adjusting car level
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
Settings for level control* (p. 470)
Drive modes (p. 462)
* Option/accessory. 469
STARTING AND DRIVING
Settings for level control*
Economical driving
Switch off the level control when the car is to
be jacked up in order to prevent problems
with automatic regulation.
Drive economically and in a more eco-friendly
way by driving gently and anticipating situations.
Adapt your driving style and speed to the prevailing situation.
Settings in the centre display
Disable Leveling Control
In certain cases, the function must be deactivated, e.g. before the car is raised with a jack*.
The difference in level created when lifting
with a jack would otherwise mean the automatic control starting to adjust the height, creating an undesired effect.
Deactivating the function via the centre display:
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car
Suspension.
Parking Brake and
To achieve the longest driving distance possible and lowest energy consumption possible
with Twin Engine, note the following:
Charge
• Charge the car regularly from the mains
power circuit. Make it a habit to always
start a journey with fully-charged hybrid
battery.
•
Find out where the charging stations are
located.
•
If possible, select a parking space with a
charging station.
3. Select Disable Leveling Control.
Level control* and shock absorption
(p. 468)
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 595)
During a short drive after preconditioning
of the passenger compartment, switch off
the ventilation fan or air conditioning in a
hot climate, if possible.
•
If preconditioning is not possible when it
is cold outside, use seat heating and steering wheel heating first of all. Avoid warming up the whole of the interior which
takes energy from the hybrid battery.
Charge the car from the mains power circuit as often as possible!
Precondition
• Precondition the car before driving if possible using the charging cable connected
to the mains power circuit.
•
470
•
NOTE
Related information
•
parking. Park the car in an acclimated
garage, for example.
Avoid parking the car in a way that the
interior cools down or overheats while
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Drive
• For lowest energy consumption, activate
the Pure drive mode.
•
•
•
•
Drive at a steady speed and keep a good
distance to other vehicles and objects in
order to avoid braking. This driving style
results in the lowest energy consumption.
Balance the power requirement using the
accelerator pedal. Use the indicator for
available electric motor power in the driver
display in order to avoid starting the internal combustion engine unnecessarily. The
electric motor is more efficient that the
internal combustion engine, in particular at
low speed.
In the event of braking being necessary brake gently with the brake pedal, this
recharges the hybrid battery. A regenerative braking function is built into the brake
pedal and can be reinforced with electric
motor braking in gear position B.
High speed results in increased energy
consumption - the wind resistance increases with speed.
•
Activate the Hold function in the function
view at higher speeds during journeys that
are longer than the range of the electricity.
•
If possible, avoid using the Charge function to charge the hybrid battery. Charging
with the internal combustion engine
increases fuel consumption and involves
increased carbon dioxide emissions.
Factors that affect range when
running on electricity
•
In a cold climate, reduce electrical heating
of windows, mirrors, seats and steering
wheel, if possible.
•
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for optimum results.
•
Choice of tyres can affect energy consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres
from a dealer.
•
Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the consumption.
The car's range for electric operation depends
on several factors. The ability to achieve a
long range varies according to the circumstances and conditions under which the car is
being driven.
The certified value for the car's mileage on
electric power should not be interpreted as an
expected range. The certification value is a
comparative value obtained by means of special EU drive cycles. The actual range is
dependent on a number of factors.
•
•
•
A roof load and ski box increase air resistance, leading to higher consumption remove the load carriers when not in use.
Avoid driving with open windows.
Do not hold the car stationary on a hill
with the accelerator pedal. Use the foot
brake instead.
Factors that affect the range
The driver can influence some factors, but has
no influence over others.
The longest range is achieved under extremely
favourable conditions when all factors have a
positive impact.
Related information
•
•
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 30)
Energy distribution in hybrid drive using
map data* (p. 466)
•
Factors that affect range when running on
electricity (p. 471)
•
•
Hybrid gauge (p. 84)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 564)
}}
* Option/accessory. 471
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Factors the driver cannot influence
There are several external factors that affect
the range in varying degrees:
•
•
•
•
•
Deactivated
passenger
compartment climate control
Normal
passenger
compartment climate control
0 °C (32 °F)
80 %
60 %
-10 °C
(14 °F)
70 %
40 %
traffic situation
short driving distances
topography
outside temperature and headwind
road condition and surface.
The table shows the approximate relationship
between outside temperature and range, both
in a car with deactivated passenger compartment climate control, as well as in a car with
normal passenger compartment climate control.
A warmer outside temperature has a positive
effect on range to a certain extent.
Outside
temperature
472
Outside
temperature
Deactivated
passenger
compartment climate control
Normal
passenger
compartment climate control
30 °C
(86 °F)
95 %
80 %
20 °C
(68 °F)
100 %
90 %
10 °C (50 °F)
90 %
80 %
Constant speed
The table shows the approximate relationship
between constant speed and range, where a
lower constant speed has a positive effect on
range.
50 %
80 km/h (50 mph)
70 %
60 km/h (37 mph)
90 %
50 km/h (31 mph)
100 %
NOTE
Factors the driver can influence
The driver should be aware that the following
factors affect the range so he/she can operate
the car in an energy-efficient manner:
• regular charging
• preconditioning
• drive mode Pure
• climate settings
• speed and acceleration
• Hold function
• tyres and tyre pressure.
100 km/h (62 mph)
•
The values shown in the tables relate
to a new car.
•
These values are not absolute, but are
dependent upon driving behaviour,
environment and other circumstances.
Related information
•
•
•
Economical driving (p. 470)
Hold and Charge function (p. 473)
Drive modes (p. 462)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Hold and Charge function
Charge
Engine charges hybrid
battery.
In some situations, it can be useful to be able
to control the hybrid battery's state of charge
while driving is in progress. This is possible
with the functions Hold and Charge.
Hold and Charge are available in all drive
modes. The functions are cancelled if Pure
drive mode is activated.
The function charges the
hybrid battery with assistance from the internal combustion engine for using
increased electric operation at a later time.
Function buttons for Hold and Charge
Symbols in the driver display
The functions are activated in the centre display's function view.
The symbol
is shown in the hybrid battery
gauge when Charge is activated.
Hold
Battery level sustained for
later use.
Related information
•
•
The function maintains the
charge in the hybrid battery
for electric drive and saves
available electricity for later
use, e.g. for driving in an urban environment or
through a residential area.
The car works as for normal hybrid operation
with discharged battery where, in addition to
re-using brake-generated energy, for example,
the car starts the internal combustion engine
more often in order to maintain the charge in
the battery.
Economical driving (p. 470)
Hybrid gauge (p. 84)
The symbol
is shown in the hybrid battery
gauge when Hold is activated.
473
STARTING AND DRIVING
Preparations for a long trip
Before a driving holiday or some other type of
long journey, it is important to check the car's
functions and equipment particularly carefully.
Check that
•
•
•
the engine is working normally and that
fuel consumption is normal
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Economical driving (p. 470)
Winter driving
Settings for car modem* (p. 540)
Pilot Assist* (p. 310)
For winter driving it is important to perform
certain checks of the car in order to ensure
that it can be driven safely.
Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
Speed limiter (p. 290)
•
The engine coolant must contain 50%
glycol. This mixture protects the engine
against frost down to approx. -35°C
(-31°F). To avoid health risks, different
types of glycol must not be mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
consumption while the engine is cold.
Recommendations for loading (p. 595)
Driving with a trailer (p. 486)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 580)
there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
braking effect on braking works as
intended
•
all lamps are working - adjust headlamp
level if the car is heavily laden
•
the tyres have sufficient tread depth and
pressure. Change to winter tyres when
driving to areas where there is a risk of
snowy or icy road surfaces
•
•
•
starter battery charging is good
IMPORTANT
the wiper blades are in good condition
a warning triangle and high-visibility vest
are located in the car - legally required in
certain countries
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the
starter battery and its capacity is reduced
by the cold.
•
Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid
ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
Related information
•
•
•
•
474
Checking tyre pressure (p. 564)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 682)
Filling washer fluid (p. 665)
Winter driving (p. 474)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Slippery driving conditions
Driving in water
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there
is a risk of snow or ice.
Wading means the car being driven through
water, e.g. on a flooded road. Driving in water
must be performed with great caution.
Observe the following to prevent damage to
the car when driving through water:
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres
are not permitted in all countries.
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 663)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 662)
•
•
Topping up coolant (p. 620)
In the event of stalling in water, do not try
to restart. Instead, tow the car out of the
water and transported on a low loader to a
workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Do not drive faster than walking pace.
Do not stop the car in the water. Drive forward carefully or reverse the car back out
of the water.
Remember that waves created by oncoming traffic may rise above the level for the
floor of the car.
•
Avoid driving through salt water (corrosion
risk).
If necessary, clean the contact for the trailer
coupling after driving in water and mud.
Braking on wet roads (p. 447)
Starter battery (p. 624)
The water level must not be higher than
the floor of the car. If possible, check the
depth at the deepest point before starting
to drive through the water. Extra caution
should be exercised when passing
through flowing water.
•
Braking on gritted roads (p. 448)
Filling washer fluid (p. 665)
Parts of the car (e.g. engine, gearbox,
driveline or electrical components) may be
damaged when driving through water with
a level higher than the floor of the car.
Damaged caused to a component caused
by submersion, hydrolock or lack of oil is
not covered by the warranty.
When the water has been passed, depress the
brake pedal lightly and check that full brake
function is achieved. Water and mud for
example can make the brake linings wet
resulting in delayed brake function.
Winter tyres (p. 578)
Snow chains (p. 579)
IMPORTANT
Related information
•
Recovery (p. 493)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 678)
475
STARTING AND DRIVING
Opening and closing the fuel filler
flap
NOTE
After the fuel filler flap has been opened,
refuelling must take place within about 15
minutes. After this, the valve that was
opened by pressing the button to open the
fuel filler cap is closed, and it is no longer
possible to refuel because the pump nozzle
cuts out.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked by pressing a
button on the instrument panel.
In the driver display, the
arrow next to the tank symbol
indicates which side of the
car the fuel filler flap is
located.
1.
476
Press the button on the instrument panel.
> Pressure equalisation of the fuel tank
involves a certain delay in opening the
flap. The message Preparing for refuel
Fuel lid will be unlocked when ready
appears in the driver display, and when
the system is ready the message Fuel
tank Ready for refuelling appears in
the driver display. If the internal combustion engine is switched on when the
button is pressed, it is generally
switched off and the car switches to
electric mode.
If the valve is closed before refuelling is
complete - press the button again and wait
until the driver display shows the message
Fuel tank Ready for refuelling.
2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap
with a gentle press.
Related information
•
Filling fuel (p. 477)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Filling fuel
Fuelling instruction:
The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel
filler system.
1.
Refuelling the car at a petrol station
Switch off the car and open the fuel filler
flap.
NOTE
NOTE
After the fuel filler flap has been opened,
refuelling must take place within about 15
minutes. After this, the valve that was
opened by pressing the button to open the
fuel filler cap is closed, and it is no longer
possible to refuel because the pump nozzle
cuts out.
It is important to feed the pump nozzle past the filler
pipe's two openable hatches before starting to fuel
the car.
4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
pump nozzle cuts out the first time.
> The tank is full.
If the valve is closed before refuelling is
complete - press the button again and wait
until the driver display shows the message
Fuel tank Ready for refuelling.
2. Choose fuel that is approved for use in the
car. See information on approved fuels in
the section on "Petrol".
3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler
opening. The filler pipe has two opening
caps. The pump nozzle must be pushed
past both caps before refuelling is started.
Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in
hot weather.
Topping up fuel from a fuel can
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located in the foam block under the floor hatch
in the cargo area.
1.
Open the fuel filler flap.
2. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening.
The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
funnel's pipe must be pushed past both
caps before filling can be started.
Applicable to cars with fuel-driven
auxiliary heater*
Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car
is in a filling station area.
}}
* Option/accessory. 477
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Handling of fuel
IMPORTANT
Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that
recommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect engine power and fuel consumption.
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of
fuels which are not recommended will
invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary service agreements; this is
applicable to all engines.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes.
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Related information
•
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
(p. 476)
•
Petrol (p. 479)
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel
are highly toxic and could cause permanent
injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been
swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could
cause spark build-up and ignite petrol
fumes, leading to fire and injury.
478
Related information
•
Petrol (p. 479)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Petrol
IMPORTANT
It is important to use the correct fuel during
refuelling. Petrol is available with different
octane ratings that are adapted for different
types of driving.
Only use petrol from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol
must fulfil the EN 228 standard.
IMPORTANT
•
Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by
volume ethanol is permitted.
•
EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by
volume ethanol) is approved for use.
•
Ethanol higher than E10
(max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is
not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.
Octane rating
•
•
•
RON 95 can be used for normal driving.
RON 98 is recommended for good power
and low fuel consumption.
An octane rating lower than RON 95 must
not be used.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C
(100 °F), fuel with the highest octane rating is
recommended for adapted performance and
fuel economy.
•
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter.
•
Fuel containing metallic additives must
not be used.
•
Do not use any additives which have
not been recommended by Volvo.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Handling of fuel (p. 478)
Filling fuel (p. 477)
Petrol particle filter (p. 479)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 682)
Petrol particle filter10
Petrol cars are fitted with particle filters for
more efficient emission control.
Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in
the petrol particle filter during normal driving.
In normal driving conditions, passive regeneration takes place, which leads to the particles
being oxidised and burned away. The filter is
emptied in this way.
If the car is driven at low speed or with repeated cold starts in low outside temperature,
active regeneration may be necessary. Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic and
normally takes 10-20 minutes. Fuel consumption may temporarily increase during regeneration.
Use the parking heater in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
When driving short distances at low
speeds in a petrol car
The capacity of the emissions system is affected by how the car is driven. Driving varying
distances and at different speeds is important
in order to achieve performance that is as
energy-efficient as possible.
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in
cold climates) frequently, where the engine
does not reach normal operating temperature,
can lead to problems that can eventually
}}
479
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
cause a malfunction and trigger a warning
message. If the vehicle is mostly driven in city
traffic, it is important to regularly drive at
higher speeds to allow the emissions system
to regenerate.
•
The car should be driven on A-roads at
speeds in excess of 70 km/h (44 mph) for
at least 20 minutes between each refuelling.
Related information
•
10
480
Petrol (p. 479)
Applicable to certain variants.
Overheating in the engine and
drive system
lower temperature or Transmission hot
Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the
recommendation given, reduce speed or
stop the car in a safe way and allow the
engine to run at idling speed for several
minutes to enable the gearbox to cool
down.
Under certain conditions, e.g. hard driving in
hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk
that the engine and drive system may overheat – in particular with a heavy load.
• In the event of overheating, the engine's
power may be limited temporarily.
•
•
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
•
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system becomes too high then a warning
symbol is illuminated and the driver display shows the message Engine
temperature High temperature Stop
safely. Stop the car in a safe way and
allow the engine to run at idling speed for
several minutes and cool down.
Do not turn the engine off immediately
you stop after a hard drive.
•
If the message Engine temperature
High temperature Turn off engine or
Engine coolant Level low, turn off
engine is shown, stop the car and switch
off the engine.
•
In the event of overheating in the gearbox,
an alternative gear shift program will be
selected. In addition, a built-in protection
function is activated that, amongst other
things, illuminates a warning symbol and
the driver display shows the message
Transmission warm Reduce speed to
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has
been switched off.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
Specification
High engine temperature. Follow
the recommendation given.
Low level, coolant. Follow the
recommendation given.
Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled.
Follow the recommendation
given.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Topping up coolant (p. 620)
Driving with a trailer (p. 486)
Preparations for a long trip (p. 474)
Gear shift indicator (p. 459)
Overloading the starter battery
The electrical functions in the car load the
starter battery to varying degrees. Avoid
using the ignition position II when the car is
switched off. Instead, use ignition position I which uses less power.
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the car is
switched off. Examples of such functions are:
•
•
•
•
If the starter battery is discharged then the
car can be started with current from another
battery.
ventilation fan
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low, a message
is shown in the driver display. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions
or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.
–
Using jump starting with another
battery
In which case, charge the starter battery
by starting the car and then running it for
at least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is more effective during driving than
running the engine at idling speed while
stationary.
Charging point for jump-starting own car.
IMPORTANT
The car’s charging point is only intended
for jump-starting the car itself. The charging point is not intended for jump-starting
another car. Using the charging point to
jump start another car may cause a fuse to
blow, which means the charging point will
stop working.
Related information
•
•
Starter battery (p. 624)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
When a fuse has blown the message 12 V
Battery Fuse failure Service required is
shown in the driver display. Volvo recom-
}}
481
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
mends that an authorised Volvo workshop is
contacted.
When jump-starting the car, the following
steps are recommended to avoid short circuits
or other damage:
1.
Set the car's electrical system in ignition
position 0.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage
of 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine and
make sure that the two cars do not touch
each other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Open the positive jump-starting point's
cover (2).
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive jump-starting point
(2).
482
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
8. Connect the black jump lead's other
clamp onto the car's negative jump-starting point (4).
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are
affixed securely so that there are no sparks
during the starting attempt.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
11. Start your own car's engine. If the start
attempt fails then extend the charging
time to 10 minutes, and then make a new
start attempt.
NOTE
When starting the engine in normal conditions the car's electric drive motor is prioritised - the petrol engine remains switched
off. This means that after the start knob
has been turned clockwise, the electric
motor has "started" and the car is ready to
move. A started motor is indicated by the
driver display's indicator lamps extinguishing and its preset theme illuminating.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the connections between
cable and car during the starting attempt.
There is a risk of sparks forming.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red.
Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with the
car's positive jump-starting point/donor
battery's positive terminal or the clamp
connected to the red jump lead.
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
•
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
•
Never smoke near the battery.
NOTE
The car cannot be started if the hybrid battery is discharged.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Starting the car (p. 440)
Towbar*
Related information
The car can be equipped with a towbar that
makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer behind
the car.
There may be different towbar variants available for the car. Contact a Volvo dealer for more
information.
•
Extendable and retractable towbar*
(p. 484)
•
•
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 486)
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* (p. 490)
Specifications for towbar* (p. 484)
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as
not to drain the starter battery.
IMPORTANT
The towball needs regular cleaning and
lubrication with grease in order to prevent
wear.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is
used, the towball must not be lubricated.
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 443)
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towbar, there
is no rear mounting for a towing eye.
* Option/accessory. 483
STARTING AND DRIVING
Specifications for towbar*
Dimensions and mounting points for towbar.
Dimensions, mounting points in mm
(inches)
A
1229 (48,4)
B
111,8 (4,4)
C
875 (34,4)
D
437,5 (17,2)
E
See the image above
F
310,5 (12,2)
G
Ball centre
Related information
•
•
484
Towbar* (p. 483)
Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 674)
Extendable and retractable
towbar*
The retractable tow hook is easy to retract or
extend as required. In the retracted position,
the towbar is completely concealed.
WARNING
Follow the instructions for retracting and
extending the towbar carefully.
WARNING
Do not press the extend/retract button if a
trailer is attached to the towbar.
Extending the towbar
WARNING
Avoid standing close to the bumper in the
centre behind the car when extending the
towing hitch.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
1.
2. Press and release the button – extension
might not start if the button is pressed for
too long.
Open the tailgate. A button for extending/
retracting the towbar is located on the
right-hand side at the rear of the cargo
area. An indicator lamp in the button must
illuminate with a constant orange glow for
the extension function to be active.
> The towbar extends out and down in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp
flashes orange. The tow hook is ready
to continue moving to the locked position.
3.
Move the towbar to its end position,
where it is secured and locked in place the indicator lamp illuminates with a constant orange glow.
> The towbar is ready for use.
NOTE
The towbar must finish the extension procedure before it can then be moved to
locked position. This procedure may take
several seconds. If the towbar is not fixed
in locked position, wait a few seconds and
try again.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety
cable in the intended bracket.
}}
485
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
NOTE
Driving with a trailer
2.
When driving with a trailer, there are a number of points that are important to think about
regarding the towbar, the trailer and how the
load is positioned in the trailer.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight.
Power save mode activates after a while
and the indicator lamp goes out. The system is reactivated by closing and opening
the tailgate. This applies when retracting or
extending the towbar.
If the car detects a connected trailer electrically, the indicator lamp stops illuminating with a constant glow.
Lock the towbar by moving it back to its
retracted position, where it is locked.
> The indicator lamp will now illuminate
with a constant glow if the towbar is
correctly retracted.
Retracting the towbar
IMPORTANT
Make sure that there is no plug or adapter
in the electrical socket when retracting the
towbar.
1.
Open the tailgate. Press and release the
button on the right-hand side at the rear of
the cargo area - retraction might not start
if the button is pressed for too long.
> The towbar automatically lowers in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp
in the button flashes orange.
Related information
•
•
486
Driving with a trailer (p. 486)
Towbar* (p. 483)
The car is supplied with the necessary equipment for towing a trailer.
•
The car's towbar must be of an approved
type.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that
the weight on the towbar complies with
the specified maximum towball load. Towball load is calculated as part of the car's
payload.
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load.
•
The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
•
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km (620 miles).
•
The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear when shifting
manually and adjust your speed.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
•
Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights.
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
•
The maximum indicated trailer weight only
applies to heights up to 1000 metres
above sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the engine output and the vehicle's
climbing ability are reduced due to the
reduced air density, and the maximum
trailer load must therefore be reduced. The
weight of the car and trailer must be
decreased by 10% for each additional
1000 m (3280 ft) or part thereof.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes, in combination with poorer fuel quality than recommended, are factors that considerably
increase the car's fuel consumption.
Trailer connector
An adapter is required if the car's towbar has a
13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin
connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo.
Make sure the cable does not drag on the
ground.
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as
not to drain the starter battery.
Trailer weights
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and
trailer may be difficult to control in the
event of sudden movement and braking.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further
limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars
can be certified for higher towing weights
than the car can actually tow.
Level control*
The car's system for level control endeavours
to maintain a constant height regardless of
load (up to the maximum permissible weight).
When the car is stationary the rear of the car
lowers slightly, which is normal.
When driving in hilly terrain and hot
climates
Under certain circumstances, there may be a
risk of overheating when towing a trailer. If the
engine and drive system overheats, a warning
symbol comes on in the driver display and a
message is displayed.
The automatic gearbox selects the optimum
gear depending on load and engine speed.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher
gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not
always a good idea to drive at a high gear with
low engine speed.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3. Select gear position P.
4. Release the brake pedal.
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a
car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2. Select gear position D.
3. Releasing the parking brake.
4. Release the brake pedal and start driving
off.
}}
* Option/accessory. 487
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Related information
•
•
•
Trailer stability assist* (p. 488)
Checking trailer lamps (p. 489)
Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 674)
•
Overheating in the engine and drive system (p. 480)
•
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 678)
•
Extendable and retractable towbar*
(p. 484)
Trailer stability assist*
(TSA11)
The function of trailer stability assist
is
to stabilise cars towing trailers in situations
where they begin snaking. The function is
included in the stability system ESC12.
Reasons for snaking
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally
occurs at high speeds. However, there is a risk
of it occurring at lower speeds if the trailer is
overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
•
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
•
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road
surface or in a pothole.
•
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or
even impossible to suppress. This makes the
car/trailer combination difficult to control and
there is a risk that you could, for example, end
up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
eral movements. If snaking is detected, the
front wheels are individually braked. This
serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination.
This is often enough to help the driver regain
control of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time that
trailer stability assist intervenes, the car/trailer
combination is braked with all wheels and
engine power is reduced. Once snaking has
been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer
combination is stable once again, the system
stops regulating and the driver once again has
full control of the car.
NOTE
The stability function is deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode by deactivating
ESC via the menu system in the centre
display.
Trailer stability assist may fail to intervene if
the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in
such a situation the system cannot determine
whether it is the trailer or the driver causing
the snaking.
Trailer stability assist function
The trailer stability assist function continually
monitors the car's movements, particularly lat11
12
488
Trailer Stability Assist
Electronic Stability Control
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
When Trailer Stability Assist
(TSA) is operating, the ESC
symbol flashes in the driver
display.
Related information
•
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 486)
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
Checking trailer lamps
When connecting a trailer - check that all the
trailer lamps work before departure.
Direction indicators and brake lights
on the trailer
If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver
display shows a symbol and a message. Other
lights on the trailer must be checked manually
by the driver before setting off.
Symbol
Message
• Trailer turn indicator Right
turn indicator malfunction
• Trailer turn indicator Left
turn indicator malfunction
• Trailer brake light Malfunction
If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators
is broken, the driver display symbol for direction indicators will also flash more quickly than
normal.
Rear fog lamp on trailer
When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp
may not light up on the car. In such cases, the
rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer.
Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check
therefore that the trailer is equipped with a
rear fog lamp to travel safely.
Checking trailer lamps*
Automatic checking
After a trailer is connected electrically, it is
possible to check that the trailer lamps are
working via an automatic lamp activation. The
function helps the driver check that the trailer
lamps are working before starting off.
The car must be switched off to perform the
check.
1.
When a trailer is connected to the towbar,
the Automatic Trailer Lamp Check message is shown in the driver display.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the
right-hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> The lamp check starts.
3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality.
> All trailer lamps start to flash - then the
lamps are switched on one at a time.
4. Visually check that all lamps available on
the trailer are operational.
5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer
flash again.
> The check is complete.
}}
* Option/accessory. 489
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Switching off automatic checking
The automatic checking function can be
switched off in the centre display.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car
Lights and Lighting.
3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp
Check.
Manual checking
If the automatic checking is switched off then
it is possible to start the check manually.
1.
Lights and Lighting.
3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check.
> The lamp check starts. Exit the car to
check lamp functionality.
Related information
490
When using a bicycle rack, the bicycle racks
that Volvo has developed are recommended.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and
in order to achieve the maximum possible
safety during a journey. Volvo's bicycle racks
are available for purchase at authorised Volvo
dealers.
Carefully follow the instructions enclosed with
the bicycle rack.
•
Bicycle rack including load must weigh a
maximum of 75 kg (165 pounds).
•
The bicycle rack may be designed for a
maximum of three bicycles.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car
•
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
Driving with a trailer (p. 486)
WARNING
Incorrect use of the bicycle rack may cause
damage to the towbar and car.
The bicycle rack can loosen from the towbar if it
•
•
is incorrectly fitted on the towball
•
is used for carrying something other
than bicycles.
is overloaded, see the bicycle rack's
instructions for maximum load weight
The car's driving characteristics are affected
when a bicycle rack is fitted on the towbar.
For example, due to:
•
•
•
•
increased weight
reduced acceleration capacity
reduced ground clearance
changed braking capacity.
Recommendations for loading
bicycles on the bicycle rack
The larger the distance between the load's
centre of gravity and the towball, the greater
the load on the towbar.
Load according to the following recommendations:
•
Fit the heaviest bicycle furthest in, closest
to the car.
•
Keep the load symmetrical and as close to
the centre of the car as possible, e.g. by
loading the bicycles facing alternately if
several bicycles are loaded.
•
Remove loose objects from the bicycle for
transportation, e.g. bicycle basket, battery,
child seat. Partly to reduce the load on the
towbar and bicycle rack, and partly to
reduce the wind resistance, which affects
fuel consumption.
•
Do not use protective covers on the bicycles. This may affect manoeuvrability,
impair visibility and increase fuel con-
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
sumption. It may also lead to an increased
load on the towbar.
Related information
•
Towbar* (p. 483)
Towing
Related information
During towing, the car is towed by another
vehicle by means of a towline.
Towing a Twin Engine is not permitted as this
will damage the electric motor. Instead, the
car must be transported raised with all the
wheels on a recovery vehicle's platform, neither of the wheel pairs may have road contact.
•
Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 492)
•
•
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 159)
When towing another car
Towing a car requires a lot of energy - use the
Constant AWD drive mode. This then
charges the hybrid battery, in combination
with improving the car's driving characteristics
and roadholding.
•
•
Recovery (p. 493)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 481)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 443)
Gearbox (p. 454)
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit
for towing before the towing begins.
Jump starting
Tow-starting the motor is not permitted as
this will damage the electric motor. Use a
donor battery if the starter battery is discharged and the engine does not start.
IMPORTANT
The electric drive motor and the catalytic
converter may be damaged during
attempts to tow-start the car.
* Option/accessory. 491
STARTING AND DRIVING
Fitting and removing the towing
eye
3. Screw in the towing eye until it reaches its
end stop.
Use the towing eye if the car shall tow
another vehicle. The towing eye is screwed
into a threaded socket behind a cover on the
right-hand side of the rear bumper.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towbar, there
is no rear mounting for a towing eye.
Fitting the towing eye
Screw the eye in firmly. For example,
thread through the wheel bolt wrench* and
use it as a lever.
Remove the cover – press on the marking
with a finger while you fold out the opposite side/corner.
> The cover pivots around its centre line
and can then be removed.
IMPORTANT
It is important that the towing eye is firmly
screwed into place - right in until it stops.
Take out the towing eye from the foam
block under the floor in the cargo area13.
Removing the towing eye
–
Unscrew and remove the towing eye after
use and return it to its place in the foam
block.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
13
492
The shape and location of the foam block may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
•
•
•
Towing (p. 491)
Recovery (p. 493)
Tool kit (p. 571)
Recovery
For recovery, the car is taken away with the
help of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The car should then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting device.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain
behind the recovery vehicle while the car
pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
The towing eye can be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
Note that cars with Twin Engine must
always be transported raised up with all
the wheels on the recovery vehicle's platform.
Related information
•
Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 492)
Applies to cars with level control*: If the car
is equipped with air suspension, this must be
disabled before the car is raised. Deactivating
the function via the centre display.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car
Suspension.
Parking Brake and
3. Select Disable Leveling Control.
The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a
flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery
vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground
clearance under the car is inadequate, then
the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up.
* Option/accessory. 493
STARTING AND DRIVING
HomeLink®*14
HomeLink®15
is a programmable remote control, integrated in the car's electrical system,
which can remotely control up to three different devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm
system, outdoor and indoor lighting) and
thereby replace the remote controls for them.
General
HomeLink® is supplied built-in to the interior
rearview mirror. The HomeLink® panel consists of three programmable buttons and one
indicator lamp in the mirror glass.
For more information about HomeLink®, visit
www.HomeLink.com or call
00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number
+49 6838 907 277)16.
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. when changing to another
car or for use in another vehicle). It is also recommended that the programming for the buttons is deleted when the car is sold.
Related information
•
•
•
Programming HomeLink®*17
Follow these instructions to program
HomeLink®, reset all programming or reprogram individual buttons.
NOTE
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position"
before HomeLink® can be programmed or
used. If possible, fit new batteries in the
remote control that shall be replaced by
HomeLink® for faster programming and
improved transmission of the radio signal.
The HomeLink® buttons should be reset
before programming.
Using HomeLink®* (p. 496)
Programming HomeLink®* (p. 494)
Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 497)
The figure is schematic - the version may vary.
Button 1
Button 2
WARNING
While programming HomeLink®, the
garage door or gate being programmed
may activate. For this reason, make sure
that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or
gate while programming is in progress. The
car should be outside the garage while a
garage door opener is being programmed.
Button 3
Indicator lamp
14
15
16
17
494
Applies to certain markets.
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
1.
Aim the remote control towards the
HomeLink® button to be programmed and
hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches)
from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator lamp on HomeLink®.
Note: The ability of some remote controls
to program HomeLink® is improved at a
distance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx.
6-12 inches). Bear this in mind if problems
occur with the programming.
2. Press and hold depressed both the button
on the remote control and the button to be
reprogrammed on HomeLink®.
3. Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has switched from flashing
slowly (approx. once per second) to either
flashing quickly (approx. 10 times per second) or illuminating with a constant glow.
> If the indicator lamp illuminates with
a constant glow: Indication that the
programming has finished. Press the
programmed button twice to activate.
If the indicator lamp flashes quickly:
The device to be programmed to
HomeLink® may have a security function that requires extra steps. Test by
pressing the programmed button twice
to see whether the programming is
working. Otherwise, continue with the
following steps.
4. Locate programming button18 on the
receiver for the garage door or similar. It is
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver.
5. Depress and release the receiver's programming button once. The programming
must be completed within 30 seconds of
the button being depressed.
6. Press and release the button on
HomeLink® that you want to program.
Repeat the sequence of pressing/holding/
releasing a second time and, depending
on the receiver model, even a third time.
> Programming is now be complete and
the garage door, gate or similar should
now be activated when the programmed button is depressed.
In the event of programming problems, contact HomeLink® at www.HomeLink.com, or
18
Button designation and colour varies between manufacturers.
}}
495
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
call 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number
+49 6838 907 277)19.
Reprogramming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button,
proceed as follows:
1.
Related information
Using HomeLink®*20
•
•
•
When HomeLink® is fully programmed it can
be used in place of the separate original
remote controls.
Depress the programmed button. The garage
door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated
(may take a few seconds). If the button is
depressed for more than 20 seconds then the
reprogramming is started. The indicator lamp
illuminates or flashes when the button has
been depressed. Naturally the original remote
controls can still be used in parallel with
HomeLink® if required.
Using HomeLink®* (p. 496)
HomeLink®* (p. 494)
Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 497)
Press the desired button and hold it
depressed for approx. 20 seconds.
2. Once the indicator lamp on HomeLink®
starts to flash slowly, programming can
continue as normal.
Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is
not programmed with a new unit, it will
resume the previously saved programming.
Resetting the HomeLink® buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink®
buttons at the same time, not each button
individually. Individual buttons can only be
reprogrammed.
–
19
20
496
Press and hold depressed the outer buttons (1 and 3) on HomeLink® for approx.
10 seconds.
> When the indicator lamp changes over
from a constant glow to starting to
flash, the buttons are reset and ready to
be reprogrammed.
NOTE
When the ignition has been switched off,
HomeLink® works for at least 7 minutes.
NOTE
HomeLink® cannot be used if the car is
locked and the alarm is armed* from the
outside.
Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Type approval for HomeLink®*21
WARNING
•
•
HomeLink®
If
is used to control a
garage door or gate, ensure that
nobody is near the door or gate while it
is in motion.
Do not use HomeLink® for any garage
door that does not have safety stop
and safety reverse.
Related information
•
•
•
HomeLink®* (p. 494)
Programming
HomeLink®*
(p. 494)
Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 497)
Type approval for EU
Gentex Corporation hereby declares that
HomeLink® Model UAHL5 complies with the
Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU.
Compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows
the compass direction22 in which the front of
the car is pointing.
Wavelength within which the radio equipment
functions:
•
•
•
•
•
433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.
868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.
868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.
869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.
869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.
Certificate holder address: Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI
49464, USA
For more information, search support information on type approval at www.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
HomeLink®* (p. 494)
Rearview mirror with compass.
Eight different compass directions are shown
by their English abbreviations: N (north), NE
(north east), E (east), SE (south east), S
(south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW
(north west).
Related information
21
22
•
Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 498)
•
Calibrating the compass* (p. 498)
Applies to certain markets.
A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only.
* Option/accessory. 497
STARTING AND DRIVING
Activating and deactivating the
compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows
the compass direction23 in which the front of
the car is pointing.
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started.
To deactivate/activate the compass manually:
–
Depress the button on the underside of
the rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.
> If the compass is deactivated when the
car is switched off, it will not be activated the next time the car is started. In
this case, the compass needs to be
activated manually.
Related information
•
•
Compass* (p. 497)
Calibrating the compass* (p. 498)
Calibrating the compass*
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass24 should be calibrated if the car
is moved between several magnetic zones.
1.
Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power
lines.
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.)
and ensure that all doors are closed.
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if
electrical equipment is not switched off.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror depressed for
approx. 3 seconds (use a paper clip, for
example). The number for the current
magnetic zone is shown.
Magnetic zones.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the
compass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing
the character C, or hold the button on the
underside of the rearview mirror
depressed for approx. 6 seconds until the
character C is shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direction is shown in the display,
indicating that calibration is complete.
Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune
calibration.
23
24
498
A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only.
A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the
character C is shown in the display when
the heated windscreen is activated, perform the calibration in accordance with
point 6 above with the heated windscreen
activated.
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Related information
•
•
Compass* (p. 497)
Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 498)
* Option/accessory. 499
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sound, media and Internet
Related information
The audio and media system consists of
media player and radio. You can also connect
a phone via Bluetooth to use handsfree functions or play music wirelessly in the car.
When the car is connected to the Internet
you can also use apps for media playback.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Overview of audio and media
Control the functions with your voice, steering
wheel keypad or the centre display. The number of speakers and amplifiers depends on
which audio system the car is equipped with.
Media player (p. 513)
Radio (p. 507)
Phone (p. 529)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Apps (p. 504)
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Driver distraction (p. 41)
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 609)
•
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 546)
•
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 609)
Audio settings
The sound reproduction quality is preset, but
it can be adjusted as well.
The volume is normally adjusted with the volume control below the centre display or with
the right-hand steering wheel keypad. This
applies, for example, during playback of music,
radio, ongoing phone calls and active traffic
messages.
Sound reproduction
The sound system is pre-calibrated by means
of digital signal processing. This calibration
takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers,
passenger compartment acoustics, listener
position, etc., for each combination of car
model and audio system. There is also a
dynamic calibration that takes into account
the setting of the volume control and vehicle
speed.
Personal preferences
Various settings are available in the top view
under Settings Sound depending on the
car's audio system.
System updating
The audio and media system is continuously
improved. It is recommended to download
system updates when new ones are available.
502
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins)
Control, Park Assist and Phone
Ringtone.
• Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
• Balance – balance between right/left
loudspeakers and balance between front/
rear loudspeakers.
• System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone
Ringtone.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sound experience* (p. 503)
Media player (p. 513)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 147)
Sound experience*
Sound experience is an app that provides
access to further audio settings.
Sound Experience is opened from the app
view in the centre display. The following settings can be defined, depending on the audio
system fitted to the car:
Settings for phone (p. 536)
Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins)
Sound, media and Internet (p. 502)
• Studio – the sound can be adjusted so
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
that it can primarily be adapted for Driver,
All and Rear.
High Performance Pro* (Harman
Kardon)
• Individual stage – surround sound mode
• Equaliser – equalizer setting.
• Balance – balance between right/left
• Concert hall – reproduces the acoustics
loudspeakers and balance between front/
rear loudspeakers.
with settings for intensity and enclosure.
from Gothenburg's Concert Hall.
• System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone
Ringtone.
High Performance
• Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
• Balance – balance between right/left
loudspeakers and balance between front/
rear loudspeakers.
• System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Recreating the acoustics from Gothenburg Concert
Hall.
}}
* Option/accessory. 503
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
High Performance Pro* (Harman
Kardon)
• Seat Optimisation – the sound can be
adjusted so that it can primarily be adapted for Driver, All and Rear.
• Surround – surround sound mode with
level settings.
• Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
Apps
The app view contains applications (apps)
that give access to certain of the car's services.
Swipe from right to left1 across the centre display's screen in order to access the app view
from the home view. Apps that have been
downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for
embedded functions, such as FM radio, are
found here.
Related information
•
•
Audio settings (p. 502)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
App view (generic image, basic apps vary by market
and model)
Some basic apps are always available. More
apps such as web radio and music services
can be downloaded when the car is connected
to the Internet.
Certain apps are only available for use if the
car is connected to the Internet.
1
504
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Start an app by pressing the app in the centre
display's app view.
All the apps used should be updated to the latest version.
Downloading apps
New apps can be downloaded when the car
is connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services
that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the
effect on other services is experienced as
disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate
to switch off or interrupt other services.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Downloading apps (p. 505)
Updating apps (p. 506)
Deleting apps (p. 506)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 522)
3. Tap on the row for an app in order to
expand in the list and get more information about the app.
4. Select Install in order to start the download and installation of the desired app.
> The status of the download and installation is shown while it is in progress.
A message is shown if a download cannot be started for the moment. The app
will remain in the list and it is possible
to try to start a download again.
Android Auto* (p. 526)
NOTE
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
When downloading using a phone, pay
extra attention to the data traffic costs.
Storage space on hard disk (p. 545)
User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 543)
1.
Open the Download Centre app in the
app view.
2. Select New apps in order to open a list of
apps that are available but not installed in
the car.
Cancelling the download
– Tap on Abort to cancel a download in progress.
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this
cannot be cancelled.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Apps (p. 504)
Updating apps (p. 506)
Deleting apps (p. 506)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 609)
Storage space on hard disk (p. 545)
* Option/accessory. 505
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Updating apps
The apps can be updated when the car is
connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services
that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the
effect on other services is experienced as
disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate
to switch off or interrupt other services.
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay
extra attention to the data traffic costs.
Update some
1. Open the Download Centre app in the
app view.
2. Select Application updates in order to
open a list of all available updates.
3. Locate the desired app and select Install.
> Updating is started.
Update all
1. Open the Download Centre app in the
app view.
1.
•
•
•
•
Apps (p. 504)
Downloading apps (p. 505)
Deleting apps (p. 506)
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 609)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
2. Select Application updates in order to
open a list of all installed apps.
3. Locate the desired app and select
Uninstall in order to start the uninstallation of the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it
disappears from the list.
Related information
•
•
•
•
2. Select Install all.
> Updating is started.
506
Open the Download Centre app in the
app view.
Related information
•
If an app is being used during an ongoing
update, it will be restarted in order for the
installation to be completed.
Deleting apps
Apps can be uninstalled when the car is connected to the Internet.
An app that is being used must be closed in
order for the uninstallation to be completed.
•
Apps (p. 504)
Downloading apps (p. 505)
Updating apps (p. 506)
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 609)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Radio
It is possible to listen to the FM bands and to
digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is online, it
is also possible to listen to Internet radio.
•
•
•
•
RDS radio (p. 512)
Start radio
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
The radio is started from the centre display
app view.
1. Open the required frequency band (e.g.
FM) from the app view.
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Media player (p. 513)
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
Related information
•
•
Start radio (p. 507)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 508)
•
Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app (p. 510)
•
•
Settings for radio (p. 510)
Digital radio* (p. 512)
2. Select a radio station.
Related information
•
•
Radio (p. 507)
Searching for radio stations (p. 509)
}}
* Option/accessory. 507
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
•
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 508)
Changing radio band and radio
station
2. Select playback from Stations,
Favourites, Genres or Ensembles2.
•
Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app (p. 510)
3. Tap on the desired station from the list.
•
•
Settings for radio (p. 510)
There are instructions here for changing the
radio band, the list in the radio band and the
radio station in the selected list.
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Changing radio band
Swipe to show the app view in the centre display and select the preferred radio band (e.g.
FM), or open the driver display's app menu
using the right-hand keypad on the steering
wheel and make your selection from there.
Changing lists within the frequency
band
Favourites - only plays back selected favourite channels.
Genres - only plays back channels broadcasting the selected genre/programme type, e.g.
pop or classical.
Changing stations within the selected
list
–
Press on
or
under the centre display or the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist.
You can also change radio station in the
selected list via the centre display.
Related information
•
•
•
•
1.
2 Only
508
Press Library.
•
•
Radio (p. 507)
Searching for radio stations (p. 509)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app (p. 510)
Settings for radio (p. 510)
Application menu in driver display (p. 101)
applies to digital radio (DAB*).
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Searching for radio stations
Manual tuning
The radio automatically compiles a station list
of the radio stations within the area that are
transmitting the strongest signals.
The parameters you can search on depend on
the frequency band selected:
FM — station, genre and frequency.
•
•
DAB* - ensembles and stations.
1.
Press Library.
•
•
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 508)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Settings for radio (p. 510)
Searching manually makes it possible to find
and tune to stations that are not on the automatically compiled list of the strongest stations in the area.
On changing over to manual tuning, the radio
no longer changes frequency automatically
when reception is poor.
–
.
2. Press
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
3. Enter the search terms.
> Searching takes place with each input
of a character and the search results
are shown by category.
•
Press Manual tuning, pull the control or
press
or
. With a long press, the
search jumps to the next available station
in the frequency band. It is also possible to
use the right keypad on the steering
wheel.
Related information
•
•
Radio (p. 507)
Start radio (p. 507)
* Option/accessory. 509
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Save radio channels in the Radio
Favourites app
It is possible to add a radio channel to the
Radio favourites app and the favourites list
for the radio band (e.g. FM). Instructions on
how to add and remove radio channels can
be found below.
Radio Favourites
The Radio Favourites app
shows saved radio channels
from all frequency bands.
1.
Open the app Radio favourites from the
app view.
2. Tap on the desired station in the list to
start listening.
Adding and removing radio favourites
1.
Tap on
to add a channel to or from
frequency band favourites and the Radio
Favourites app.
2. Tap on Library, select Edit and tap on
to remove a radio channel from the favourites.
When a radio channel is saved from a station
list, the radio will automatically search for the
best frequency. But if a radio channel is saved
510
from a manual station search, the radio does
not automatically change to a stronger frequency.
If a radio channel is removed from the Radio
Favourite app, the channel will also be
removed from the favourites list for the relevant frequency band.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Radio (p. 507)
Start radio (p. 507)
Searching for radio stations (p. 509)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 508)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Settings for radio (p. 510)
Application menu in driver display (p. 101)
Settings for radio
There are various radio functions to activate
and deactivate.
Cancelling traffic messages
The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be
in
temporarily interrupted by tapping on
the right-hand steering wheel keypad or by
tapping on Cancel in the centre display.
Activating and deactivating radio
functions
Drag down the top view and select Settings
Media and the desired radio band to view
available functions.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
FM Radio
• Show Broadcast Information: shows
information on programme content,
artists, etc.
• Freeze Program Name: select to stop
the programme service name from scrolling continuously. Instead it freezes after
20 seconds.
• Select Announcements:3
- Local Interruptions: interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts information about traffic disruptions in the
neighbourhood. Playback of previous
media source is resumed when the message is finished. The Local Interruptions
function is a geographically restricted version of the Traffic Announcements function. The Traffic Announcements function must be activated at the same time.
- News : interrupts the current media
playback and broadcasts news. Playback
of previous media source is resumed
when the news broadcast is finished.
- Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous
media source is resumed when the message is finished.
3 Not
the message. Playback of previous media
source is resumed when the message is
finished.
- Traffic Announcements: interrupts the
current media playback and broadcasts
information about traffic disruptions. Playback of previous media source is resumed
when the message is finished.
- Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous
media source is resumed when the message is finished.
DAB* (digital radio)
• Sort Services: option for how channels
will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by
service number.
- Traffic Flash: receives information about
traffic disruptions.
• DAB To DAB Handover: starts the function for linking within DAB. If reception of
a radio channel is lost, another channel is
found automatically in another channel
group (ensemble).
- News Flash: receives news.
- Transport Flash: receives information
about public transport, e.g. ferry and train
timetables.
• DAB To FM Handover: starts the function for linking between DAB and FM. If
reception of a radio channel is lost, an
alternative FM frequency is searched for
automatically.
• Show Broadcast Information: select to
show radio text or selected types of radio
text, e.g. artist.
• Show Program Related Images: select
whether or not to show images for programmes on the screen.
- Warning/Services: receives information
about incidents of lower significance than
the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.
Related information
•
•
•
Radio (p. 507)
Digital radio* (p. 512)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 122)
• Select Announcements: select the types
of messages to be received while DAB is
playing. Selected messages will interrupt
the current media playback to play back
all stations support all message types.
* Option/accessory.
511
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
RDS radio
Related information
RDS (Radio Data System) means that the
radio automatically changes to the strongest
transmitter. RDS provides the ability to
receive e.g. traffic information and to search
for certain programme types.
RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An
FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following
functions:
•
•
•
Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter if reception in the area is poor.
•
Search for programme category, e.g. programme types or traffic information.
•
Receive text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or
only selected parts of its functionality.
When broadcasting news or traffic messages,
the radio can switch stations, interrupting the
audio source currently in use. For example, if
the CD player* is in use, it is paused. The radio
returns to the previous audio source and volume when the set programme type is no
longer broadcast. To go back earlier, press
on the right-hand steering wheel keypad
or tap Cancel in the centre display.
512
Radio (p. 507)
Settings for radio (p. 510)
Digital radio*
Digital radio (DAB4) is a digital broadcasting
system for radio. The radio supports DAB,
DAB+ and DMB5.
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
The digital radio app is
launched from app view in
the centre display.
Digital radio is played back in the same way as
other radio bands, such as FM. Besides the
option to select playback from Stations,
Favourites and Genres, there is also the
option to select playback from subchannels
and Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio
channels (a channel group) broadcasting on
the same frequency.
In the cases where the radio channel transmits
its logotype, it is downloaded and shown
beside the station name (download time varies).
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
DAB subchannel
Secondary components are usually named
subchannels. These are temporary and can
contain e.g. translations of the main programme into other languages. Subchannels
are indicated with an arrow symbol in the
channel list.
Link between FM and digital radio*
Media player
The function enables the digital radio (DAB)
to switch from a channel with poor or no
reception to the same channel in another
channel group (ensemble) with better reception, within DAB and/or between DAB and
FM.
Related information
DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking
The media player can play back audio from
the CD player* and from external audio
sources connected via the USB port or
Bluetooth. It can also play back video format
via the USB port.
When the car is connected to the internet, it is
also possible to listen to web radio, audio
books and music services via apps.
•
Link between FM and digital radio*
(p. 513)
•
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 508)
•
•
Searching for radio stations (p. 509)
•
•
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app (p. 510)
Settings for radio (p. 510)
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Media
DAB.
3. Tick/untick DAB To DAB Handover
and/or DAB To FM Handover in order to
activate/deactivate the respective functions.
Related information
•
•
•
Digital radio* (p. 512)
Radio (p. 507)
Settings for radio (p. 510)
The media player is operated
from the centre display, but
several functions can be
operated using the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad or
voice control.
The radio is operated in the media player and
is described in a separate section.
4 Digital
5 Digital
Audio Broadcasting
Multimedia Broadcasting
}}
* Option/accessory. 513
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Media playback
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Media playback (p. 514)
Controlling and changing media (p. 515)
Searching media (p. 516)
Apps (p. 504)
The media player also operates the radio,
which is described in a separate section.
Radio (p. 507)
CD player* (p. 518)
Starting the media source
Video (p. 518)
Media via
Bluetooth®
The media player is controlled from the centre display. Several functions can also be
operated using the steering wheel's righthand keypad or voice control.
(p. 519)
CD*
1. Insert a CD.
2. Open the app CD from the app view.
3. Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
USB memory
1. Insert the USB memory.
2. Open the app USB from the app view.
Media via USB port (p. 520)
3. Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Mp3 player and iPod®
NOTE
To start playback from iPod, use the iPod
app (not USB).
When an iPod is used as audio source, the
car's audio and media system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod player's
own menu structure.
1.
Connect media source.
2. Start playback from the connected media
source.
App view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by market
and model.)
514
3. Open the app (iPod, USB) from the app
view.
> Playback begins.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Bluetooth connected device
1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.
2. Connect media source.
3. Start playback from the connected media
source.
4. Open the app Bluetooth from the app
view.
> Playback begins.
Media with Internet connection
Play back media from Internet-connected
apps:
1.
Connect the car to the Internet.
2. Open the current app from the app view.
> Playback begins.
Read the separate section on how apps are
downloaded.
Related information
•
Handling the application menu in the
driver display (p. 102)
•
•
•
Radio (p. 507)
•
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
(p. 520)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Downloading apps (p. 505)
Controlling and changing media (p. 515)
Connecting a device via USB port
(p. 520)
Controlling and changing media
The playback of media can be controlled with
voice control, steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
The media player can be
operated by voice recognition, from the steering wheel
keypad or the centre display.
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Video (p. 518)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 522)
Android Auto* (p. 526)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Compatible media formats (p. 521)
Video
1. Connect media source.
2. Open the app USB from the app view.
3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
Apple CarPlay
CarPlay is described in a separate section.
Android Auto
Android Auto is described in a separate section.
Volume - turn the control knob under the centre display or press
on the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad in order to increase
or decrease the volume.
Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to
the song being played back, the physical buton the
ton under the centre display or
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
}}
* Option/accessory. 515
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Change track/song - tap on the desired track
or
in the centre display, press on
under the centre display or on the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
Similar - tap on the button in
order to use Gracenote to
search for similar music on
the USB device and to create
a playlist from it. The playlist
can contain a maximum of 50
songs.
Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time
axis in the centre display and drag sideways,
or press and hold
or
under the centre
display or on the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
Changing media - select from previous
sources in the app, in the app view, press on
the desired app or select with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad via the app menu
.
Library - tap on the button to
play back from the library.
Shuffle - tap on the button to
shuffle the playback order.
Searching media
It is possible to search by artist, composer,
song titles, album, video, audio book, playlist
and, when the car is connected to the Internet, podcasts (digital media via Internet).
Change device - tap on the
button in order to switch
between USB devices when
several are connected.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Media player (p. 513)
Searching media (p. 516)
Audio settings (p. 502)
1.
Apps (p. 504)
Press
.
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
Gracenote® (p. 517)
2. Enter the search terms.
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
3. Press Search.
> Connected devices are searched and
the search results are listed by category.
Swipe sideways across the screen to show
each category separately.
Related information
•
•
516
Media player (p. 513)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
•
•
Media playback (p. 514)
Gracenote®
Updating Gracenote
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 127)
Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles
and associated images, which are shown during playback.
Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music
recognition. Information on the music can be
presented by means of the identification and
analysis of the metadata in the music files.
Sometimes metadata from different sources
can be inconsistent or inadequate.
For information and download, see
support.volvocars.com.
Gracenote has support for phonetic processing of artist name, album titles and genres,
and in this way, voice control can be used to
play back music.
1.
The content of the Gracenote database is
updated continuously. Download the latest
update to take advantage of improvements.
Related information
•
•
•
Media playback (p. 514)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 546)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Media
Gracenote®.
3. Select settings for Gracenote data:
• Gracenote® Online Search - searches in
Gracenote's online database for playing
media.
• Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects
how to display Gracenote data if there are
more than one search results.
1 - the file's original data are used.
2 - Gracenote data are used.
3 - Gracenote or original data can be
selected.
• None - no results are shown.
517
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
CD player*
Video
Playing a video
The media player can play back CD discs with
compatible audio files.
Videos on USB-connected devices can be
played back using the media player.
No picture is shown when the car starts to
move, but only the audio is played back. The
picture is shown again when the car is stationary.
Videos are played using the USB app in the
app view.
1. Connecting a media source (USB device).
Information on compatible formats for media
can be found in a separate section.
Disc insert and eject slot.
Disc eject button.
Related information
•
•
•
518
Media playback (p. 514)
3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
Settings for video (p. 519)
Finding video files may be problematic if the
USB device also contains music and audio
tracks. In this case, it is possible to find them
by going to Library and selecting the video
tab.
Compatible media formats (p. 521)
Related information
Related information
•
•
•
•
2. Open the app USB from the app view.
Playing a video (p. 518)
Playing back DivX® (p. 519)
•
•
•
•
Video (p. 518)
Playing back DivX® (p. 519)
Settings for video (p. 519)
Compatible media formats (p. 521)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Compatible media formats (p. 521)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Playing back DivX®
Settings for video
Media via Bluetooth®
2. Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the
registration code.
Certain language settings can be changed for
video playback.
With the video player in full screen mode, or
by opening the top view and pressing
Settings Media Video, the following
can be adjusted: Audio Language and
Subtitle Language.
3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information
and to complete the registration.
The car's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth and can wirelessly play audio files
from external Bluetooth devices, such as
mobile phones and tablets.
For the media player to be able to play back
audio files wirelessly from an external device,
the device must first be connected to the car
via Bluetooth.
•
Certified®
This DivX
device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) films.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Video (p. 518)
Playing a video (p. 518)
Settings for video (p. 519)
Compatible media formats (p. 521)
Related information
Video (p. 518)
Related information
•
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
(p. 520)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
•
•
Media playback (p. 514)
Compatible media formats (p. 521)
519
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
Media via USB port
Connecting a device via USB port
Connect a
device to the car for
wireless playback of media and to provide the
car with an Internet connection where possible.
Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth® technology, but not all of them
are fully compatible with the car.
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio
system via the car's USB port.
Devices with rechargeable batteries are
recharged when connected via USB and the
ignition is in position I, II or the engine is running.
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio
system via one of the car's USB ports.
The phone must be connected to the USB
port with white frame (when there are two
USB ports) when using Apple CarPlay* and
Android Auto*.
For information on compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
The content of the external source can be loaded more quickly if it only consists of compatible formats. Video files can also be played
back via the USB port.
Bluetooth®
The procedure for connecting a media device
is the same as for connecting a phone to the
car via Bluetooth®.
Related information
•
•
•
520
Media via Bluetooth® (p. 519)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
Media playback (p. 514)
Certain MP3 players have their own file system that the car does not support.
Related information
•
Connecting a device via USB port
(p. 520)
•
•
•
•
Media playback (p. 514)
•
•
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 522)
Video (p. 518)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 521)
Android Auto* (p. 526)
USB inputs (type A) in the tunnel console. Allow the
cable to lie forwards so that it is not trapped when
the lid is closed.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Media playback (p. 514)
Media via USB port (p. 520)
Media player (p. 513)
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 521)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
•
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 521)
Technical specifications for USB
devices
•
•
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 522)
The following specifications must be met to
allow the contents of the USB devices to be
read.
No folder structure will be shown in the centre
display during playback.
Android Auto* (p. 526)
Max number
Files
15 000
Folders
1 000
Folder levels
8
Playlists
100
Items in a playlist
1 000
Subfolders
No limit
Technical specification for USB A
connector
•
•
•
•
Type A socket
Version 2.0
Voltage supply 5 V
Current supply max. 2.1 A
Related information
•
Media via USB port (p. 520)
Compatible media formats
The following file formats must be used for
media playback.
Audio files
Format
File extension
Codec
MP3
.mp3
MPEG1 Layer III,
MPEG2 Layer III,
MP3 Pro (mp3
compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3
compatible)
AAC
.m4a, .m4b, .aac
AAC LC
(MPEG-4 part III
Audio), HE-AAC
(aacPlus v1/v2)
WMA
.wma
WMA8/9,
WMA9/10 Pro
WAV
.wav
LPCM
FLAC
.flac
FLAC
Video files
Format
File extension
MP4
.mp4, .m4v
MPEG-PS
.mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v
}}
* Option/accessory. 521
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Format
File extension
Audio codec
MP3, AC3
AVI
.avi
Subtitles
XSUB
AVI (DivX)
.avi, .divx
ASF
.asf, .wmv
Special functions
Multiple subtitles, multiple
audio, resume play
Reference
Meets all requirements of
the DivX Home Theater
profile. Visit divx.com for
more information and software tools to convert your
files into DivX Home
Theater video.
Subtitles
Format
File extension
SubViewer
.sub
SubRip
.srt
SSA
.ssa
DivX®
DivX certified devices have been tested for
high-quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback.
When you see the DivX logo, you have the
freedom to play DivX films.
522
Profile
DivX Home Theater
Video codec
DivX, MPEG-4
Resolution
720x576
Bit rate
4.8Mbps
Frame rate
30 fps
File extension
.divx, .avi
Max file size
4 GB
Related information
•
•
•
Media player (p. 513)
Video (p. 518)
Playing back DivX® (p. 519)
Apple® CarPlay®*
CarPlay gives you the option to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions,
send/receive messages and use Siri, all while
you stay focused on your driving.
CarPlay works with selected
iOS devices. If the car does
not already support CarPlay
there is the option to install it
retroactively. Contact a Volvo
dealer to install CarPlay.
Information about which apps are supported
and which iOS devices are compatible is available on Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/
carplay/. Using apps that are not compatible
with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the
connection between the device and the car is
broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in CarPlay.
When using map navigation via CarPlay, there
is no guidance in the driver display or head-up
display, but only in the centre display.
When navigation is started through Apple
CarPlay, ongoing native turn-by-turn route
guidance will be ended.
The CarPlay apps can be controlled via the
centre display, the iOS device or using the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to
certain functions). The apps can also be voicecontrolled using Siri. A long press on the
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
steering wheel button
starts voice control
using Siri and a short press activates the car's
own voice control. If Siri breaks off too early,
6
hold the steering wheel button
depressed.
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
features/applications. When using Apple
CarPlay, certain information from your car
(including its position) is transferred to
your iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you
are fully responsible for your and any
others person’s use of Apple CarPlay.
Using Apple® CarPlay®*
To use CarPlay, Siri voice control must be
activated on your iOS device. The device also
needs an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the
mobile network for all functions to work.
Connect an iOS device and start
CarPlay
NOTE
Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 523)
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 525)
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
6 Apple
and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
3. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is
deactivated. A phone or media player connected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore not be available when CarPlay is
active. An alternative Internet source must
be used to connect to the Internet for the
car's apps. Use Wi-Fi or the car's built-in
modem*.
Related information
•
•
•
•
2. Read the terms and conditions and then
tap on Accept to connect.
> The subview with CarPlay is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has
not been connected previously:
1.
Connect an iOS device with support for
CarPlay to the USB port. In the cases
where there are two USB ports, the one
with the white frame around the port must
be used.
}}
* Option/accessory. 523
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Starting CarPlay
To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has
been connected previously:
1.
Connect an iOS device to the USB port. In
the cases where there are two USB ports,
the one with the white frame around the
port must be used.
> If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the name of the device will
be shown. The tile with CarPlay is
opened automatically in the cases
where the home view is shown when
connecting the iOS device.
2. If the tile with CarPlay does not open
automatically, tap on the device name.
The subview with CarPlay is opened and
compatible apps are shown.
3. If an app is active in the same tile, tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app view.
> The subview with CarPlay is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
4. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
CarPlay runs in the background if another app
is started, or is already active when connecting, in the same tile. To show CarPlay in the
subview again - tap on the CarPlay icon in the
app view.
7
524
Switch the connection between
CarPlay and iPod
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 539)
CarPlay to iPod
1. Press Settings in the top view.
•
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 540)
•
Voice recognition (p. 143)
2. Continue to Communication
CarPlay.
Apple
3. Untick the box for the iOS device that
shall no longer start CarPlay automatically
when the USB cable is connected.
4. Disconnect and connect the iOS device to
the USB port.
5. Open the app iPod from the app view.
iPod to CarPlay
1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK.
3. Disconnect and connect the iOS device to
the USB port.
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is
opened and compatible apps are
shown7.
Related information
•
•
•
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 520)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 522)
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 525)
Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®*
Settings for iOS device connected with
CarPlay8.
2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
• Voice Control
• Navi Voice Guidance
• Phone Ringtone
Automatic start
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Continue to Communication
CarPlay and select setting:
Apple
•
Tick the box - CarPlay starts automatically when the USB cable is connected.
•
Untick the box - CarPlay does not start
automatically when the USB cable is
connected.
If the car is shared by a lot of people, such as
in a car pool, it is worth noting that a maximum of 20 iOS devices can be stored simultaneously in the list. When the list is full and a
new device is connected the oldest one is
deleted.
Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®*
Here are some useful tips for using CarPlay®.
Update your iOS device with the latest
version of the iOS operating system and
ensure that the apps have been updated.
•
•
In the event of a problem with CarPlay,
disconnect the iOS device from the USB
port and reconnect. Otherwise, try to
close the app on the device that is not
working and then restart the app, or try
closing all apps and restart your device.
•
If the apps do not appear when CarPlay
starts (black screen), try minimising and
expanding the tile for CarPlay.
•
Using apps that are not compatible with
CarPlay may sometimes mean that the
connection between the iOS device and
the car is broken. Information about supported apps and compatible telephone
devices can be found on the Apple website. You can also search for CarPlay in the
App Store to find information about apps
that are compatible with CarPlay on your
market.
•
Using Siri it is possible to write/dictate
and read out messages. Messages are
read out and dictated in the language
selected in the settings for Siri. When the
message is written/dictated, no text will
be shown in the centre display – instead,
Related information
•
•
•
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 522)
Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 523)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
To delete the list, the settings must be reset in
the centre display (factory reset).
System volumes
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
8 Apple
and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
}}
* Option/accessory. 525
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
the text will appear on the iOS device.
When Siri is used, note that the telephone's microphones are used and that
the quality is therefore dependent on the
position of the telephone.
•
•
•
If the device is connected to the car via
Bluetooth, the connection will be interrupted when CarPlay is used. Resume the
Internet connection in the car by sharing
the Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot from the
device.
Some of the CarPlay functions (such as
voice call and messages) mean that use of
the car's own functions is stopped and
CarPlay is shown automatically instead. If
this behaviour is not wanted, deselect the
display of the equivalent function in
CarPlay under the phone's settings for
notifications.
CarPlay only works with iPhone9.
NOTE
Availability and functionality may vary
depending on market.
Related information
•
•
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 522)
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 539)
9 Apple,
526
Android Auto*
NOTE
Android Auto gives you the option to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions and
use car-adapted apps from an Android
device. Android Auto works with selected
Android devices.
When a device is connected to Android
Auto it is possible to stream via Bluetooth
to another media player. Bluetooth is
active while Android Auto is being used.
When using map navigation via Android Auto
there is no guidance in the driver display or
head-up display, but only in the centre display.
Android Auto can be controlled via the centre
display using the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad or voice control. Holding down the
starts Google
steering wheel button
Assistant and a short press deactivates it.
Information about which apps are supported
and which Android devices are compatible is
available on the website: www.android.com/
auto/. For third-party apps, see Google Play.
Please note that Volvo is not responsible for
the content in Android Auto.
Android Auto is started from the app view.
After Android Auto has been started once, the
app will be started automatically the next time
the device is connected. Automatic start can
be deactivated under settings.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge
the following: Android Auto is a service
provided by Google Inc. under its terms
and conditions. Volvo Cars is not
responsible for Android Auto or its
features or applications. When you use
Android Auto, your car transfers certain
information (including its location) to your
connected Android phone. You are fully
responsible for your and any other
person’s use of Android Auto.
Related information
•
•
Using Android Auto* (p. 527)
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 527)
CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Using Android Auto*
To use the Android Auto app, the app must
be installed on your Android device and the
device must be connected to the car's USB
input.
NOTE
For installation of Android Auto to be possible, the car must be equipped with two
USB ports (USB hub)*. If the car only has
one USB port then it is not possible to use
Android Auto.
Previously connected Android
1. Connect your device to the USB input
with a white frame.
> If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the name of the device is
shown.
Settings for Android Auto*
2. Tap on the device name – the tile with
Android Auto is opened and compatible
apps are shown.
2. Press Communication
and select setting:
The first time an Android is connected
1. Connect your Android device to the USB
input with a white frame.
3. If the setting for automatic start is not
selected - open the Android Auto app
from the app view.
> The subview with Android Auto is
opened and compatible apps are
shown.
2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK.
4. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
3. Tap on Android Auto in the app view.
Android Auto runs in the background if
another app is started in the same subview. To
show Android Auto in the subview again - tap
on the Android Auto icon in the app view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then
tap on Accept to connect.
> The subview with Android Auto is
opened and compatible apps are
shown.
5. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Android Auto* (p. 526)
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 527)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 520)
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Settings for an Android device that has been
connected the first time with Android Auto.
Automatic start
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
Android Auto
•
Tick the box - Android Auto starts automatically when the USB cable is connected.
•
Untick the box - Android Auto does not
start automatically when the USB cable
is connected.
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be
stored in the list. When the list is full and a
new device is connected the oldest one is
deleted.
A factory reset has to be executed in order to
clear the list.
System volumes
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
• Voice Control
• Navi Voice Guidance
• Phone Ringtone
}}
* Option/accessory. 527
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Related information
•
•
•
528
Android Auto* (p. 526)
Using Android Auto* (p. 527)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
Tips for using Android Auto*
•
Here are some useful tips for using Android
Auto.
• Ensure that your apps are updated.
•
When starting the car, wait until the centre display has started, connect the device
and then open Android Auto from the app
view.
•
In the event of problems with Android
Auto, disconnect your Android device from
the USB port and then reconnect via USB.
Otherwise, try closing the app on the
device and then restarting the app.
•
When a device is connected to Android
Auto it is still possible to playback media
via Bluetooth to another media player. The
Bluetooth function is on when Android
Auto is used.
•
If the icon for Android Auto is greyed out,
this means no device is connected. When
you connect your device the icon will be
illuminated. If the icon is not visible at all
then the car does not have support for
connecting a device for this purpose.
•
If the device is connected to the car via
Bluetooth, the connection will be interrupted when Android Auto is used. Resume
the Internet connection in the car by sharing the Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot from
the device.
If the car is shared by a lot of people, such
as in a car pool, it is worth noting that a
maximum of 20 Android devices can be
stored simultaneously. When the list is full
and a new device is connected the oldest
one is deleted. A factory reset has to be
performed in order to clear the list.
Related information
•
•
Android Auto* (p. 526)
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 539)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Phone
Overview
A phone with Bluetooth can be connected
wirelessly to the car's built-in hands-free system.
The audio and media system acts as handsfree, with the facility to remotely control a
selection of the phone's functions. The phone
can still be operated with its own keys even if
it is connected to the car.
When a phone has been connected online and
connected with the car, it can be used make
calls, send/receive messages, play back media
wirelessly and be used as an Internet connection.
Microphone.
The phone is operated from the centre display,
but also via voice recognition and the app
menu, which are accessed from the right-hand
steering wheel keypad.
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 531)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 532)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 532)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 533)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 533)
•
•
•
Settings for phone (p. 536)
Phone.
Phone operation from centre display.
Keypad for operating phone functions that
are shown in the driver display and voice
recognition.
•
•
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Handling the application menu in the
driver display (p. 102)
Audio settings (p. 502)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 538)
Driver display.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Managing phone calls (p. 533)
Managing the phone book (p. 536)
Managing text messages (p. 534)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
529
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
Connect a phone with Bluetooth activated to
then be able to make calls from the car, send/
receive messages, play back media wirelessly
and connect the car to the Internet.
It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices
connected at once, in which case one of them
can only play back wirelessly. The most
recently connected phone will automatically
be connected to make calls, send/receive
messages, play back media and provide an
Internet connection. It is possible to change
what the phone is to be used for under
Bluetooth Devices via the settings menu in
the centre display's top view. Your mobile
phone needs to be equipped with Bluetooth
and support tethering.
After the device has been connected/registered a first time via Bluetooth, it no longer
needs to be visible/discoverable, but only have
Bluetooth activated. A maximum of 20 connected Bluetooth devices can be stored in the
car.
There are two options for connecting. Either
search the phone from the car or search the
car from the phone.
Option 1 - search phone from car
1.
530
Make the phone searchable/visible via
Bluetooth.
2. Open the phone tile in the centre display.
•
If there is no phone connected to the
car, tap on Add phone.
• If there is a phone connected to the car,
. In the pop-up wintap on Change
dow, tap on Add phone.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
The list is updated as new devices are
detected.
3. Tap on the name of the phone to be connected.
4. Check that the specified number code in
the car matches that in the phone. In
which case, choose to accept in both places.
5. On the phone, choose to accept or reject
any options for phone contacts and messages.
NOTE
•
The message function must be activated in certain phones.
•
Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car.
Option 2 - search car from phone
1.
Open the phone tile in the centre display.
•
If there is no phone connected to the
car, tap on Add phone Make car
discoverable.
•
If there is a phone connected to the car,
. In the pop-up wintap on Change
dow, tap on Add phone Make car
discoverable.
2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
3. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
4. Select the name of the car on the phone.
5. A pop-up window for the connection is
shown in the car. Confirm the connection.
6. Check that the specified number code in
the car matches the one shown in the
external device. In which case, choose to
accept in both places.
7. On the phone, choose to accept or reject
any options for phone contacts and messages.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
NOTE
•
•
The message function must be activated in certain phones.
Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is updated
then the connection may be broken. In
which case, delete the phone from the car
and then connect again.
Compatible phones
Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth technology, but not all of them
are fully compatible with the car.
•
•
•
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 533)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 537)
It is possible to connect a phone to the car
automatically via Bluetooth. The phone has to
have been connected to the car for the first
time.
It is only the two last connected phones that
can be connected automatically.
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 538)
1.
2. Set the car in ignition position I or higher.
> The phone will connect.
Related information
•
•
Phone (p. 529)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 532)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 532)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 533)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 533)
For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
•
Phone (p. 529)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 532)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 532)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 533)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 531)
Activate Bluetooth in the phone before
setting the car in ignition position I.
•
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 537)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
}}
* Option/accessory. 531
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 538)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
Disconnecting a Bluetoothconnected phone
•
Ignition positions (p. 442)
It is possible to connect a phone to the car
manually via Bluetooth. The phone has to
have been connected to the car for the first
time.
1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
It is possible to disconnect a phone connected to Bluetooth, and it will then no
longer be connected to the car.
• When the phone is out of range of the car
it is automatically disconnected. If disconnection occurs during an active call, then
the call will be continued on the phone.
2. Open the subview for phone.
> Connected phones are listed.
3. Tap on the name of the phone to be connected.
> The phone will connect.
Related information
532
•
•
Phone (p. 529)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 531)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 532)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 533)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 533)
•
•
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 537)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
•
It is also possible to disconnect the phone
by manually deactivating Bluetooth.
Related information
•
•
•
Phone (p. 529)
Settings for phone (p. 536)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 533)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 533)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 537)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 538)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Switch between Bluetoothconnected phones
Removing devices connected to
Bluetooth
It is possible to switch between a number of
Bluetooth-connected phones.
1. Open the tile for the phone.
It is possible to remove phones from the list
of registered Bluetooth devices, for example.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
or drag down the top
2. Tap on Change
view and tap on Settings
Communication Bluetooth Devices
Add device.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
2. Press Communication Bluetooth
Devices.
> Registered Bluetooth devices are listed.
3. Tap on the phone to be connected.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 529)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 537)
Managing phone calls
Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-connected phone.
3. Tap on the device to be removed.
4. Tap on Remove device and confirm your
selection.
> The device is no longer registered to
the car.
Related information
•
•
Generic illustration.
Phone (p. 529)
Making phone calls
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
1.
Open the subview for phone.
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 532)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 533)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 532)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 533)
2. Select call from call history, enter number
using the keypad or via the contact list. It
is possible to search or browse in the conin the contact list in
tact list. Tap on
order to add a contact under Favourites.
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 537)
3. Press
4. Tap on
to make a call.
to end the call.
You can also make calls from the call log via
the app menu, which is accessed from the
.
right-hand steering wheel keypad
}}
533
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Making multi-party calls
During a call:
1.
Private call
–
Press Add call.
• Switch to mobile phone - the hands-
2. Choose to make a call from the call log,
favourites or the contact list.
free function is disconnected and the
call continues on your mobile phone.
3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap
on
alongside the contact in the contact list.
4. Tap on Swap call to switch between the
parties.
• Driver focused - the microphone in the
roof on the passenger side is switched
off and the call continues with the car's
handsfree function.
Related information
to end the active call.
5. Tap on
Conference calls
During an active multi-party call:
•
•
Phone (p. 529)
1.
•
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146)
•
Handling the application menu in the
driver display (p. 102)
•
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 127)
•
•
•
Managing the phone book (p. 536)
Tap on Join calls to merge the active
multi-party call.
2. Tap on
to end the call.
Incoming phone calls
Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver
display and the centre display. Manage the
call on the right-hand steering wheel keypad
or in the centre display.
1.
Tap on Answer/Reject.
2. Tap on
to end the call.
Incoming phone call during an active call
1. Tap on Answer/Reject.
2. Tap on
534
During the current call, press Privacy and
select setting:
to end the call.
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
Managing text messages (p. 534)
Audio settings (p. 502)
Managing text messages10
Message handling in the car for a Bluetoothconnected phone.
In some phones, the message function must
be activated. Not all phones are compatible. In
such cases, they cannot display contacts and
messages in the car.
For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
Managing text messages in the centre
display
Text messages are only shown in the centre
display if the setting is selected.
Press Messages in the app
view to manage text messages in the centre display.
Reading text messages in the centre
display
Press the icon to get the message
read aloud.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sending text messages in the centre
display11
1. You can reply to a message or create a
new message.
•
•
Reply to message - tap on the contact
whose message you wish to reply to,
then tap on Answer.
Create new message - tap on Create
new. Select a contact or enter a number.
Message notification
Settings for text messages
It is possible to activate and deactivate notifications in the text message settings.
Settings for text messages on connected
phone.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
2. Compose the message.
Phone (p. 529)
Settings for text messages (p. 535)
Managing text messages in the driver
display
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
Text messages are only shown in the driver
display if the setting is selected.
•
User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 543)
Reading a new text message in the driver
display
– To have the message read aloud - select
Read out with the steering wheel keypad.
Dictating a reply in the driver display
After the text message has been read out, it is
possible to reply briefly with dictation if the car
is connected to the Internet.
–
10
11
message notifications in the centre display's status bar.
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146)
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 127)
Text Messages
• Notification in centre display - shows
Settings for phone (p. 536)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
•
3. Press Send.
2. Press Communication
and select settings:
• Notification in driver display - displays notifications in the driver's display
and incoming messages can be managed using the steering wheel's righthand keypad.
• Text message tone - select tone for
incoming text messages.
Related information
•
•
Phone (p. 529)
•
•
Managing text messages (p. 534)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
Settings for phone (p. 536)
Press Answer with the steering wheel
keypad. A dictation dialogue starts.
Valid in certain markets only. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Only certain phones can send messages via the car.
* Option/accessory. 535
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Managing the phone book
When a phone is connected to the car with
Bluetooth, contacts can be managed directly
in the centre display.
Up to 3000 contacts can be shown from the
phone selected in the centre display.
. It is possible to sort by first
sorted under
name or surname, and this setting is adjusted
in the telephone setup.
Related information
•
•
•
Phone (p. 529)
Settings for phone (p. 536)
Settings for phone
When the telephone is connected to the car,
the following settings can be made:
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication
select settings:
• Ringtones - selection of ring signal. It
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146)
•
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 127)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
Phone and
is possible to use a ring signal from the
phone or the car. Some phones are not
fully compatible and their ring signals
may therefore not be available for use in
the car. 12
• Sort Order - select sort order of contact list.
Call notifications in head up display*
1.
Browse between the letters and
to
find a matching contact. Depending on
existing contacts in the phone book, only
matching letters are shown.
Search contacts - tap on
to search
for a phone number of name in the contact
list.
Favourites - tap on
to add/remove a
contact to/from the favourites list.
Sorting
The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order
where special characters and numbers are
536
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car Displays
Display Options.
Head-Up
3. Select Show Phone.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 529)
Settings for text messages (p. 535)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 537)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
•
•
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Settings for Bluetooth devices
Internet-connected car*
Audio settings (p. 502)
Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
When the car is connected to the Internet, it
is possible – for example – to use web radio
and music services via apps, download software and contact your retailer from the car.
The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or
with the car's built-in modem* (SIM card).
2. Press Communication Bluetooth
Devices and select settings:
• Add device - starts the pairing of a new
device.
• Previously paired devices - lists registered/paired devices.
• Remove device - removes the connected
device.
• Allowed services for this device - sets
When the car is connected to the Internet, it is
possible to share the car's Internet connection
(Wi-Fi hotspot) so that other devices such as
tablets can access the Internet13.
The Internet status is indicated by a symbol in
the centre display's status bar.
device usage options: calling, sending/
receiving messages, streaming media and
as Internet connection.
• Internet connection - connects the car to
the Internet via the device's Bluetooth
connection.
Related information
•
•
•
•
12
13
For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
Phone (p. 529)
Settings for phone (p. 536)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
}}
* Option/accessory. 537
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
NOTE
Data is transferred when using the internet
(data traffic), which can have a cost.
Activation of data roaming can result in further charges.
Contact your network operator about the
cost for data traffic.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using
Wi-Fi or the car modem*.
NOTE
When using Android Auto, it is possible to
connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth or the car modem*.
Before connecting the car to the Internet,
search support information on terms and conditions for services and privacy policy for customers at www.volvocars.com.
Related information
538
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 122)
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 538)
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 539)
Connect the car to the Internet via
a Bluetooth-enabled phone
•
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 540)
•
•
•
Apps (p. 504)
•
•
•
•
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 543)
Create an Internet connection via Bluetooth
by sharing your phone's Internet access and
access several online services in the car.
1. To be able to connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-connected phone, the
phone has to have already been connected to the car via Bluetooth for a first
time.
No or poor Internet connection (p. 542)
Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 541)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 543)
Volvo ID (p. 28)
User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 543)
2. Make sure that your phone supports tethering and that this function is activated.
On an iPhone, this function is known as
"tethering". On Android phones, this function may have different names but is frequently known as "hotspot". For iPhones,
the menu page "tethering" must also be
open until the Internet connection has
been established.
3. If the phone has been connected via Bluetooth previously, press Settings in the
centre display top view.
4. Press Communication
Devices.
Bluetooth
5. Tick the box for Bluetooth Internet
connection under the heading Internet
connection.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
6. If another connection source has been
used, confirm the option to change connection.
> Your car is now connected to the Internet via the Bluetooth-connected phone.
NOTE
The telephone and network provider must
support tethering (Internet connection
sharing), and the subscription must include
data.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using
Wi-Fi or the car modem*.
Related information
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 540)
Connect the car to the Internet via
a phone (Wi-Fi)
therefore needs to be reactivated the next
time it is used.
Create an Internet connection via Wi-Fi by
tethering your phone and access online services in the car.
1. Make sure that your phone supports tethering and that this function is activated.
On an iPhone, this function is known as
"tethering". On Android phones, this function may have different names but is frequently known as "hotspot". For iPhones,
the menu page "tethering" must also be
open until the Internet connection has
been established.
When a phone is connected to the car, it is
saved for future use. To show a list of saved
networks or manually delete saved networks,
go to Settings Communication Wi-Fi
Saved networks.
3. Continue to Communication
Wi-Fi.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking
the box for Wi-Fi.
5. If another connection source has been
used, confirm the option to change connection.
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 530)
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 539)
7. Enter the network password.
> The car connects to the network.
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 522)
Note that certain phones switch off tethering
after the contact with the car has been disconnected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the
next time it is used. The tethering in the phone
No or poor Internet connection (p. 542)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 537)
The telephone and network provider must
support tethering (Internet connection
sharing), and the subscription must include
data.
2. Press Settings in the top view.
6. Tap on the network name of the network
to be connected.
•
•
•
NOTE
Technical and safety requirements for Wi-Fi
connection, are described in a separate section.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 543)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 542)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 543)
* Option/accessory. 539
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Connect the car to the Internet via
car modem (SIM card)
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking
the box for Car modem Internet.
It is possible to establish an Internet connection via the car modem and a personal SIM
card (P-SIM)*.
Cars equipped with Volvo On Call will use the
Internet connection with car modem for the
services.
5. If another connection source has been
used, confirm the option to change connection.
6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
> The car connects to the network.
1.
NOTE
Note that the SIM card used for Internet
connection via P-SIM cannot have the
same telephone number as the SIM card
that the phone uses. If this is disregarded,
it will not be possible to route calls correctly to the telephone. Therefore, use a
SIM card with a separate telephone number for the Internet connection, or a data
card that does not handle telephone calls
and is therefore unable to disrupt the function of the telephone.
Fit a personal SIM card into the holder
under the cargo area floor.
Note that a mini SIM is required to fit the
car's card reader.
2. Press Settings in the top view.
3. Press Communication
Internet.
540
Related information
•
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 542)
Settings for car modem* (p. 540)
Settings for car modem*
The car is equipped with a modem that can
be used to connect the car to the Internet. It
is also possible to share the Internet connection via Wi-Fi.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication Car Modem
Internet and select settings:
• Car modem Internet - select whether to
use the car modem as Internet connection.
• Data usage - tap on Reset resets the
counters for received and sent data volume.
• Network
Select network operator - automatic or
manual selection of network operator.
Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the
car modem will attempt to connect to the
Internet when the car is abroad and outside its home network. Note that this may
result in heavy costs. Check your roaming
agreement for data traffic abroad with
your network provider in your home country.
• SIM card PIN
Car Modem
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can
be entered.
Sharing Internet access from the
car via a Wi-Fi hotspot
Disable PIN - select whether the PIN
code shall be required for access to the
SIM card.
When the car is online, its Internet connection can be shared to allow other devices to
use the Internet connection14.
• Send request code - used e.g. to top up
or check the balance on a prepaid card.
Functionality depends on the provider.
NOTE
Note that the SIM card used for Internet
connection via P-SIM cannot have the
same telephone number as the SIM card
that the phone uses. If this is disregarded,
it will not be possible to route calls correctly to the telephone. Therefore, use a
SIM card with a separate telephone number for the Internet connection, or a data
card that does not handle telephone calls
and is therefore unable to disrupt the function of the telephone.
Related information
•
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 540)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 542)
14
Does not apply when the car is online via Wi-Fi.
The network operator (SIM card) must support tethering (sharing of the Internet connection).
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication
Hotspot.
Car Wi-Fi
3. Tap on Network name and name the
shared connection.
4. Tap on Password and select a password
to be entered on connecting devices.
5. Tap on Frequency band and select the
frequency on which the hotspot is to
transmit data. Note that selection of frequency band is not available in all markets.
6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking
the box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.
7. If Wi-Fi has been used as a connection
source, confirm the option to change connection.
> It is now possible for external devices
to connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi
hotspot).
}}
541
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
NOTE
Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in
further charges from your network operator.
Contact your network operator about the
cost for data traffic.
Connection status is indicated by the symbol
in the centre display's status bar.
Press Connected devices to see a list of the
currently connected devices.
Related information
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 122)
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 542)
No or poor Internet connection
Related information
Factors that affect the Internet connection.
The amount of data transferred is dependent
on the services or apps in use in the car. For
example, streaming audio can require large
amounts of data which requires a good connection and good signal strength.
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 543)
Phone to car
The speed of the Internet connection may vary
depending on the location of the phone in the
car. Move the phone closer to the centre display in order to increase the signal strength.
Ensure that there is no source of interference
in between.
Phone to network operator
The speed of the mobile network varies
depending on the coverage in the present
location. Poor network coverage may occur,
for example in tunnels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or indoors. The speed also
depends on the agreement you have with your
network.
NOTE
In the event of problems with data traffic,
contact your network operator.
Restarting the phone
If there are problems with the Internet connection then it may help to restart the phone.
542
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Remove Wi-Fi network
Wi-Fi technologies and security
Removing a network that is not to be used.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
Possible network types to connect to.
It is only possible to connect to the following
types of network:
2. Continue to Communication
Saved networks.
Wi-Fi
3. Tap on Forget alongside the network to
be removed.
4. Confirm the selection.
> The car will no longer connect to the
network in future.
Remove all networks
All networks can be removed simultaneously
by restoring factory settings. Please note that
all user data and system settings are reset to
original factory settings.
Related information
•
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 542)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 539)
15
16
Selection of frequency is not available on all markets.
Does not apply to Volvo On Call*.
•
•
•
Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz15.
Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n.
Security type — WPA2-AES-CCMP.
The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle
Wi-Fi devices inside the car.
If several devices operate on the frequency at
the same time then it may result in reduced
performance.
Related information
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
User terms and conditions and
data sharing
The first time certain services and apps are
started, a pop-up window with the headings
Terms and conditions and Data sharing
may be shown.
The purpose is to inform about Volvo's user
terms and conditions and policy for data sharing. By accepting data sharing, the user
accepts that certain information is sent from
the car. This is required so that certain services and apps can have full functionality.
The data sharing function for online services
and apps is deactivated as default16. Data
sharing needs to be activated so that certain
online services and apps in the car can be
used. Data sharing can be set from the centre
display's settings menu or in connection with
the services or apps being started in the centre display.
Privacy and data sharing
With the software update made available
November 2017, privacy and data sharing settings were introduced for online services and
downloaded apps. The settings can be found
under Privacy and data in the settings menu
in the car's centre display.
}}
* Option/accessory. 543
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
There you can select the online services which
are allowed to share data. Data sharing for
downloaded apps can also be deactivated
there. Note that services and apps cannot be
used as intended if data sharing is deactivated.
After a factory reset or e.g. a workshop visit or
software update, the data sharing settings
may have been reset to their default settings.
In which case, reactivate data sharing for
online services and for downloaded apps.
NOTE
Privacy and data sharing settings are
unique for every driver profile.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating data sharing
(p. 544)
Activating and deactivating data
sharing
Data sharing for services and apps required
can be set in the centre display's settings
menu.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press System
Privacy and data.
3. Select activation or deactivation of data
sharing for individual services and all apps.
If data sharing has not been activated for an
online service or downloaded apps, this can be
done when they are started in the centre display. If this is the first time a service is started,
or e.g. after a factory reset or certain software
updates, Volvo's terms and conditions for
online services need to be approved. Note that
data sharing will then also be activated for
other services or apps for which sharing has
already been approved.
NOTE
After a visit to a Volvo workshop, you may
need to reactivate data sharing so that the
online services and apps shall work again.
Related information
•
544
User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 543)
Data sharing for services
If you have not activated data sharing for an
online service or for downloaded apps, you
can do this in connection with starting them
in your centre display. If this is the first time
you are starting a service, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain software updates, you
also need to approve Volvo's terms and conditions for online services.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Activate data sharing when you start a
service
2. Select to approve data sharing for the
service or to cancel.
1.
If you select to approve, data sharing is activated and you can start to use the service.
Select the function or service to be activated.
> If this is the first time you are using the
service, or e.g. after a factory reset or
certain software updates, you first need
to approve Volvo's terms and conditions for online services in order to continue.
Activate data sharing when you start
an app
To approve data sharing for an app that needs
the function, start the app and tap on Allow in
the pop-up window.
You can deactivate data sharing for services
and apps in the settings menu under System
Privacy and data Data Sharing.
Storage space on hard disk
It is possible to view how much free space
there is on the car's hard disk.
Storage information for the car's hard disk,
including total capacity, available capacity and
how much space is used for installed apps can
be shown. The information is available under
Settings System System Information
Storage.
Related information
•
Apps (p. 504)
545
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
License agreement for audio and
media
Dirac Unison®
A license is an agreement for the right to
operate a certain activity or the right to use
someone else's entitlement according to the
terms and conditions in the agreement. The
following texts are Volvo's agreements with
manufacturers/developers.
This DivX Certified® device can play back
DivX® Home Theater video files up to 576p
(including .avi, .divx). Download free software
on www.divx.com to create, play back and
stream digital video.
Bowers & Wilkins
Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks
of the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered
trademark of DuPont.
546
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logotypes are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC
and are used under licence.
Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in
frequency, time and space for the best possible bass integration and clarity. It enables a
faithful reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of specific performance venues. Using
advanced algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all
loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic highprecision measurements. Like a conductor of
an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in perfect unison.
DivX®
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order
to play back purchased DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) films. Get the registration
code by locating the DivX VOD section in the
device's settings menu. Go to vod.divx.com
for more information on how to complete the
registration.
Patent numbers
Protected by one or more of the following US
patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
Gracenote®
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Parts of the content are copyright © of
Gracenote or its suppliers.
Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote
MusicID are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the USA
and/or other countries.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
This program or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA
("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote
("Gracenote software") activates this program
to perform disc and/or file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track and title ("Gracenote data")
from online servers or embedded databases
(together called "Gracenote servers") and in
order to perform other actions. You may only
use Gracenote data in accordance with the
intended end-user functions for this program
or this device.
You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers for your
own personal non-commercial use. You agree
not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit this
Gracenote software or any Gracenote data to
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN
THIS AGREEMENT.
You agree that your non-exclusive right to use
Gracenote data, Gracenote software and
Gracenote servers will be terminated if you
violate these restrictions. If your license is terminated you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote
servers. Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all
Gracenote data, all Gracenote software and all
Gracenote servers, including all ownership
rights. Gracenote will under no circumstances
have any obligation to pay you for any information you provide. You agree that Gracenote,
Inc. may enforce the company's rights under
this agreement against you directly in its own
name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier
to track enquiries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to enable the Gracenote service to
count enquiries without knowing anything
about who you are. Additional information is
available on the web page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote software and everything
included in Gracenote data are licensed to you
"as is". Gracenote provides no undertakings or
warranties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the Gracenote data contained in the
Gracenote servers. Gracenote reserves the
right to delete data from the Gracenote servers or to change data categories for any reason that Gracenote deems sufficient. No war-
ranty is provided that the Gracenote software
or Gracenote servers are fault-free or that the
Gracenote software or Gracenote servers will
operate without interruption. Gracenote has
no obligation to provide you with new,
improved or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future,
and the company reserves the right to discontinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE
RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR A
GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE WILL
IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR REVENUES.
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2
and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
(Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
1993), The Regents of the University of
California. All or some portions are derived
}}
547
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
548
from material licensed to the University of
California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories,
Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met: Redistributions of source
code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution. Neither the
name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL
Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1,
released January 26, 2000, developed by
Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is
Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics,
Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third
parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All
Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to the following conditions: The
above copyright notice including the dates of
first publication and either this permission
notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/
projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software. THE
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall
not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale, use or other dealings in this
Software without prior written authorization
from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of
the FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Linux software
This product contains software licensed under
GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
You have the right of acquisition, modification,
and distribution of the source code of the
GPL/LGPL software.
You may download Source Code from the
following website at no charge: http://
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/TVM_8351_013
The website provides the Source Code "As Is"
and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code.
Please note that we cannot respond to any
inquiries regarding the source code.
camellia:1.2.0
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone
Corporation). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer as
the first lines of this file unmodified.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Unicode: 5.1.0
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use
in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode
data files and any associated documentation
(the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without
restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files
or Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Data Files or Software are furnished to do
so, provided that (a) the above copyright
notice(s) and this permission notice appear
with all copies of the Data Files or Software,
(b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this
permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
each modified Data File or in the Software as
well as in the documentation associated with
the Data File(s) or Software that the data or
software has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
}}
549
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
a copyright holder shall not be used in
550
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale,
use or other dealings in these Data Files or
Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
Declaration of Conformity
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Country/
Area
Brazil:
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não
pode causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
EU:
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive
2014/53/EU.
For more information, search support information at www.volvocars.com.
The United Arab
Emirates:
}}
551
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Country/
Area
Kazakhstan:
Model name: NR 0V
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Exporting country: Japan
552
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Country/
Area
China:
1.
■ 使用频率
2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射
■ 最大
率(EIRP)
率谱密度
天线增益
天线增益
10dBi 时
10dBi 时
≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限
20 ppm
■ 帯外发射
率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
■ 杂散发射(辐射)
•
•
•
•
•
率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2.不得擅自更改发射频率
大发射
率(包括额外
3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业
使用
4.使用微
率无线电设备,必须忍
装射频
产生有害干扰
各种无线电业
率放大器),不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
一旦发现有干扰现象时,应立即停止使用,并采
的干扰或工业
措施消除干扰后方可继续
科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用
}}
553
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Country/
Area
Korea:
B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)
이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로
가정에서 사용하는 것을
적으로 하며,
든
지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다.
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수
습니다.
Malaysia
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical
Standards) Regulations 2000. To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM
Label Verification”.
Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)
Model: NR-0V
Type Approval No.:
RBAY/18A/1015S(15-4067)
554
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Country/
Area
Mexico:
Taiwan:
低
率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司
變更頻率
商號或使用者均不得擅自
加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低
率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應
立停用,改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用
電通信
低
前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線
率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業
科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備
之干擾
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Sound, media and Internet (p. 502)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Media player (p. 513)
Gracenote® (p. 517)
Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 34)
* Option/accessory. 555
VOLVO ON CALL
VOLVO ON CALL
Plan and schedule the charging of
your car using the Volvo On Call*
app
You can use the Volvo On Call app to plan
and schedule the charging of your car.
You can schedule charging for the charging
stations you have saved in your app, which
may be practical if, for example, you need to
plan charging points along a travel itinerary or
when you are planning charging intervals for
your car at home or in your neighbourhood.
1.
5. Go back to the view for fuel.
> A charging icon appears by the saved
location for which you have scheduled
the charging. When the icon disappears
again the scheduling has been saved
and programmed.
Via the Home tab, select Fuel range or
Battery charging.
> In the view that appears you can see
saved charging stations under Saved
locations. If you have not saved a
charging station yet or want to add
new locations, e.g. charging stations
along a travel itinerary or in your neighbourhood, you can select the option for
Add location (you can save up to eight
charging stations).
2. Select the location for which you want to
schedule charging.
> A view opens for the saved location.
3. Select a start time for the charging.
4. Select an end time for the charging.
558
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres
New tyres
The function of the tyres is to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear.
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
pressure and speed rating are important for
how the car performs.
Tyre economy
•
•
The car is fitted with tyres according to the
tyre information sticker found on the driver's
side door pillar (between the front door and
the rear door).
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
Recommended tyres
On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo
original tyres that have the VOL1 marking on
the side of the tyres. These tyres are carefully
adapted to the car. In the event of changing
tyres, it is therefore important that the new
tyres also have this marking in order for the
car's driving characteristics, comfort and fuel
consumption to be maintained.
1
560
There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.
tion can therefore be affected. This applies to
all tyres that are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the
tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discolouration.
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres
as possible when you replace them. This is
especially important with regard to winter
tyres. The last four digits in the sequence
mean the week and year of manufacture. This
is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of
Transportation), and this is stated with four
digits, for example 0717. The tyre is then manufactured in week 07, year 2017.
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
if they are hardly ever or never used. The func-
Maintain the correct tyre pressure.
Avoid fast starts, heavy braking and
squealing tyres.
•
•
•
Tyre wear increases with speed.
•
The tyres must have the same direction of
rotation during their entire service life.
•
When you change tyres, the tyres with the
best tread must be fitted on the rear
wheels to reduce the risk of oversteer during heavy braking.
•
If you drive over kerbstones or deep holes
you can damage the tyres and/or wheel
rims permanently.
Correct wheel alignment is very important.
Unbalanced wheels worsen tyre economy
and travelling comfort.
Tyre rotation
The car has no mandatory tyre rotation. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how quickly the tyres age and
WHEELS AND TYRES
wear. Correct tyre pressure results in more
even wear.
IMPORTANT
Storing wheels and tyres
When you store complete wheels (tyres fitted
on wheel rims) they should be hung up or
positioned lying on their sides on the floor.
Tyres not fitted on rims must be stored lying
on their sides or standing upright, but not
hung up.
Recommendations for loading (p. 595)
Tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and
dark place, and should never be stored
close to solvents, petrol, oils, etc.
To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the
front and rear wheels should be switched with
each other. A suitable distance for the first
change is approx. 5000 km (approx.
3100 miles) and then at 10000 km (approx.
6200 miles) intervals.
Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted for checking if you are
uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread
depth) between tyres have already occurred,
then the least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Understeer is normally easier
to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car
continuing forwards in a straight line rather
than having the rear end skidding to one side,
resulting in possible complete loss of control
over the car. This is why it is important for the
rear wheels never to lose grip before the front
wheels.
•
WARNING
•
Wheel rim size and tyre size for your
Volvo are specified to meet stringent
requirements for stability and driving
characteristics. Unapproved combinations of wheel rim size and tyre size
may have a negative effect on the car's
stability and driving characteristics.
•
Any damage caused by the fitting of
unapproved combinations of wheel rim
size and tyre size is not covered by the
new car warranty. Volvo accepts no liability for death, personal injury or any
costs caused by such installations.
Related information
•
•
•
Checking tyre pressure (p. 564)
Tyres' rotation direction (p. 563)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
(p. 564)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
(p. 566)
•
•
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 580)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 562)
* Option/accessory. 561
WHEELS AND TYRES
Dimension designation for tyre
Speed rating
Designations for tyre dimension, load index
and speed rating.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims
and tyres.
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol),
must at least correspond with the car's top
speed. The table below shows the maximum
permitted speed for each speed rating (SS).
The only exception to these regulations is winter tyres2, where a lower speed rating may be
used. If such a tyre is selected, the car must
not be driven more quickly than the tyre is
rated for. For example, cars with Q rating tyres
must be driven at speeds not exceeding
160 km/h (100 mph). The road conditions and
applicable road traffic rules determine how
quickly the car can be driven, not the speed
rating of the tyres.
Designation of dimensions
All tyres have a dimension designation, such
as: 245/45 R18 100 W.
245
45
Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
R
Radial ply
18
Rim diameter in inches
100
NOTE
Codes for the maximum permitted
tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
The maximum permitted speed is specified
in the table.
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this
case 270 km/h (168 mph).)
Q
160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on
winter tyres)
Load index
T
190 km/h (118 mph)
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a
load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres.
H
210 km/h (130 mph)
V
240 km/h (149 mph)
W
2 Both
562
Tyre width (mm)
those with metal studs and those without.
W
270 km/h (168 mph)
Y
300 km/h (186 mph)
WARNING
The lowest permitted load index (LI) and
speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each
respective engine variant are shown in the
car's registration document. If a tyre with
too low a load index or speed rating is
used, it may overheat and be damaged.
Related information
•
•
Tyres (p. 560)
Dimension designation for wheel rim
(p. 563)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Dimension designation for wheel
rim
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims
and tyres.
Tyres' rotation direction
NOTE
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow.
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have
the same type and dimension, and also the
same make.
Related information
•
Tyres (p. 560)
All wheel rims have a dimension designation,
for example: 8Jx18x42.
8
Rim width in inches
J
Rim flange profile
18
Rim diameter in inches
42
Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface
against the hub)
Related information
•
•
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
•
The tyre must always rotate in the same
direction throughout its lifespan.
•
Tyres should only be switched between
front and rear positions, never between
left and right-hand sides, or vice versa.
•
If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to
force rain and slush out of the way are
adversely affected.
•
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
Tyres (p. 560)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 562)
563
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
Checking tyre pressure
Cold tyres
Tread wear indicators show the status of the
tyre's tread depth.
Correct tyre pressure helps to improve driving stability, save fuel and extend the service
life of the tyres.
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies
depending on ambient temperature. Driving
on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low
could result in the tyres overheating and being
damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling
comfort, road noise and driving characteristics.
The tyre pressure must be checked when the
tyres are cold. Tyres are considered cold when
they have the same temperature as the surrounding air. This temperature is normally
reached when the car has been parked for at
least three hours.
A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's
tread pattern. On the side of the tyre are the
letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the
tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16
inch), the tread will be level in height with the
tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as
soon as possible. Remember that tyres with
little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain
and snow.
Related information
•
564
Tyres (p. 560)
Check the tyre pressures monthly. Use the
recommended tyre pressure for cold tyres in
order to maintain good tyre performance. Tyre
pressure that is too low or too high may cause
uneven wear on the tyres.
WARNING
•
•
Tyre pressure that is too low is the
most common cause of tyre failure and
may result in serious cracks in the tyre,
the tread loosening or the tyre exploding, with unexpected loss of control of
the car and increased risk of personal
injury.
Tyres with pressure that is too low
reduce the load capacity of the car.
After having driven approximately 1.6 km
(1 mile) these tyres are considered as warm. If
you have to drive further than this to inflate the
tyres, first check and record the tyre pressure
and inflate to a suitable tyre pressure when
you arrive at the pump.
When the outside temperature changes, the
tyre pressure also changes. A decrease in temperature of 10 degrees causes the tyre pressure to decrease 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the tyre
pressure regularly and adjust to the correct
pressure, which is specified on the car's tyre
information decal or certification label.
If you check the tyre pressure when the tyres
are warm then you must never release any air.
The tyres are warm due to driving and it is normal for the pressure to increase above the recommended pressure for cold tyres. A warm
tyre with tyre pressure equal to or below the
recommendation for cold tyres may have a
pressure that is far too low.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Related information
•
•
•
•
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 565)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
(p. 566)
Tyres (p. 560)
Adjusting tyre pressure
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. The tyre pressure must
therefore sometimes be adjusted in order to
maintain the recommended tyre pressure.
Use the recommended tyre pressure for cold
tyres in order to maintain good tyre performance and even tread wear.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres.
"Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same
temperature as the ambient temperature
(approx. 3 hours after the car has been
driven). After a few kilometres of driving,
the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.
1.
Remove the cap from the valve on one
tyre and then press the tyre pressure
gauge firmly down onto the valve.
2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure,
see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres.
3. Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
4. Check the tyres visually for any implanted
nails or other objects that could puncture
the tyre and cause leakage.
5. Check the sidewalls for any cavities, cuts,
bumps or other irregularities.
6. Repeat this for all tyres, including the
spare tyre*.
NOTE
If you have over-inflated, release air by
pressing in the metal pin in the centre of
the valve. Then check the pressure again
using the tyre pressure gauge.
Some spare tyres require a higher tyre
pressure than other tyres. Check in the tyre
pressure table or on the tyre pressure label.
}}
* Option/accessory. 565
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Related information
•
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 564)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 584)
Recommended tyre pressure
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side
door pillar (between frame and rear door)
shows which pressures the tyres should have
at different loads and speed conditions.
The tyre pressure monitoring system3, gives a
warning with an indicator symbol in the driver
display when the pressure in one or more of
the car's tyres is too low.
The symbol illuminates to indicate
low tyre pressure.
Approved tyre pressures (p. 683)
If there is a fault in the system the
tyre pressure warning symbol
flashes for approximately one minute and then
remains illuminated.
System description
The decal displays the designation for the factory-fitted tyres on the car, as well as load limits and tyre pressure.
Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure
For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of
up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures can be chosen for good fuel economy.
However, the lower comfort pressures are recommended instead if improved noise and travelling comfort are desired.
The tyre pressure monitoring system measures differences in rotation speed between the
different wheels via the ABS system in order
to be able to determine whether they have the
correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pressure is too
low, the tyre's diameter is changed and, as a
result, so is its rotation speed. By comparing
the tyres with each other the system can
determine whether one or more tyres have
pressure that is too low.
Related information
•
•
566
Checking tyre pressure (p. 564)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 683)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
General information on the tyre monitoring
system
In the information below, the tyre monitoring
system is referred to generically as TPMS.
Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be
checked once a month. When checking, the
tyre should be cold and have the air pressure
recommended by the car manufacturer specified on the tyre pressure label or in the tyre
pressure table. If the car has tyres of a different size than that recommended by the manufacturer, find out what the correct air pressure
level is for these.
As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped
with a tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS), which shows when the air pressure in
one or more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol for low air pressure is lit, stop and
check the tyres as soon as possible and inflate
to the correct air pressure.
Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that
is too low may cause the tyre to overheat,
which can cause a tyre failure. Low tyre pressure also reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre
service life, and can affect car handling and
stopping ability. Note that TPMS does not
replace regular tyre maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre
pressure, even if the limit for low tyre pressure
3 Indirect
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
has not been reached so that the indicator
symbol illuminates.
• Tyre pressure low Check Car Status
The car is also equipped with a TPMS system
fault indicator, which indicates when the system is not functioning correctly. The TPMS
system fault indicator is combined with the
indicator symbol for low tyre pressure. When
the system detects a fault, the symbol in the
driver display will flash for about one minute
and then remain illuminated. This procedure
will be repeated when the car is started until
the fault has been rectified. When the symbol
is illuminated, the system's ability to detect or
warn of low tyre pressure may be affected.
• Tyre pressure system Temporarily
app in center display
unavailable
• Tyre pressure system Service required
To bear in mind
•
Always save a new tyre pressure in the
system after changing a wheel or adjusting tyre pressure.
•
A TPMS system fault can occur for several
reasons, such as after changing to a spare
tyre, or changing tyres or wheels that prevent
TPMS from functioning correctly.
If you change to tyres of a different size to
the ones fitted at the factory, the system
must be reset by storing a new tyre pressure for these tyres to avoid false warnings.
•
Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS
after changing one or more tyres in order to
ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly with TPMS.
If a spare wheel* is used, it is possible that
the tyre pressure monitoring system does
not work correctly due to the differences
between the wheels.
•
The system does not replace the need for
regular tyre inspection and maintenance.
•
It is not possible to switch off the tyre
pressure monitoring system.
Messages on the instrument panel
When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated
in the driver display and a message is shown.
Check the tyre pressure in the Car Status app
in the centre display.
}}
* Option/accessory. 567
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
WARNING
•
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
•
The system cannot indicate sudden
tyre damage in advance.
Related information
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
•
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 570)
•
Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 568)
See tyre pressure status in the centre display* (p. 569)
Saving a new tyre pressure in the
monitoring system*
In order for the system for tyre pressure
monitoring4 to work correctly, a reference
value for the tyre pressure must be saved.
This must take place every time the tyres are
changed or the tyre pressure is changed so
that the system can warn about low pressure
correctly.
For example, when driving with a heavy load
or at high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph),
the tyre pressure should be adjusted in
accordance with Volvo's recommended tyre
pressure values. The system is then reset by
saving a new tyre pressure.
Perform the following procedure to store a
new tyre pressure as a reference value in the
system:
1.
Switch off the car.
2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure,
see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres.
3. Start the car.
4. Open the Car Status app in the app view.
5. Press TPMS.
4 Indirect
568
NOTE
The car must be stationary for the Store
Pressure button to be selectable.
6. Press Store Pressure.
7. Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure in all four tyres has been checked and
adjusted.
8. Drive the car until the new tyre pressure
has been saved. The new tyre pressure is
stored when the car is driven at a speed
above 35 km/h (22 mph).
> When sufficient data has been collected for the system to be able to detect
low tyre pressure, the animation showing storage progress disappears from
the centre display. The system does not
provide additional confirmation that a
new tyre pressure has been saved.
If storing fails, a message is shown: Storing
pressure unsuccessful. Try again.
If the car's ignition is switched off before the
new tyre pressure has been saved then the
procedure needs to be performed again. Allow
the storing to finish within the same driving
cycle to ensure that the new tyre pressure has
been saved correctly.
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
WARNING
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odourless, but
highly toxic. The procedure to save a new
tyre pressure must therefore always be
performed outdoors or in a workshop with
exhaust extraction.
Related information
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
See tyre pressure status in the
centre display*
With the system for tyre pressure monitoring5, tyre pressure status can be viewed in
the centre display.
Checking status
Several minutes driving above 35 km/h
(22 mph) are required for the system to
become active.
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 565)
1.
See tyre pressure status in the centre display* (p. 569)
2. Tap on TPMS to show the status of the
tyres.
•
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 570)
Status indication
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 566)
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
Driver display:
Tyre pressure
low Check Car
Status app in
center display
The indicator symbol
switches on to indicate
that there is low tyre
pressure in one or more
tyres. See the Car Status app in the centre display for more information.
Driver display:
Tyre pressure
system Temporarily
unavailable
The indicator symbol
flashes and changes to
constant glow after
approx. 1 minute. The
system is currently
unavailable, activated
shortly.
Driver display:
Tyre pressure
system Service required
The indicator symbol
flashes and changes to
constant glow after
approx. 1 minute. The
system is not working
correctly, contact a
workshopA.
Open the Car Status app in the app view.
The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending
on car model or updated software.
5 Indirect
Below are some examples of the messages
that can be shown for tyre pressure status and
what they mean.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
}}
* Option/accessory. 569
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Related information
•
Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 568)
•
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 570)
•
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 566)
Car status (p. 610)
Action in the event of warning for
low tyre pressure
When the system for tyre pressure6 warns
that tyre pressure is too low, action is
required.
Check and rectify the tyre pressure
when the indicator symbol for the
system is illuminated and the Tyre
pressure low message is shown.
1.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres.
"Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same
temperature as the ambient temperature
(approx. 3 hours after the car has been
driven). After a few kilometres of driving,
the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.
Switch off the car.
2. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres
with a tyre pressure gauge.
3. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure,
see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
4. Always save a new tyre pressure in the
system via the centre display after the tyre
pressure has been adjusted.
Note that the indicator symbol does not
extinguish until the low tyre pressure has
been rectified and storing a new tyre pressure has been started.
6 Indirect
570
WARNING
•
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
•
The system cannot indicate sudden
tyre damage in advance.
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Related information
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 565)
Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 568)
When changing wheels
Tool kit
The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter wheels or a spare wheel. Follow the relevant instructions for removing and fitting
wheels.
Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel
changes or similar are found in the car's
cargo area.
•
See tyre pressure status in the centre display* (p. 569)
When changing to another tyre
dimension
•
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 566)
Check that the tyre dimension is approved for
use on the car.
Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 584)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Removing a wheel (p. 573)
Fitting the wheels (p. 575)
Tool kit (p. 571)
Winter tyres (p. 578)
Spare wheel* (p. 577)
Jack*
Wheel bolts (p. 573)
Tool for removing the plastic caps from
the wheel bolts
Funnel for filling fluids
Wheel wrench* and towing eye
The foam block under the cargo area floor
contains the car's towing eye, puncture repair
kit, tool for removing the plastic caps from the
wheel bolts and a socket for the lockable
wheel bolts.
If the car is fitted with a spare wheel*, there is
a jack and a wheel bolt wrench.
}}
* Option/accessory. 571
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Related information
•
•
•
•
When changing wheels (p. 571)
Jack* (p. 572)
Jack*
IMPORTANT
The jack can be used to raise the car, for
example, to change to the spare wheel.
•
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
•
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term
use, such as when changing a wheel
after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used
to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer
time than is required just to change a
wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 580)
Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 492)
The jack needs to be cranked together to the
correct position in order to have space.
Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If the
car is equipped with the air suspension option
then this function must be deactivated before
the car is raised with the jack.
Related information
•
•
572
Tool kit (p. 571)
Raise the car (p. 613)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Wheel bolts
Related information
Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to
the hubs.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.
•
•
Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
with a torque wrench.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
wheel bolts.
WARNING
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the change. Temperature differences and vibration may
mean that they are not attached equally as
tightly.
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm. (103 foot-pound). Overtightening
or loose tightening may damage the nuts
and the bolts.
Removing a wheel (p. 573)
Fitting the wheels (p. 575)
Removing a wheel
Wheel changes must always be performed
correctly. Instructions on how a wheel is
undone and what is important to remember
are provided below.
IMPORTANT
•
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
•
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term
use, such as when changing a wheel
after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used
to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer
time than is required just to change a
wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
Locking wheel bolts*
In the foam block under the cargo area floor
there is space for the sleeve for the lockable
wheel bolts.
}}
* Option/accessory. 573
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
WARNING
•
Apply the parking brake and set the
gear selector in Park position (P).
•
Chock the wheels standing on the
ground using solid wood blocks or
large stones.
•
Check that the jack is not damaged,
that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.
•
Check that the jack is resting on a firm,
level surface that is not slippery and is
not slanted.
•
The jack must be correctly attached in
the jack's bracket.
Set up the warning triangle and activate
the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being
changed in a trafficked location.
5. Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench until the stop position as
per the instructions.
2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear
position P, or engage first gear if the car
has a manual gearbox.
Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If
the car is equipped with air suspension,
this must be disabled before the car is
raised with a jack*.
3. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and
tools for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that
are fitted in the foam block.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into the
wheel bolt wrench* as far as possible.
•
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the
jack and the car's jacking point.
•
Passengers must leave the car when it
is raised on the jack.
•
If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
•
Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
Never crawl under the car or reach
under with a part of your body when it
is raised on a jack.
4. Chock in front of and behind the wheels
that remain on the ground. Use, for example, heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
•
574
1.
6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts with the intended tool.
7. With the car still on the ground, use the
wheel bolt wrench/towing eye to undo the
wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing downwards (anticlockwise).
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
8. When raising the car, it is important that
the jack or lifting arms are fitted in the
intended points on the car's underbody.
The triangle markings in the plastic cover
indicate the locations of the jacking/lifting
points. There are two jacking points on
each side of the car. There is a recess for
the jack at each point.
11. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far
away from the side of the car as possible,
at which point the jack's arms are perpendicular to the direction of the car.
12. Raise the car high enough to allow the
wheel to be removed to move freely.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
Fitting the wheels
Wheel changes must always be performed
correctly. Instructions on how a wheel is
attached and what is important to remember
are provided below.
IMPORTANT
•
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
•
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term
use, such as when changing a wheel
after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used
to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer
time than is required just to change a
wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
9. Position the jack on level, firm and nonslippery ground under the jacking point
that will be used.
10. Crank up until it is correctly aligned and so
that it makes contact with the car's jacking point. Check that the head of the jack
(or the lift arms at a workshop) is correctly
positioned in the jacking point so that the
bump in the centre of the head fits into the
jacking point hole and the base is positioned vertically below the jacking point.
Settings for level control* (p. 470)
When changing wheels (p. 571)
Raise the car (p. 613)
Jack* (p. 572)
Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 492)
Fitting the wheels (p. 575)
}}
* Option/accessory. 575
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
WARNING
•
Apply the parking brake and set the
gear selector in Park position (P).
•
Chock the wheels standing on the
ground using solid wood blocks or
large stones.
•
Check that the jack is not damaged,
that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.
•
Check that the jack is resting on a firm,
level surface that is not slippery and is
not slanted.
•
The jack must be correctly attached in
the jack's bracket.
•
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the
jack and the car's jacking point.
•
Passengers must leave the car when it
is raised on the jack.
•
If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
•
•
The car needs to be raised high enough so
that the wheel to be loosened can roll freely.
1.
Clean the surfaces between wheel and
hub.
WARNING
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the change. Temperature differences and vibration may
mean that they are not attached equally as
tightly.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
wheel bolts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
NOTE
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm
(103 foot-pound). Check the tightening
torque with a torque wrench.
•
•
•
•
•
•
5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
•
576
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
Related information
Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
Never crawl under the car or reach
under with a part of your body when it
is raised on a jack.
6. Check the tyre pressure and save the new
tyre pressure in the system for tyre pressure monitoring*.
When changing wheels (p. 571)
Raise the car (p. 613)
Jack* (p. 572)
Tool kit (p. 571)
Removing a wheel (p. 573)
Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 568)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 564)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel, the Temporary Spare type,
can be used to temporarily replace a punctured normal wheel.
The spare tyre is only designed for temporary
use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as
possible.
The car's driving characteristics can be
changed when the spare wheel is used and
the ground clearance is reduced. Do not wash
the car in an automatic car wash if the
Temporary Spare is being used.
Recommended tyre pressure must be maintained regardless of the position of the temporary spare wheel on the car.
WARNING
•
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) with a spare wheel fitted on
the car.
•
The car must never be driven fitted
with more than one "Temporary Spare"
wheel.
•
The car may have different driving characteristics while driving with the spare
wheel. The spare wheel must be
replaced with a normal wheel as soon
as possible.
•
The spare wheel is smaller than the
normal wheel, which affects the car's
ground clearance. Look out for high
kerbs and do not machine-wash the
car.
•
Follow the manufacturer's recommended tyre pressure for the spare
wheel.
•
On all-wheel drive cars, the drive on
the rear axle can be disengaged.
•
If the spare wheel is fitted to the front
axle then it is not possible to use snow
chains at the same time.
•
The spare wheel must not be repaired.
If the spare tyre is damaged then a new one
can be purchased from a Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
The car must not be driven with tyres of
different sizes or with a spare tyre other
than the one supplied with the car. Using
different-sized wheels can cause serious
damage to the car's transmission.
Related information
•
•
When changing wheels (p. 571)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
* Option/accessory. 577
WHEELS AND TYRES
Handling the spare wheel
Winter tyres
Tread depth
Follow these instructions for handling the
spare wheel.
Winter tyres are adapted for winter road conditions.
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter
tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted
to all four wheels.
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres
that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm
(0.15 inches).
NOTE
Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about
which wheel rim and type of tyre are most
suitable.
The illustration is generic and appearance may differ.
The spare wheel is stored in a bag and must
be secured with two straps on the floor of the
cargo area while driving. The straps must be
tensioned crosswise over the wheel and
attached in the car's four load retaining eyelets.
Tools for changing wheels are located under
the cargo area floor.
Related information
•
•
•
578
Spare wheel* (p. 577)
Tool kit (p. 571)
Removing a wheel (p. 573)
Related information
•
•
•
When changing wheels (p. 571)
Winter driving (p. 474)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 564)
Tips for changing to winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are
changed, mark which side of the car they were
mounted on, for example L for left and R for
right.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently
for 500-1000 km (300-600 miles), so the
studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives
the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer
service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Snow chains
Use of snow chains and/or winter tyres can
help to improve the traction in winter conditions.
Volvo recommends that snow chains are not
used on wheel dimensions greater than
18 inches
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and
tyre and rim dimensions. Only single-sided
snow chains are permitted.
IMPORTANT
•
Driving with snow chains may have a
negative effect on the car's driving
characteristics. Avoid fast or sharp
turns, as well as braking with locked
wheels.
•
Some types of chain that are firmly
tensioned affect brake components
and must therefore NOT be used.
Snow chains can be used on the car with
the following restrictions:
•
•
•
In the event of uncertainty about the show
chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
The wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to the car and lead to an accident.
Always follow the mounting instructions from the manufacturer carefully.
Fit the chains as tensioned as possible
and tension them at regular intervals.
Snow chains must only be used on the
front wheels (also applies to all-wheel
drive cars).
In some cases, snow chains must NOT
be used, such as if accessory, aftermarket or "special" tyres and wheels
are fitted that have a different size to
the original tyres and wheels. Sufficient distance must be maintained
between the chains and brakes, suspension and body components.
•
Check local regulations with regard to
using snow chains before fitting them.
•
Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed. You must
never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) under
any circumstances.
•
Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
when driving with snow chains.
•
Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and
tyres.
You can obtain more information on snow
chains from a Volvo dealer.
Related information
•
Winter driving (p. 474)
579
WHEELS AND TYRES
Emergency puncture repair kit
Using a puncture repair kit
kit7,
The emergency puncture repair kit (TMK8)
can be used to seal a puncture.
The emergency puncture repair
is used
to seal a puncture as well as to check and
adjust the air pressure in the tyre.
Overview
Cars equipped with spare tyre* do not have
the puncture repair kit.
The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing
works as a temporary repair.
NOTE
The sealing fluid is effective at sealing tyres
with tread punctures but has limited ability
to seal tyres with sidewall punctures. Do
not use the emergency puncture repair kit
on tyres displaying larger slits, cracks or
similar damage.
Sealing fluid expiry date
The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if
the bottle's expiry date has passed (see the
decal on the bottle). Treat the old bottle as
environmentally hazardous waste.
Related information
NOTE
The compressor is intended for temporary
emergency puncture repair and is
approved by Volvo.
•
Using a puncture repair kit (p. 580)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 584)
Tyres (p. 560)
Air hose
Pressure reducing valve
Protective cap
Label, maximum permitted speed
Location
Bottle holder (orange cap)
The puncture repair kit is located in the foam
block under the floor in the cargo area.
Pressure gauge
7 Temporary
8 Temporary
580
•
•
Electrical cable
Mobility Kit (TMK)
Mobility Kit
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Sealing fluid bottle
Switch
Connecting
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tyre sealing system:
•
•
The sealing fluid bottle contains 1) rubber latex, natural and 2) ethanediol.
These substances are harmful if swallowed.
The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory
tract, the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
Store out of the reach of children.
•
Wash thoroughly after handling.
Harmful if ingested.
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin. If sealing fluid has come
into contact with your clothes, remove
them.
First aid:
•
Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention
if symptoms occur.
•
Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for
least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting
the upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.
Inhalation: Move the exposed person
to fresh air. If irritation persists, get
medical attention.
•
Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical
personnel. Get medical attention.
•
Disposal: Dispose of this material and
its container at a hazardous or special
waste collection point.
WARNING
Precautions:
•
•
•
•
1.
•
Do not remove the bottle when the
puncture repair kit is being used.
•
Do not remove the air hose when the
puncture repair kit is being used.
Set up the warning triangle and activate
the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being
sealed in a trafficked location.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or
similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It
helps to seal the hole.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed that is affixed on one side of the
compressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a reminder to observe the speed
limit. You should not drive faster than
80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency
tyre repair kit has been used.
}}
581
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
3. Check that the switch is in position 0
(Off), and locate the electrical cable and
the air hose.
4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from
the compressor, and unscrew the cork
from the sealing fluid bottle.
5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the
bottle holder.
The bottle and the bottle holder are equipped with a reverse catch to prevent sealant leakage. When the bottle is screwed in
it cannot be unscrewed from the bottle
holder again. The bottle must be removed
at a workshop9.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
NOTE
Make sure that none of the other 12 V
sockets is in use when the compressor is
operating.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
8. Start the compressor by flicking the
switch to position I (On).
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the
compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be
switched off immediately. The journey
should not be continued. Call roadside
assistance for recovery to a tyre centre.
Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi) but the
pressure drops after approximately
30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in
the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed in.
9 An
582
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
IMPORTANT
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
WHEELS AND TYRES
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
pressure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum
is 3.5 bar (51 psi). Release air using the
pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi)
then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside
assistance for recovery to a tyre centre.
Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre.
11. Switch off the compressor and detach the
electrical cable.
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve
and refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in
order to avoid leakage of the remaining
sealing fluid. Place the equipment in the
cargo area.
14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km
(2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal
the tyre, and then perform a follow-up
check.
WARNING
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during the first few rotations of the tyre. Make
sure that nobody is standing near the car
and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto
them when the car is driven away. The distance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet).
15. Follow-up inspection
Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and
screw in the valve connection to the bottom of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor must be switched off.
16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
•
If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the
tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey
should not be continued. Call roadside
assistance for recovery.
•
If the tyre pressure is higher than
1.3 bar (19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the
driver's side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa
= 14.5 psi). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure
is too high.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
sealing fluid.
The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
these replacements be performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
}}
583
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
WARNING
Maximum mileage with tyres containing
sealing fluid is 200 km (120 miles).
NOTE
The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste management.
Related information
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 580)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 584)
Inflating tyres with the compressor
from the puncture repair kit
The car's original tyres can be inflated using
the compressor in the emergency puncture
repair kit.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
(Off), and take out the electrical cable and
the air hose.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the
switch to position I (On).
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in
the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified
on the tyre pressure label on the driver
side door pillar. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is
too high.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed in.
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and the electrical cable.
3. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste management.
584
WHEELS AND TYRES
Related information
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
Using a puncture repair kit (p. 580)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 580)
585
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Passenger compartment interior
Rear seat
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Overview of the passenger compartment's
interior and storage locations.
Front seat
Electrical sockets (p. 590)
Using the glovebox (p. 593)
Sun visors (p. 595)
Tunnel console (p. 589)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 520)
Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holder*
in the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the
front seat backrest and also electrical sockets in the
tunnel console.
Storage compartment in the door panel and by the
steering wheel, glovebox and sun visors.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories,
etc. in the glove compartment or other
compartments. Otherwise they may injure
people in the car in the event of sudden
braking or a collision.
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
example, are easily scratched by metal
objects. Do not place keys, phones and
other items on sensitive surfaces.
Storage spaces with cup holder, electrical socket,
mesh pocket* and USB port in the tunnel console.
588
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Tunnel console
IMPORTANT
The tunnel console is located between the
front seats.
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
example, are easily scratched by metal
objects. Do not place keys, phones and
other items on sensitive surfaces.
NOTE
One of the detectors for the alarm* is
located under the tunnel console's cup
holder. Avoid leaving coins, keys and other
metal objects in the cup holder, since this
may trigger the alarm.
Storage compartment with cup holder.
Storage compartment with 12 V socket
and USB port under the armrest.
Climate controls for the rear seat climate
functions* or storage compartment.
Related information
•
•
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 588)
Electrical sockets (p. 590)
Climate controls (p. 211)
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories,
etc. in the glove compartment or other
compartments. Otherwise they may injure
people in the car in the event of sudden
braking or a collision.
* Option/accessory. 589
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Electrical sockets
High voltage socket*
There are two 12 V electrical sockets and one
230 V electrical socket* in the tunnel console, and there is one 12 V electrical socket*
in the cargo area.
If a problem occurs with an electrical socket,
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
12 V electrical socket
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
Electrical socket in the tunnel console, rear seat.
The high-voltage socket* can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as
chargers or laptops.
Status indication, high-voltage socket
An LED1 lamp on the socket indicates the status of the socket:
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.
The 12 V sockets can be used for various
accessories designed for this, such as music
players, cooler boxes and mobile phones.
1
590
12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Status indication
Reason
Action
Steady green light
The socket is delivering current to a connected device.
None.
Blinking orange light
The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because
for example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger
compartment is too warm).
Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool
down before reinserting the plug.
The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or
continuously) or is defective.
None. The accessory cannot be connected to the
socket.
The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted.
Check that the plug is properly inserted into the
socket.
The socket is not active.
Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest
ignition position I.
The socket has been active but is now deactivated.
Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery.
Extinguished lamp
Related information
•
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 588)
Using electrical sockets (p. 592)
591
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Using electrical sockets
12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones.
High-voltage sockets* can be used for various
accessories designed for this, such as chargers and portable computers.
For the sockets to supply current, the car's
electrical system must be set in the lowest
ignition position I. The sockets are then active
as long as the starter battery level does not
become too low.
If the engine is switched off and the car is
locked, the sockets are deactivated. If the
engine is switched off and the car is not
locked, or is locked with double lock temporarily deactivated, then the sockets continue to
be active for a further seven minutes.
2 LED
592
NOTE
Remember that use of the electrical socket
with the engine switched off entails a risk
of discharging the starter battery, which
can limit functionality.
Accessories that are connected to the electrical sockets may be activated even when
the car's electrical system is disconnected
or if preconditioning is used. For this reason, disconnect the connectors when they
are not in use in order to avoid the starter
battery being discharged.
Using 12 V sockets
1.
2. Unplug the accessory's connector and
refit the blanking plug (tunnel console) or
fold up the cover (cargo area) when the
socket is not in use or if the socket is left
unattended.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A)
per socket.
WARNING
•
Do not use accessories with large or
heavy connectors - they can damage
the socket or come loose when driving.
•
Do not use accessories that can cause
interference to the car's radio receiver
or electrical system for example.
•
Position the accessory so that it is not
at risk of injuring the driver or passengers in the event of heavy braking or
collision.
•
Keep an eye on connected accessories
as they can generate heat that can
burn passengers or the interior.
Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold down the cover (cargo area)
in front of the socket and plug in the
accessory's connector.
Using high-voltage sockets
1.
Pull down the socket cover and insert the
accessory's plug.
> The LED2 lamp on the socket indicates
the status.
2. Check that the lamp is illuminated with a
steady green light - only then is current
available at the socket.
(Light Emitting Diode)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
3. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out
the plug - do not pull on the cable.
WARNING
Pull up the cover when the socket is not
being used or the socket is left unattended.
IMPORTANT
•
Only use accessories that are undamaged and fault-free. The accessories
must have a CE marking, UL marking
or an equivalent safety marking.
•
Accessories must be rated for 230 V
and 50 Hz with connectors designed
for the socket.
•
Never allow sockets, connectors or
accessories to come into contact with
water or other liquids. Do not touch or
use the socket if it appears to be damaged or has come into contact with
water or other liquid.
•
Do not connect junction sockets,
adapters or extension cables to the
socket as these can override the socket's safety features.
Maximum socket output is 150 W.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the high-voltage
socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
•
The socket is equipped with a protective cover, ensure that nothing protrudes in or damages the socket preventing the cover from doing its job.
Do not leave children in the car unsupervised when the socket is active.
Using the glovebox
The glovebox is located on the passenger
side. The printed owner's manual and maps
can be kept in the glovebox, for example.
There is also space for a pen and card holder.
Locking and unlocking the glovebox*
The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car
is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar.
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
with the accompanying key.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can lead to severe or fatal electric shocks.
Related information
•
•
Electrical sockets (p. 590)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 588)
}}
* Option/accessory. 593
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
The key's designated storage space. The figure is
schematic - the design may vary.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.
Activating cooling.
Deactivating cooling.
–
Pull out the key.
–
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.
Using the glovebox as a cooled area
The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g.
drinks or food. The cooling works when the
climate control system is active (i.e. when the
car is set in ignition position II or when the
engine is running).
594
Activate or deactivate the cooling by moving the control to the end position toward
the passenger compartment/glovebox.
Related information
•
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 588)
Private locking (p. 275)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Sun visors
Cargo area
Recommendations for loading
There are sun visors in the roof in front of the
driver seat and the front seat passenger seat
which can be folded down and angled out to
the side when necessary.
The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it
possible to transport and secure large
objects.
By folding down the backrests in the rear seat,
the cargo area can become quite spacious.
Use load retaining eyelets or bag holders to
secure the load, and the extendable cargo
cover* to conceal the load if desired.
There are a number of things that are important to bear in mind when loading the car.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a
corresponding weight.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a spare wheel then
this is attached on the cargo area floor. The
car's towing eye and puncture repair kit are
stored under the cargo area floor.
Related information
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
The mirror lighting* is switched on automatically when the guard is lifted up.
The mirror frame incorporates a holder for e.g.
cards or tickets.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 588)
•
•
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 595)
Bag hooks (p. 597)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 598)
Fitting and removing cargo cover*
(p. 599)
The car’s driving properties change
depending on the weight and positioning
of the load.
Loading in the cargo area
Good things to remember when loading:
•
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
•
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds)
can, in a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an
item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
}}
* Option/accessory. 595
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection
of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed
in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing
injury to the car's occupants.
Related information
Roof load and loading on load
carriers
•
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 598)
•
Through-load hatch in the rear seat
(p. 598)
•
Roof load and loading on load carriers
(p. 596)
For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers
that Volvo have developed are recommended.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and
in order to achieve the maximum possible
safety during a journey. Volvo's load carriers
are available for purchase at authorised Volvo
retailers.
•
Level control* and shock absorption
(p. 468)
•
Weights (p. 673)
Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 194)
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
•
If the load is longer than the car at the
front, e.g. a canoe or kayak, fit the towing
eye to its front socket and attach the bungee to this.
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long
items. Otherwise you may accidentally
knock the gear lever or gear selector with
the load into a drive position - and the car
could then move off.
Increasing the space in the cargo area
To expand the cargo area and simplify loading,
the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note
that objects must not prevent the function of
the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of
the rear seat's backrests is folded down.
A through-load hatch in the rear seat can be
folded down for carrying long and narrow
loads.
596
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads.
Follow the car's specifications with regard
to weights and maximum permitted load.
Bag hooks
Under the floor hatch*
Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and prevent them from overturning and spreading
their contents across the cargo area.
Along the sides
Related information
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 595)
Weights (p. 673)
There are two bag hooks and an elastic strap3
in the cover, which is part of the floor hatch in
the cargo area. The strap can be fitted in four
different positions.
There are two bag hooks in the side panel on
each side of the cargo area.
IMPORTANT
The bag hooks may be loaded with a maximum of 5 kg (11 lbs).
Lift up the cover in order to use the bag hooks.
Fasten the bags in a suitable position with the
enclosed elastic strap. If the bags have handles and are a suitable height - hang them in
the hooks.
Related information
•
•
•
3 It
is possible to reorder additional elastic straps at a Volvo dealer.
Recommendations for loading (p. 595)
Using the glovebox (p. 593)
Fitting and removing the safety net*
(p. 603)
}}
* Option/accessory. 597
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
•
•
Fitting and removing cargo cover*
(p. 599)
Fitting and removing safety grilles*
(p. 601)
Load retaining eyelets
Through-load hatch in the rear seat
Use the load retaining eyelets to attach
straps in order to anchor items in the cargo
area.
The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be
opened to transport long narrow items, e.g.
skis.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which
protrude may cause injury under violent
braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information
•
•
598
Recommendations for loading (p. 595)
Weights (p. 673)
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
1.
In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle
and fold down the hatch.
2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat.
If the private locking function is used then the
through-load hatch must be closed.
Related information
•
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 595)
Private locking (p. 275)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 598)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Fitting and removing cargo cover*
Removing cargo cover
4.
In retracted position:
In the extended position, the cargo cover prevents visual access to the cargo area.
1.
Fitting cargo cover
Depress the button on one of the retracted
cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that
end.
2. Angle the cover up/out carefully.
> The other end piece loosens automatically and the cover can be lifted out of
the cargo area.
Fold the cargo cover's front panel forward
to eliminate the space between the cargo
cover and the rear seat's backrests.
Related information
•
•
Operating cargo cover* (p. 600)
Recommendations for loading (p. 595)
IMPORTANT
Insert one of the cargo cover's end pieces
in the recess in the side panel in the cargo
area.
Then insert the other end piece in the
recess in the side panel on the opposite
side.
Press down the end pieces on both sides one by one.
> When a "click" is heard and the red
marking on each end piece has disappeared, the cargo cover is attached check that it is affixed securely.
The cover plate has two plastic parts that
act as support to hold it in place.
The plastic parts must not be used to hang
bags on. They are not designed for this
purpose and may break.
If the safety net* shall be used at the same
time as the cargo cover then the safety net
must be fitted first.
* Option/accessory. 599
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Operating cargo cover*
Loading mode
There are two extended positions for the
cargo cover - a full-cover position and a loading position, where it is partially extended to
make it easier to reach further into the cargo
area.
From the full-cover position:
Full-cover position
With an automatic* cargo cover, the cover will
be retracted from full-cover position to loading
position every time the tailgate is opened, and
extended again when the tailgate is closed.
The cargo cover detects if something is
obstructing its movement and then retracts
automatically.
WARNING
Grasp the handle and pull it back until it
stops.
Angle the cover down.
1.
Move the cover and its attachment pins
carefully forward and up over the hooks.
> The cover retracts until it stops in the
loading position.
Grip the handle and pull out the cargo
cover so that it slides over the side panels
in the cargo area. Pull to the end position.
2. Guide the cover's attachment pins into the
grooves in the side panels. Release, while
at the same time angling the handle
slightly upwards so that the attachment
pins hook in.
> The cargo cover is locked in the fullcover position.
IMPORTANT
Returning to full-cover position from loading
position:
1.
Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover
out to the end position.
Pay attention to the risk of crushing when
opening and closing with the automatic*
cargo cover.
IMPORTANT
If the cargo area is loaded with a bulky load
then the automatic* cargo cover is moved
to retracted position in order to avoid it
making contact with the load.
NOTE
The cargo cover may not operate automatically in low passenger compartment temperatures.
2. Release the handle so that the attachment
pins hook into the hooks.
> The cover is locked in the full-cover
position.
Do not load objects on top of the cargo
cover.
600
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Retracting
1. From the full-cover position:
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to
disengage the cargo cover's attachment
pins and then release.
From loading position:
Grip the handle and pull out the cargo
cover in the grooves - pull to the full-cover
position. Lift up the handle and pull it
backward to disengage the attachment
pins and then release.
Fitting and removing safety grilles*
The safety grille prevents loads or pets in the
cargo area from being thrown forward in the
passenger compartment under heavy braking.
The safety grille is crash-tested in accordance
with the ECE R17 legal requirement and fulfils
Volvo's strength requirements.
2. Retract the cover with its attachment pins
outside of the side panels until it stops in
the retracted position.
Installation
IMPORTANT
The safety grille must only be used in the
rear position (behind the rear seat) described here.
Before first installing the safety grille, the
existing plastic roof mountings must be
replaced with steel roof mountings. Volvo recommends that replacing roof mountings is
performed at an authorised Volvo workshop or
retailer.
1.
Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.
2. Make sure that the safety grille is turned in
the right direction. Lift in the safety grille
through one of the rear side doors.
Remember that a retracted cargo cover may
obstruct rearward visibility.
Related information
•
Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 599)
For safety reasons, the safety grille must
always be attached and anchored correctly.
WARNING
Under no circumstances may anybody
remain in the cargo area while the car is
moving. This is to avoid injury in the event
of heavy braking or an accident.
}}
* Option/accessory. 601
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
3.
Related information
4.
•
•
Position the safety grille's brackets on the
roof mountings.
The next step is facilitated if two people
hold the safety grille in the right position.
Insert the supplied screw and tighten
using the supplied 6 mm Allen key. Repeat
on the other side. Recommended tightening torque: 20 Nm (15 foot-pounds).
> Check that the safety grille is properly
fitted.
5. Restore the backrest to the upright position.
For more information about the tools required
and methods for fitting/removal, see the
installation instructions4 that were included
with the initial purchase.
IMPORTANT
The protective grille cannot be folded up or
down when a cargo cover is fitted.
4 Installation
602
instructions no. 31659257.
Recommendations for loading (p. 595)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 598)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Fitting and removing the safety
net*
The safety net prevents loads from being
thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking.
The safety net is fitted into four mounting
points.
For reasons of safety, the safety net must
always be fastened and anchored as described below.
Loads in the luggage compartment must
be anchored well, and also using a correctly fitted safety net.
Fitting the safety net
4. Hook one of the safety net's retaining
hooks into the rear roof mounting and
then press it forward to the end position.
5. Hook the other of the safety net's retaining hooks on the opposite side and press
it forward to the end position.
Rear fitting
1.
If necessary, fold the rear seat backrests
forward in order to facilitate installation.
Rear fitting - behind the rear seat.
2. Lower the safety net cassette's end pieces
over the mounting eyelets in the recess of
the side panels. Press down the end piece
one side at a time. Check that the cassette
is properly secured.
Front fitting - behind the front seats.
3. Pull up the net.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and
can be secured two different locations in the
car:
•
•
WARNING
}}
* Option/accessory. 603
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
Front fitting
Removing the safety net
First aid kit*
1.
The first aid kit contains first aid equipment.
Store the first aid kit behind the elastic strap, if
the car is equipped with one of these.
Undo the safety net from the roof mountings by pressing the retaining hooks backwards. Allow the net to roll into the cassette.
2.
1.
•
Cargo area (p. 595)
Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.
2. Align the safety net cassette's anchor rails
in front of the backrest's attachment lugs.
Rear fitting:
3. Slide the cassette into the attachment
lugs.
Press the button on each side of the cassette in order to release the end pieces
from the mounting eyelets. Lift out the
safety net.
4. Pull up the net.
5. Hook one of the safety net's retaining
hooks into the front roof mounting and
then press it forward to the end position.
6. Hook the other of the safety net's retaining hooks on the opposite side and press
it forward to the end position.
604
Related information
Front fitting:
Slide the cassette from the attachment
lugs and lift out the safety net.
Related information
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 595)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 598)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Warning triangle
Use the warning triangle to warn other road
users if the car is stationary in traffic.
Also activate the hazard warning flashers.
Storage spaces
The warning triangle is located under the
panel on the inside of the tailgate.
Folding up the warning triangle
Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn and then unhooking the panel.
Place the panel to one side.
Open the latch and take out the case.
Remove the warning triangle from the
case, unfold it and put the ends together.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic.
Make sure that the warning triangle and case
are properly secured in their storage space
and that the hatch is fully closed after use.
Related information
•
•
Cargo area (p. 595)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 159)
605
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to perform the service and
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the
personnel, special tools and service literature
that can provide the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Service and repair
Service the car regularly. Follow Volvo's recommended service intervals.
If inspection and repair are required then only
an authorised Volvo workshop may carry out
the work.
WARNING
Do not carry out any repairs of your own on
this vehicle. Electrical cables and/or components that have detached must only be
rectified by an authorised workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
608
Charging cable with control unit
IMPORTANT
Do not modify the control unit in any way.
Related information
•
•
•
Car status (p. 610)
Book service and repair (p. 611)
Connection of equipment to the car's
diagnostic socket (p. 40)
•
Servicing the climate control system
(p. 615)
•
•
Brake system maintenance (p. 448)
Engine compartment overview (p. 617)
Data transfer between car and
workshop via Wi-Fi
Volvo's workshops have a specific Wi-Fi network for data transfer between your car and
the workshop. Your workshop visit will be
simpler and more efficient when the transfer
of diagnostic information and software can
take place via the workshop's network.
During a workshop visit, your service technician may want to connect your car to the
workshop's network via Wi-Fi to perform
fault-tracing and software download. For this
type of communication, the car only connects
to a workshop's network. It is not possible to
connect the car to another Wi-Fi network,
such as at home, in the same way as to a
workshop's network.
Connection with the remote control
key
Connection is normally handled by the service
technician who then uses the remote control
key buttons. That's why it's important to take
a key with buttons with you for the workshop
visit. Press three times on the lock button on
the remote control key to connect the car to
the workshop's network via Wi-Fi.
When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi network, the
symbol appears in the centre
display.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
WARNING
The car must not be driven when connected to the workshop's networks and
systems.
Related information
•
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 609)
•
Book service and repair (p. 611)
Download Center
Several of the car's systems can be updated
from the centre display with an online car1.
The Download Centre app is
started from app view in the
centre display and enables:
Functions for online car and infotainment can
be updated via the Download Centre.
Updates can be made one at a time or all at
once.
Searching for update
•
searching for and updating system software
•
•
updating map data for Sensus Navigation*
downloading, updating and uninstalling
apps.
Related information
1 Data
2 Data
Managing system updates via the
Download Centre
•
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 609)
•
•
•
•
•
Downloading apps (p. 505)
Updating apps (p. 506)
Deleting apps (p. 506)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
If an update is available, the
message New software
updates available is shown
in the centre display's status
bar.
For system updates to be possible, the car
must be connected to the Internet2.
–
Go to Download Centre in the centre display's app view.
> If no search has been performed since
the last time the infotainment system
was started, a search is performed. No
search is performed if a software installation is in progress.
A number on System updates shows
how many updates are available. One
tap shows a list of the updates that can
be installed in the car.
}}
* Option/accessory. 609
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
NOTE
Data download may affect other services
that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the
effect on other services is experienced as
disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate
to switch off or interrupt other services.
NOTE
An update can be interrupted when the
ignition is switched off and the car is left.
However, the update does not have to be
completed before the car is left, this is
because the update is resumed the next
time the car is used.
Update all system software
–
Select Install all at the bottom of the list.
If no list is desired, then the Install all option
can be selected at System updates.
Update individual system software
programs
–
Select Install for the software required.
Cancelling software download
–
610
Tap on X in the activity indicator that has
replaced Install at the start of the download.
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this
cannot be cancelled.
Deactivating the background search
for software update
Automatic search for software updates is activated when the car is delivered from the factory, but this function can be deactivated.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press System
Download Centre.
Car status
The car's general status can be shown in the
centre display along with the opportunity to
book service3.
The Car Status app is started
from app view in the centre
display and has four tabs:
• Messages - status messages
• Status - checking engine oil level and
AdBlue level4
3. Deselect Auto Software Update.
Related information
•
•
•
Download Center (p. 609)
• TPMS - checking the tyre pressure
• Appointments - appointment information
and car information3.
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
Related information
•
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 105)
•
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 619)
•
•
•
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 566)
Book service and repair (p. 611)
Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 612)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Book service and repair5
1.
This service provides a way to send a booking
request for service and workshop visit
directly in the car.
When it is time for service, and in some cases
when the car is in need of repair, a message
will appear in the driver display and at the top
of the centre display. The service date is determined by how much time has passed, hours
that the engine has been running, or distance
driven since the last service.
Before the service can be used
•
•
•
Create a Volvo ID and register it to the car.
Select the Volvo retailer you would like to
contact by going to www.volvocars.com
and logging in.
Open the Car Status app from the app
view in the centre display.
2. Press Appointments.
3. Press Request appointment.
4. Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is
filled in.
5. Make sure that the desired Workshop is
filled in.
6. Fill in the field Tap to write information
to the workshop if there is anything you
would like done during the workshop visit
or any other important information to your
workshop.
To send and receive booking information,
the car must be connected to the Internet6.
Book a service
Fill in a booking request when so required or
when a message indicating that the car needs
a service or repair is shown.
3 Applies to certain markets.
4 AdBlue Applies to cars with diesel engines.
5 Applies to certain markets.
6 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet,
7 This time frame may vary depending on market.
and this may involve a cost.
7. Press Send appointment request.
> You will receive an appointment suggestion via e-mail within a couple of
days7.
You will also receive the same communication via e-mail and when you go to
www.volvocars.com and log in.
In certain markets, once you have sent
the appointment request, the message
that the car needs service is extinguished in the driver display.
8. Tap on Cancel request to cancel your
request.
The booking enquiry sent from the car
includes car information that facilitates workshop planning.
The retailer comes back with a digital booking
proposal. Information about your dealer is also
available in the car so that you can contact
your workshop.
Accept the appointment suggestion
When the car has received an appointment
suggestion, a message will be shown at the
top of the centre display.
}}
611
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
1.
Tap the message.
2. If the suggested booking is acceptable,
tap on Accept. Otherwise, tap on Send
new proposal or Decline.
For certain markets, the system reminds you
of a scheduled appointment time as it
approaches and the navigation system8 can
also guide you to the workshop when the time
comes.
Related information
•
•
Sending car information to a
workshop9
It is possible to send information for the car
at any time, e.g. if you book a workshop
appointment and want to help your workshop
by providing them with better data so that
your visit can be planned. Sending car information is not the same as booking a service
appointment.
1. Open the Car Status app from the app
view in the centre display.
Car status (p. 610)
2. Press Appointments.
Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 612)
3. Press Send car data.
> A message that vehicle data are being
sent is shown at the top of the centre
display. You can cancel data transmission by tapping the X in the activity
indicator.
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
•
•
Volvo ID (p. 28)
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
The information is sent via the car's
Internet connection10.
This car information can be accessed by any
retailer if they have the car's identification
number (VIN11).
8 Applies to Sensus Navigation*.
9 Applies to certain markets.
10 Data is transferred (data traffic)
11 Vehicle Identification Number.
612
Car information content
The data sent is the last information saved (the
last time the car was running) and includes
information in the following areas:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
service requirement
time since last service
function status
fluid levels
meter reading
the car's vehicle identification number
(VIN11)
the car's software version
the car's diagnostics data.
Related information
Book service and repair (p. 611)
•
•
•
Car status (p. 610)
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 537)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Raise the car
When raising the car, it is important that the
jack is fitted in the intended points on the
car's underbody.
Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If the
car is equipped with air suspension, this must
be disabled before the car is raised.
WARNING
If the car is raised using a workshop jack,
this must be placed beneath one of the
four jacking points. Take care to position
the workshop jack so that the car cannot
slip off. Make sure that the jack plate is fitted with a rubber guard so that the car
remains stable and is not damaged. Always
use axle stands or similar.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions
supplied with the equipment.
The normal car jack is only designed for
occasional, short-term use, such as when
changing a wheel after a puncture. If the
car is to be jacked up more often, or for a
longer time than is required just to change
a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
}}
* Option/accessory. 613
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).
Related information
•
•
•
614
Removing a wheel (p. 573)
Jack* (p. 572)
Settings for level control* (p. 470)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Servicing the climate control
system
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system must only be
serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance
with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for
Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service
and repair of the refrigerant system must
only be performed by trained and certified
technicians in order to ensure the safety of
the system.
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be
used during leak detection.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
Related information
•
WARNING
Volvo service programme (p. 608)
Head up display when replacing
the windscreen*
Cars with head-up display are equipped with
a special type of windscreen that meets the
requirements for displaying the projected
image.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop when replacing
the windscreen. The correct version of the
windscreen must be fitted in order that the
head-up display's graphics shall be displayed
correctly.
Related information
•
•
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Cleaning the head up display* (p. 650)
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system
must only be serviced and repaired by an
authorised workshop.
* Option/accessory. 615
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Opening and closing the bonnet
Close the bonnet
The bonnet can be opened using the handle
in the passenger compartment and a handle
under the bonnet.
1.
Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall
from its own weight.
2. When the bonnet stops against the lock
catch, push the bonnet to close it completely.
Open the bonnet
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing
path under the bonnet is not obstructed,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury.
Turn the handle under the bonnet anticlockwise to release the bonnet from the
lock catches and lift the bonnet.
Warning - bonnet not closed
Pull the handle near the foot pedals to
release the bonnet from its fully closed
position.
When the bonnet is released, a
warning symbol and graphics in the
driver display will light up and an
acoustic reminder will sound. If the
car starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal
will repeat.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed. The bonnet must engage at both
sides audibly.
NOTE
If the warning symbol is lit or the warning
signal is heard despite the bonnet being
closed properly, contact an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Bonnet not completely closed.
616
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Engine compartment overview
The overview shows some service-related
components.
Some of the components included in the car's
electric drive system are located under the
bonnet. Exercise caution in this area and only
touch anything that is related to normal maintenance.
WARNING
Bonnet completely closed.
Orange-coloured cables must only be handled by qualified personnel.
WARNING
Never drive with an open
bonnet!
If this symbol is visible –
or something else indicates that the bonnet is
not fully closed while driving – stop immediately
and close it properly.
WARNING
Several components in the car work with
high-voltage current that could be dangerous in the event of incorrect intervention.
•
•
Do not touch anything that is not
clearly described in the owner's manual.
Exercise caution when checking/refilling fluids in the engine compartment.
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the
driver's side)
Washer fluid filler pipe12
Central electrical unit
Air filter
Engine oil filler pipe
Related information
•
•
12
Engine compartment overview (p. 617)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 51)
Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling.
}}
617
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment,
behind the radiator) may start or continue
to operate automatically for up to approx.
6 minutes after the engine has been
switched off.
Engine oil
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals and
warranty can be applied.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. There is a risk of fire if the
engine is hot.
WARNING
The ignition system works at a very high
and hazardous voltage. The car's electrical
system must always be in ignition position
0 when work is being performed in the
engine compartment.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition
coil when the car's electrical system is in
ignition position II or when the engine is
hot.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
618
Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 616)
Filling washer fluid (p. 665)
Topping up coolant (p. 620)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 632)
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 619)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
If the engine oil cannot be checked on a regular basis and the level falls too low, there is a
risk that this will cause serious damage to the
engine.
Volvo recommends:
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise there is a risk of the service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact of the car being
affected.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and
viscosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo Car
Corporation disclaims any liability for any
such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo uses different systems to warn about
the oil level if it is too low/high, or in the event
of low oil pressure. Certain engine variants
have an oil pressure sensor, and then the
driver display's warning symbol for low oil
is used. Other variants have an
pressure
oil level sensor, when the driver is informed via
the driver display's warning symbol
and
display texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service
and Warranty Booklet. Using oil of a higher
than specified grade is permitted. If the car is
driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade than the
one specified.
Related information
•
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 619)
•
•
Engine oil — specifications (p. 677)
13
14
Checking and filling with engine oil
The oil level is detected with the electronic oil
level sensor.
WARNING
If this symbol is shown together
with the message Engine oil
level Service required, visit a
workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. The oil level
may be too high.
IMPORTANT
Filler pipe.13,14
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up
between service intervals.
No action with regard to engine oil level needs
to be taken until a message is shown in the
driver display.
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 678)
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant.
If this symbol is shown together
with a message about low oil
level, such as Engine oil level
low Refill 1 litre for example,
then only fill the volume specified, e.g.
1 litre (1 quart).
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
See oil level in the centre display
The oil level is visualised using the electronic
oil level gauge in the centre display when the
car has been started. The oil level should be
checked regularly.
}}
619
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
1.
Open the Car Status app from the app
view in the centre display.
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
level (time after engine shutdown, the car's
inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are
not met, then the message No value
available will be shown in the centre display. This does not mean that there is
something wrong in the car's systems.
2. Press Status to show the oil level.
Related information
•
•
Graphics for oil level in the centre display.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The car
must have been driven approx. 30 km
(approx. 20 miles) and have been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine switched
off and on level ground before the oil level
indication is correct.
620
•
•
•
Engine oil (p. 618)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 678)
Engine oil — specifications (p. 677)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Car status (p. 610)
Topping up coolant
The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature.
The heat that is transferred from the engine
to the coolant can be used to heat the passenger compartment.
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. Never top up
with water only. The risk of freezing increases
with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.
If there is coolant under the car, if there is
coolant smoke, or if more than 2 litres (approx.
2 quarts) have been filled, always call for
recovery to avoid the risk of engine damage
due to a defective cooling system when
attempting to start the car.
WARNING
The coolant may be very hot. Never open
the cap when the coolant is hot. If a top-up
is required, unscrew the expansion tank
cap slowly to allow any overpressure to
disappear.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Screw off the cap in the plastic cover.
Screw off the cap and top up with coolant
if necessary. The coolant level must not
exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the
expansion tank.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Grip the hatch's handle and lift/jiggle the
hatch from the plastic cover.
Screw off the cap and top up with coolant
if necessary. The coolant level must not
exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the
expansion tank.
Coolant expansion tank, left-hand drive car.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Coolant expansion tank, right-hand drive car.
}}
621
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
•
Harmful if ingested. May cause organ
(kidney) damage.
•
Use ready-mixed coolant as recommended by Volvo. If concentrated liquid is used, make sure that the ratio is
50 % coolant to 50 % water of an
approved quality.
•
•
This car is equipped only with
lamps
and therefore no replaceable bulbs. Contact a
workshop15 if a fault occurs in the lighting.
The engine must only be run with a
well-filled cooling system. Otherwise,
temperatures that are too high may
occur resulting in the risk of damage
(cracks) in the cylinder head.
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
Engine compartment overview (p. 617)
•
•
Coolant — specifications (p. 679)
16
15
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The bulbs for the reversing lamp are located
behind the panel in the tailgate.
If a fault occurs in LED16 lamps, the entire
lamp unit usually must be replaced.
NOTE
For information about bulbs not covered in
this Owner's Manual, contact a Volvo
dealer or a certified Volvo service technician.
Do not mix different coolants.
•
Replacing the reversing lamp bulb
LED16
Only new coolant should be used
when replacing major cooling system
components to ensure the system has
sufficient corrosion protection.
Related information
622
Bulb replacement
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and
rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to
withstand this. Condensation is normally
vented out of the lamp housing when the
lamp has been switched on for a time.
Related information
•
Replacing the reversing lamp bulb
(p. 622)
1.
Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn anticlockwise and then unhooking
the panel. Place the panel to one side.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Lamp housing on left-hand side.
2. Undo the bulb holder by turning it anticlockwise and pulling it out.
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning anticlockwise.
4. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning
it clockwise.
5. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise.
6. Hook on the panel and turn the knobs a
quarter turn clockwise.
623
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Starter battery
The electrical system is single-pole and uses
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The starter battery is used to start up the
electrical system and drive electrical equipment in the car. The hybrid battery is used
when the internal combustion engine is
started.
The starter battery should be replaced by a
workshop17.
The starter battery is a 12 V AGM battery
(Absorbed Glass Mat), designed for regenerative charging, and to support the functionality
of the car's different systems.
The service life and function of the starter battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving
conditions, climatic conditions etc.
•
Never disconnect the starter battery when
the engine is running.
•
Check that the cables to the starter battery are correctly connected and properly
tightened.
17
624
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
•
Never smoke near the battery.
Charging points
When connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger, use the car's charging points
in the engine compartment.
The battery terminals on the car's starter battery in the luggage/cargo area must not be
used.
Positive charging point
Negative charging point
IMPORTANT
It is not possible to charge another car's
battery by supplying current through the
charging points. Using the charging points
to charge another car's battery may cause
a fuse to blow, which means that the
charging points will stop working.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
When charging the starter battery, only use
a modern battery charger with controlled
charging voltage. Fast charging function
must not be used since it may damage the
battery.
NOTE
If both the starter battery and the hybrid
battery are discharged then both batteries
must be charged. In such a case, charging
only the hybrid battery first is not possible.
In order for the hybrid battery to be
charged the starter battery must have a
certain state of charge.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotainment may be temporarily disengaged,
and/or the message in the driver display
about the starter battery's state of charge
may be temporarily inapplicable, following
the connection of an external starter battery or battery charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's starter battery must never be
used for connecting an external starter
battery or battery charger - only the
car's negative charging point may be
used as the grounding point.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and
climate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore
needs to be recharged if the car is not used
for a longer time or when it is only driven
short distances. Extreme cold further limits
starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition,
at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic
trickle charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
}}
625
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Location
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function
must be reset to work properly. A reset
must take place for pinch protection to
work.
IMPORTANT
On certain models, the battery is attached
with a retaining strap. Make sure the
retaining strap is properly tightened.
The starter battery is located in the cargo area.
Specifications for starter battery
A
B
Battery type
H8 AGM
Voltage (V)
12
Cold start capacityA - CCAB (A)
850
Size, L×B×H
353×175×190 mm (13.9×6.9×7.5 inches)
Capacity (Ah)
95
According to EN standard.
Cold Cranking Amperes.
Volvo recommends entrusting battery replacement to an authorised Volvo workshop.
626
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, make sure you
replace it with a battery with the same
size, cold starting capacity and type as the
original battery (see the decal on the battery).
Related information
•
•
•
Symbols on the batteries (p. 629)
Hybrid battery (p. 628)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 481)
•
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 167)
•
Battery recycle (p. 629)
627
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Hybrid battery
Related information
The car is equipped with a hybrid battery for
electric motor operation - a maintenance-free
rechargeable Lithium-ion type battery.
•
•
•
•
NOTE
The car cannot be started if the hybrid battery is discharged.
NOTE
If both the starter battery and the hybrid
battery are discharged then both batteries
must be charged. In such a case, charging
only the hybrid battery first is not possible.
In order for the hybrid battery to be
charged the starter battery must have a
certain state of charge.
WARNING
The hybrid battery must only be replaced
by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Coolant
The hybrid battery's cooling system has a separate expansion tank.
628
IMPORTANT
The hybrid battery's coolant must only be
topped up by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Specifications for hybrid battery
Type: Lithium-ion
Total amount of energy: 11.6 kWh.
NOTE
The capacity of the hybrid battery diminishes with age and use, which may result
in increased use of the internal combustion
engine and, as a consequence, reduced
fuel economy and reduced range during
electric operation.
Symbols on the batteries (p. 629)
Starter battery (p. 624)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 413)
Battery recycle (p. 629)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Symbols on the batteries
Battery recycle
There are information and warning symbols
on the batteries.
A used starter battery should be recycled in
an environmentally sound manner – it contains lead.
Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty
about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Use protective goggles.
Risk of explosion.
Related information
•
•
•
Further information in the
owner's manual for the
car.
Starter battery (p. 624)
Hybrid battery (p. 628)
Symbols on the batteries (p. 629)
Must be taken for recycling.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
Related information
•
•
•
Starter battery (p. 624)
Hybrid battery (p. 628)
Battery recycle (p. 629)
The battery contains corrosive acid.
629
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses and central electrical units
Location of central electrical units
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to
protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to
protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.
WARNING
1.
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
WARNING
Orange-coloured cables must only be handled by qualified personnel.
WARNING
Several components in the car work with
high-voltage current that could be dangerous in the event of incorrect intervention.
Replacing a fuse
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new
fuse of the same colour and amperage.
The figure is schematic - appearance may vary
depending on car model.
WARNING
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
electrical units under the glovebox change
sides.
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Do not touch anything that is not clearly
described in the owner's manual for the
car.
WARNING
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop
about the fuses not mentioned in the
owner's manual. If replacing the fuse is not
performed correctly, it can cause serious
damage to the electrical systems.
Cargo area
Related information
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault
in the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting
an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
630
Look in the fuse diagram to locate the
fuse.
•
•
•
•
Replacing a fuse (p. 630)
Fuses in cargo area (p. 644)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 632)
Related information
Fuses under glovebox (p. 639)
•
•
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 630)
Fuses in cargo area (p. 644)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
•
•
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 632)
Fuses under glovebox (p. 639)
631
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses in engine compartment
Fuses in the engine compartment protect
engine and brake functions, amongst other
things.
632
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
The fuse box also provides space for several
spare fuses.
Positions
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
Function
Ampere
Type
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
Control module for actuator for engagement/change of automatic gearbox gear positions
5
Micro
Control module for the high-voltage heater of the internal combustion engine's coolant
5
Micro
Control module for air conditioning; Shut-off valve for heat exchanger; Shut-off valve for coolant that passes through the
climate control system
5
Micro
Control module for hybrid battery; High voltage converter for combined high-voltage generator/starter motor with voltage converter 500 V-12 V
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
Converter for control of the supply to the rear axle's electric motor
10
Micro
Control module for hybrid battery; High voltage converter for combined high-voltage generator/starter motor with voltage converter 500 V-12 V
10
Micro
Charging unit
5
Micro
Shut-off valve for the hybrid battery's coolant; Coolant pump 1 for hybrid battery
15
Micro
Coolant pump for electric drive system
15
Micro
}}
633
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
Ampere
Type
Cooling fan for hybrid components
25
MCaseA
–
–
MCase
–
–
MCase
–
–
MCase
Calculation unit
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
12 V socket in tunnel console, front
15
Micro
12 V socket in tunnel console, by legroom for second seat row
15
Micro
12 V socket in cargo area*
15
Micro
–
–
Micro
Left-hand headlamp, LEDB
15
Micro
Right-hand headlamp, LED
15
Micro
USB ports in head restraints right/left
634
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
Ampere
Type
–
Micro
Heated windscreen* left-hand side
Shunt
MCase
Heated windscreen* left-hand side
40
MCase
Headlamp washers*
25
MCase
Windscreen washers
25
MCase
–
–
Micro
Horn
20
Micro
Siren*
5
Micro
Control module for brake system (valves, parking brake)
40
MCase
Windscreen wipers
30
MCase
Rear window washer
25
MCase
Heated windscreen* right-hand side
40
MCase
Parking heater*
20
MCase
Control unit for brake system (ABS pump)
40
MCase
–
MCase
Shunt
MCase
–
–
Heated windscreen* right-hand side
}}
* Option/accessory. 635
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
Ampere
Type
Supplied when the ignition is switched on: Engine control module; Transmission components; Electric steering servo;
Central electronic module
5
Micro
Exterior car noise (certain markets)
5
Micro
Right-hand headlamp, LED
15
Micro
Alcohol lock*
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
Airbags; Passenger weight sensor
5
Micro
Left-hand headlamp, LED
15
Micro
Accelerator pedal sensor
5
Micro
Transmission control module; Control module for gear selector
15
Micro
Engine Control Module (ECM)
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
20
Micro
Engine control module; Actuator; Throttle unit; Valve for turbocharger
636
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
Ampere
Type
Solenoids; Valves; Overpressure connection
10
Micro
Vacuum regulators; Valve for electric bypass: Valve for ventilation
7,5
Micro
Control unit, spoiler damper; Control unit, radiator damper
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
Lambda probe, front and rear
15
Micro
Solenoid for engine oil pump; Solenoid clutch A/C; Lambda probe, front, centre and rear
15
Micro
–
–
Micro
Engine Control Module (ECM)
20
Micro
Ignition coils; Spark plugs
15
Micro
–
–
MCase
–
–
MCase
30
MCase
–
–
MCase
Actuator for transmission
25
MCase
–
–
MCase
Control module for transmission fluid pump
}}
637
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
A
B
Ampere
Type
–
–
MCase
–
–
MCase
This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Related information
•
•
638
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 630)
Replacing a fuse (p. 630)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses under glovebox
Fuses under the glovebox protect, amongst
other things, electrical sockets, displays and
door modules.
}}
639
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment
also provides space for several spare fuses.
Function
640
Positions
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
Ampere
Type
Intermediate voltage module
10
Micro
–
–
MCaseA
–
–
Micro
Movement detector*
5
Micro
Media player
5
Micro
Driver display
5
Micro
Keypad in centre console
5
Micro
Sun sensor
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
Steering wheel module
5
Micro
Module for start knob and for parking brake control
5
Micro
Steering wheel module for heated steering wheel*
15
Micro
–
–
Micro
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
Ampere
Type
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
Control module for climate control system
10
Micro
Steering lock
7,5
Micro
Diagnostic socket OBDII
10
Micro
Centre display
5
Micro
40
MCaseA
5
Micro
7,5
Micro
5
Micro
20
Micro
Head-up display*
5
Micro
Passenger compartment lighting
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
Display in roof console (Seatbelt reminder/Indicator for airbag on the front passenger seat)
5
Micro
Fan module for climate control system, front
USB HUB
Controls lighting; Interior lighting; Dimming of interior rearview mirror*; Rain and light sensor*; Keypad in tunnel console, by legroom for rear seat*; Power front seats*; Control panels in rear doors; Fan module for climate control left/right
Control module for driver support functions
Panorama roof with sun blind*
}}
* Option/accessory. 641
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
–
Ampere
Type
–
Micro
Micro
–
–
Micro
Fuses in cargo area
10
Micro
Control module for online car; Control module for Volvo On Call
5
Micro
20
Micro
–
–
Audio control device (amplifier)
642
40
MCaseA
–
–
MCaseA
Module for multi-band antenna
5
Micro
Modules for seat comfort (massage) front*
5
Micro
Alcohol lock*
5
Micro
Rear window wiper
15
Micro
Control module for fuel pump
15
Micro
Relay coils in fuse box in engine compartment; Relay coil for transmission oil pump; Medium voltage converter; Integrated dynamo.
5
Micro
Opening the boot lid/tailgate with foot motion*
5
Micro
Seat heating, driver's side front
15
Micro
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
Ampere
Type
Seat heating, passenger side front
15
Micro
Coolant pump
7,5
Micro
–
Micro
Power driver's seat*
20
Micro
Control module for suspension (active chassis)*
20
Micro
–
–
Micro
Sensus control module
10
Micro
–
–
MCaseA
–
–
Micro
20
Micro
–
–
Micro
TV* (certain markets)
5
Micro
Primary fuse for fuses 52, 53, 57 and 58
15
Micro
–
Electrically operated front passenger seat*
A
This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 630)
Replacing a fuse (p. 630)
* Option/accessory. 643
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses in cargo area
Fuses in the cargo area protect, amongst
other things, power seats*, airbags and seatbelt tensioners.
644
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
The central electrical unit is located on the right-hand side.
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment
also provides space for several spare fuses.
}}
645
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Positions
Function
Ampere
Type
Rear window defroster
30
MCaseA
Central electronic module
40
MCaseA
Compressor for air suspension*
40
MCaseA
Lock motor for backrest on rear right-hand side
15
MCaseA
–
–
MCaseA
Lock motor for backrest on rear left-hand side
15
MCaseA
Electrically operated front passenger seat*
20
MCaseA
Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel)
30
MCaseA
Power operated tailgate*
25
MCaseA
Electrically operated front passenger seat*
20
MCaseA
Towbar control module*
40
MCaseA
Seatbelt pretensioner module, right-hand side
40
MCaseA
5
Micro
Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel)
15
Micro
Door module left-hand side rear
20
Micro
Door module right-hand side rear
Door module right-hand side front
Internal relay coils
646
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
Ampere
Type
Alcohol lock*, USB hub/accessory port
5
Micro
Enhanced accessory module
5
Micro
Towbar control module*
25
MCaseA
Accessory module
40
MCaseA
Power driver seat*
20
MCaseA
40
MCaseA
Parking camera*
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
Supply when the ignition is switched on
10
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
Seat heating left-hand side rear*
15
Micro
–
–
Micro
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
5
Micro
Door module left-hand side front
Seatbelt pretensioner module, left-hand side
Control module, exterior reversing sound
}}
* Option/accessory. 647
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
A
Ampere
Type
–
–
Micro
Seatbelt pretensioner modules
5
Micro
Actuator for exhaust gases (petrol, certain engine variants)
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
Seat heating right-hand side rear*
15
Micro
–
–
MCaseA
This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
648
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 630)
Replacing a fuse (p. 630)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning the interior
Related information
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly,
and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cle